/S^ The A.NTHON LlBF^ARY. COLLECTED BY CHARLES ANTHON Professor of G-reeb: and Latin in Columbia CoUege- Purchaaed by Cornell University, 1868, Cornell University Library PA 367.M18 1853 3 1924 021 604 024 Cornell University Library The original of tiiis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924021604024 SYNTAX OP / I THE ^REEK LANGUAGE, ESPECIALLY OF THE ATTIC DIALECT, dFor tie ^^e of §itboo\ii DR. J.^n! MADVIG, PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN. TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN BY THE RET. HENET BEOWNE, M.A. AND EDITED BY THE LATE RET. THOMAS KEECHEVEE AENOLD, M.A. RECTOR OF LYNDON, AND FORMERLY FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE. TOGETHER WITH AN APPENDIX ON THE GREEK PARTICLES, BY THE TRANSLATOR. LONDON: FEANCIS & JOHN EIVINGTON, ST. PAITL'S CHUEOH TABB, and "WATERLOO PLACE. 1853. . ^^ . CORNELL^ UlMIVERSiTY LIBRARY LONDON: GILBERT AND RIVINGTONj PRINTERS, ST. 'JOHN's SQUARE. ST PREFACE BY THE TRANSLATOR. Those who are acquainted with Mr. Arnold's (larger) Greek Grammar, and the later editions of his Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition, will have observed how very highly he rated the authority of Dr. Madvig. On the first appearance of this "Syntax of the Greek Language," my lamented friend promptly recognized its great merits, and by the use he has made of it in his own manuals, it may be said to have already materially aided in the instruction of the rising generation of scholars. His increasing sense of its importance prompted the wish to extend its usefulness, and he was persuaded that the work itself, in an English translation, could not fail to be welcomed as a most valuable addition to our school and college books. In this country, certainly, no national prejudices or animosities of the schools are opposed to a favourable reception of Dr. Madvig's labours. He lies under no imputation of regarding with an unfriendly eye the performances of English scholars ; he has attacked no favourite theories of ours : that a Dane has remonstrated against what he conceived to be an excessive deference to the deci- sions of Hermann, can be borne by us without an effort of magna- nimity; nor are we jealous lest a light from Copenhagen should obscure the lustre of German scholarship. With us, at least, his work will be appreciated by its own merits. His Latin Grammar is already well known and highly esteemed in this country, and the a2 IV PREFACE BY THE TRANSLATOR. principles and method which he has developed with signal success in his treatment of the Latin, are here applied by him to the Syntax of the Greek Language. He has produced a work of which, in my opinion, it is not too much to say that, while, as an accession to philology, it possesses a high scientific value and importance, it is pre-eminently distinguished from the works of his prede- cessors in the same field, from Buttmann and Matthise down to Kiihner and Kriiger, by its excellencies as a manual of instruction. " For schools" Dr. Madvig wrote this book, and he was guided throughout by a constant regard to the wants and requirements of learners. The objects which he proposed to himself were, greater clearness and definiteness in the conception and enunciation of the fundamental positions and principles, and a more exact and perspicuous development of these into rules, simple and easy, and of well-defined application, unembarrassed by disquisition or subtle distinctions, and illustrated by copious and well-selected examples. There can be no doubt that he has been eminently suc- cessful in the accomplishment of his design, and I am much mistaken if the peculiar excellencies of this work are not precisely of the kind which will be most highly appreciated by the practical judgment of English teachers and' scholars. As instances of Dr. Madvig's happy talent of clear grammatical exposition, I may refer to his chapter on the article, his deduction of the various uses of the genitive case, and especially, to his doctrine of the optative mood. At the same time, there are parts of this work in which he has a right to claim for himself the merit of having been the first to give the true statement of the facts, and to reduce them to their rules : for example, his explanation of the force of the aorist in the optative and infinitive, and of the use of on and (Lc in declarative object-sentences. It is a further, and certainly not an inconsiderable, advantage of this exhibi- tion of the Greek Syntax, that it has been conducted by its author in congruity, as far as that was possible, with his treatment of the Latin PREFACE BY THE TRANSLATOR. Y Syntax. The references given in the margin to the Author's Latin Grammar will enable the student to compare the syntactical pro- cedure of the Greek with that of the sister language, and to obtain a clearer insight into what is common to both, or peculiar to either. In restricting himself, for the most part, to the cultivated Attic form of the language, as this appears in the historians, jihilosophers, and orators, and the dialogue of Aristophanes, I think it will be generally acknowledged that Dr. Madvig has exercised a sound discretion. Whatever may be, in a purely scientific regard, and in a work intended only for philologists, the advantages (perhaps it should be said, the feasibility) of a comprehensive historical and " genetic " method, in which the phenomena of the language should be traced from its earliest records downwards, it will hardly be ques- tioned that the student ought to be, in the first place, well grounded in a firm and exact knowledge of that regular, most finished form of the language which marks the culminating epoch of Grecian litera- ture. This point being secured, his attention may be directed to the licenses and other peculiarities by which the language of the poets is diflFerenced from the prose usage, and also to the deviations which are characteristic of the later prose (the Kotvij), without that danger of confusing his perceptions of the normal and essential, which can hardly fail to attend the attempt at a wider and more general exhibi- tion of the language, and especially of its syntax. From the Attic literature, he will of course proceed to the reading of the most primitive Greek authors : and for the understanding of Homer and Herodotus, he must be introduced to their dialect. But on this head. Dr. Madvig expresses it as his full persuasion, that the acquisition of the. dialectic pecuHarities (which, in a syntactical point of view, in Herodotus are neither many nor considerable, and in Homer are in great measure negative, i.e. may be described as belonging to a state of the language in which the rule was in some points not yet so clearly settled as it afterwards became) ought to be rendered as easy Vi PREFACE BY THE TRANSLATOR. as possible, and only just so much information imparted as is necessary for the explanation of the task actually in hand. " I fore- see," he says, " that some will accuse me here of recommending a shallow and perfunctory way of study ; but I also know that in the school, in the attempt to be very thorough-going, we often miss the nearer object which could, and ought to be secured." Dr. Madvig's Latin Grammar was early made known in this country through the medium of an English Translation. The present work, originally composed by its author in German, and published in 1847, is now, for the first time, made directly accessible to English students. The translation was undertaken by me at the instance of my lamented friend, Mr. Arnold : the editing, I am happy to say, was entirely his. The work enjoyed, throughout, the benefit of his careful revision ; and (with one slight exception, at p. 201 ) all the additions to the text and notes are from his hand.* His also should have been the Appendix on the Particles, to which, as a desirable supplement to the Syntax, he has in several places referred the student. But the execution of this part of Ids design was hindered by the illness which terminated his valuable life ; and at his own request it was undertaken by me. I have not the presumption to imagine that my powers have adequately seconded my willingness to give effect to the wishes of my revered friend. I will only say, that while, in the performance of this task, I have freely used the materials collected by others, and especially by Mr. Arnold in his larger Greek Grammar, and the Second Practical Introduction to Greek Prose Composition, I have also drawn upon my own stores, and have ' A remark in the note to § 122, on the force of 'dvag and tis &v with the sub- junctive in final sentences, proposed by me as a query for Mr. Arnold's considera- tion, has, I perceive, been allowed by him to stand as part of the note. PREFACE BY THE TRANSLATOR. VU exercised an independent judgment. As regards the method, the alphabetical order seemed to labour under the disadvantage of throw- ing wide apart what is closely related (for example, fiiv and Se), and ought, for the sake of mutual illustration, to stand side by side. On the other hand, the attempt to reduce the doctrine of the particles to a strictly categorical method, e. g. under the heads of connective and separative, restrictive and intensive, &c., — in itself very precarious, by reason of the many-sided significance and varied expressiveness of these nicer elements of language, — was at best impracticable without an amount of discursiveness and repetition which would have con- fused the subject. The enumeration, therefore, begins with the particles of most frequent occurrence, koI and te, juev and Si, and, upon the whole, proceeds upon the plan of bringing together the particles which either seemed to be most nearly related by common origin and signification, or suggested each other by various kinds of association. It is scarcely necessary to add, that the enumeration is not intended to be complete. To facilitate reference, a list of the particles treated of is included in the Table of Contents. H. B. Chichester, May 30, 1853. CONTENTS. PART I. PAGE On the Connexion of Words in Sentences 1 — 86 Cliapter I. On the Agreement of the Subject and Predicate ; of the Substan- tive and Adjective : — and on the Impersonal form of Expression 1 II. On the Use of the Article 7 III. The Cases. Nominative and Accusative 19 IV. Dative 31 V. Genitive 40 VI. Appendix to the Doctrine of Cases : of the Prepositions, especially such as govern several cases 57 VII. The Verb and its kinds, and the Gerundive .... 66 VIII. The relations of Adjectives (and Adverbs), especially the degrees of Comparison 70 IX. Peculiarities in the Adjective construction of the Demonstrative ' and Relative Pronouns, and in their relations to the Sentence . 77 PART II, The relations of Propositions one to another, especially the way of denoting the mode or manner of Predication, and the time of the thing predicated 87 — 207 Chapter I. The Moods in general, and especially the Indicative and its Tenses : the Indicative with av 87 II. The Subjunctive (Conjunctive) and its Tenses .... 98 III. The Optative and its Tenses : the Optative with av . . . 108 IV. The Imperative .126 V. The Infinitive and its tenses 127 VI. The Participle 155 VII. Peculiarities in the Connexion of Co-ordinate Sentences, and of Principal and Accessory Sentences. Interrogative Sentences . 171 X CONTENTS. FACE Chapter VIII. The Negations -189 IX. (Appendix to Farts I. and II.) Certain particular Irregularities of Construction 202 PART III. The Order and Position of Words and Sentences 208 — 210 APPENDIX (by the Teanblator). ON THE USB AND MEANING OF THE PAETICLES. f22l. Office of Particles generally 211 § 222 — 226. Kai. Kal yap. d cat ......... ib. j 227, 228. Tc 213 § 229. li. Kal Si. oiU, fitiSe 214 5 230. likv 215 § 231 — 233. /iriv. icai jiriv. Kai p^v ye. Kal jif/v Kai. AXKH firiv. «l\X' o6 /t^v. re f«ni' ib. J 234—236. SI). Kal Si), /liv S^ 216 § 237. Stjra 217 § 238. Sai 218 J 239. — Se, —Bcv. Sri^ev ib. § 240. l^Touetv ib. § 241. eriv ib. § 242. ijSri (Sf/v) ib. J 243, 244. vvv. vvv, vv, end 219 $ 245. vr\, vai. /«i ........... ib. § 246. 5- 3 1'V". 5 "■'"'• ^^' h ••••.... ib. § 247. »rep (icaiTrep) 220 § 248 — 251. yi. Kal ye. Sk ye. «t ye, et — ye. ye fiiiv. ye Si), ye iiiv it). yk TOi. ye roi 5*? .......... ib, § 252 — 256. Toi. KaiToi. Kairoi ye. n'evTOi Kal fiivToi. ye ftivrot. ijroi (from ^), ijroi (from ij). ovroi, /iqrot. ^^rot — 7' • . . . . 222 § 257 — 259. ^a,dp.dpa 224 § 260, 261. yap 226 § 262, 263. &pa j ipd ye ; Up' olv ; ip' oi ; apa /iri ; . . . . , 227 § 264 — 269. oiv. dW oiv, i" oiv. At oiv. yovv. ydp ol)v. fi&v. aiiKOVf, oixovv. fiiv oiv ..•••■•... ib. § 270. Toivvv 230 CONTENTS. XI 271. Toiyap, roiyaproi. xoiyapovv • 272, 273. irov, end. SiiTroy. SriirovQev 274. TTOTt, end. (diiirori) 275 — 282. aWa. oXV apa. iW ^ ; dWd — yop, aXXa, oil y&p aWd. 6XK' >j (dXX' ^^ 283 — 285. q (qroi, qroi — -yt) (/laSXav ^ oi) 286 — 296. oil and /x^. ow itri. fiij oi 297—302. av (mv) . 303. ofpa. opp' av, o^pa Ktv 304. %U>Q. TiUQ . 303. eare 0»6XP«e. "XP'c) 306. irpij/. jrpij' av . 307. wj ((»£ = «e) 308. £ — > nXXo} 311. %va (iv' av) 312. firi (oix oTi — , oXXa). fton. (c, ri raxiirra) 313. oVt. TOTt. iroTC ; ovoti 314. oVov .... 315. In'Ei. ivitSri. iTrtiSav 316. EI. iav. circ. il6i . 317. «t ye. fiirtp. icai ei'.^ «i 318. lira, tirara 319. £«.... /")" dXXa, oij jliVTOl PAGE 230 ib. 231 ib. 235 236 240 244 ib. ib. ib. 245 248 ib. 249 230 251 232 ib. ib. ib. 253 ib. 254 Index 1 255 Index II 265 GREEK SYNTAX. PART I. ON THE CONNEXION OF WORDS IN SENTENCES. CHAPTER I. On the agreement of the Subject and Predicate ; of the Substantive and Adjective : — and on the Impersonal form of expression. a) The verb of the predicate conforms to the subject in person § 1, and number. But with a plural subject of the neuter gender, the (211) verb stands in the singular. With a dual subject of the masculine or feminine gender, the verb not unfrequently stands in the plural, when no stress is laid on the. fact of there being precisely^wo. (The first person of the dual is not used in prose.) Tw ^ivw toiSe cto^w koJ (fi'iXti) laTQv ifiw [PL Gorg. 487). 'Q Aa^^rje koI NtKta, iitraTov rifuv, Tivi S?7 Ssti/OTOTiji avyyijovaTOv Trspl Tijg roiv i/twi' rpoipri? {PI- Lach. 186). Fevoc Koi fiipog ov tuvtov eotov {PI. Pol. 263). — -"GTrXa oii TrdpsiTTiv. Ta KoAa ttjv Tpvy^v tixjipaivu. — Aote Trapahnyfia Tifuv, 5) Ad\iig KOI NiKi'a, rivac; tic )e SwicparEt wfuXi'iTriv (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 40). Kai ri yvvrj Koi 6 av^p ayaOoi slcriv [PI. Men. 73). The singular, however, is also used when the predicate is a single verb and precedes the subjects, only the nearest subject being then regarded : "lawg ava^rjatTai koi avvspil Ty jiovXy ^iXnnrog koi 'AvTiylvjjc koi 6 avTiypa^ivQ [Dem. 22, 38). ^Hkev d QepcrayopaQ koi 6 'E^jyKEffroc Eip AectJSov koi (j/kovv EKEt {Dem. 23, 143). ('Ek rwv irarpi^iav 9pi\piTai {6 Tvpavvog) avTog T£ Kal 01 avfxiroTai te koi iToipoi koi iToipai, PL Rep. 8, 568). c) If the connected subjects are things and impersonal notions, then the predicate may either conform only to the nearest subject (so that all the subjects are conceived as one, or, it may be, the nearest is rendered prominent), or be placed in the plurali, the plurality and distinction being both alike regarded. (For several subjects of the neuter gender, the verb always stands in the singular, according to § 1, a.) T(I)V ■fljUETEpWV KOKWV 1} T 10 V TToXtTWV OTaatQ Kal O TToXt/UOC aiTioQ iOTiv. 01 ifioi TrXavoi koi ToXanrwpiai koi to. iroXXa Jprj^i'tr/taTa TOVTo ifirtipyatraTo (Dem. 18, 218). So^ta koi voile avEu ^vxnc ovk av iroTS ytvoia6i}v (PL PhiL 30). If, in the last case, the predicate is such a verb as expresses no independent notion, with an adjective or participle, if the siibjects are of different genders, the predicate is always neuter : if they are of the same gender (masculine or feminine) it is most commonly neuter (the subjects in general being regarded as things, objects), and then the verb also stands in the singular : ndXE- fiog KOI oTaaiQ oXiOpia rate iroXtalv iaTiv. KaXXoe koi layyq SEtXcj! B 2 4 PART I. CHAP. I. [§ 3. [§2.] KOI KUKiJ! ^vvoiKOvvTa aTTpiirr) (paivtrai (PL Men. 346). fpBovog Koi ipwg ivavria iariv. (Less commonly: g wcpi oixoiiivov (PI. Rep. 306). Some- ' Ot aXXoi oKiivovfitv biraWpioi (Xen. Anab. 5, 5, 21, — we others ; the rest of us). Qe/uiTTOKXiig rjKia vapd at (Thuc. I, 137). 6 PART I. CHAP. I. [§ 7. [§ 6.] times, by an inaccuracy, the expression passes over from a whole class, denoted by a plural substantive, to the singular, denoting one of the individuals contained in the class : oi ripavvoi, and then rivuv yip Irt ap?£i ; namelv, o TvpavvoQ (^Xen. Hier. 6, 14). (208, |j^ fjjg third person of a verb in the plural is sometimes found without a subject expressed, when it is to be understood of men in general ; especially when the thing spoken of is the common opinion or common talk of men ; or when particular men are intended, who are easily known from the context : Toiie tv TraOovrag, orav Svvafitvoi Xapiv aiTo^ovnai fifi cnrodwcnv, a\api(TTovQ koXoiktiv {Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 1). 'O NtKiag (oTTEp Traa^ovaiv tv TOig fieyaXoig aywcn) Travra re epyi^ eti ivSea Eivai svofiiZs koI Xoji^ ovirw iKava Etpijadat {Thuc. 7, 69). (Often ^aci, they say, people say ; it is said.) Ti^ irorafu^ yi^vpai ouk tTnimv, tiafiaivovm It etti <7;i^£8(wv (namely, the inhabitants of the country). (211a, c) The second person of the verb is used, in some kinds of R.370) sentences, to denote an assumed indefinite subject: OvSi jiovXofievog av EBjOEc pqSiia6lj, aTroKTtiviiv Seriau {PL Pol 299). (AaSoKrat, it is resolved.) Rem. 1. This use is, however, for the most part, restricted to verbs that denote to say (\iyeiv, oiioXoytiv), and to the perfect and pluperfect of other verbs, with an appended dative of the agent (see on Dat. § 38, g), of the completed action, and what has been effected. (On the other hand, the Latin practice, of using impersonally in the passive voice verbs which govern the dat., e. g. iuvidetur, invidebatur mihi, is not customary in Greek.) Rem. 2. Now and then we meet with a general impersonal expression (without a sentence for its subject), with a neuter adjective (sometimes in the plural, § 1, b. R. 4), to denote a relation that exists, and a certain state of affairs, e.g. kVoifia kiTTtv, yiyvtrai (Thuc. 2, 3 ; it is ready = things are in readiness, or all is ready); paaifia ijv, ajSara ijv (Xen, Anab. 3, 4, 49) ; ti iiriQiTov tjv IvravBa (Xen. Anab. 3, 4, 20 ; here it was easy to attack = here was a convenient opportunity for attacking). On the Gerundive, see Chap. VII. Rem. 3. Observe, that the Greeks occasionally use a personal expression with a definite substantive (or substantivized) subject, where in English we use a neuter adjective with it is, &c., having a sentence for its subject : as in the case of the adjectives (jiavcpde, SijXos (see on the Participle, § 177, b. R. 2), and Skaios (see on Infin. § 165, a. R.). CHAPTER II. On the use of the Article. The Greek article (like the English definite article, the) represents § 8. the substantive before ^hich it is placed, as the name or designa- tion of a certain definite and known object (as opposed to a repre- sentation of some one or other indefinite object amongst several of the same kind). It stands, therefore, 1) before the generic names 8 PART I. CHAP. II. [§ 8. [§8.] of objects which are, In their own nature, isolated and definite'; 2) before substantives which denote the whole class designated by the substantive (or substantive with 'its adjective), not any individual object ; 3) before the names of persons or things, a) which are sufficiently distinguished from others by some appended specification (adjective, participle, genitive, preposition with its case), or b) which have been already mentioned, or follow immediately from what has been said, or c) of which it is easily understood, from the circum- stances under which they are spoken of, that they, and no others, are the objects intended: 'O ovpovoe, n jv, 6 rJAtoe, v OaXaaaa—Oi 'nririig. To. flijp/a. Ot 'liriroi KaWiovg twv ovwv ilaiv. 'O (TVKOavTtiQ {the sycophant, as a class "). 01 tro^oi avSpsg. Ai KoXal yvvaiKeg. Ttg TTorafu^j) _ ot 'imroi {the horses, which have been spoken of, and are here meant). KvpoQ ava(5ag tvi tov "iinrov ra TraXra ilg rag X"P°? iXafitv {Xen. Anab. 1, 8, 3, the javehns = his javelins, it being supposed a known thing, that javelins made a part of his equipment). Olvog Iv tw TriOt^j) ovK iariv (in the cask, t/ie cask in use); Ss'pSiJC aytipac t>?v avapi- dfinrov arpariav ?i\div iirl tjjv 'EXXdSo {Xen. Anab. 3, 2, 13, the well- known, numerous army). Rem. 1. The article stands more frequently than in English, to denote an object that is defined by its relation to another (subject, obje'ct, or relational-object in the sentence) : in such cases we generally use a possessive pronoun in English : Ol irXovmoi Toig xpiiptaaiv k%ii>vovvTai roig Kivdivovg {Lys. 24, 17). Toie toiovtovs TTorlpaf oiSk ol jralJec alSiiaQai Svvavrat. 'la/itv ifiag eiBiafiSvovg rolg tvepykraie luyiarriv x"?'" iiToSiSivai (^Isocr. Plat. 1). Rem. 2. With certain words in certain connexions (without an adjective) the article is occadonally omitted in Greek (as in some similar instances in English), although a definite notion is denoted, some peculiarity in the nature or conception of the notion having caused, in particular instances, the retention of the old manner of expression, when the use of the article was not yet become general, and firmly established. Such words are : a) The names of the large and peculiar portions of external nature {oipavog, yf), BoKaaaa, iiKiav&g, tjXioe), especially when a particular point or particular manifestation of them is contemplated : 'Eiri BaXarry, on the sea. "YSiop it oipavov TToXu. "HXtoj avariWci, TJXioc iSvtro, irepi rjXtov dva/iag (at sunset = the setting of the sun) ; further, sometimes Btoi and avBpiairoi, when it is precisely the generic term, that is to be made prominent : Td h avdpilnroic (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 7), human affairs and institutions. TUv ovtwv ayaQCiv xal koKCiv ovliv dviv 7r6i/o« koJ [' Bp. Middleton's ' monadic nouns.'] P Where, however, our idiom allows us to say ' a sycophant,' taking one as the type of the class.] § 8.] THE ARTICLE. 9 ijTt/itXftas 9(01 SiSoaaiv dvepw^oif (Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 28), and the names ofr§8.] naturally-defined times (fi/aa 'iif>, at day-breah ; with the dawn ; at the break of day ; even when a particular day is meant ; but also ufia ry 'iip). b) The term liaaiKtvs, when the Persian king is intended (HanXiie o ftlyac). Oi Trpoyovoi ol fiaaiKiuQ. (Here the article is nearly always omitted.) c) The names of virtiies, vices, sciences, arts, and occupations, when they are considered as general conceptions, which may be exhibited in a different form in different persons : Havra ret kuXA Kai ayaOa aaxTiTa ianv, o-ix fJKiaTa Si aiiiijipoaivr) (Xen. Mem. I, 2, 23, moderation, or temperance). OvSiiroT apa XvatTcKkirTtpov aSiKta SiKaioavvriS (.Pi- Rep. 1, 354, but also AvavriKkoTtpov ij dJiKia rqc itKaioavvriQ, PI. ib. as a single definite notion). 'Av^pi koXij) te icayaeip kpyav\aKy Ipxirai kx TroXtwf (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 17). AokeItI jioi T-poe darv uip/jLiiaBai (PI. Rep. 1, 327, to the city, Athens, from the Piraeus ; but shortly before a-TryfUv irpoQ to aarv). 'E|(i> 'laQ/tov (Thuc. 1, 62, beyond the Isthmus of Corinth, but in the same chap. Iv rip 'laBfiif). 'Ekt-os thxovq and Iicr6e rou riixovg (of the wall of the city). In the same way sometimes also ffrparof, arpaTia, arfdrcvfta, arpaTo-iriSov (and with adjectives as one word, Se^tbv Kkpag, eiiovviiov Kkpag, the right, the left wing : KopivBioic to fikv Sctibv Kspag al MtyaplSeg vijig ilxov Kai at 'A/ivpaKibyriSeQ, eviivvfiov Sk KkpaQ avroi oi KopiVdioi ilxov, Thuc. 1, 48). ('Ajri Si^idg, &c.) e) Names of relationslnp in certain connexions with an emphatic prominence given to the generic term of the relationship : Ovn vaTpbg ovri iiinpbg ^liStTat. Ot Kapdovxoi ixovrfg yvvaiKag Kai TralSag^ i^ivyov kjri rd opr) (Xen, Anab. 4, 18, with their wives and children). f) And in general, the article is sometimes omitted when, by the combination of two or more opposed members, the expression of the whole is brought out with a certain emphasis ' : Aiaig Kai x&ipiir/iof ij'i'x'je d.irh au/iaTog (PI. Phced. 67, as in English, body and soul ; but, 64 : ij Trig ^vxvg dirb tov aii)fiarog diraWayrj. Hav- aaviag avyKoKkaag iroXefidpxov; Kai irevTr}KoaTijpag IjSovXE^Ero (Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 22). 'Airo TiXtvTTJg iiz' apxriv^ [cf. note 1].) Rem. 3. A superlative (or other adjective) with a predicative noun, or a superlative standing alone as the predicate, never takes the article in Greek : nor does it stand with a substantive and the ' superlative of eminence ' (denoting only a very high degree, and therefore not distinguishing any particular object as belonging to the highest degree of all) : 'AvSpi KoKif KdyaSif kpyaaia KpariaTri iari yiiapyia (Xen. CEc. 6, 8). (O^roi (jiavcpd kari Siaj)Sopd tuiv avyyiyvo/ttvaiv, are evidently the ruin of — : PI. Men. 91, C.) IldvTiov ^liofiaBkaraTog' Kvpog rjv. Ot *a(njXi7-ai Etiri irovtiporaTOi dvBptoiriiiv Kai dSixdiTaToi (Dem. 35, 2). (ToSro /Sapii- [' Bp. Middleton considers government by a preposition to favour the omission of the article generally.] P This belongs to Bp. Middleton's head of enumeration.} ^ "O oTfXtrijfi Spaxiit/v kXan^avt rrig r/iiipag (Thuc, 3, 17, received a drachma a day = every day) ; but also ikxa, tig dizb fv\rjg (Xen. Hell, 2, 4, 24, ten, one from each Phyle), fig ditb iroXeug (ib, 4, 2, 8). 10 PART. I. CHAP. II. i§ 9 [§ 8.] rarov sari toO ffrpartu/jarog, Xen. Ct/r. 5, 3, 37, the most heavily-armed division. Aid PpaxvTciTiov, in the shortest way I can.) Rem. 4. The Attic poets often omit the article where it must have stood in prose, as well before substantives undefined by any added specification, as before such as have a genitive or adjective (possessive pronoun) with them: e.g. eu/uarof iiridTarriQ lirkarri TovSe iraiQ 'AxiXXeus {^Eur. Hec. 224). JlaiSa ariv KTtvomiv. UiiiTTOvai fie Swaoi ' ArptiSai (JSur. Hec, 510). 'EicaiSi; KtCrai kovh ^vpovaa SiaTt\vov Kapa (,Eur. Hec. 496). In the old poets (Homer, Hesiod) the usage is still more fluctuating. § 9. a) The adjective or participle by which the substantive is defined, stands, with any appended notion dependent on it, either between the article and its substantive, or, with the article repeated, after the substantive : '0 ayadog avrip. '0 Trovr&J'v KaWiarog koi warn (piXraTog avrjp. 01 aTpaTTiyiKoi vofi.iZ,6fiivoi avBpeg. At apiarai ooKovaai uvai ^viT£ig{Xen.Mem. 4i, 1, 3). — Ai Ti/xai al noXiTiKai. 01 arpaTnyoi oi ravTa (iefiovXtVKOTtQ. (Tag fxeyaXag riSovag koi to ayada tcl fieyaXa ij miOu) (cat fi Kapripla Kot oi iv Koipt^ ttovol TrnoE^ovrat. Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 8.) The latter position, that with the article repeated, is, however, the more rare, espe- cially in the Attic writers, and is usually employed only when the object is first mentioned, as a notion sufficiently defined in and by itself, and then has a nearer specification added to it besides : T6 rtJ^og irepietXov rb Kaivov (Thuc. 4, 51). 'Em rfjg j/fiig TrJQ Sia(p9apei TToAig. 'H irporspov aTrpay/ioavvri {your former, or previous, inactivity ; ri TrpoTipa, the former, of two). 01 apxovTtQ 01 'A0»^v»)(T£. 'H noXig v vno t<^ opu. In this way ayav and \lav are also used (r; ayav imBv/iia, Thuc. 6, 24) with vavv (6 wdw IlEpiKXqc, il>e celebrated Pericles) : as are also a few other isolated adverbs, when no corresponding adjective exists, or with a peculiar meaning : Td KarakoyaSiiv avy- ypdiiiiara (Isocr. ap. Mc. 1, prose writings). TJ oKiiBSiq ^iSg (PI. Plued. 109, the light which is truly tight). (Also "O yovt^ iraTrip, Lys. 13, 91, the natural father.) Rem. Now and then a specification which would be properly attached to the substantive by an article, is referred less accurately to the verb : oi7ot t&v irpa- yfiaTwv Trpoe ToiQ 'A6ij voiowj jiaKwra jutT-lff^ov ( Thuc. 4, 74). The article stands in Greek with substantives that are defined by § ip. an appended genitive, either of a generic term with the article, or of a proper name : 'H tov iruTpbg oIkiu, j] tov virip twv 'HAe^oji; opovg Kopv^fi {Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 13), (of SoX&jvoc vopoi), ri oIkIu tov Trarppc, v oIklo 17 tov iraTpog. Of these forms the first (that of the genitive in the middle) is the most common ; the second (the genitive following the substantive) is also common : the third (the genitive following the substantive with its article repeated, by means of which the specifica- tion is, as it were, returned for and appended with emphasis) is less common. Fourthly, the genitive may also precede, when it stands with emphasis on account of an opposition, or in a transition : Twv tto- XatbJv ri (pi\o(TO(pla {PL Prot, 84^3). Tou ^((iipiou 17 oTTopia {Thuc.4i, 29). (T6 Trjg rov ^atvovTog TSxvtjQ tpyov, PI. Rep. 381, after the first form. Ucpi roi; fiw9ov TTiQ diroSoaiioQ, Thuc. 8, 85, after the fourth '.) Rem. 1. The partitive genitive very frequently precedes, and with this genitive the article can never be repeated : cf. § SO, Rem. 1. Rem. 2. A substantive which governs a genitive with the article, itself stands without the article, when, in spite of the appended genitive, the object is undefined (especially in the case of the partitive and objective genitives : e. g. phpog riJQ woKimq iwl pXafiy r^g irSXtbig {Thuc. 8, 12, for injury to the city [though we should say, to the injury of the city] p.tya\ai Sairdvai riSv re rpii/papx™" ""'■ Trjg iroXcoig (TAuc. 6, 31), great outlays on the part of the trierarchs and the state) : some- times also, when it is wished to express a notion that in itself is definite, in a general and indefinite way : Iv dpxy rov "Koyov {Dem. 37, 28), ujri irKi^Sovg tSiv iiriKeipkvuiv viSiv {Thuc. 8, 105). The article is always omitted, when the governing substan- tive is the predicate with dpi or yiyvopat, or belongs to the predicate as an appo- ' But at ISiai ^fiSv iKaariiiv 7r<5Xae {Isocr. Plat. 8), and r) Soxovaa ripSv irpdrepov ffw0po<7uvjj {T/iue. 1, 32), where the genitive attaches itself to another specification (Rem. 6). 13 PAET I. CHAP. II. [§ 11. [§ 10.] sition' : 'H tiSv voXEfiiav /3Xd|3ij KspSog rije TtoXedic ytyvcrai. Sur^p ytvoii rrjg ■n-arpiSde. MiyaKuv KaKiiv ayyiKoi riKofitv. (Nd/ioi iroKiiaq, hws of a state ; irepi apiarov wpav, Thuc. 7, 81.) Rem. 3. Now and then the article does not stand with the substantive itself, but is not placed till before the following genitive * : 'Eri aKrivtjv yeaav Tf)v SivoipiSv- T0£ (Xen. Anab. 9, 2, 19). Tiaaatpkpvrn yiu Toig MiKrjaiovs ig rfiv AaKtSaiftova TTopevoixkvovg iwl Karapoy ry avTov iiaXiaTa (Thuc. 8, 85). Rem. 4. With respect to the position of the article with the governing sub- stantive, the genitive of a personal or possessive pronoun has the same effect as the genitive of a substantive with the article. The genitive of the personal pro- noun stands either before the article or after the substantive (enclitically). 'H/iwi/ ij ■TToXig, r) TToXig rjfiiijv. Tovro ffoi 5l5wfLi *6ri fiov rijv ^ijrepa (rilv fiTjrspa jiov) rinq.g. The genitive of a demonstrative or reflexive pronoun either stands in the middle, or follows with the article repeated : 6 tovtov adt\v iiacaiStica vr/eg (Thuc, 8, 13). Td Ik Trig 'laaov fiiydXa x|0»;M«ra SiapiraaBkvTa (Thuc. 8, 36 ; the par- ticiple removed according to § 9, a. Rem. 1). — 'H ffE/ij/j) aiiri;, ly rrig rpayifUag iroirjaig {PI. Gorg. 502). 'H avu) ri irpbg Tif Ttlxu diroXtiipig t&v orrXiTuiv (Thuc. 7, 54). Al jrsvTi Kai tlxoai vrisg tSiv KopivBiuv ai Totg 'Adrjvaiotg dvOop/iovaai (Thuc. 7, 31). Tb Iv 'ApKaSiif r6 roS Aibg tov Aveaiov Up6v (Pl. Rep. 8, 565). Kard r^v 'ATTiKt)v Tffv iraXaidv ^usvriv (PI. CVai. 398). Inc/iaipoiiat is tov dXXov tov ir/ttrlpow Tpoirov (PI. Rep. 2, 368). (Also where the other adjective or participle stands substantively : Ol dXXoi ol wapovTtg twv arpaTiinTuiv, Xen. Anab. 6, 4, 7.) (It is seldom, that one of the specifications follows without the repeated article : tj Trig ■noXiuig 6.vd\(i)irig Siffioaia, Thuc, 6, 31. Mtrd j-jjv twv rvpdvvuv KOToXvaiv ix rng 'EXXdSog. Time. 1, 18. Tov rrpta^iiTaTov vlov iavTOv, Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 1.) § 11. The article stands with substantives (appellatives), that are con- nected with a demonstrative pronoun, oiiroe, oSe, or ekcTvoc. The ' [So, often, (Anog, aiTiov &c., used substantively in the predicate, = the cause.] ^ [Observe that in both the instances substantives are under the government of prepositions,] § ll'J THE ARTICLE. 13 demonstrative stands before the article or after the substantive :[§ n.] Ouroe 6 avrip. "HSe 17 noXig. Kara roue vofiovg SKtivovg. 'Ektwvto TJjv Ti^irjv javTriv {Isocr. Phil. 107). If, however, besides the pronoun, an adjective or the like is also added, the pronoun may either attach itself to this (the more usual case), or retain its own peculiar position : 'H (iTtvfi avTr) oBoe {Xen. Anab. 4, 2, 6). At irpoe rove rvpawovg avTai Xiav ofiiXiai [Dem. 6, 21). — Ot aAa^o'vEe Xo70( Ikuvoi {PL Rep. 8, 560). 'EKEt'vi) 11 vipriXoTaTti irXaravot; {PL Phced. 229). (Airo'e, self, has no influence on the use of the article '.) Rem. I. The article is omitted, when the substantive is properly a predica- tive noun, or an apposition (connected with the predicate) to the" pronoun, which last, instead of standing independently, conforms in gender, according to the Greek practice, to the substantive (is attracted by it) : ABrij iariv dvSpbg dperri (PI. Men. 71, this is the virtue of a man), Kivrims avrri ficyicrn) Tolg "EWriaiv iyivtTO (Thuc. 1, 1). Tourijv rkxvrjv ix^i {Lys. 6, 7). Tavry aToXoyif xp^ra« {Dem. 49, 63, he uses this as an excuse). 'Qg ol Trcpi K\fd/j/3porov iKparovv rjf flaxy, T«^" TovTtji TiKfi-npuf -yvoir) av rig (Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 13 ; from this as from a certain indication, or proof) ; and in the same way, where the pronoun refers to something following, by which the notion is defined for the first time : OiJroi, o8s opSrE, pdpPapoi, TToM/iioi ly/Jiv laovrai (Xen. Anab. 1, 5, 16). MevekX^; UiXto iliSv SoSvai xapiv TavTtiv avT), seldom ttoXis vaaa, an entire city, the whole of a city.) Hag, however, and especially o\oq, also stands after the article, like other adjectives : 'H iraaa SiKtXia (^Thuc. 4, 61, the whole of Sicily, Sicily as a whole). 'H avfinraaa 'EXK&q {Isoc. Paneg. 8, 3). To irav TrXijQoQ tS>v oirXiTdv iThuc. 8, 93). TA bXov Trpoauimv (PI. Prot. 329). TJ oXov yivog {PI. Crat. 392). In the same way we also meet with in the plural : Id, iravra fii^rj, all the portions together, oi iravrtQ a,v9pioirot (Xeti. Anab. 5, 6, 7), /iovT] t&v iraaHiv ir6\eg avv dyaQolg toIq nap' tiioi, Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 12, with those about me good, roith good people about me.) Oi trap' t/iot, substantively, of. § 14, h". ('O Xi/iyv rb aTo/ia el^e A/crii aradioiv, Thuc. 7, 59, with the descriptive genitive.) Rem. The same position (outside the article) is also taken by the adjective and participle in other cases, when they are in apposition (i. e. used, not attri- butively, but appositively) : Oi KepKvpaloi iviirpriaav r&g BKriv&g IpTjjiovg (Thuc, \, i9, left with none to defend them). 'O Troraiibg Sid likurjg rijg TroXeojg pet (Xen. Cyr, 7, 5, 8). "Axpaig ralg xtpiriv. "Afia T(f ijpi dpxopLivif. On the adjective, see § 86, and on the participle, J 181, R. 7. § 13. a) Proper names do not require the article (which is accordingly omitted even where a demonstrative is annexed : ovroo-i 'Atto- TovQioQ, this A. tiere) ; but they may take it, if the person or you [• Cf. note 1, p. 9.] - Hivag Xkyiig, rdg rkaaapag' itoXiTt'iag ; (PI. Rep. 8, 644, What ar^ the four polities u are speaking of?) § 14.] THE ARTICLE. 15 object is made prominent, as having been previously named, and as [§ 13.] being essential to the matter in hand, or as being so generally known and presupposed, that the scope of the discourse naturally leads one to expect the mention ; sometimes without any particular emphasis : TavTa Xafiwv 6 IlavaaviaQ ra jpafifiora iroXXi^ juaXXov Tipro [Thuc. J, 130, in the continuation of an account of Pausanias.) — Kai Ik mv Bv^avTtou jSi^ EKTToXtopKrjOfic [liavaaviaq] Ic juev t»jv Sffajortjv ovk avs\wpii, ic Se KoXojvac Tag Tpw'iaSag iSpvdrt (Thuc. 1, 131 ; Byzan- tium, mentioned before as the place where Pausanias was residing; Sparta, his w^ell-known home. But shortly afterwards : av^x'^P^'- *c 'SiirapTt}v). 'Ev Se ry IluXtf) — Iv Se raXg ^Adrivaig (Thuc. 4, 26, 27, the narrative now passing on to these before-mentioned cities), 'h OtfHiTT-oKXeowe apiTri, y dper^ r/ 0f/ii(TroKXEo«c (by § 10), but not jj dptri) 6e^i- cTOicXiovg (though it may be ij apcrt) tov Q(iuaroK\iovi with the article, and ri aptr^ i) TOV Oe/i. Mvprifia eEjuiffroicXeouc, an invention of Themistocles. Rem. 'O lifyaQ 'A^t^avSos, B^jiat ai tv Bouorif, 'AXi^avSpoc o MaKcSiiv, for distinction from others of the same name. 'O ^tXavbg 6 ' An^paKuarriQ {^Xen. Anah. 6, 4, 13), (the before-mentioned) S. the Ambraciote (who is recalled to one's thpughts here ; otherwise 2iX. 6 'A^/3p). When, to describe a person more exactly, the name of the father is added in the genitive, the governing word may take an article after it before the genitive, which makes the addition more prominent : KXicuv 6 KXtaivsrow, IlEpi/Soio i? 'AXkclBov, but also without the article : KXemi/ TiXtaivkrov (in the business-style). (With appended designation of birth- place and district : KaXXi7r7ro£ 6 tiXwros 6 Ai^avtis, or KaXXisX^j 'ETriTpl^ouf epiacrioc, Bern. 50, 47 '.) b) For names of nations, the same rule holds good, when they are used of the whole nation. (But always o[ "EXXtive?, in contradis- tinction to 01 fSdp^apoi '.) '0 ' AQriv/iiix>v iijfioc, 6 Stj/ioe 6 'Adrivaiwv (in public transactions this is the most usual) and o S. t&v ' Adriva'mv . (Rarely 'O Sriiiog o tUv 'Aeijxaiuv.) When some of a nation are spoken of, it is ol 'AOrivaiot, ol "EXXrivEs, and 'AdrjvaXoi, "EWrivig, according to the general rules for the article. "EXXjjvsj iaiiiv. So 'A9t]vmoe and o 'ABtivaXog. a) In the same manner as with substantives, the article stands with § 14. adjectives or participles when they are used substantively of persons or things (definite individuals or classes) : 'O koXoc, to ayaOov. Oi KoXoi, Tci ayada. Ta iv avOpwTvotg ayaOd. {Oi iroXXoi, the many ; the multitude, the popular party : ol oXiyoi, the oligarchical party.) Oi TtoX&ixovvTsg. 'O fdovXofjiivog, whoever will. Oi trpwroi ipxontvoi. 'O ctKWV a/xaprdvwv. lldv to KuXug e'xov {PI. Rep. 381). Ot KivSvvtveiv ' '0 WaiavSpoQ ■troTafxaQ (with different genders : In-i Ty Alrvy rif opei, or M rip uoEi ry AiTvy), more rarely /j«xP' Maiavipou noraiiov. ■ Movoe 'EWiiviov Kol jiap^dpoiv, of Greeks and barbarians, J 8, R. 2, f. 16 PART I. CHAP. II. [§ 14 [§ 14-] eOiXovTig or oi iOiXovTcg KivBvvivHV, '0 to Tti)(og iXv,. O IXwv to Rem. 1. Where such a participle has a predicate nominative, this is usually placed between the article and the participle (o I'ra-Xatdv, of old, rb jrpurov (rb Ssiripov, jre^irroj', etc.),yor the first time, to rsXevraXov, lastly, at last, rb '6\oi>, rb ^v/iirav, on the whole, rb /ikyitTTOv, for the greatest part, to. iroWa, mostly, rb irXeov, tA vXeiu), for the more part (in Thucyd. sometimes ro irXkov for the mere adverb ttXeoj'), rb Xoiirov, ra Xoiira, for the future, raXXa, for the rest, rd riXtv- Toia (Thuc. 1, 24), lastly. b) In the same way, the article without a substantive is prefixed to a preposition and its case, or to an adverb of time or place (§ 9 b), to denote persons or things (definite individuals or classes), which are in the situation or relation assigned by the preposition or adverb : Ot Iv T-g TToXu, the people in the city, ot ■Kaga Nikj'ou [the persons sent from N.), 01 If" ijVwv, ifiov [our, my, contemporaries, people in our times), 01 iirl tmv irpajfj.aTwv [Dem., those over the affairs, i. e. those who are at the head of them). 'O iv t(^ 7rXo/(j> {the men in the ship, of a person lately mentioned). 0? vvv, ol ivOaSs, ol tKei. 01 ^juTaTiu [ytvovQ), the next of kin. Ta uq tov icoXtfiov, what belongs to war, the preparations for war. Ta 1^' ii/uTv, what is in our power. To Kara StKEXiav, the Sicilian affairs. Id ivOdSe, the affairs here '. Rem. 1. In the singular of the neuter gender, some such expressions, governed by a preposition, serve to mark time and place. 'Ei/ rip totc, at that time, iv rif ■npb TOV, in the time preceding, Ik tov lirl Garepa, iK tov It' apiaTtpd, from the opposite side, from the left side, ri iv Tif sTzktcuva rije UKpag yiyvousva (Thuc. 8, 104), what was doing on the other side of the promontory. Rem. 2. Some such expressions, formed with the neuter article and a prepo- sition, are used (in the accusative) as adverbs to denote a certain compass or extent, thus : t6 A.vb Tovh,from this time forth, to iir' ip.oi, as far as it depends on me, for my part, to kuB' kavT6v,for his own part, as regards oneself, rb Trpb tuvtov, informer times. The article stands in this way even before adverbs of time to denote a certain extent of time : tA vpiv, of yore, to nj/jepoy, rb vvi>, t& vvv ' Rarely r6 a^6ipa, Tb (pavipSiQ, and the like, with an infinitive understood : the 2)utting it strongly, the vehement form, the spealdng openly. § 15.] THE ARTICLE. 17 (tovvv, Taviiv), now (rd vvv rdSi), to t£ irapavTiKa Koi ri liriira {Thuc), both [§ 14.] for the instant and for the future. (Td jidXiara, in the highest degree'). c) The article in the plural masculine is put with the genitive of the name of a person to denote that person's people, train, troops, &c. : KAeopxoc vXavviv iTTi Toiig MivwvoQ {Xen. An. 1, 5, 13). But espe- cially the article is put in the neuter with the genitive, and conveys a general substantive notion of that which belongs to, or arises from, or concerns a person or thing : Td twv iroXciiiwv. Td rrig iroXswg, the concerns or affairs of the city. 'H Ai'kjj wavra Yd rwv avOpwirwv lopq. {Dem. 35, 11). To rije imTpoirf,g iXiXvro {Bern. 33, 19, the affair of the guardianship). Td rije tuxicj the dispensations, dealings, of fortune. Td rCiv ^Adrivaiwv ^nd of tViroe (»;) for the cavalry, with the numerals x>X'a and /ivpia in the singular : Herodotus has even r) icAiiriKog, denoting a troop of camels. CHAPTER III. The Cases. Nominative and Accusative. In Greek, an apposition is often attached to the subject or object § 19. of a proposition, sometimes even to a case governed by a preposition, to denote in what quality, to what end, the person or thing appears in the action : "VLkuq hoi o-turTjp. Tivoq SiSatrKoXoi Tahiti ; {PI. Euthyd.' 287). Oil \tipovQ j3o»)6oi aoi irapaarricFO/iiOa r] el iralSag IkIktijcto {Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 19). 'Tovg (piXovg fxd^Tvpag irapiyui. Ttt Tripurra Xpvfiara irpayfiara k'^ovCTiv {Xen. Cyr, 8, 2, 21 ; as a burden, i. e. in their superfluous wealth they have only an incumbrance). "lo-we Taxa Toiig GrjjSaiovc akXove AaKsSaifioviovg svpijasrs [Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 34). Siiv aol 0iX(ii KOI Toura hairpa^ofiai '. Rem. 1. Such an apposition is rarely found with objects which are not in the accusative, except with xpw/iot (dative : Xpu/tai toIc ipiXoig fionQoXg) and rvyxava (genitive : 'Epwrare roig TpajreSowjTioue, oitoiiav rivdv riiiSiv irvxov, Xen. An. 5, 5, 15, what sort of people they found zts). (QpaavurjStjg oiiSiv ySn, o'lote Sijpioij iitXriaiaZe role civBpbiicoiQ roiroig, Dem. 35, 8, with what monsters he associated, in having to do with these men.) Rem. 2. In a numerical statement of breadth, length, height, weight, or value, the general term is often put as an apposition (100 feet as length, i.e. in length): and so, in speaking of a sum of money, the more special description of the way in which it is applied (30 taUnts as reward = for reward, as we also say, 30 t. ' On the other hand a relation of time is never denoted (as it is in Latin) by the apposition of a substantive or adjective (without the participle tiv). When, or, as consul, is viraTtvav, as a child, iraXg uv. See § 174 b. R. C2 20 PART I. CHAP. III. [§ 30. [§ 19.] reward). TA ayaX/jo, TeaaapaKovra raXavra araQuhv eTxe xpwffiou AirifBov (^Thuc. 2, 13). 'Apx6/3iOf Kal \vai0ciSrie f^O""" XP^/"""" NouKpariKd, rifiriixa rdXavra twea Kai TpiaKovra /ivag (^Dem. 24, 11). 'ETri yuaBif rpidicoVTa ToKdvTOtg (Hdt. 8, 4). 'E^ot TTor^p (caTsXiTTt T-pioKoira /ivac (j>i\sta iariv {Xen. Mem. 2, 3j 6), "Ovojua rtj) fXiipaKiij^ 'AyaOwv Icrrlv '. Rem. 1. [Verbs of imperfect predication.] The verbs which in themselves do not form a complete predicate, and therefore require a predicate noun, are in Greek (besides liiil) uTrapxa), yiyvo/tat, and certain passives (see § 24), Trl^uica, I am by *■ ■nature. (Aay\dva, become by lot : SriiioaBiurig ovr' ^Xox« ruxoirouig ovr sxsipoTovrjQti, JEsck. 3, 28. AokQ with tlvat omitted.) Rem. 2. V/hen a participle has & predicative-noun or an apposition, the predicate or apposition follows the case of the subject and of the participle : '0 ^aiiXos vofuZoiitvog, tSiv u) Trjv ovalav {waste my property by keeping horses). tion thence resulting, holds also in the Greek. These verbs, for instance, in Greek, are simple transitives : ^^(KW, jSKaWTO), TBlBul, KoXoKEtriO, oiKTupcj, eXeaif ijfiKSt, ivtSpeiiu). ' TiBvavai rip 0oj3y roig GijjSaiotic (fiem. 19,81), l^apvov tlvai (ylyviaBat) rfiv Siuvrav (Jsocr. Call. 13, the award of the umpires). 'Aarioxoe rr)v x^pav Karalpouais \eiav iiroiuTO (Thuc. 8, 41). . § 24, 25.] NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 23 Some verbs govern, besides the object itself, the accusative of a § 24. substantive or adjective, which, as apposition or predicate-noun to (227) the object, serves to complete the notion of the verb. In the passive, these verbs usually take a predicate-noun in the nominative by § 20. Such verbs are : a) Those which denote : to make (to be) something (elect, nomi- nate, appoint) ; to have (take, give) as something ; to shew and exhibit somewhat in a certain way, as something. Aaptloe Kvpov aarpairriv iirohjas Koi arparjj'yov airiSei^i navTwv, oaoi ilg KaarwXov tteSiov adpoiZovrai {Xen. An. 1, 1, 2). Qiiaav^ovXog v/iag fiiv irEvtaTipovg airtSit^s, ToiiQ Si KoAaicae tovq avTov TrXovaioaraTOvg tQiv woXitHiv lirolri- (T£v (Jjys. 28, 4). Of orpartiiiTat 'AXKt/3mSr)v ffrpaDiyoi/ £(Xovro (Thuc. 8, 82). 'ApiaTov iidiXofiiv fiaaiXia Kauiaravat {Xen. An, 3, 2, 5). T(j) 'AAic(j3taSp ntjoiicA^c l7r£)(j-£ rraiBayo)yov twv oiketopv tov a^piiora- Tov VTTO yf)p(i>Q {PI. Ale. P. 122). Ta TTipiTTo. Xp/j/iOTa irpayfiaTO iXovcFtv {Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 21). Auo-avSpoc ctte^ovouc irapa twv troXswv iXanfiavE SQpa {Xen. Hell. 3, 3, 8. See § 19). Tor ISmttiv xpri iavTov TToplj^tiv iimuOri toiq apj^ovaiv {Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 22). A^joov tnroSiiKvvamv 'EvSujuitui'a {PI. Pheed. 72 ; they make Endymion a farce ; surpass him so much that he becomes mere child's-play in com- parison). OuSeic i%ti- 4'^vBj} anoiprivat, a sipfiKaftsv {PL). Rem. The Greeks even say [prolepticallt/], av^avtiv nva niyav, aipetv rifieya, and the like ; where the notion expressed in the apposition is already involved in the verb, and hSaaiciaBai nva aKvria, to set a person to learn to be a shoemaker. b) The verbs which denote to name, call {Xiydi, koXui, incoKaXw, ovnuaZf), Trpoaayoptvu), TrpoatiTTov), and to regard {hold, account, de- clare) as something {vonitiw,r]yovnm, Kpivu)). Oi EXXrivig roiig aAAowc vavrag ^apfiapovQ cbvojua^ov. (Aov at riyovfiai {PI. Gorg. 473). 'AflAiwTUTrjv TauTJjv TWV ttoAewv Kpivb) {PL Rep. 9, 578). Rem. 1 . Instead of the name, title, or denomination itself, a pronoun may stand in the neuter : Ti at Ka\&jiiv ; Tovto KaKovjxau. 'Avri Kfii ^hov, d tots iivofidZovTO, vvv K6\aKE£ OKovovaiv (fiem. 18, 46)j Also, KaXiiv nva ovojia n. 'AvaKo\o5(Ti ravTa to. ovoiiara eaVTOve, iS(\^ve, iraripag, vieig {PI. Rep. 5, 471). KaXilv, TiSiaBai, jrpoauiriiv rivi ovona ti, to give a person a name ;• riBeaOai rivi ovo/ia 'S.iaaiav (Dem. 43, 74). (^Ewiawiilav ex"^ rvpavvoe.) Rem. 2. yyoviiai, vofiiKui, Kpivuj, often take an accusative with infinitive (clvai), sometimes even ivoixatw : ^ofiar^v dvofidZovai tov avSpa elvai (PI. Proti 311). 7, 5, -^ , 'UipaStv SiiStKO ipv\irc Siaipiiv (Xen. Cyr. 1, 8, 5). A double accusative, to express a nearer and a more remote object § 25. 24 PART I. CHAP. III. [§ 25. [§ 25.] (the former a person, or something conceived as person) is taken by- verbs which denote, to demand (aiToJ, anaiToJ, irpaTTo/xai, more rarely irpaTTui, ugirpaTTw), to deprive, bereave, make to lose [a^aipovfiai, airooTspw, also avXw), clothe and strip, invest and divest {tvBvw, IkBvw, afKJtiivwui '), teach (StSacTKO), 8i8aeya ovSevore oiSeva Spf (^Pl. Hep. 6, 495). Oi tiTTOKpirni sv Toig Tpayii>Siais oKKriXovg rd iaxara Xeyovmv {Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 9). Instead of the second accusative we may also have merely the adverbs ti and KaKSiQ : KoKtSg Xiyovaiv ol iyaBoi tovq kukovq {PI. Euthyd. 284) '. a) Verbs in themselves incapable of an object accusative have § 26. nevertheless not unfrequently the accusative of a substantive derived (223, from the same root or of corresponding meaning, usually connected ' ' with an adjective or pronoun or similar adjunct serving to define and characterize the action more closely. (In English, we usually employ a verb of general signification, which can take the substantive as its regular object, in place of the special and intransitive verb in the Greek.) "HSojuat tuq /jitjiarag ^Sova? {PI- Phil. 21 ; I feel, expe- rience, enjoy). Xatpi(jtwv tvvi(pvye rfjv ^uyrjv Tavriiv (PI. Apol. 21 ; took part in ; shared). 01 QpqKsg, Ittei tVT{i\riaav tovto to tvTV\rifia, (TvveXlyovTo tjjc vvkto^ [Xen. An. 6, 1, 6). AaKcBai/jiovioi jutra ravTa Tov iepbv KoXovfiEvov iroXifiov iarparivaav (Thuc. 1, 112). 'Att^pojUev Ttiv irpoTipav Trpia j5dav {Dem. 19, 163 ; we set out on the first embassy). NtKoiv vtKTjv KaXXtCTTijv. AaKESaijtiovioue 0aorii' iv nXarajaie irpwTov fiiv (pevytiv, hrtira Se avaaTpe v(Kfj(Tat rrfv ekeT fiaxriv {PI. Lach. 191). Tac piv veviKriKart vavpaxtag, Tjjv S' Ik tov EiKOToe vvv viKTiatTS {Thuc. 7, 66) '. riao-ae voaovg kojuvo) {PI. Rep. 3, 408). Noo-ov voaovptv rfiv ivavTiav {Arist. Aves, 31). "HSij riadivsi raurrjv tjjv voaov {Ism. 1, 14). ripoe to avTo'ig avpipipov (coi Toiig vopovg TiQevTai Kai Tovg iiralvovg iiraivovai koi Toiig xpoyovg \f/iyov(Tiv {PI. Gorg. 483 ; praise, when they praise, and blame, when they blame). Hence sometimes a passive is formed : 'O fiifSiupevoQ (joi BioQ {Dem. 19, 200, the life you have led [so we : the life you have lived] ). Oj TToXtpoi 01 iTrl-Qriaiwe TroXspridivTeg {Xen. Mem: 3, 5, 10). Rem. 1. The poets employ even bolder constructions, e. g. Tt'e Stjt' &v elri rrivS' 6 ■TrpoadaKuiv Upav ; {Soph. (Ed. C. 1 166, that sits here in this sort ?). Rem. 2. In the same manner, some phrases are formed of a verb with a sub- stantive, related in signification, but more special, without adjective or pronoun : viKCLv 'laBjiia (to gain an Isthmian mctory, =■ vmdv roig arnpaviTag dyHvae), Bveiv tiayykXta, 6vuv rd, AvKaia, itsTidv yd/tove. {'Eariav eiir^o^opia rde yvva'iKas, Jsts. 3, 10, see b.) ' 'EKiOTiv viiZv dviv Sairdvve rd diKaia icoirjaai ro'ig tiepyeraiQ (Dem. 20, 12). ^ NiKov, KpoTHv ry ftdxy, to conquer in the fight (17 ^e roifi AaKeJoi/ioviowj Ula, ^v Sid 7-6 aiaxpi" ^V ^otjeriaetv vinlv vwTiiirt avrovs, Thuc. 5, 105, the confidence you have in the Lacedemonians, that they of very shame, etc.). 26 PART I. CHAP. III. [§ 37. [§ 26.] Rem. 3. This accusative may also stand with verbs which govern a genitive or dative : ^ti/ioadevjis Sktjaiv riva iaxvpav i/icv li(r)9ti jii) irapaKiiriiv rovro (JEsch. 2, 43). (Aeiviz Ittij Kartiyopuv rivog. Soph. OSd. R. 513.) b) Such an accusative of the notion contained in the verb, or of one nearly related to it, together with a defining and characterizing adjunct, may also stand with a verb which governs a proper object- accusative : QpatTvl5ovXog koi QpaavWog wpKOjaav iravrac roiig arpa- Tidirag Tovg fiiyiarovg lipKOvg, ^ firiv ^TUfxoKpaTrtttiadai icat ofiovoriativ {Thuc. 8, 75). Toue TroAtrac jusraStSovai aXXrjXote XP'' '"''f w^tXeiae, r)v av iKaoTOi rh koivov Suvorol loaiv w^iXiiv {PI. Rep. 7, 519). MiX- TtaSriQ o Tr)v iv MapaOiiivt fidxriv tovq |3apj3apouc vtKjjtroc {^sch. 3, 181) '. Alax^vrig Krriai^wvra Ypa^ijv hoiSv xpwarwv i^iwKsv {Dem, 19, 293). Ttfiwpia Vfiiv rj^at evOvg fiira tov ipxiv davarov iroXv ^a- XtTTUTcpa 7) o'iav sfii airsKTOvaTe {PI. Apol. 39). This accusative may remain, when the proposition is expressed passively, and conse- quently the proper object becomes subject : Toiovtov rfirifxa tejuvstoi TO TEfjivontvov, olov TO Tifxyov Tifivu {PL GoTQ. 476 ; is cat with such a cut). OhZiv opviov q.Sfi, OTav TTHvg t) piyol r\ Tiva aXXrjv Xvirriv XvTTriTai {PI. Pkmd. 85). Tae aXkag juaxac, ocrac nipcrai riTTridt)crav, SO) {Isocr. Paneg. 145). 0pacri)j3ouXoe l^iQr\ koI hiplOri ap(j)OTipag tcLq KpiaeiQ iv t^ ^nfJt-t^ {Dem. 24<, 134). TivTeaOai t^ Srifioaiq fiaaT'iyi TTSvrriKovTa TrXjjyac {-^sch. 1, 139). S 27. ^) Verbs which in themselves cannot govern an object-accusative, (229) may take the neuter accusative of a pronoun or of a numeral adjec- tive, to denote the contents and compass of the action ; and in like manner sometimes another description of adjective which serves to characterize the measure and extent of the action. (The pronoun or adjective belongs, properly speaking, to the substantive notion involved in the verb.) "Ei» ipti TavTa ; Kvpog Avcrav^pif aWa t E^iXo^povetro Koi tov hv 2ap- St(ji irapadtiaov iiriSci^s {Xen. (Ec, 24). "SifiiKpov ti atropQi {PL Thecet. 145). Taiira XuTroiJjuai Kot ravTo. \aip(i) toTc ttoXXoTc {Dem. 18, 292). 'O dpyiaOeig oi/k tXaaau) Trraui r) h tvopyriToig rote Trpdyfiaaiv ofxiXriaag {Thuc. 1 , 122). Alojuai ixiTQia Kai B'lKaia vfiiHv {Dem. 37, 3 ; my request does not exceed the bounds of moderation and justice). Aiofiai vfiwv, v (for a by attraction, [§ 27.] see ch. 9) ivavfjiaxvaafuv {Arist. Aves, 677; what we fought, i. e. the way we fought in the naval engagement). Hence sometimes the pas- sive is formed, especially in the participle: Ta aoi imrgia^tviiiva {Dem. 19, 240; your acts as ambassador=a av irtirpiafiivKaQ). Ta ev oirXoiQ KOI Kara Trjv ^noie a certain use of an object, use it for [a certain purpose]): Ti ^ouXerai KCpof ^/iXv ^^pflffSai ; {Xen. An. I, S,2S). 'Y/iEig vvicri, oaairep ot dWoi ij/iip^e, SivaaBc xRV"^"!- (-Xen. Cyr. 1, 5, 12). XloWti xPV'Sai tivi (PI. Theeet. 157). Ovk Ixw, o,ti \pi\i50fia\ Tovrif rtp avB^bmtf (JPl. Symp. 216; what I shall do with him: what to do with him). (XpfjaBai rtvi sn-t irpayjid n, xp^<'Sai ToTg vivpoig tig raig tjipevSovag.) Rem. 2. Sometimes an adjective thus accompanying the verb acquires almost the force of an adverb ; see" Adjectives, ch. 8. Ti (somewhat, in a certain degree) and (aptiKpov ti) and oiSkv are used as complete adverbs even with adjectives (ol aptr^C Ti jitTaTtoiovntvoi, Thuc.2, 51, oiiSiv oiioiOQ,afiiKp6v ti iSfioioc), and with adverbs (ffx^^ov Ti, Trdvv Tt). Tavra acquires sometimes the senseybr this reason, therefore ; Avrd ravra Kal vvv rJK(D irapd as (PI. Proi. 310, this is the very reason of my now coming). Tn5r' dpa Kai iveiipag /toi ; (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27). (In the poets also Tati, ToiavTa ^ o8rws.) b) Such an accusative may also stand with'a transitive verb which governs an object-accusative (the adjectives almost always in the plural) : 'Eav ejue aTroKT(.ivt\ti, ouk sjue fitiZio jiXaipeTt rj vfiag avrovg {PL Apol. 30 ; vnll bring greater hurts, = will harm more). Tavra koI aWa TOiavTa iyKOj/JLLaZovai Trjv SfKaio'cruvrjv {PI. Rep. 2, 363). Aukc- Sai/Movioi TToXXa rrjv ttoXiv rifiwv fiSiKtiKaai koI /jtsyaXa {Dem. 18, 98). This accusative may remain with the passive : 11 oXXa koi Seiva fiSi- Ki)Qr]v {Isce. 8, 4). Oil /SAa^ovrai a^ia Xoyov {Thuc. 6, 64; they will suffer no loss worth mentioning). (eavfidZeadai to. Ukoto, Thuc. 1,38, fo enjoy becoming honours. Totavr iirri kXwwv, d vvv av rrjvS' aripa^tig iroXiv, Soph. (Ed. R. 340, ^ ravra, & — , the affront thou puttest upon the city.) a) The accusative stands with the prepositions ava, up along some- § 28. thing, along through something (of space and time), up to {ava to opoc), (230) and elg, to, into something, together with wg, to, and with iifi^i, Sia, tiri, Kara, /xtra, irapa, ircpi, irpog, vrrip, viro, in certain significations (those which start from the conception of a motion to something, a spreading round or over something). Rem. 1. Ei'c (agreeably with its signification into) is never (in Attic, rarely in Ionic writers) applied to individual persons (irpog, we). To persons in the plural it is applied, when these persons denote an assembly (tig roig StKaarag, dg i/idg, into the assembly of the people), a definite place (dg Toig iro\f iiiovg, dg roig varaTovg 28 PART. I. CHAP. III. [§ 29, 30. [§ 28.] lii^dKKuv), or an extension (land and people) and expansion : ('ETropMtiaav de Taoxove, Xen. An. 4, 7, 1. llk\oi^ k r^c 'Affiag XPW*""" 'X"" ^'^9"' ''f avBp&vovg anSpovs, Thuc. 1,9. Uapi ^aaCkka Kai a\\o(re kg roig jSap^dpovg, Thuc. 1, 9. Aia^t- pXtlvrai (ig roig aWovg, PI. Sep. 7, 539, in the minds of. Tijg voXtug fi Sivaftig tig liiravTag avepuirovg Sta(pavr'ig kykvtTO, PI. Tim. 25). In speaking of disposition and behaviour towards any one, dg is also applied to individuals {tvvota de nva, v^pl- Zuv dg nva, \kyav ti dg nva, of and against hini). 'Qg is used only oi persons^. Rem. 2. The poets use with verbs of motion an accusative without dg or vpog : Aonovg ardxia k/iovg (Soph. (Ed. C. 643). Ilapti/it ( =: tiKw) AipKt)g vdfiar' 'lufitivov ff vSiop (Eur. Bacch. 5). In prose we find instead of dg, only some names of cities in the form Se (?£, cf. the Accidence) : l^iWdv 'EKivaivaSs, 'OXv/iiriaZe. Rem. 3. Transitive verbs compounded with the prepositions Sid and inkp, in their proper local signification, sometimes take besides their object-accusative, the accusative of the name of the place through or over which the motion takes place : 'Xirtpiivf/Kav rbv AevKadiiov indiibv Tag vavg (Thuc. 3, 81). (In Herodotus also Teixog Tcipi^dXKeaBai rrjv iroXiv, Hdt, 1, 163.) b) Likewise with the particle jxa iu assevei'ations : Nai jua tov Aia. Oil fia Ala. (In the poets sometimes oi without fid : Ov, rbv iravnav Bdov Bdiv ■Kpofiov" XKiov. Soph. (Ed. C. 666.) S 29. Verbs denoting an extension, motion, or distance, take the name of (234) the measure in the accusative, so jiyova, am — old, the specification of the age. Yivpoq l%ikavvu Sta Trig AvSiag aradfiovg rptig, Trapaaayyag HKoaL Koi Suo {Xen. An. ], 3, 5). BnaiXevg te koI oi "EXXrivsg Siiaxov aXXjjXoJv wg TpiaKOvra araSia {Xen. An. 1, 2, 4). (EloAAwi' rifiipoiv o86v airixiiv). QpaavjJovXog Wero ra oirXa liaov rpia (TTaBia airb Twv ^povpwv {Xen. Hell. 2, 4, 5 ; took up a position at a distance of — .) Ovirio t'lKomv eVij ytyovwg {Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 1). Rem. In adjectives denoting an extent (long, &c.) the accusative of the mea- sure is not usual in Greek. It says : firJKog ex'^'' Tpiuiv iroSdv (rptlg ■jroSag), ro^pos Tpidv iroSHv t6 /j^koj. § 30. In statements of duration and extent of time {how long), the measure (235) of time is put in the accusative : ''EvravOa Kvpog i/xeivsv rifiipag'TrivTE {ravTriv tjjv r/ju£pav) {Xen. An. 1, 2, 6). Oi rwv llepirhiv £0))j3oi Sl/ca eVj),, a(f ov av ek wai^wv i^sXOwai, KOifiwvrai wepl to ap)(ua {Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 9). rivBuOi fioi /xiKpov xpovov tjjv Siavoiav {in imagina- tion, see § 31) Ev Ti^ diarpif {j^sch. 3, 153). IloXXote koI fuydXaig KaKoiQ KOL trpayfiaai rrjv a;roSi)/xtav iraaav avveixofiriv {Dem. 19, 177. Also TTapa vaaav rrjv awoS., during the whole journey. Am Troiroe rov xpovov, Lys.7,8; throughout the whole time). SttouS)) d/xoiwg Kul vvKTa Kai riftcpav iVrot Trig 6Sov'{Thuc. 7, 77; through the night ' 'Avd in Epic and lyric poetry with the dative, on, upon, not implying motion. § 31.] NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 29 and the day : night and day alike. Nuktoc koi mipag, by night and [§ 30.] by day, ^66'). Rem. The accusative of a denomination of time with an ordinal number denotes how long ago (properly, what time it is now, since the thing happened) : "H Bvyarfjp air

'pl'^raTov rhvov (Soph. Phil. 1301). ' Oiie dridig kutA. to vScltiov livai aXXitiQ re icai TrivSt ti)v &pav -ov Itovq re Kai rrjs riiihae (PI. PAcedr. 229). Herodotus uses tovtov Tbv xpovov quite in place of iv TovTifi Tif XP°^V> '''"■" TOVTOV TOV xP^vov, and vvKTU (Tds vvktoq), instead of VVKTOQ. 30 PART I, CHAP. III. [§ 31. [§31.] b) Adjectives denoting cleverness, skilfulness, or knowledge often take an accusative of the object in which the knowledge or skill is ascribed to a person, but for the most part only a neuter adjective (in the plural) or a pronoun (also Tiyyr\v, aptrriv). 'O iravra (Toog TTOijjTTjc {PI. Thecet. 194). 'Av»)p ayaBbg {Setvog) to. iroXiTiKa, 'E«v Tig (p'g ayadoQ ai)A»)r»)e Eivat tj nXXrjv fivrivovv Te\vriv, jjv firi eariv, KarayeXiocnv {PI. Prot. 323). Ot aTpaTtwrai hriaTrifiovsg fjaav to. TrpogriKOvra ri) lavrwv iKacTTog oTrXiasi {Xen, Cyr. 3, 3,9'). (Also, "0(ra (loi ■)^pr\(sifioi iare, olSa, Xen. An. 2, 5, 23.) Rem. KokJc iraaav KaKiav (PL Rep. 6, 490), with a substantive of the same origin ; as in verbs, J 26. c) In certain cases an accusative is used to denote something external to the subject (a certain extent, range, sphere) to which the predicate refers (as regards). In this manner are used the substantive fdoog {to ifiov fxipog, to (tov ju., etc.) ; some adjectives with the article in the neuter, which then for the most part have quite the significa- tion of adverbs of extent and time ; and the neuter article with a pre- position or an adverb (in like manner forming adverbial expressions). 01 naiBig, to aov fiipog, 6 ti av tv')(ij}(ti, tovto Trpa^outrt {PI. Criton. 45). To AItwXikov Tradog Sia rjjv tiXi|v julpoc ti iyivtro {Thuc. 4, 30; the defeat in JEt.). Ov novov to. fjaydXa, aXXa koI to /iiKpa iruptofiai ai\ airo Qiwv apxtaQaL {Xen. Cyr. 1, 5, 14). Ta {xlv TrapEXflovra {hitherto) v/itig fxlv Kvpov Jjii^jjcrart, KDpoe 8' svKXetig vfjiag iTTOiriatv {Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 23). To Xotwov, to ^v/jnrav, etc. (see The Article, § 14 a. Rem. 2). To kut ifil ovdev kXXd\pei {on my part). To wpiv, etc. {seeib. § 14 b. Rem. 2). 'H -woXig Eipijvrjv ayei ra TTEpi rijv xwpav .{Isocr, Areop. 1). 01 OTpuTriyol anovSag Ejroitio-aiTO to. ;r£pi llvAov {Thuc. 4, 15; on account of P., as regarded matters at P.). d) The accusative Tpoirov is put adverbially, and so likewise o^ov, in certain expressions {as 'manner,' 'way,' in English). Tourov tov TpoTTOv irpa^ag oXou tov irpayfiarog aTraXXa^ofxai {Dem. 30, 23). , (flavro rpon-ov, tTipov rpoiroj/, 8v Tpoirov, etc. Also tIvi rpoTri^, rovTt^ Tw TpoTTi^. See Dative, § 41). Kvpoe ttjv KiXiauav elg KiXiKiav an-o- Tre/xTTH Trjv raxiaTriv 6B6v {Xen. An. 1, 2, 20). Rem. In this manner several adverbial expressions are formed elliptically by- omission of 6l6v, e. g. Trjv raxinTtiv, T^v irpilirriv. The accusative of some par- ticular substantives is used adverbially without an adjective or pronoun annexed : apXV", n)w apxWi "^ «''. TsXoe, to teXos, iripaf, at last, rrpo^aaiv, in pretence, npoiKa, gratis ; diicriv, after the manner of, and x&?iv,for the salee of, have the force ' ^pojTiffrjyj tH jitTBupa {PL ApoL 18), as adjective. § 32— 34.J THE DATIVE. 31 of a preposition with the genitive, thus: iyyciov lixriv irevXnpHaBai (PI. Phced. [§ 31,] 235),'Ti»'oE x^P'"! '■»»' ^oyo" x^P'*" {Pl.'),t\ie\a.tteT also accompanied by a posses- sive pronoun: inriv xapiv, (n)v x^P'"- In the same way Sffov, '6aa (iaov yi, oaa yi) are used as adverbs. e) Of the accusative absolute of a participle {Hov) to denote a cir- § 32. cumstance, see under Participles, § 182. The accusative is put elliptically in the phrase ;ui) fioi — , come not to me with — , don't talk to me of — .- juj{ fioi Trp6jTpi fxovov yiy tvrifitBa, aXXa icai ry iruTpiSi {Dem, 18,205). 'Avd'y/crj fioi airuvat. OOovoc fisyiarov kukov Toiiq iyovaiv avTov {Isocr. Euag. 6). Mtfljj ^vka^iv cnrpeTriaTaTov {PI. Rep. 3, 398). SwKparTie a^toc Oavarov lori ry iroXii {Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 1 ; has deserved death from the city, owes death as his deserts to the city). Ola tKaara IfioX tjtaivsTai, Toiavra Koi iariv Ifioi ' The Greek dative, therefore, corresponds not only with the Latin dative, but also, to a great extent, with the Latin ablative. 32 PART I. CHAP. IV. [§ 35. [§34.] (PI. Tketet. 152). "Aofiog toc dgi,opag IfioX Xoyt^trat (Dem. 27, 46; debits the tasees to me as eocpenditure). (Dat. commodi et incom- modi.) Rem. 1 . Sometimes the dative has directly the meaning in honour of, to the ad- vantage of: areipavovaBai Ttp 6tif (Xen. Ages. 2, IS), Xayxavnv tov icX^pow (to claim the i'3ieritance') ryyvvaiiei (jscB. 3,32, =:vvip rrjg yvvatKOC, in behalf of ; for ; ib.30). Rem. 2. Such a dative is sometimes, in speaking of something that one has, or needs, or must bring about, immediately attached to a substantive, to denote for whom it is had or wanted, etc. : XptindTwv 'Apiaro^dvu irpoakStt vpbe t6v ftiaBiv Toie wiXTatTTois (Lt/s. 19, 22). ''EuTrdvil^ov rpoijifiQ role voWdig (Thuc. 4, 6). UtiaavSpog ijpwro iva cKaffTov, ijvnva iXiriSa txei amriipiag ry woXtt (Thuc. 8, 53). § 35. a) The dative stands with transitive verbs, which either usually (like (242) SiSfujut), or in certain phrases (e. g. n-oXt/xov avaipeiaOai, to declare war), denote an action in reference to another person or thing besides the proper object, as object of reference (both with the active and with the passive), e. g. fxiadov SiBovai {virKT^viiaOai, rarrstv) Totg aTpariwraig, Siavifiuv XprifiaTa rote TroXiraig, a(jtXoiQ, lirt- TpiiTEtv rd TTpdyfiara roTe ifiirupoTaTOiQ, ^(jprifiaTa ttoSXoIq bi^i'iKuv, (ioridtiav ■Kifiiruv Tiv'i, Xiytiv [SiriyeitTOai, ayyiXXsiv) rivl ra imrpay- fiiva, ovEiSi'^Eiv Tivi ^iiXiav, haXXarTuv riva rivi [to reconcile a per- son with, to, some one), SiKrjv Xay\avuv tivi {to commence a law-suit against a person), \tipag avixuv Bt.^. BoijOeia kiri/i^Ori BotuTolg. 'H yiycvr]fiivri fia.-)(r\ rijJ ^aaiXu ayyeXXiTiii. (243) b) Such a reference to something else besides the proper object is often denoted by the composition of the verb with one of the pre- positions avri, iv, tiri, tteoi, Trpog, avv, vtro. For example, avTiraTTstv TovQ 'nrtrtac roig woXafiioig, ffxjddXXiLv tivX 'ipwra, EfiTroiEiv {kvepya- ZsuOai, tfifvuv) hrSvfiiav ry '4'^XV> eYX^'P'^^'" '"'"^ ''" ""P^TA""''';^ [ivTpetpsiv, ivTpaftig t^ fiamXeiq), £i/opav KaKOvoiav Tiva Ttvi, tTraynv air'iav ipivSri rivi, riXog iTTiduvai Trpdyfiari, iTri(j>epeiv oirXa aXXfiXoig, iiriariXXeiv Tivi ti, kiriTaTTSiv (popov Toig avpfjia.\oig, Trspiaimiv Ty TToXti ala-xyvriv {ti/itiv, ovstSog, So^av alcTXpdv) , jrcpiTiOivai tivi cTi^avov (aTifiiav), inptlidXXsadai Toig iroXccTiv IjOujuara '), TrpoaTiOivai Ti Tf^ v6p, irpoaixuv tov vovv tipeiv Tw (Twfiari Tpotprjv, avviaTavai Tiva oioacrKoXi^, viro^dXXEiv Tivl X070V, vTroTaTTeadat tivi. The reference, however, is denoted by a repetition of the preposition, whenever the conception of place or of a motion is prominent : YlsptOsivai TriXiSia Trepl rijf Ke(j>aXriv [PL Rep. 3, 406). To sv MtX^f iv(^KoSofir)fxsvov ^povptov ' But also TrepipdK\iir9ai r^v vrjaov riix^t, with a wall. § 36.] THE DATIVE. 33 ylnuc. o, 4). (In some cases the usage of the language somewhat varies : this [§ 35.] must be learnt from the Lexicon.) Rem. 1. Transitive compounds vrith Tropa are fond of repeating the preposition. (Also irapa^aXkHv n TfoQ rt.) (napa^tyvui/oi ri Tivi, to mix something with a thing; also simply fiiyvivm rl rti/i.) Rem. 2. An object of reference in the dative may also stand with verbs which govern the genitive, e.g. ajiijiiafiriTiiv tivi roii airov, ivniroulaBai T(f jiacnXtt r^g "PX^Cj l^iradiSovai rivl tS>v ayaBdv, jiiTixuv Tivl tSiv KaKuv, ^.vKKajipdvHV tivi row TTOVOV. Rem. 3. With an inaccuracy, peculiar to themselves, some such verbs in the passive, instead of being predicated of the proper (accusative) object, take for their subject the object of reference, e. g. those which denote transferring and ^ving in charge. The proper object then remains in the accusative, as in the verbs which have a double accusative in the active (§ 25) : Q'i lirifiT^aniikvoi Ti\v ipvKaKfiv (Thuc. 1, 126). 'AXXo n fitiZov kiriTaxSriastTBi Thuc. 1, l40, = hiiXv iirtra%6)7fferai). So in the passive : ctiroTciiveaGai ti)v KtipaXiiv, hicaUadat or hKoirreaQm Ti>(p6a\fu!i of the person to whom this is done. (Ol airoaiarinoTes Toig SaKTvXovs tUv iroSSiv, Xen. An. 4, 5, 12, = iKtivoi, S>v SLjroaiariTraaiv ol SaKTvXoi.^ a) The dative stands as object of reference with intransitive verbs § 36. which denote an action, disposition, of mind, or situation in reference (224) to a person or thing, but, in the view of the Greeks, do not imply a passive attitude on the part of the object, e^ g. irddtcidai rolg apT^ovcTiv, iroXtfiiiv AoKsSaifiovioiQ, tu^EO-flaj toIq OsoIq, ofitXslv roig ayadoXg, anavrav toIq aTriov, iittKovpSi, TiiuapH (poet, dpqyu), cvfil3ovXtvia, vapaivu), vTroTiStjiai, vapaKeXivofiai, Triarevo), anwTa : and those which denote meeting, approaching, following, and communing or companionship : aifavrSi, ivTvyxdvfji, TrXrjtrid^it} ^, aKoXovQw, STTOfiat, dfiiXui, KOLvtovui : lastly, some which do not belong to the foregoing classes, viz. touca (am tike}, SiaXiyojiai (converse with ; eg Xoyovg ipxofiai), evxofiai, XvaireXto, and the impersonals doKei, evfifspet, Trp^n'ctf Trpoff^Kfi, julXei ^. Rem. 1. As in some verbs the mode of viewing the relation wavers between the notion of a mere reference, and that of a transitive working upon the object, ' XotdopS in the active with the accusative. ^ The poetical words TrsXaJo/iat, l/tTreXoSo/iai, irpoaTtiXdZoixai have also the genitive. Active : ireXdl^uv Tivd tivi. ^ Atl jioi (rtvog, I have needof, something is needful to me, Dat. commodi), poetically also ^£4 fxk (and xpri /*«) tivoq. Aa pi, xpv /*£ voiilv (rarely Set /(oj iroiiiv, I must do). D 34 PART I. CHAP. IV. [§ 36. [§ 36.] they occur both with the dative and with the accusative, especially ip'soKa, please, dvapkiTKo), displease (Xviiaivopat, 0tXo^povo5/iai, Ji/ox^w), sometimes with a some- what altered meaning, thus fti/i^o/ioi, blame, with the accusative, /liiKpo/iai rivi ri, cast up something to a person as a reproach, ('XjraKowij' rivi and tivoq.') Rem. 2. In some of these verbs, the reference may also be expressed by a pre- position, e. g;. SiaXkysadm ffpoc Tiva, jroXt^isIj', liaxiiSai jrpSg Tiva, 'iinadai fiiTa, tivoq, avv Tivi, 6.Ko\ovQtiv [itTa. Ttvog. Rem. 3. Some of these verbs may also have an object-accusative, either merely of a neuter pronoun or adjective, e. g. x«p''?o/""j or also of substantives, e. g. iri- (iTivia, entrust. Rem. 4. Occasionally the passive of a verb of this sort also is (less accurately) predicated of an object of reference as its subject, e. g. Oi KspKvpaXoi ois tUoTuie-, iroKifiovvTai iirb KopivBiiav (Thuc. 1, 37, are warred upori). ISijiTtavTiQ oi rriQ XtKiXiag tvoiKoi kiriPovXevoiitBa (Thuc. 4, 61), especially in the participle orinfinitive, for the sake of conciseness : naKapiiSrig Sm aopiav ^SovrjBt'iQ v-xb row 'OSvaaioiQ &7r6\\vTai (Xen. JUem, 4, 2, 33). Kpetrrov ttJTt TrtffTsviuBaL virb rriQ Trarpidog ri diriariiaBai (Xen. Symp. 4, 29). (In Thucydides, even verbs in which the con- struction with the dative rests on the composition (4) : Al sikoiti viqig t&v tlfXo- trovvftffitov, i^opfiovptvai "wi^ apiQfxt^ virb 'AOTjvaUov, tTTSKTrXovv kiroiiiaavTO, 8, 20.) (245) b) The dative is often put in this manner with intransitive verbs, which by composition with one of the prepositions avri, iv, kwi, -rrapd, TTtpl, TTpocj "vv, vTTo, oT with the particle ofiov, come to denote a reference to something else, especially in a figurative sense, e.g. avAxuv Qo hold out agaii}st^, AifTij3\iTreiv ToXg TroXifiiotg, kfi^iveiv Totg ffvvOrjKatg (rotg 'opKoig, Totg SsSoypkvotg^^ kirikvat Toig OTrXlraig, ETriKtltrBai Toig ^tvyovuiv^ k^opfitiv Tt^ \ifikvi, s^rjSeaBai, kirEyyeXdv tlvi (roig KaKoXg Tivog), k-jriarparsiieiv (iTriarpaTtvsadai) roig "EX- Xrjffiv, Trapafikvttv TOtg cvfipdxotg^ TrapaKaBrjcrBai "SoiKpoLTd, TrepiiriTTTSiv tjv^i^op^ C'P^yV^j 'Trepirvyxavtiv Kpiry ayvufiovi, irpouoiKiiv iroTafioXg rcat QaXdaay^ TrpoGrjKeiv Tivi (to be related to a persoii), awiivui, av'Ci}v tivi (avvtXvai, ffvvExtffOai, (TvJ^fvyvvaOat, avar^vai KaKoCg, voat^, irovif}), ffwepyeiv Tivi, avvoiKtXv yvvatRi (avyxai-ptiv Toig evrvxovffiv'), VTOKiiaBai Tip dpxovTi, o/joXoytij', bjioyviaiiovCiv, biiovoiiv tivi. IIoAA iViOTl Tl^ yrippiO-Qi Etc avayKi)v. " k\(piT oiic ivicjTiv Iv T(^ 6vXaK(i> {Arist, PL 763). In this point, however, the individual verbs somewhat vary '. Rem. I. The compounds of verbs of motion with napd, wipi, im-6 are transitive, ' The compounds of rjnat and Kitfiai, even in their literal signification, have, for the most part, the dative without prepositions ; on the other hand, vpoaiptpiaBai vp6g nva nera wpaSriirog, to deal with, hear oneself towards, a person. § 37.] THE DATIVE. 35 and have the accusative (§ 23). (More rarely, anJ chiefly iu poetry, certain [§ 36.] others : Iviarpartviiy Ttva, TrpoairaiZuv Ttva : in Thucydid. irpoffowtiv, wpoff- KadE^6>\oc, lx^P°£> iroXiptog, o/iopof, as substantives are used with the genitive (even in the superlative : oi liceiVov Ixdurrat, Xen. An. 3, 2, 5). , Rem, 2. When it is denoted by o/taio£, iaoQ, 5ropasrX»j<«of, or the adverbs formed from them, that two subjects (or objects) have something equally or similarly, that something in them is equal or alike, the regular construction is, that the subjects are coupled by Kai ('Ofioiav yvupiiv l^u ««' ff"), or by a relative word (iffoE bo-osirtp, Trapaa-XJjiHoc otocjrfp) ; but by a less exact way of putting it, the Greeks often have the second subject (or object) in the dative, as goverued by the adjective (or adverb): 'O/xoiav yvipiiv aoi ix"- ToAs KOKOvg iv jrouiv o/joia TTiiaii Toig rig aWorpiag xivag nrUiovatv {Isocr. Bern. 29). Ov Kai ai Tirru rdg laag TrXijydc ipoi i (Arist. Ban. 636. On the accusative, see § 26, b.). 'Esri- OvpCi 5rapa!rXij(7i(ii£ ffoi {PI. Ph,\rhuc. 4, 101, = aig iyivtro ra IttJ 4.) Rem. 3. (To § 34 — 37.) Sometimes the dative is used even with a substantive, when it is derived from a verb or adjective which has an object of reference in the dative : M^ i^aiiaprijTc vtpi rijv ro5 fltoS doiriv v/iXv (^Pl. Apol. 30). Sififiaxoi iyivoiitSa oiiK Irri KaraSovkaaii rStv "&CKi)vwv Toig 'ABrivaloig (Thuc. 3, 10). T)))/ avTOig o/ioioTriTa Trjg Siayuy^g ati s^ovaiv {PI. ThcBt. 177). "0 Tovrovg Toig vojiovg \vQ)v rovg Tif y^pf |3oijSoii£ Xv/ialvtrat (Dem. 24, 107, usually row yripoig^. § 38. The dative of reference serves in Greek, in some special cases, to denote a certain particular way and manner, and a certain sense, in which the thing predicated takes place for, and in reference to, some person or some thing. (246) a) The dative with u/jlI, inrapx'^! yiyvofiai denotes the person for whom something is or comes to be, i. e. who has it or comes to have it ; Nijtc ovK eictiv rifuv. Toiavra rifitv dg e 'ABtivaiovg iyayilv rriv woKw (Thuc. 8, 24). f) The dative of the personal pronouns, especially of the first (248) person, is added in expressions of surprise and of blame, in demands, expostulations, and the like, to denote a certain participation, and an interest in the person speaking, spoken to, or spoken of : Sw^jooo-uvrjc dpa oil Ssija-Et ■fifuv Tolg vsaviatg ; [PL Rep. 3, 389.) Tourw Travv juoi irpogixtTe tov vovv (Dem. 18, 178). [This dat. is called the Dativiis Ethicus.'] g) Sometimes the dative of the agent stands with passive verbs (250) instead of vtto with the genitive ; but in prose, for the most part, only with the perfect and pluperfect (to denote what one has complete and ready) : "A vttktxvov iroiriusiv ayaQa rifiag, awoTiTtXtaTai o-ot fjSi) {Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 16). Ta trol viwpajniva {Dem. 19, 291). (Tive? av vfxwv SiKaiorepov iram Totg "'EXXtiiri fuaolvro ; Thuc. 3, 64.) As the case which denotes circumstance and appurtenance (Lat, § 39^ ablative), the dative stands, partly by itself, used in difierent ways, (252, partly with the prepositions iv and avv, together with afia (which in ^54) prose is used, for the most part, only in definitions of time, a.p.a ry 'dqi, ctjia T(f aiTv EXE'v tOj 0apj"aK itupaadm (also Travra rpo'TTov, § 30, d), oiSti^i ko KjOttrrwv, oanj) Trpiajivrtpot;.) (MaKpif dpt- (rrof, with the superlative. noXX^ 7rpoiXa;3ov, Thuc. 7, 80, had greatly the advantage.) Rem. But we also find iroXv and oXiyov (ttoXj") f«i?uv), and always (wheniio substantive is added) ri and ovSiv {p.aK\6v ti, oidiv ftaXXoj/). (Tooout-^j SttvoTipog, oa<{) Kai ifjeiliaBai roX/i^, without comparative in the second member : so much worse, as — .) a) Verbs -which denote an affection of the mind, at and because o/§44. something, take this object in the dative : thus 7(So;ua(, xa'ipw, a)(6o- (264) fiai, advfib}, ayaXXofiai, iiraipofiai : "AxBofiai roig napoixjiv, to'iq ytys.- vrifiivoii;., 'ETTaipopivoc V irXovTdj) rj ia\vi t] aXAtj) tij) toiovt(^ (PL Rep. ■ 4, 434). But iiri is also added: 'Eiri ry twv ^ApKoBltov rvxy ovx tJTTOv T(Li» AaKtSatfioviuiv ^(rdtiaav ol 6ri|3a(ot [Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 32). Rem. Some verbs most frequently take M (xnipw), with others it is rare (iirai- po/iai). The dative is also found with aya'jrdv and aripyiiv, e. g. arspytiv ry iavTov Tvxy (PI- Hipp. Maj. 295) ; but Usually the accusative, e. g. aTipyav rh ■Kapovra. We also find ^apiaq (xaXfjrwc) ^iptiv ri, km Tivi. b) The verb xP'^i"'"^ *'*^' ^^^ vo/jtZo), when it has the same mean- (265) ing, govern the dative : ^wfiarotpiXa^i xp'^i"""' fiapfSapoig. Xp^ftai Tivi 0tXtj). Of 'A6r]vaToi ajwai koi Ovaimg diirnatotg Jvojui^ov [Thuc. 2, 38). a) The dative serves to mark the time at which [when] a thing § 45. takes place, when a definite point of time (day, night, month, year), (276) or a festival is assigned (and with Sipq, e. g. xf'ju''^>'oe &pq) : Ty avry 40 PART I. CHAP. V. [§ 46. ( 45.] rinspq {ravry Tiff vvktX) airidavcv. T(^ rpir(j> irsi oikoSe airiirXevaa. Trj {xTTspaiq 6 Kvpoe to aTpaTiv/xa aviiraviv [Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 29). Tote UavaQ^va'ioig, rote ^.lovva'ioiQ, at [the festival of[ the Panathmma, the Dionysia. (T^ vovfiriviq^,raiQ TTojuTraie.) With other words £v is added : 'Ev TOVTlf) T(^ XpOVO^, Iv £KE(V(j) Ti^ Kalpw, Iv Tti^ TTapOVTl, Iv Tl^ TOT£, SOmC- times also with the words above named : Iv rySs r^ i7f«f|oa, sv rt^ Qapyv^iMVi juijvt {Dem. 49, 60). (The omission of iv is very rare_ with words which in themselves do not denote a point of time but an event, e. g. 'Eg rb ■KiUov 'XpxiSaixoQ Ixeivy Ky iajSoXy ov Kari^n, in that invasion, Tkuc. 2, 20.) Rem. On the genitive in notes of time, see f 66. b) To denote the place where a thing takes place, the poets sometimes use the dative without iv, e. g. aypolg Tvyxavav (Soph. PI. 313). 'EreoicXoj jrXfiffraf ri^df IffxEv 'Apyiif xSovi (Eur. SuppL 874), especially of names of cities, e. g. AiaSHvi, MuKjfvais. In prose the name of the city is thus put : Ma,oa0wvi (Mapa- dSivi ital ^aXaiiivi icai nXaraiaiQ, PL Menex. 245), and besides, the adverbial forms derived from the ancient dative plural, in the sense at the place, e. g. 'A0ijvij(t(, UXaTammv ; see the Accidence. ('OXvfnriaaL Kai AeX^oIf, Tkuc. 1, 143.) (So too 'S^riTTol, 'laOfioi, Ilu0oi.) Rem. (To J 39 seqq.) A dative, denoting circumstance or appurtenance, may sometimes be attached to an individual substantive, instead of to the predicate, e. g. 6 yovif TTanjp (Lys. 13, 91) ; sometimes even without the article : 'iTmoQaXriQ Xkyti n-epi riiv vgoyovuiv AvtnSoe ttXovtovs re Kal lir^oTpofiae Kal vUae Jlvdol Kal 'laSiiol TtdpiiriroiQ ri Koi KtKriaiv (PI. Lys. 205). CHAPTER V. Genitive. § 46, The genitive in Greek denotes, in general, a connexion of depend- (279) ence between the person or thing which is named in the genitive, and some other person or thing which is referred to it. The con- nexion is either immediate, between two substantives, one of which is defined by the other ; or it appears in this, that something is referred to some other thing through an action or quality which goes to, is directed at, and exerted towards, or enters into, that other ; or in this, that something is ranged under some other thing as the whole, of which it is the part. Further, the genitive denotes a farting from, and a going out from something, because this supposes a previously existing connexion \ ' This latter sense is not possessed by the Latin genitive, where the ablative is used in this way with prepositions, adjectives, and verbs. The use of the genitive to denote a connexion or hanging together, as the result of an action which aims at § 47, 48.] THE GENITIVE. 41 In the genitive is put with a substantive the name of the per- § 47, son or thing which possesses what the substantive denotes ; the (280) person or thing to which it belongs, and by which therefore it can be denominated and designated (genitive of connexion and posses- sion) : Y«6c Aapelov. K^ttoi 'E7r£KOJ5|Oou. Oi/clrtjc ArifioaOivove. vXa5 TToXttoc. 'SiVyy pafxfia nXarwvog. "Epyov Ilpa^iriXovQ. 'U Twv TToXsfiiwv rpoTTj'). To yivog tuv avdpwvwv. MiaOog TSTvapwit firivwv. 'ApidfjLog irsiraKKrx'Aiwv irwv {PI. Tim. 33; an amount of — ), KXripwatg apx^v. Ai twv vitSv Tifxat {honours which the young enjoy, or which they shew). Al twv kokiov awovalai {badmen's society, intercourse with bad men). ('O rije riavxiag filorog, Eur. Bacch. 388, poetical.) EicaoTOii [tovtwv tuv juaSijfiaTtov] opyavov ri ip"X^^ iKKadaipsTai {PI. Rep. 7, 527. In the case of each). Elval nvog, yiyvsadai nvoe. '0(289) Xd-yoc ArifioaOivovg kariv {is D.s's, vopiZerat, is ascribed to D.). Elpi Trig TToXiwg Kol TWV TO. f3e\Ti(TTa XsyovTwv {Isocr. de Pac. 129. / belong to — ). Eivat twv i-jnTiQtfiivwv {PI. Pol. 307, to be theprey of — , at the mercy of — ). Oi riEjOtrat ttjv 'Acriav tavrtov iroiovvTai {Xen. Ages. 1, 38). {Oi IliXoTrovvriinoi Svo koi stKoai vavg tiHv ^Adrjvaiwv sXa^ov, Thuc. 8, 95, two and twenty ships of the Athenians, Athe- nian ships.) Rem. 1. The usual way of describing the son of such a man, is to put the father's name iu the genitive without wdj : Alapxoc KaWtfiaxov and A. 6 KaXXt/ja'xow. (See the Article, § 13, a. R.) (Tjjj/ S/niic«eiwvos oiix opfs MiXiarixriv i Arist. Eccl. 46, M.the wife of Sm.) Rem. 2. The prepositions Iv and tg (sometimes I?) in the language of common life, and in imitations of it, often stand before a genitive with omission of the governing substantive oUia (also Up6v) : XlEpiicX^f KXeiviav naraSeiievos i" 'Api- ippovoe ivaiScviv {PI. Prot. 320, placed him in A.'s home'). MavQavnv kv KiQapiarov (PI. Theeet. 206, at a dthara playei's). Xlorfpov rh irapd opwpev rjpwv avTwv to. opwpeva ; {PI Rep. 6, 507 ; with what part of ourselves — ?) 'Ev toiovtij) Trjg omag, ottou wXctaraKig 6 StaTTorng o^trai {Xen. Hipp. 4, 1 ; in such apart of the house — ). 01 'A6t|vaTot EV TOVT^) wapaaKSvrig ijwav {Thuc. 2, 17). — Eif roCro tivec avoiag iXriXvBa(riv {Isocr. Pac, 31). Eip roaovTO upaB'iag riKw {PL Apol. 25). 44 PART I. CHAP. V. [§ 51. [§ 50.] Rem. 1. We must note the different positions of the words, when the partitive genitive is governed by a participle with the article which has with it other defini- tions (case, adverbs, etc.) : Ol 'ApxaSmv rifiBTcpoi ovtcc ^vf-lt-a-xoi- (Thuc. 5, 64, those of the Arc. who — ), Ai apiara tSv viwv TrXiovam {Thuc. 1, 48). Ot 5ti/i7rpo6ti/j)j- OkvTtQ tS)v prfT6p(i)v TQv ekttXovi^ (Thuc. 8, 1). Rem. 2. With numbers or words of number (jiovog, bXiyoi) now and then &.tt6, I? are added, especially to denote that which is drawn off from, or remains : "Ayviav iirb rerpaKiaxtXidtv ottXituiv x'-'Xtovg Kai TrevTTjKOvra ry voffqt dTTibXefrev (Thuc. 2, 58), 'Ee rpiwv iv dv tiXo/Jiriv (Soph. Tr. 734, T should have chosen one of three). Rem. 3. Instead of thp neuter singular of an adjective denoting magnitude (voXie, etc.), or a certain part (e. g. ^ixi(Tvg,Xonr6s) with a partitive genitive, in Greek the adjective often takes the gender of the genitive : '0 rijuavg, 6 Xoiirbg rou xpdj/o«. 'E{jKT7i^b)v i^iit) ETT] 'i^ Kal kvivrjKOVTaf TOVTOV Sk rou ^povov TOV irXElffTOV sSoKH tvda'ifXb>v sivai (Iscs. 6, 18). Kvpofi KcCnvoEi iroXXiiv ttiq x^P^S ''Oi£ ' Apftsvioig Iprjiiov Kal apybv ovaav Sid top TroXe/iov (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 2). (Rarefy with other adjectives : T^e ytig ri dpiaTrj, Thuc. 1, 2.) Rem. 4. Sometimes a general subject (or object) is put first, and then instead of the partitive genitive, we have, by way of apposition, a partition with pronouns or words of number (e. g. ot iiiv — ol Ss, etc.) or a limitation (ol ■KoXXoi, partli/ — , partly — , for the most pari) : Ol ry ^tXoffo^t^ fiefifofiEvoi Xkyovait on ol Kvvovtsq avry ol fikv ovdsvbg a^toi, ol Sk "jroXXoi -jroXXutv Kaxiav a^ioi tlciv (PI. Rep. 6, 493). OlSa dbiX^ovQt ol tol icra XaxovTeg b fikv avrutv rapKovvra e'x*'* o Bk tov iravrbg kvSiiTai (Xen. Conv. 4, 35).' UsXoTrovvTjfftot Kai ol Kviifiaxoiy rd Svo fikpTj^ cvk(3aXov kg TTJv 'Aj-TiKrjv (Thuc. 2, 47). Ol kvavrloi rote AaKiSaifiovioig da^ibv fikv Kepag ol MavnvtXg eIxow, Trapd 5" aiiTolg ol ^vfifiaxoi 'ApicdSoiv ri(Tav, iirnra 'Apyiiuiv ot x'^'O* XoydStg (Thuc. 5, 67). Cf. § 5, sKaarog and aXXog aXXo. b) A partitive genitive is also governed by an adverb of place or time, denoting a point in and of the whole : 'ESayyEXXs to'iq iroXEixlotg, rifiag TrapaaKtvaZiadai sfijBaXuv ttov rtjc CKdv(i)v ^wpac {Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 43). OiiK olaQa, OTTOv jrfg u {PL Rep. 3, 403). YlavraXQi) Trig yriQ, ovBafiov 7^e- (Oil /SXetteic, 'lv si KOKoO. Soph. (Ed. R. 413.) "AAXoi aXXy TJje ttoXewc aTTiijWvvTO {Thuc. 2, 4). 01 aXKoi, 6(T0t ivTavQa JfXQov 7]\iKiaQ {PL Rep. 1, 329). Oi avw tov yivovQ {PL Legg. 9, 378, those higher up in the race, i. e. the ancestors), tyyvTaTa yivovg {Isv irtpioiKwi/ (Thuc. 4, S3, Lac. of the class of the Periceci). Especially in this manner is used the genitive of a country (a place) with the name of a single point in it : TlapaXa^ovTiQ "BoitaToiq Kal Ofa>rc£a^ 'AGtjvoXoi kffT^driVcrav riJQ QtaaaXiag ^^t ^dptraXov (7huc. I, 111, to Ph. in 7%.). Ot 'Afljjvatot wpiiitravTo ttjq Xs^povrjaov iv ''EKiovvTi (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 10). (The genitive here has always the article, the governing word never, the place in itself less known being relerred to the well- known country.) c) With the verbs elvai, ylyvsadai, to be, become, one of- — (i. e. to belong to — ), and after all verbs denoting the being in one or another way received into a class, counting or being counted with a class. But with ilvat, jlyvsaOm, and sometimes with other verbs, tie may be prefixed to the genitive, e. g. Kpuiag rCJv rpiaKovra ^v (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 31, one of the thirty tyrants). TJiy 'AXk-juaioviSopv iivai [Dem. 21, 144). 'E^ijv EuKjOar££ twv TptaKOvra jEviadai [Lys. 18, 5). "Eort riov ala-xpwv, juaAXov 8e twv aio-xic^wv roiig ^vfXfia\ovQ (jialvtijOai ttjOO- SiSovTa {Dem. 2, 2. So icm twv XvaiTiXovvTwv, TWV adiKwv, twv KaAdiv, nearly ^ alax^ov, aSiKOv, etc.). But also"E(TTiv ev twv alcrxpwv, Isocr. Arch. 97; eo-ti twv ^avXwv n. Pl.Rep. 10, 603 ; 'iv ti twv alcrxp'i'v ioTiv, Dem. 20, 135. Twv iIq ttjv ttoXiv avjjXwKorwv tjjv ovaiav sit; lyo) (pavijfTOfiai yiytvr]fj.ivog {Isocr. Call. 62). '0 OpatruXof twv Iv "SilKtK'K^ KaTiXiyri Tgiripap\wv [IstS. 7, 5). So'Xwv tuSv ivrct ao^iaruiv hXTjOt} (Isocr. Antid. 235). Tpatl>i ju tiSv 'nrvtitiv imSvjioivTiiiv (.Xen. Cyr. 4, 8, 21). Kai kfie eke riSv ■Ktirtiaiiivwv (PI. Rep. 4, 424). OvSafiov vuiroTt MeiSioc ti3v avyxaipov- Twv i^tirdaBri Tt$ Sr]fiip {Dem. 21, 202). Also : AiVxtvije tiSv kx9p TTorafiov, ovtq to tvpng TiTTapwv irXidpwv {Xen. An. 1, 4, 11. Here also without adjective, as the sub- stantive .n-XiOpov in itself expresses a definite magnitude : nora/xog KiptTog ovofxa, ivpog ■TrXidpov, Xen. An. 1, 4, 4). To Ti/xrifia rije x'"V"e i^aKit%ijg. § 57.] THE GENITIVE. 49 Tov (TKOTToD, aTTTeaBui Ttjc X*'P°?) '■"'' irpayfiaTOQ, imdv/iuv iipr]vr\Q, [§ 56.] EQav ^povrjo-twc, ixerixuv twv ayaObSv, jucraSiSovat rote aWoig rwv ayaOwv, iirtfisXiiaOai twv irpajfiaruyv, apxnv TtSv 'EX\j']Vbiv, iravuv Tiva vppewQ, ahiaadm Tiva tcJii iv ti^ iroXifxt^ irpaxOivrwV) Karayiyvdj- oKiiv (j)vyfiv TivoQ (to Condemn a man ta exile). Rem. 1. In some such verbs the construction is somewhat variable in conse- quence of a different view of the meaning ; for particular instances of this, the Lexicon must be consulted. Some verbs have the genitive in some one special sense, but otherwise have different constructions. Rem. 2. Although the genitive does not denote an object passively recipient of the action, yet verbs which govern a genitive (as principal object, not as secondary definition along with an accusative) are sometimes predicated in the passive of a subject which, in the active, would stand in the genitive : NiKijparog Ipfiv TJjg yvvat- Kig avTtpaTai (Xe»i. Conv. 8, 3). 'AaKtlrai dii ri ri/uiijuevov, o^eXelroi Ik to dri/ia- Zoftivov (^Pl. Sep. 8, 551, 'AfiiKiiv rtvoq). "OariQ apx^Tai virb tuiv )v, fiti aXriBtig !taiv (JPl. Rep. 1, 330). 'la/iriviag Kare\jjti^ia9i] nal a-iroBvtjaKu {Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 36, from sara- i/zq^tSo/xai, deponent middle). a) The genitive is governed by the verbs which involve the con- § 57. ception of attaching to, and adherence to a thing ; viz. such as mean to seize or lay hold by or upon, to hold to, catch at, get to (hit), aim at, and be studious of, crave, be in need of, lay claim to, be or make par- taker of, fill with, be full of and rich in, make a beginning of': thus, \afil3dvoiiai (in the middle), iirCKajx^avoixai, dvri\aju/3di/o/xai, avXXafi^avoiiai, ixo/iat, ivTexofiai (also figuratively, e. g. iiriXan^avoiiai tQv vo/iov, lay hold upon and Jind fault with, T&. To^Tiav Ixoftiva, what hangs together with these and borders thereon) ', aVro/jai, KaScmroiiai, i^avu, 9iyyavii>, — dpiyofiat, aroxaZoitai, Tvyxavu) (hit — attain, get), E^ucvov/iaf, kKiKvovfiai (Kupw), — EiriSu/iu, spw', lipieiiai, yXixoiiai (Si^pS, thirst after, IXtufepi'ac), — Sii (jioi, I need), lio/iai (rivSg, of a person : / beg of some one), irpogSsofsat (xPV^*^^ ^» eWhtth (fioi, I have lack of), — dvmroiovnai (tt)q apx^Q tivi, contest the government tvith some one), fierairoiovftai, dn^iQfSrjTto (rivog tivi), irpogrjKu (jxoi rriQ dpx^lS< I have a right to, have to do with — ), /iitexi^, jiiTaXayxavw, fitTaXa/x- ^dvbj, fiSTiffTi (rivog ftot), fieTaSiStofii*, Koivu}vto (rtvog Ttvt), trvvaipo^ai (rivi.TOV Kiv- ' The actives Xa/i^dvai, take (not talce by), e^'^. bold, have, govern the accusative. ' But ipiX(S Tiva, as it does not express desire. ^ IloXXou Skuj, oXiyov Siu>, I am far from — , within a Utile of — , 6X1701; Sii, it wants little of, or but that — . Tpiaeoirrov irog ivbe Skov, not SUvTOg, i. e. the twe7tty-ninth year; dvoiv dkovrce TuvrijKOVTa dvlpsg, forty-eight men. ('Oicni diroSsovTig rpiaKoaioi, Thuc. 4, 38 ; bKTbi as genitive.) ('OXiyow, fuicpov without hi, adverbially : within a little, almost, nearly.) ■* Merexiii, litTaXaftfidvu jikpoe, fiiTtdTi fioi iiipog, as the genitive denotes the whole, of which the person has part. Aayxavia rt, obtain by lot ; in the poets also rivoi. E 50 PART I. CHAP. V. [§ 58. [§57.] Svvov)^,'K\tipovonS) (rije ovaiag), aTroXavia'', yivo/iai (/itsXirOf, iiaBtifiaTOg, ytiii) Toig (259) TcdihaQ aluaTog), £^0opoS^at, 6iyv vojiijxmv, Thuc. 1, 132), l^itrnjjUi (rivd tov (ppovtiv, ISicrra/^ai Trig apx^o)' ieXwd) (rivd diropiag). Where the local notionyrom, ou^, is prominent, we have (both in these compounds, and in other verbs) dvo or iS,, e*. g. 'H i/vxi) dvb ' TOV aiifiarog xuipiZtrai. At oxdai rpia irXkQpa dirb tov Trora/joB &TTtXxov (Xen. An. 4, 35). 'AiraXXdrrtiv nvd ix iroviav. ■ (^VXtvBtpovv, dvaXXdrruv rivd dirb MriSiav,. of persons.) § 58. ^) Further, the genitive is governed by the verbs which denote (291) being careful or neglectful of, mindful or forgetful of (the conception being, tliat the mind is directed to something), as iinittXovfiaL, /ikXa jiot, fiiTajiiXu fioL (it repents me of), (jipovriZu, KriSoiiai, evrpsTrofjai (have a care of, regardfor), TrpovoHy irpoopw, dfXEXo}, bXiyiapiS, — ^kfivtjfiat, liripifivrjiiai, Xav9dvofjiai, kirtXavBdvofiai, dva- liinvijmiii (nvd nvog), sometimes kvBvfioviiai (usually with the accusative), and the verb wu^difjtai {Tritpw), attempt. ' Also avvalpofiai tov kivSvvov, share the danger. Also diroXavtji dyaQov {tfXavpov) ri Tivog. ' " h.pXo\iai diTo Tivog, begin with, at something. * But d, hear to (e. g. TiSv SuprivMv), difterent from UKovia rtvoe, hear from a person, f 60. 'Akovid Tivog SiaXiyofisvov, I hear some one speaking. b) Likewise the verbs which signify to be leader and ruler of, as «PXW, ^yov/iat, KpariS, PatTiXcvoi, StairoCio, irpoaraTiS, rvpavvtvu), HTparriyiS, Siyiiiovtvw, and the verb okouw (kXv&>) in the signification obey (and avjjKou- • OT&J) '. Rem. 'Eyov/iai j-ivi, am leader to a person, show him the way, icparu riva, over- come a person (/la^y). In the poets, the verbs of ruling have also the dative. As uKovia, so i-itaicovu occurs with the genitive (usually with the dative). a) The genitive stands with various verbs which are compounded with § 59. a preposition governing the genitive, as the object of the relation denoted by the preposition, either alone, or with an object-accusative; especially (besides the verbs with airo and i?, § 57 b, R.) those compounds with Kara which denote an action directed to, or against a person, e. g. Kwra- yc\(S, Karafpovd, Kara^oiS (jiav arparriyiSv, cry out against the generals, in accusation or complaint), KaravrXiS (ycX&ira rivog), /caraxlo), Karairpoi^oftai, Kara^evSonai, KaBv^pi^ia. In those which denote accusation and condemnation {Karriyopw, kutu- yiyvdakia), KUTaSiKaZb), KaTaxpivit), Karaipi)0(^ojuai), the offence or the punishment stands as object in the accusative : Karj)7op£ri> aSiKiav, fiwpiav rtvoe (literally, to charge injustice against a person), so that the Greek construction is often the converse of the English. Orav row Karayvwr^ ItpoavXiav rj kAottjjv, ov Trpoc to /xsysOog 5)v av Xa^wai, Trjv iifuiipiav TToiiiaOs, aXX' o/xoiajg uTravriov davoTOv KaTaKpivire [Isocr. in Loch. 6). KaTa\pTi(j}iZe(rOai SctXiav, Oavarov tivoq). In the passive : Td /lov i^EvSij KUTTiyoprifjLiva {PL Apol. 18). 'O KaTS\pri(j>iov, KXoirqs), lirl^Ei^ii {rivl fivov), £iKt]V Xayxavb) (or simply Xayxdvb)), SiKd^o[iai {rivl K\7ipov, go to law with a person because of an inheritance), ^liym, oKwKOjiai, b^Xwsaviii {dae^eiaQ). (^AiroXvw, dfitjui, Tiva rrjg airias, § 57, b *.) Rem. 1. With some of these verbs t,\\e name of the punishment also stands in the genitive : 'Yjrayoi rivil Bavdrov. Kplvo/iai Bavdrov {am upon my trial for life and death, but also icipl Bavdrov, Xen. Hell, 5, 5, 25). {TifjuS tivi ti2v iaxdriitv. lijiaTai fioi b Kar^yopog Bavdrov, lays the punishment at, demands that death be the punishment,) ! , ' In like manner avixo/""' rivog itoiovvroe ri, put up with, tolerate that (prop, when) a person does so and so, . Hence with gen. alone, dvkxofiaL nvoc * The conception on which the genitive rests, seems to be either that of a bringing under a certain notion (on account of, under the head of), or, of a direction to something (that to which the charge comes). § 62, 63.] THE GENITIVE. 53 Rem. 2. On the verbs compounded with Kara, see § 59, a. 'OpXiasavio stands [§ 61.] also with the accusative of the things one is accounted guilty of, and of the punishment : 'Q^X^koo-i ftox^ifpiav Bat aSmav {PL Apol. 89), b(p\uv xtXiaj Spaxnae, d^XiXv yiXiora. ('Ey/caXtlw rivi aSuciav.^ b) With some verbs and phrases denoting to praise or count happy, to compassionate or take revenge for, the object on account of which one is praised or pitied, or revenge is taken, stands in the genitive : EwSat/iovi'^o) o-E Toxi rpoirov [PI, Crit. 43). NiJv i^iari AaKESatfioviovg TravTwv, wv TmrotriKaaiv rifMac, rifxiopriaaadai {Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 19) ; so with dyaiiai, (vdaifiovO^o), /ia«:api?w, ?i)\(2, oiKTEipw, anivo/iai, rifiiapovnai. (With an adjective : EiJaiftuv not avtip ifaiviTo tov rpovov, PI. Phced. 58.) Rem. 1. Occasionally some other verbs of kindred meaning are thus used, e.g. ffuyyiyviSo-KM rivi r^g i-iriBv/tiaQ {PI. Euthyd. 306 ; as n/jupoSjuoi, otherwise cruyyty- viatTKHv ry kTriOvfii^ Tivog). AaKeSaiiidvioi ^pyiZovTO 07}^aioig r^s &VTi\7j^sio£ Trjg TOV ' AiroWuivoQ SiKarrie {Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 5). The poets use this genitive with alt verbs which denote praise, blame, or anger at something, e. g. Trarpi /iijvio-ae 0oVou {Soph. Ant. 1177). Verbs of wondering are also found with a single genitive of the person wondered at : 6av/ia^(u tUv vTrkp t^s ISiag WSijc aTroBvriaKiiv i6c\6vTuv, iiirip dk r^c KotviJQ fit) rijv avT7)v yvb)ijir}v £;^6vrwv {Isocr. Archid. 93). Rem. 2. In the same manner the genitive is used in crying out at something, with an adjective, an interjection, or alone : 'S.xtrXla ToKfiris {Eur. Ale. 741). *£5 TOV avdpog {Xen. Cyr. 2, \. 39). Tqg riiyyiq, rh ^ftk vvv Ssvpo KKtjQkvra rux"" {Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 3, what a misfortune, that I — ). The genitive stands (as possessive) with the adjectives which denote § 62. belonging to, or the contrary, viz. oIkcXos, iSiog, Up6s {consecrated to a god), Koiwoe, (28ii f.) aX^o^plos. Ta Twv Tr/v TToXiv oIkovvtmv oiKtXa riov KoXlbg jiaaiXiuovTiov tariv {Isocr. ad Nic. 21). 'H iroXic airavrmv tmv TToXiTsvonivwv koivt) icrriv {Andoc. 3, 1). 'lEpop 6 x^pog r^e 'Ajor£;ut8oc {^e». An. 5, 3, 13). Rem. OiKHoQ, in the sense inclined and appropriate to, and dWorpiof, unfavorable to, alienated from, have the dative : "H 9aiT0£ tote Aaxtdatiioviois niv oUeia, riiiXv S" aXKorpia riv {Dem. 20, 61). Kotvo's has more frequently the dative (koivAv iraatv, Koivhg 6 dyil)v knot ts Kal (7ot). The genitive stands, as objective genitive, with adjectives denoting a § 63. property which refers to a certain object (transitive adjectives), viz. : a) With the adjectives denoting full of, deficient in, needy, unpar- (268, ticipant of, void, or free from (cf. § 57, the genitive with the corre- ^ \ sponding verbs), e.g. To KotAn t^c yrje uSaroe e/ittXeo lariv (PI. Pheed. 110).' Uoktg fiearr) ifiTTopoiv Koi kivwv {Isocr. Pac. 21). "Eprifioi av/x- ljia\wv idfiiv. Ilwe av ^«oe "") o '^'^^ icaXwv kui ayaOiov afiotpog; aii/iaroe). 54 PART I. CHAP. V. [§ 63. [§63.] Rem. 1. To an adjective formed from a substantive with d privalivum, and expressing a notion complete in itself without the addition of an object, the Greeks sometimes annex for more exact definition the genitive of a kindred substantive, so that the adjective expresses no more than the general notion bereft of, free from, e.g. airaiQ dppsv(ov vaiSav {Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 2), an/iof Traffjjg ri/i^c {PI- Legg. 6, 774, also TovTuiv ariftoi, Andoc. 1, 75, deprived of this honour), dSuipoTarog xpfl/tarajv (^Thuc. 2, 63, uncorrupted by), clQSioq ttiq ^CKiirirov dvvaaTtlag {Dem. 18, 270, free from, unhurt by). But especially in the poets, e. g. ccviivejioQ jrdvTuv x"-l''Ov'uvTai {Thuc. 6, 33), avTjKOog Tov wavrtov riSiv dg tov jxhWovra xpovov row /3io« ippovHZiiv (Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 34). Rem. 2. Of the genitive with adjectives which denote something corresponding with a thing, see the dative, § 37, R. I . The genitive stands with the comparative of adjectives and adverbs, to § 64. denote the second member of the comparison {KaXXiwv AXki^ioSov, ojust- (271) vov ZrjvToJv aXXwv), in the same signification with the adjectives which denote double of, twice as great, and the hke ( — irXamoQ, — ttXoSc), and sometimes with aXAoe (see comparative, § 91); further, with some verbs derived from a comparative and expressing a comparison, together with one or two others, which, without being so derived, have a similar signification, as nXebviKra (rHv IxBpdv), nuoviKra, t'laaiS/jiai, (t(3v ijriOvfttiSv^, iXaaaovitai, varepio and woTcpiju (rrjs fi&xrii), — irtpiyiyvo/iai, irepUini (tivoq ?rX^Sf«, ao^iif), XiiTro/iai (ttXtjAei ifi,i3v), d7roXci7ro/ia( (am left behind, fall short of, TTJe aXriQuae). a) The genitSve serves to denote the price at which a thing is S 65. bought, sold, exchanged, given in pledge, for which it is done, or at (258) which it is set : IIoXXwv ■^(prifia.Tisiv (ttoXXoC) wviiadai ti (irplaaOai, KTaadaifTTuiXaiv, aTTOoiSoadni). Ao^a X/orjiudrwv ovk wvrirri {Isocr. adNic. 32.) Kai T^c i/^X^f O.V TovTo Trpiaifir]v. OhStfjuag j(apiToq ohW wtju- \eiag avraXXa^aitrt^c av tj^v sip touc "EXXjjvae ivvoiav (Dem. 6, 10). 'YiroTiOivai {viroKiiadm) ttevtejuvwi'. Iloaov Eurjvoe SiBd(7Kei ; {PL Apol. 20.) MiaQov {for pay) Tt^oicparrje vojuowc ii^^ipu {Dem. 24, 66). Xpi);uarwv iTrdcovpEiv {PL Rep. 9, ^75, for, money). 01 t^c irap" rinipav y(apiTog to fiiyiara rije irdXtwc aflroXwXtKorec {Dem. 8, 70). Ta rwv £v Kol KaKbJc iTOiiiv Svvafisvwv Swpa fxdZovog rifiwvTm oi Xafi^avovTic V rwv aXXaiv {Xen. Cyr. 2, 11, 13). nXoia 'Uprifia.Tbiv TSTifirifiiva {Thuc. 4, 26). Rem. notov/tai ri (tivol) iripi iroWov (vXclovog, 6\iyov). With AWaTTo/tat, avTaWdrTo/iai the preposition avri is also added. b) In the genitive is also set that for which pay is demanded or given : SwBpaTqj ovSsva Ti)s avvovaiag cipyvpiov tTrparrero (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 1 1). a) The genitive serves to denote the time within which, or at a § 66. certain point of which, something takes place (with partitive eoncep- (276) tion), therefore partly in specifying a natural undefi^ned time, or a time often recurring (as e. g. vvkto?, at or hy night, r^p rtfiipaq, by day =: per diem) ; partly in specifying the definite period of time in the course of which something takes place (e. g. rtyv uhrox) depovg, in the 56 PART I. CHAP. V. [§ 67. [§ <*c.] same summer, tije liriovar\Q rinipag, in the course of the following day) ; joartly in specifying the time within which something takes place, or in the course of which something has not taken place (does not take place) : Afi'Xjjc cKpiKovTo ot"EXA?)VEc fie tuq Kiofiag [Xen. An. 3, 3, 11). "En jdadiog opOpov (PI.) SwKpaDje to aurb IfiaTiov rtfKpUaTO Oipovg ra KOI XEtjuwvoc {Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 2). (More rarely kv 9ipa, in the poets also simply ekfti^ AapEtKOV tKOoroc Qiau TOV iit\vOQ Vfliov {Xen. An. 7, 6,7 ; also TOV firjvoQ iKciaTov). — Toil airov Bipovg" Ayvaiv Koi KXEOTTOjuTroe euTpdrivaav iiri XaXKiSiag tovq etti GpaKrje {Thuc. 2, 58). 'ETrpa;(0i) Tavra 'EXa^j)/3oXHJVoe jUijvb? etti Geo^iXou apxovTOQ {Dem, 37, 6). AjjXia {the Delos festival) ^v hiivov tov firivog {Xen. Mem, 4, 8, 2). 01 rmiTspoi wpoyovoi Trig avrije rifxipag iirvdovro n Triv atropaaiv Trjv Twv jiapfiapwv Kat lj3oi7&?)(rav etii Toiig opovg Trig xwpag Kai fxaxv viki)- aavTsg Tpoiratov iaTritrav tuv iroXtfiiwv {Isocr. Paneg. 87). — TvXiirwog 'i\tyiv, El |3ouXovrat k^iivai oi 'AOrivdiot ek Trig ShceXioc jte'vte fifxtptLv, IVoijuoe ilvai airivSiadai {Thuc. 7, 3). UpogBTaxOr) NtKO/iai((i) TiTTapwv fxrivwv avaypaipai Toiig vofiovg Tovg 'S^oXiavog {Lys. 30, 2). IloXXwv ETwv ^AyaQwv evOoSe ovk ejtiSeSjjjujjkei' {PI. Conv. \72). Ovrriii drj TToXXow xP'^vov TovTov ridiovi olvtf) ETTETi/i^ov {XcH. An. 1, 9, 25). Rem. 1. T^c aiir^f ijjjlpae, i« Me course of the same day, yet on the same day, on one and the same day, ry airy riiikfxf (§ 45), the same day, often with small differ- ence. ToJ avTov 9spovg, iv Tif avrif 9spei (Thuc. 4, 133). Toii XoiiroB, in future (oi I3\d}l/0fiev tov Xoiirov eKot^Ttg rd Updv, Thuc. 4, 98) and rb \ot7r6v. Rem. 2. 7%e time in the progress of which is also denoted by the dative with iv : *Ev TiavapcLKOVTa ^dXtara rjittpaig"Ayvtijv ^t^towc Kat irevriiKovTa oxXirag ry vdfft^ A.7rit)X£(Ttv (Thuc. 2, 58). 'Ev rpiffiv jj/^tpaic Kai Tocravraig vv^l SiaKoaia Kai %iXia ardSia ol AaKtSaiii6vtoi SiijXdov (Isocr. Paneg. 187) ^. (277) b) The genitive of a substantive (or word used substantively) and a participle serves to denote the time (and the circumstance), and indi- cates that something goes on while the subject is doing the thing, or is in the situation, denoted by the participle : Kvpov ^aatXivovrog, oTpaTriyovvTog, in the reign, under the command, of Cyrus. See Par- ticiples, § 181. § 67. a) The general (possessive) genitive relation may be denoted in Greek alike by the possessive pronouns and by the genitive of the personal pronouns: ra fifikspa orrXa, to. ottXo rifiwv. A possessive pronoun may have a genitive standing in apposition to it, especially that of avTog : 'Efiog avToxi {avrrig), ri/xiTcpog avTwv, my own, our own. ' AaKtSaiiioviiov jiairiKtiig Ivrbg rpiSiv It&v i^dXtTO t^v A.px'^" (Isocr. Euag. 64, in less than — ). § 68.] PREPOSITIONS. 57 ElSov Tr\v arjv avBpiav Koi fKjaXotppoavvriv, ava^aivovrog Im rov OKpi- [§ ^'l /3avTa {on. the stage) jueto twv vTroKoirwv {PL Conv. 194), b) The objective genitive relation is sometimes denoted by a pos- sessive pronoun : Eiivoj^ epw ry T(^ tiju£7Ep({i TroAEjUjja-Etoua-tv (TAmc. 1, 33) '. CHAPTER VI. Appendix to the doctrine of Cases : Of the Prepositions, e^ecially such as govern several cases. The prepositions which govern more than one case, are partial to the s 68. accusative (a case in itself not conveying the notion of any particular relation), when they denote a motion to, along, or over any thing ; or when they have a figurative meaning derived from this (of a relation which is neither local nor corporeal) ; sometimes even (e. g. Sta and Kara), when the thought of a local relation altogether disappears in the figurative meaning. The dative they take in the signification on, at, by : the genitive, when they call forth the notion either of a going out from, or of a connexion with, or of an entering into (e. g. furd, Sia), or of a part (a point) of the whole (e.g. iiri, upon). Rem. The different construction, and the difference of meaning therewith connected, results — apart from the consideration of the way in which it is influenced by the notion of rest or of motion involved in the relation — from the circumstance, that some prepositions in themselves originally denote an undefined relation capable of being put in various ways ; which relation is specifically deter- mined by the verb and the governing word, e. g. kvi, by and upon, but especially ■jtapa and jrpos of a relation beside, and in the direction from something. Jn the figurative usage of the prepositions, the original signification, from which that usage is derived, is in many instances not so easy to discover. The particulars of these figurative senses in the several constructions must be learnt from the Lexicon ; here, only the primary distinctions are assigned, together with some • Of the vocative, we have only to remark, that in prose it has <5 before it, with very rare exceptions where there is a forcible brevity in the expression : "AvSptg, hcnrXtiv fiiv, iv8a fiovXoittOa, 'Apiorap^oc oSs rpi^peig £%(ov kuXvei (^Xen. An. 7, 3, 3) ; in the poets u is very often omitted. An adjective is put between Hi and the sub- stantive, when it is emphatic (w KoXi sral) ; otherwise it is put after it (ai Uparapxi 0iX£, PI. Phil. 53), and always in customary forms of address, as w avSpsg 'AQrjvaXoi. Instead of the vocative the poets sometimes put the nominative (Wffrijvoj;, ivri j-oB ; Soph. (E. R. 1 155). In prose only with ovtoq, thisperson here, which is also used in the sense ho, there! you there! An adjective or participle may be annexed as apposition in the nominative with the article : 'S.i Si, 6 dpxinv tSv ^tti raif icajuqXois 6.vSpS}v (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 33). ('Q ''Xtsratiira koX ol aXXoi ol irapovrii, Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 17.) 58 PART I. CHAP. vr. [§ 69, 70. [§ 68.] examples of the manner in which the more special and less proper applications are deduced from the primary senses. In some instances, the senses of two construc- tions border closely upon one another, and the construction varies in different authors. From the Lexicon and by practice it must also be learnt, how, even in prepositions governing only one case, the Greeks apprehended this or that operation or condition under a different view of the relation in space from that which lies at the foundation of our constructions : e. g. naxi^^o-tt Brjpiviiv aer along something (of dif- fusion or expansion over, or of abiding somewhere in), in, upon, at, over against : Miya irivOog ^v Kara to Aokwvikov orparEUjua {Xen. Hell. 4, 5, 10). OiiK Tiv KOTO TToAtv {PI. Thecst. 142; in town). Kara MaXEav, directly over against. Oi Kara raiJTa oiKoilvTEe {An. Xen, 7, 5, 13 ; here-abouts, in these parts). KaTayr\v,KaTaQaXaaaav. Oftime:Kara Tovg 'HjoaKXEi'Sae, ot koO' 17/iae, Kar' dpr]vt\v, in time of peace, b) ac- cording to, agreeably with, after — in proportion or relation to, and corir- cerning (of that which belongs to something and points to it), — after the manner of, answering to, — wise (of the sort or manner denoted by the substantive, especially in distribution, where a certain number recurs continually) : Kara rovg vofiovg l,r\v {PL Prot. 326). KaTu vovv ifio\ TO. Trpayixara yiyovev. Kara GovKuStSjiv, Kara tov aov Xoyov. nXEifel rj Kara to rifA.iTtpov TrXiidog. Karo Trjv xpdav KaXa TavTa Xiyio {PI. Gorg. 474.) Ta Kara Uavaav'iav {the affair of P., the account concerning him). Karo to aCofia, as to or in the body. Ov Kara TovTovg prjTwp dfii {PI. Apol. 17, in their manner, after their § 71 — 73.] PREPOSITIONS. 59 measure). — 'Kara iroXeto city-wise, city by city, each city by &eZj^[§70.] Ka9' iva (koO' iva twv 'EAXjjvojv, Dem., the Greeks, man by man), kut oXiyovQ. c) on account of, for (of cause and purpose) : 01 npoyovoi rifitov Trjv irpo%eviav vfiHv Kara ri tyKXriiMi uTTuirov [Thuc. 6, 89). 'A^iy- fiivoi Kara \prifidT(i)v :ropov [Xen.Hell. 5, 1, 7, with intent to get, — -for). ' Ava^aiviiv Kara diav row X'^P'"" {Thuc. 5, 7, to get a view of — ; for a view of — ). 2. With the genitive : a) down upon or over, also under : Kara rije TTETpaC) KOTO tJiq KE^aXijc, fivpiag Kara yijc opyviag ycvicrOai [Xen. An. 7, 1, 30). b) against, upon, of (in expressions denoting a complaint against or a sentence upon, or generally something said of a person). Mr)vv£iv KOTO Tivoe {Thuc. 6, 60). Aiyb) oh icafl' airavTwv, aXXa koto. Twv Ivo^wv ToTg ilprjfiivoig ovtwv (Isocr. ad Nic. 47). Me^'"''''"' iyKtofuov Kara tiov 'Adrtvaiwii. "Q^TTip Xiytrai Kara riov fisfivriiiivwv {PI. Phced. 81, in the case of). 'Xirip. 1. With the accusative: over, above (of exceeding and sur- § 71. passing) : virip rpiaKOvra etj), fuyidu koi pwfJ-y WTrcp roiig iv ry vJ)t Trdvrae slvai {PI. Rep. 6, 488), vTrsp avdpojirov (ppovslv. (Rarelj' heyond, to denote distance : iriZy ^aSi^dv virkp t&s niXac sai ^loKsag (Dem. 6, 36 ; to beyond). Poetically and in Herodotus, over, so that the goal lies on the further side : pmrtiv Ti virip Tov Sojiov, over the house, to the other side of it. 2. With the genitive : a) over, above (denoting the where) : 'O wrip Trig KMfxrig yri\oi to. tKKaihBKa eVjj yeyovwg. 2. With the dative : a) on, with, or in a thing about me (d/t^i kX&Sois e?e(t6oi, with boughs about me, merely poetical, b) about, for, of: (po^iiadai afi^i yvvaiKi, poetical, and in Herodotus. 3. With the genitive : about, around (rare), of, poetical. ('H S'lKti ii afiifi tov TTarpoc, Xen. Cyr. iii. 1, 8.) 'Etti. 1. With the accusative : a) upon (Lat. in with accusative) : § 73. avaf5aivciv ava tTTTrov. b) to (towards, to fetch something), against (persons) : Uvai kirl Tag rwv TrXovaiwv dvpag, Karacju-Oytiv etti Xo^ov (etti Se^m KtiaOai), KaXblaOai etti Bsittvov, ayuv Tiva hn to icaXa KayaOa, livai etti irxip, e^' wSwp, etti ^vXa rag vavg wifiirciv ttoj, avv- 60 PART. I. CHAP. VI. [§ 73. i 73.] iaraaBai lirX tovq ap)(Eiv mix^tpovvrag {Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 3). Opaavfia^og ^K£v iff rifjiag wg ^MpTraaofXivog {PI. Rep. 1, 336). M}]xavaadai tl siri Ttva. (QE^uKEvai sttI ti, to be made for something.) c) over (of expan- sion in space and time) : iiii rEca-apaKOvra ara^ia StriKCiv, tin irauav EvpwTrriv Kol 'Atriav iXXoyifiog. 01 'AflijvaToi fSfj'ovv Trjv jriv tm Suo Vfiipag, Thuc. 2, 25, for two days, for the space of. ('Etti StKa eVij airo/itarBovv ti, Thuc. 3, 68, to let for ten years.) ('Etti ttXeov, iirl fiuZov, adverbially, in greater extent; kirl ttov, Thuc. 5, 68, on the whole, on the average.) 2. With the dative : a) on, by, beside (of place and of things) : oiKttv ETTI r^ BaXaTT^, ilvai ettI raig irvXaiQ, fitveiv £7i;i t({» aXti^ET, ot ETTi raTc juiixavaTe (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 28, the people with the engines). b) (more rarely in prose) on (Led,, in with abl.) : keijuevoc iwl ry TTvpq {PI. Rep. 10, 614), aXtoTTEKtSae ETTi rate Ks^aXale (j)opehi {Xen. An. 7, 4, 4). c) at, against: roKa riralveiv ini rivi, poetically and Ionic, d) besides, in addition to, after (of accompaniment and im- mediate sequence) : etti ti^ atrt^ oxpov haOhiv, apyvpiov txetv etti ry yvvaiKi {IstB. 3, 28, to get money with his wife, his wife and money besides). 'Av^cttij ett' avT(^ ^spavXaQ {Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 7). 'H etti ry wkti, y i^riXOov, rifxipa {Xen. Hell. 4, 4. 9). 0( etti waut, the last. ,e) upon, on account of, for (the occasion) : OavfidZicrOaL Im t^wypa^ici, (ftdovslv Tivi Iwl Tivi, Xiyeiv etti tivi {to speak upon a person, over his grave). 'Ejti fiiv To'iQ Twv (j)iXu)v ayaBotQ (jiaidpoi, etti 8e to7q kokoTc (TKvOpwndl yiyvofisda {Xen. Mem, 3, 10, 4). f) for, with a view to (the condition on account of which something is done, with a view to obtain it) ; kirl jU£(T0(j», for pay. 'Etti Troo-fji av tdiXotg ttjv yvvdiKa aov UKOvaat, on (TKivofopiig; {Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 43.) 'Etti tovt(^ tte^ukev (TrapEorKEiiaaTai) 17 rixvri. " kyuv Tr]v (iaatXiwg Ovyaripa tin yafiii^ {Xen. An. 2, 4, 8). 'E;rt T(^ rifiiTipif ayado^ ^Apaawag ekivSuveuctev {Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 16).» Aio/xai aysiv ^xoXriv etti T13 d'juete'p^ TrapaKEXtiitTei {PL Apol. 36, in order to exhorting you. g) in the power, at the command (of a person) : 'OTTorav fiovXy eiQiivai wq ejus, sttI ctoi eutoi {Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14). Ta £0' v/Mv, what we have in our own power, what rests with us. 3. With the genitive: a) upon (in answer to the question where? KaOiiaOai etti S'Kppov, oxtladm i(f afia%rig, wspidyciv' riva e^' 'iirirov, etti Tov alyiaXov avXit^KrOai, sir' ayKvpag opfisiv, Eiri TErrapwv reraxdai {by fours, i. e. four men deep). Hence b) (close) beside: ixivuv lifl tov TTOTafiov {Xen. An. 4, 3, 28). Td etti QpqKrjg. c) before, by (in pre- sence of) : ETTI Twv arpaTtjywv, etti /lapTvpwv (e^' lavTOv, by themselves alone), d) by, upon (i. e. in the case, or, in the matter of) : oirep ivl ruv SovXwv Xiyo/icv. 'A ettI twv aXXwv opdn, tBriaiTai, Dem. 9, 61). 'Eiri tov ovojuotoc tovtov Travra rov \p6vov ^v [Dem. 39, 21, have always gone by this name). ('EttI rrjc Toiavrng yiyvsaOm yvw- ftrig, Dem. 4, 6, to keep to this opinion.) f) in the time of: kirl tuv VfiiTtpwv n-po7o'vwi/ {Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 31). 'En-i ro\i AekeXeikou ttoXIhov {Bern, 22, 15). Ot 1^' rifuSv. — g) (set) over (of office and business) : 0? lirX T(Jv TTQa-yiiaTtav {Dem. 18, 247). — h) towards (in the direction of) : aTroTTAetv ejt' Ai-yvirrov, ettj SapS^uv (jtevytiv, airo'xcjptiv ett' oVkou (homewards). Msro. 1. With the accusative: a) a/lfer (of time and order) : fura § 74. ravTa, thereupon ; fiiTO. tovq OtovQ, next to the gods, b) after (to go after a thing and fetch it) : TrXtlv /itrd xoXkov, poetical, whence /iET-lp^o/Joi, /lEraffi/ijro/iat. c) Me0' qjuEjoav, 6y rfay ,• ;u£ra X"P"C sX^'"' ^^ ^'^''^ *** hand. 2. With the dative ; among, amid, poetical : jut' 'Apyeiote, i^iTd ij>peciv. 3. With the genitive : with (following and connected with) : livm /.iiTo. TivoQ, KaOriadai fiera tuv aXXwv, oikeTv fitra Biwv (among), nira TOV SiKaiov (jUET aSiKi'ae) KTaadai ti, /xira irovwv kol kivSvvwv kXivds- povv TTjv TrarpiSa. (2vv has partly the same signification ; but avv expresses rather a union, /jetu participation and companionship, e. g. in compounds, awix"^: hold together, juetIxw, share in.) Ilapa. 1. With the accusative : a) along, (past) by, beside, incourse § 75. of {during, of time) : wapa Trjv OaXuTrav Uvai {Xen. An. 5, 10, 18). Kw/iot TToXAat ^(rav Trapa tov iroTafiov {Xen. An. 3, 5, 1). Ilapa rap vavq apicsTO- wotiiadai {Thuc. 7, 39). Xlajoa rjjv o'Sov Kpjjvj/ ?iv {Xen. An. 1, 2, 13). MiBvovra avipa napa v7}(f>6vTWv Xoyovg TrapafidXkeiv {PI. Conv. 214 ; to place them side by side with, for comparison). (Seldom precisely Tvith, tTvai napa Tiva.) Hapa TOV viwv TTorafiog irapappd. Ilapa tjjv Ba]3u- \wva TTapiivai. Ilapa tov ttotov, Trapa Travra rov (3iov, Trap' EKairri/v "fi/xipav, irapa Trjv a.p\fiv tivoq. (Hap' aiira to aSiKi^juara, Dem. 37, 2, immediately upon, after.) b) to (mostly of persons) : 17 Trap' £;U£ EieoSoe {Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14), oTriE'vat Trapa rov di6v {PL Phced. 85). c) In comparison with (in preference to) : 'Ax'XAeuc tov KivStfvov KaTiopov(Tiv ov juovov TTEpt TOte aripvoig, dXXa (cat Trspi rojc firipotg {Xen. An. 7, 4, 4). b) about, for (of a care) : ^ojSEidOai Trtpt Tivi, dapptiv TTEpt Tivi. (Poetically also oi fighting for, in defence of : naxiadai irtpi ToXg aKiflvoiQ.) § 7^7'-] PREPOSITIONS. 63 3 With the genitive : a) about, of (something as matter of dis- [§ 76.] course, knowledge, treatment, endeavour) : liaXiyiaQai, ^ov\iwaQai, ■iTvvdaviaOai, irpia^ug irffiiruv, /laxiaOai irepl rivog, Kiv^vvevuv Trept Twv iaxarwv. TlspX tovtwv ovtwq tSoSei-. IlEpi fiiv Srj jSpanrEO)? koi noaewc ovTto SwicpaTije irapsaKivatynivog ijv [Xen. Mem. 1, 3, 15 ; as regards, when one comes to speak of—). Ti o'Ui iroiriaciv avTov irpog Tovg vofiovg tijutjc te iripi koi TruOapxiaQ ', {PI- Rep. 7, 538 ; in point of — ■) (Sometimes instead of with the accusative in sense b : to wspi Ttjg apcTrjg, especially with reference to the added verb, e.g. Ta :r£pi Evpovog £ip»|Tat, Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 1 [which may be said to be compounded of ra Trepi Ev^pova, and Eipijrat Trspi Eu^/jovoc].) b) IlEpi TToXAoi), navTog, oXiyov, ovSsvbg iroiuadai, to value much, &c. (literally, to make to oneself a question about something great), to ac- count of much importance. (Poetical: ahout (round, vtpi airuove yXa^vpoXo, Od. 5, 68) ; before, of pre-eminence, jrtpi iravnav efi/icvai aiXiov, II. 1, 287.) ripop. 1. With the accusative: a) to, towards (of persons and & 77. things) : awEkOilv irpog riva, wpogdyuv irpog to Tuxog, airojSAETTEtv Trpbg Tov Osov, irapo^vvetv Trpog to. Koka, (jkottuv wpoc ti. Ilpoe ew, east-ward, to Trpoc jSopsav. (Ilpbe ew also towards morning.) b) to, against, with, of an action in relation to some person who, from the other side, takes part in the action ; of a state of mind towards a person or thing : ^inyuaQai ti irpog nvag, StayojviZsaOai wpog Tovg iroXefxiovg, jua)(ij IlepaQv Trpog ^Adriva'iovg, (TTamaKtiv irpbg tov ap^ovra, mrovSag TTOtaiadai irpog TOvg arpari^yovg twv 'AOrivaiwv, ai Trpog Tovg Tvpavvovg ofitXiai {Dem.Q, 31), ayvfivaaTdig ex*'" '"'pog BaXTTt} koi ipv\ri {Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 6), adv/iilv Trpog tijv e^oSov {Xen. An. 7, 1, 9), Xojog Trpbg AiTTTivriv {against ; of an impeachment : kutu Astttivov). {OvSiv Trpbg sfii, it is nothing to m£.) c) in relation to ; for : koXoc Trpbg Spofiov, oiiSsvbg a^iog Trpbg ao^iav. Aiyuv Trpbg rb fdiXrKTTOv. Bow- Xtviadai irpbg Tb Trapov. Tej^I "ai Tav 'AOifvaiwv fuyaXriv KOKOTrpaylav EvBvg oi"EXXrivig Trav- Tig tTrtipfiivoi ^crav, Thuc. 8, 2. Ilpoe roiro, :rp6e ravra, consequently. d) in comparison with : f^avXoi rrpbg r\p.ag. AaTvoxog Travra vaTapa ivofuas Trpbg Tb vavg ToaavTog ^vfnrapaKOfxiaai {Thuc. 8, 41). najOOjaav Ti Trpbg TO BiKata. e) Ilpoe /3iav, Trpoe (piXiav, Trpbg bpyriv, Trpbg X"?'") adverbially, violently, &c. 2. With the dative : a) by, at : Ilpoe Baj3uXwvt ^v 6 KCpoe {Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 1). Ilpoe roie Kpirdtg (more usually iTrl twv KpiTwv, Trapa rote K.). E'lvai Trpoe rivi, to be at (occupied about) something, to have one's mind directed to something, b) besides, in addition to : Ilpoe 64 PART I. CHAP. VI. [§ 78. [§ 77.] rolf aXXoig iraaiv Koi iravovpyog lariv. Efpot,' tovtoiq. (Ilpoe SI, awcif besides.) 3. With the genitive : a) from, and ^om the side of a person or thing (of that which comes from it, is viewed in reference to it) : To. irpoQ vorov. To inroZvyia e^fv irpog tov iroTa/xov (Xen. An. 2, 2, 4, on the side turned towards the river). Upbg iraTpog, Trpbg iirirpog, on the father's, mother's side. Tlpog /liv dewv aat^ig, irpog Se avdpwtrwv alaxpov {Xen. An. 2, 5, 20). h) in favour of, on the side of a person, in accordance with : ri cv aTiv(^ vav/xaxta Trphg AuKeSaifjioviwv eariv {TflUC. 2, 86). 'O diog irpog vfitov 'icrrai {Thuc. 4, 93). Ta STrXa (r,)v \priv tj civQ^Aviitv Xo/Seiw (^Hdt,), liavSavuv ti srpo's rivog {Soph., usually wapd). Ilpie tov diSaxBiig ; {Soph. = in-o.) 'ASuctiaBai irpog Tivog {Eur. = inro), TinaaBai trgoQ tivoc {Hdl.^. d) by, in prayer and adjuration by something (on behalf of it) : Ilpog iralSwv KOI yvvaiKwv jketevw kqI avTtf5o\w {Lys. 4>, 20). M»j, irpog deiov, iroi- fiai^g. (With the accusative (7E ell iptically: Mri, irpog as jovoltwv Tijg Ti vsoyafiov Ko'pjje, Eur. Med. 324.) § 78. 'Ytto. 1. With the accusative : a) under, in answer to the ques- tion whither ? Uvai viro yrjv, vir avra Ta TSi-)(ri aysiv to (TTpaTiv/xa, vTTo TBixiov airouTTivai {PI. 6, 496), and figuratively, of a higher power : virayuv Tiva vtto Toiig vopovg, virb rriv ^ij^ov ipxeadai. A'lyvTTTog vnb fiaaiXia lyiviTO {Thuc. 1, 110). TdSs Travra 'AflijvaToi irupaaovTaL virb (r(j>ag irou'iadai {Thuc. 4, 60. Also irouTaOai v virb iroXsfiiwv. Also with neuters, and with phrases in which the § 79, 80.] PREPOSITIONS. 65 subject is passive to the action, and which therefore have a significa- [§ 78.] tion similar to the passive : ilvai iv fieyaXiy a^iunari inrb twv aarwv (Thuc. \, 130), 8(K»)v StSovaj VTTO Qiu)v, av/jifopj, TTipmiTTTUv, irXriyag Xafi^dvEiv viro tivoq, EKTriVrtiv (to be driven into exile) iirb tu)v tvqciv- va\eiag bo-ov ISivavro fxakwTa Tag TroXfig ifKOvv, ivpaxBrj Tt dit ain&v ovdkv tpyov a^ioXoyov (Thuc, 1, 17). a) Sometimes a verb, not in itself denoting any motion, is so conceived as to § 79 include the notion of an antecedent or accompanying motion, on which accordingly depends the preposition or a local adverb, especially Trapeifii : irapilvai ig darv. 'EvTavBoi ndpitaiv (PL Apol. 33). (KaOs^taBai ig rb 'Hpalov, ivi t-jjv iariav, dWoae iroi, to seat, betake, oneseff^ thither.) Conversely, prepositions and adverbs denoting rest and continuance, stand with verbs which in themselves denote the antecedent motion, e. g. Ik Trjg iroXtiag, oi Karhipvyiv, Xen. Cyr. 5,4, 15. 'Avi^tiv IvBdSi, Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 16. 'EvTavBa ya, PI. Apol. 36. b) The prepositions Avo and I?, together with jropa, are sometimes (as also occasionally in English) annexed adjectively with the article to a substantive, where one should rather expect Iv or jrapa with the dative (denoting residence in or at a place, or with some one), viz. when a motion of the -person or thing to another place, or a residence at another place is denoted : KXeavSpog, Ik Bu^airiou apfio- UTrig, fiiXKii ijKeiv (Xen. An. 6,4, 18 ; the governor frovi Byzantium). Ol diro BaXdaarig 'AKapvdvig dSivaroi riaav i,Vji^ojfiuv (Thuc. 2, 80). "Ogng dfiKveiTO t&v irapd jSafft- \kiag srpoc Kupov, irdvTag ofircuc SiiriBti HgB' iavrif fiaXXov jiiXovg eTvui fj /Sao-tXti (Xen. An. 1, 1, 15). (l^ijjioaBkvrig tn Myxavev £iv /jtrd rd ik rrjg AiruXiag Tripl NawTra- KTov, Thuc. 3, 102, was still, after the events in Mtolia, about N.) So likewise IvBkvSt, IkiTBsv. " Ayy eXoi tSiv ivSoBcv (Thuc. 7, 73). a) Between a preposition and its case, besides the definitions belonging to this S 80. case (e. g. Ik t&v Ipymv rng smfieXUag, Thuc. 3, 46, for Ik Ttjg kir. t. epyuv, M iroXXdg vavg KiKTriiikvovg, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 19, against people possessed of many ships), there F 66 PART I. CHAP. VII. [§ 81j 83. [§ 80.] may stand a particle of transition or connexion (as rk, yk, fikv, Sk, yap, a5, oiv, <5pa), sometimes several of these, and enclitic cases of the pronouns, e. g. iv av roif drj/io- aloig KivSvvote (PI. Hep. 9, 577). I\pbg fikv dpa trot tov varspa (PI. Crit. 50). ('EC, oijuai, 7-^s aBporarijs iXtvdip'iaQ, PI. Rep. 8, 564.) - Rem, An adjective or participle, as apposition to the governed word, stands sometimes between this and the preposition : Iv /lovy tSv TrtiaSv iroKimv ry viicripif (Dera. 8, 64). Aid ^CKiaq Trjg QpfxriQ jroptiJo/joi (Xen. Hell. 3, 2, 9). b) Prepositions are often put after their case by the poets (ivaixTpoijir)), but in prose only ■jrtpi is thus put (when the substantive has the emphasis, e.g. Ei/3oiaf jiiv ir'tpt, sometimes after several words : &v tyi> oiSkv ovri /teya oiire a/iiKpiv iripi iiratia, PL Apol. 19), and most frequently iviKa. (^Qv avev in Xenophon.) c) The position between the adjective and its substantive is rare in prose (chiefly with pronouns : roifSc iv rd^ti), in the poets frequent. d) The preposition may stand between an adjective and an adverb of degree belonging to the adjective : iroXii iv SuvoTepoig, cig Sid ^pax^Tarinv. Rem, Whether the preposition with connected substantives shall be repeated with each, depends upon the consideration, whether the connected words coalesce into one notion, or whether they are separated (as with dXKa, ovrt, ij) ; some- times, however, the preposition is omitted, where we should have expected it to be repeated, e.g. with ^'. If to the governed substantive there is annexed a comparison by i>e {Hgirtp), in Greek the comparison is often put first, and usually is immediately followed by the preposition without repeating this with the prin- cipal substantive : 'Qg irepi /irirpbe Kai rpo^ov Trjg x^pag, iv y rtdpanfiida, fSovXfv- cadai Sil (PI. Rep. 3, 414 = jripl Trjg %• ^Q '"'^P' fli^pos). "Qe Trpbg it /SouXeuo^lvous Tovg ivavriovg irapaaRtva^toQai, xpv (Tkuc. 1, 84). 5 81. ^'S> ™ft /o'". is connected with adverbs of time : tig dd, eig av9tg, ig aipiov, ig e'TTHTa, ig 07ri- paWofxai luaria, atromiofiai to "yjjpac, shake off old age from me, ntpippri- yvvfiai Tov x'Twva, tear off my coat, iairaaafiriv to St^oc, drew my sword. HXaTaifig TraicoQ koi yvvmKag iKKiKOfiia/xivoi ^aav ec ^Adrivag {Thuc. 2, 78, had conveyed away their wives and children). 01 (TTpaTiioTm fiKo- viovTO Koi XoyxaQ Kai i.ia-)(aipa(; kol l\afnrp{wovTO roc CKJiriSag {Xen. Hell. 7, 5, 20; their spears and swords — ). Rem. 1. Some verbs which, when they are simple, have active forms, by com- position take the form of a middle deponent, with such a signification, e. g. fiera- iriinrojiai, send after, for (Thucydides also iitTa-Trkfnrb)), if'iKKOfiai, drag with me. Sometimes iavrip Q/iavrip, oavrif) is added to the middle in this sense, to mark it more strongly, e. g. iavrif dvvaiuv irEpfiroiitaOai. Sometimes the active and the middle are used with little difference, because the reference to the subject itself is not necessary to be expressed, e. g. Trparrw, exact, call in, and irpaTTo/iat (for myself^, ^kpo/iai /nadov, but also simply ^ipu, djroirEjUTrw, send away, airominrofiai, send away from me. Rem. 2. noiovjjLai oir\a, make myself arms, i. e. have them made for me, StSdaKofxai, cSidaKajjitiv rbv uldv, / had my son instructed (but iiroKTiivia, cause to be killed, with- out such a reference, &c.). b) Sometimes the middle denotes an action upon and in the sub- ject itself; this however is not the case, when the subject is at the same time plainly conceived as special object of the action, and con- sequently an express reflexive relation takes place, but where the action is rather taken as a merely intransitive one, without a definite external object (in the accusative), e. g. Xovofiai (iXovaajuqv), aXd- ^o/xai {rtXiiipaiiriv), eTriStiKvvfiai {iiriSti^dnr}v), show myself (my art and skill), Tpiirofxai (trjOOTro/Lnjv), turn oneself to, attend to, a thing, iXOfiai (£(r;^ojuijv), ke^ (myself) close {tivo^, to something), airexoftai, abstain from, Xafifiavofiai, lay hold upon {rivug, something). With expressly reflexive signification, the active stands with iavrov, e. g. awZiiv, airoKTdviiv havTov, avaXafifidvtiv iavT6v, Tropl^w ifiavThv rifivsiv {to cut), (rarely tirKK^ciTTtadai kawov tivi,) and where the f2 68 PART I. CHAP. VII. [§ 82. [§ 82.] notion of a condition in which the subject is, or into which it is brought, or of something that goes on in it, is more strongly promi- nent, there the passive form (middle with passive aorist) is very fre- quent, where the English sometimes, and much oftener the German, has the reflexive form, e. g. (j>ipofiai {rivix^vv), Kivovfiai {sKivridriv, put myself in motion, get in motion, am set in motion), adpoiZo/xai {fidpoi- CT01JI', but fi9poi(Taiiir]v Svva/xtv, gathered m£ a force, as in a), SiEmrapriv, iirepmwdrtv, wp/xriOriv, iw\av0rtv, a'n'riXXa.yriv, avvsdiadriv, Sitivtx^VV, IfiaKQaKia&riv, sometimes where the passive view does not seem very obvious, e. g. in (patvofiai {iipavriv). {^Eiravcaiiriv, I ceased, ettouo-Ojiv, was made to cease.) Rem. 1. A similar view lies at the foundation of the form of several verbs as deponent vfith middle or passive aorist, e. g. vtavitvofjim, behave mi/selflike a young maUt kv£avi€vadfii]v, but upyi^ofiai, become wroth (am wroth}, dtpyifrdtjv (6pyt^w, move to wrath, rare), liaivojiai, become mad, l/iavijv. Where the view wavered between the two, the result was a deponent with alternating form of middle and passive ; of. the Accidence. Rem. 2. Sometimes a verb lays aside the transitive signification, and yet keeps the active form. Originally, this is apt to take place in consequence of an ellipse, some object, more general or special, being understood, and the verb thereby acquiring a specific meaning, although in process of time the ellipse quite disap- pears from the signification, e. g. ciyia (viz. to arparevijia), lead on (in war), iXavvci), ride (rbv iinrov), j3aX\(o \i9oic, pelt with stones, ig^XXin, ma/ce an attack, charge, iitra^aWo), change myself (^undergo a change), 'dx tie Smiivriv, steer (rijv vavv), kirsxi^, hold up, stay, pause, cLvlt^ii, leave off, cease, arp'upia, viroffTpk^w, turn round, fvXaaaut , keep guard. Sometimes both the active and passive are used in the same signification, e. g. viro(paivti. ij riiiipa and vTro^atvtTai. Rem. 3. In some particular transitive verbs, certain forms have intransitive signification, especially the perfect, plusquamperfect, and aor. 2, in dvw, (pia, and 'idTTifu, then the perf. 2, and its pluperf. in certain verbs, e. g. oXoAa (of. the Acci- dence). » c) Sometimes the middle assumes a somewhat different and more special active signification, in which there lies concealed an original relation to the subject, e. g. ^uXarrw, guard, ^vXaTTOfiai, am on my guard against [tI or nva), arroSiSwfj.t, give back, pay, cnroildoium, give back from me, i. e. sell, ypcKjiw, write, jpa(l>ofiai, indite, lay a charge against, tTrayyiXXw, announce, pass the order for something, iwayyiWo- fxai, (announce myself) promise, make profession of, afivvw, ward off, a/xvyoixai. Ward off from myself, defend myself against. {Tifiwpw nvi, help, intransitively, Ti/xiopovfiai nva, avenge myself upon some one.) Rem. 1. Sometimes the middle is used, without any strongly marked difference, but still in certain particular constructions of the verb, e. g. irotw, make, bring forth, but TToiovftai \6yov, Bripav, hold (in periphrases) ; TroioB/iai nepl woWoB, iv 6pyy voiov/iai nva, noiov/iai rbv noTajjtbv SmaOiv, get the river in my rear. § 83, 84] VERB AND ITS KINDS. 69 Rem. 2. Sometimes out of the purely passive conception (with the passive [§ 82.] forms) there develops itself a new active signification, as a depoftent passive, e. g. 00^0), / make afraid, , am counsellor, /3ouXtvo//ai, deliberate, take counsel, av/tfiovXivoi rivi, giwe counsel, avfiPovXcvoiiai tivi, take counsel with some one (on ray own con- cerns). Some other intransitive verbs have active and middle used with no per- ceptible difference of meaning ; but usually the one form is more frequent than the other, e. g. Trtcpoi/iat more frequent than iretpSi. ('Erp£i|/a/uijv, put to flight, iTpavo/iriv, turned myself.) Of the use of the several forms in middle and passive it is to be remarked : § go a) The future middle, like the tenses which coincide for act. and pass., is often used in a purely passive sense, e. g. Opk^oixai ^ rpafrjaoiiai, ^X&ponai, iy^eXiiaojiai = pXa^rtBOjiai,, ii^tXriBriaojxai (rarely the future of the verba liguida, ipavovjiai = (jiavri- aojiai), but not of those verbs which to the present active take the future in the middle (cf. the Accidence), e. g. Xri^opai, yviiaoiiai, ytXaaojiai. (But aor. 2 middle, in a passive sense, is very rare and limited to a few verbs ; thus Karaaxoiuvos.) b) Of transitive deponents the perfect middle is used in the passive beside the active sense, e. g. tipyaafiai, KtKTtJiiivoc (KaraKexpirai, is used tip, Isocr. Paneg. 74, although the verb governs the dative) ; so from transitive medial deponents some- times the passive aor. and fut. are formed and used as such, e. g. eipydadtiv (middle llpyaaajiriv), tKTri9r}V (iKTriadntiv), airiaOiie (yriaadfiiiv), kpyaaOriaofiai. The other tenses of a transitive deponent in the middle are rarely used passively, e. g. iivoineva Kai irfTrpaaKd/ieva (JPl. Phmd. 69). c) That in Greek there are passives of sundry verbs which are not transitive, or do not take a proper object-accusative, was noted in § 26, § 27, J 35 b. R. 3, § 36 a. R. 4, and § 56, R. 2. a) The gerundive of transitive verbs (active or middle) is an adjec- § 84. tive with the signification fit or necessary, and is predicated of the (420) 70 PART I. CHAP. VIII. [§ 85, 86. [§ 84.] subject with tljui. (The elfii is often omitted in the indicative, some- times also in the infinitive.) 'Q^eXtiteo aoi ri irdXiQ eot/v {Xen, Mem. 3, 6, 3). NtKi'ae iXejev, oTrXiraywyoiig {vavc;) Ik riov ^Vfifiaxi^v fura- ireixiTTEac tlvai {Thuc. 6, 35). noiTiria a XiyiiQ, (421 a) b) Of intransitive verbs the gerundive is formed only in the neuter, and is used with iariv as an impersonal predicate, which is construed with the dative or genitive when the verb governs these cases. 'Iriov larlv (tTijrea iariv, § 1 b, R. 4). 'E7rtX£i|0»Ji"£0v ti^ 'ipjV- 'Atrriov tov TToXfjttou (from aTtTOfiai in middle). 'EirtjueXTirEov tCiv j3o(TK»)juarwv. (421 b) c) As from intransitive, so, by analogy, from transitive verbs also, the gerundive is used impersonally with iariv, and governs the accusa- tive : Qipamvrmv rovq dsoxig {Xen. Mem. 3, 1, 28). 'Atncurlov ttjv ao^iav. Touc iratSae EiC rov TroXe/iov okte'ov koi ysvariov, a'ifiaroQ {PL Rep. 7, 537, from yivuv rwa dlfiaroQ, to give one a taste of blood). Rem. From verbs which are used both in active and middle in different senses, the gerundive may be used impersonally in both significations, e. g. yvjivaa-kov rb aStfia (yviivdZ(o) and yvjivavrkov iariv, one must exercise {yvjivaZoiiai), Tniartov, one ' must obey (^niiOofiai). § 85. The name of the person who has to perform the action, is taken by the gerundive in the dative (of relation, by § 34) : ^Q^iXriTea rifuv ^ TToXtc- ^IrriTsov aoi. But with the impersonally used gerundive the name of the acting person also stands in the accusative : Oii SouXeuteov touc voxiv 'i-)(pvraQ rote ovrw kokuc ^povovaiv {Isocr. Euag. 7). Tov /3ouXojUEVov ai/Saifiova iivai aw^poavvriv SiWKTtov koi atT/cij- riov {PI. Go7'g. 507). Oil Bixaig Kot Xoyoig SiaKpiria iariv, fifj X6y(f> Koi avToiig pXairrofiivovg {Thuc. 1, 86 ; we must not seek to decide by law and words not being ourselves injured in words only). Rem. The acting person was conceived in general, without the special relation denoted by the dative, and yet not as actual grammatical subject (nominative). CHAPTER VIII. The relations of Adjectives {and Adverbs), especially the degrees of Comparison. § 86. a) The adjectives which express order and sequence, as also those (300) which denote inclination, contentment with an action, or a multitude and vehemence, together with some others (e. g. judvoe), stand in Greek as apposition to the subject, sometimes also to the object, where we use an adverb to denote the situation and relation of the § 87.] ADJECTIVES. 71 subject (or object) during the action : 01 'Afljjvmot jrporEpoi ETrp'sirav. [§ 86.] HpoSoToc irpwroQ tu ElEpffiKa (rvviypaxpEv (but irpiorov to. TlepaiKa, first the Persian war, then something else). "YaTaroQ ^kw. 'O Srifiog MiXriaSy >v, briefly, kic ro5 pavepov, openly. b) Certain adjectives are used quite as substantives (with or with- out the article, with a genitive or possessive pronoun) to denote persons or things ; thus, exdpog, (piXog {oi ifiol Svcrfievilg, evvoi, PI.), ayaOov, kokov, a good, an evil. With some, especially in the feminine, a particular substantive was originally understood, e. g. ij ■Korpig, the father-land, country (jroXic? yn), ^i%i.d, apiaTipa (x^'p)' 'J juovo-iKr/, ij ypafifiariKri (te'^vij). Rem. 1. Especially, there is in some expressions an omission of the following substantives : y^ (?) irjuErepa, t/ oiKOVfjLkvrjt ri ^aaiKsoig), oSog (r^v kiri Ba(3v\Cjvog ikvai, see § 17, and in adverbial expressions, § 31 d. Rem., fiaspdv airtlvai), il^ipa (ri iviovaa, rj varepaia, i) avgiov, 'E\a(pri$o\uivoQ SKTy laTapsvov), fidipa (^ d/iappivti, ijr' lay sal bfio'uf), and others in particular constructions and phrases, e. g. 71 i/iij vmq, (yvii/iij), rr/v ivavrlav r'StaSai (t(/ijfov), X'^'^S XajxPavtiv (Spaxjiae), or in technical terms, e.g. r/ 6p9ri, f/ yivucri (Trriucrij), 6 /ieXXwv (^piSvoc) in Grammar. Rem. 2. Names of nations are used adjectively of persons : oi MaKtSovsg IjrTTEie. The words avijp and av9ps 'o/ioia TOig lioXiara Tov jiapPaputov, TAuc. 7, 29.) b) Some adjectives are used adverbially in the neuter singular with certain intransitive verbs, to denote the sensible quality of the action : fMsya (pOiyyiaOai, j3oav, Xijiiv, r]dv {kukov) o^eiv, o^v bpav. (Also fiiya (ppoviiv.) Rem. Of certain adjectives with the article used as adverbs, see § 14, a. Rem. 3. To the comparative of an adjective or adverb, the second member § 89. of the comparison is joined by r\, than, in the same case as the first, (303) when the same verb or the same governing term also belongs to the second member, and might be repeated with it : Miit,(ov u icat ttXeiw E;^£ie J? syw. Ttvi av fiaWov -maTtvaaifu r] aoi; If this is not the case, then, properly speaking, a new sentence should be formed with iifii, or some other verb, to be taken from the first member ; usually, however, the verb is dropt, so that the nominative stands alone : Avopoe JToAu CvvaTWTipov, jj iyd), vlov 6 ' Apfieviwv jBacriXevc nivovTa Trap' savTi^ avviXafisv {Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 28). Tote vtwrlpote icai juaAXov aKfiaZovdiv, rl lyu), TrapaivQ ravra iroiHv [Isocr. Pac. 145). Toiv aXkwv oIkstuv ovk fideXsv "A^ojSoc irapaXafjifinvetv ovSiva twv tout^ ilSoTiuv juaAXov 7) MtXirae {Dem. 29, 56, viz. oISev). But when it would be necessary to understand sl/xi, the Greeks not unfrequently retain, by an attraction, the preceding case : U\ovai(i>Tip^> av, d iaw- (ppovsig, rj Ifioi, TOV 'iTTirov iSiSovg [Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 32, ^ rj iydj tlfii). "HSij Tivig KOI £K Ssivoripwv rj toiwvSe tawdriaav [Thuc. 7, 77). Rem. 1. Occasionally a comparative is followed by the preposition jrpo, before, or irapa (clvtC). Rem. 2. For [iSKKovij (rather than), the Greeks are fond of saying, iiSXKovri oi, when the principal proposition is negative, or interrogative in the negative sense, or expressive of censure (so that what is said in the last member, is considered as the thing which holds, or must be done, &c., t& the exclusion of the other) : Oh vepl rSv k/iSv IS'uav jiaKKov niiuiprjaiaBe TioXvK\ka ^ oiix iTip vfiiav avrdv (Dem. 50, 66). Tt ovv Ssi kKtivov rbv xpovov dvafisvetv, 'itog &v virb ttKtjQovq Kaic&v dirsi^ irio/uv, jiaWov fj oix wf raxK^ra Ttjv eipr]vr]V iroiriaaaOai ; (Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 15.) 'Qfibv rb PoiXev/ia mXiv iXr/v Sia iriptav icafl' Vavyiav j3ov\tv£iv {Thuc. 1, 85, zz jj IrEpotc)^. Rem. 1. Strictly considered, the comparative should take after it the genitive only where a substantive (or substantively conceived word) is directly compared with the first member as the subject'of the comparative, or of an adjective or verb to which an adverb in the comparative is attached : thus, oUia iiciZmv r^g vnirk^aQ = ^ ^ v/teTepa, oiiciav fititm fj T^v ii/iETEpav or fi r) i/UTspa iariv, ail fiaXKov kfiov ^ i) iyti : but by a less exact way of putting the comparison, and from a desire of brevity, the Greeks also put with the comparative the genitive of a substantive which is compared with another in reference to the degree of a third object [com- paratio compendiarid] : Oyw ;u£ijiu oUiav f^w aov =: r) av) : "E^oje Tv Swaioiv, different form — ), the adjectives in vXdatog denoting (many)/o/d greater, &c. than, together with irpoTepaXog, iaTe^alog. UoXXairXdffia ' Even fttrd tSiv vpia^vTipiav rinSiv (PI, Prot. 314), instead of ^ rnj&v, by } 89. § 92, 93.] ADJECTIVES. 75 AireSiDKa tSv \r]f9svTo>v (ij '6aa c(Xi]^a). AiTrXima'AXKi^iaSy ^^tovv al TroKeig StSovat [§ 91.] J) d\Xvi5)jv etpafttv XkyHv, PL Rep. 1, 334, without pronoun. Ol nXarnjije trpoQkpaWov rif rtixci rHv JliKovovvriaiuv ix rovinraXiv rj oi dvSpig avTwv vircpE/Saivov, TAuc. 322, or ij y. Also ry v(rTtpaig Irt] iXarrov (ij) TpiaKOvra, 76 PART I. CHAP. VIII. [§ 94—96. [§ 93] TrXoufftwrEjoov [Lys, 19, 15). ('A-yafloe juaXXov t) vkniiaiog, ratlier good — .) (308) b) The comparative sometimes denotes, without any definite com- parison, a somewhat (tolerably) high degree, e. g. avdadiarepov n atroKpLvtaQai {Thuc. 8, 84). 'EiiflujuoO/zaj, fir) aypoiKorepov y Xeysiv (P/. Gorg. 462). Of some particular adjectives {good, bad, beautiful) the com- parative is sometimes applied in the neuter to an action or procedure merely to denote a reference to the opposite procedure ; 'MQvojiriv {sacrificed in order to consult the god), ci /SEXTtov tit] vfttv tc l/ioi ivirps^ai rairriv rfiv apx')" ««' ^/I'o' vTroBTrjvai {Xen.An. 5, 9, 31). MaXaKwrtpoi jj (is koXKiov avToXg {PI- Rep. 3, 410) ; especially in negation (ou KpiiTTov, ^kXrtov, KaWiov, xiipov, kclkiov) : liaKw A.vafiifiV7](TK0v' ov yap x"!""" ''roWcLKis obokeu' (PI. Phced. 105, it does no harm, one is none the worse for — ). ripog r& (pvXdmiv oii kAkwv etrn tpojiipciv tXvai Trjv i^vxifv {Xen. CEcon. 7, 25). (Nfwrepoe and Kreti/drfpoe with the accessory meaning of an alteration of what pre- viously existed.) (308, c) By an irregularity, the comparative takes after it a superfluous jxaWov,' e. g. ft. 2) aiaxvvTtiporipoc /iSWov tov Siovroe {PI Gorg. 487). k\.pzTii>Ttp6v iari fiaxoitsvovg iiroQaviiv fiaXkov jj ipevyovTaq uiiZurBai {Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 51). Conversely, in verbs denoting a wish or choice, \i.aKKov is now and then omitted before j/ ('Ayijo-iXaos ^petro cvv Tt^ yevvaiqt fieiovfKTeTv ff avv t<^ ASiKqi ttXeov ex^'^j Xen. Ag. 4, 5). {Ov^iv ij instead of oiiSkv dWo -ij.) § 94. The comparative is used to denote the highest degree, in speaking (309) of two persons (also of two sets of persons) : 'O 7rp£<7J3ur£poe rc5v iraiSwv irapMV irvyxavsv {Xen. An. 1, 1, 1). IlorEpot juoXAov ■)(alpov(n Kai XvirovvTai, ol ^povifioi r) ol apove(; ^ {PI. Gorg. 498.) § 95. The superlative often denotes merely a very high degree [super- (310) lative of eminence'] : KaXXtura \iyeig. Kvpog ftXofiaOiaTaTog ^v. (Without the article, § 8, Rem. 3.) The exclusive sense is gathered from the context, or from a partitive genitive annexed. Rem. 1 . A superlative belonging to the predicate, sometimes governs a partitive genitive, which refers to the subject of the proposition, or to some other word of which the predicate holds in the highest degree : Ol 'ABrivaloi navriiiv 6.vQpiinnav irXdnTif ffirrj) xpwjrai iviiqaKTif {Dem. 18, 87). <6iKoaoipia iaH iraXotorar)) re xal TrXeiffrij tCiv 'EWtividv iv Kpr/ry Kal iv AaKiSaip.ovi {PI. Prot. 342). 'A6^>/a?£ cLifi^ai, oi T7]c 'EXXa^og TrXelffrtj iariv e^ovaia tov Xeynv {PI. Gorg. 461). A genitive with the superlative of an adverb in the predicate, may refer, not only to the subject, but also to the object or another case : Su/cparije TrpoerpETrtro iravruiv fiaXuTTa Toig avvovraq vphg kyxpantav {Xen. Mem. 4, 5, 1, above all else to self- command). Rem. 2. The superlative with the genitive of a reflexive pronoun, or personal pronoun used reflexively, denotes the highest degree to which the property attains in one and the same subject at a certain time : EWe <70i, u IlcpiicXeif, Tore avveyt- vojitiv, ore SuvoraroQ aavTOv rjaBa {Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 46). § 96. For additional force, the superlative takes before it the words § 97.] DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 11 (denoting the excess or distance from others) ttoAXcJ), /uoKpo? (Trapo [§ 96.] iroXu, poet. TToXu), e. g. fia^pCj EwvojJoraroe [Arist. Pac. 673). ("OCTfji , fiiyiarov to tu)V ^vAokuv spYov, ro(Toi5r({( av eijj rE;^v»)e re koi tTncrrrifiric fiiyiimie Sto/jLivov, PL Rep. 2, 374 ; in the same degree, as — .) The high- est possible degree is denoted by additions such as u»e (ottw?) Suuotov, i>Q, biTiiiQ (^) Svvafiai, OS — as possible (e. g. vavg wg SvvavTai irXdaTag TrXripovrnv, Thuc. 7, 21, wf ^vva/xai /jLoXiara and wg fiaXiuTa Svvafiat), ov aWiav {PI. Rep. 1, 853). Mdvot tuv oKXiav "EXkfivtiiv {JEsch. 2, 37, alone among, or ofaU, the Greeks) '. CHAPTER IX. Peculiarities in the Adjective construction of the Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns, and in their relations in the sentence. a) The demonstrative and relative pronouns take their gender and § 97. number in accordance with the substantive words to which they (312) refer, or which the speaker has in his thoughts (e. g. tjSe, this tooman). ' Mfyiffrij oTfaTiia tiSv Trpo avTJjq {Thuc. 1, 10), = fuyiarri iraamv fi^XP' ^Ktivou TOO xpovou KoX /[tEt^oiv TiSv irpb avTriQ. 78 PART I. CHAP. IX. [§ 98. [§ 97-] When the pronoun refers to several connected substantives of differ- ent genders, the rule § 2, 6 and d, is followed : aSiXfol koi aSe\ai, oSe Eixov. 'EKfcXrio-ia^ojUEV irepi TroXifiov Kot BipriviK, a fieyiaTriv e^st Svvafiiv kv T(^ /3i({) T(^ TU)v dvOpwTTwv {Isocr. Pac. 3). Likewise a relative in the neuter may refer to a number of inanimate antecedents, even when they are all masculine or feminine : TaSra iiirov ov irpog Trjv ivai^uav oiiSi irpbg rriv SiKaiocrvvtiv ovSi ttjoo;- ttjv p6vr}(Tiv aTo- fiXii^ag, a av SiiiXOeg {Isocr. Panath. 217). Rem. The relative to an antecedent in the dual, may stand in the plural : rd X»p£, S-Q Sios ^T' rb avWa/ijidviiv iXXii\aiv iTroiijaev (^Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 18). b) When a demonstrative or relative pronoun, not referring to a particular substantive, denotes something comprising a number of units or individuals, it stands in the neuter plural : TaSra outtoj ^kij- KOEtv. 'Epa» (Toi, a olSa. {Tavra yap koi koXo. Kat Siicaia, firj irepiopav TToXug apxaiag £^avt(7ra'(7ac, Dem. 16, 33, where the pronoun is con- ceived in a general way : this procedure '.) X 98, a) A demonstrative pronoun to which a substantive is attached as (313) predicate-noun by dfi't, or by a verb denoting to call, consider as, &c., is apt to assume the gender and number of the substantive (attrac- tion) : Ouroc (ipoQ Ecrri SiKatoavvriQ aXriOri ts Xiyiiv Koi a av Xafiy rtp, airodidovm [PL Rep. 1, 331). KivTjo-ie aiirrf fitjiaTti toT? 'EAXt)rig, to Ssofievov tivoq ju») e'x'Iv ^prjciOai {Xen. CEcon. 8, 2). Kat \pv)(riQ apa Kafl' 6(tov av ivplaKuifisv icaKtac apovriZovv rr/v yviofiriv dTriirepvev (^Xen. An. 1, 7, 8). TiiXiiTTrog fispog n vefitjjag Trpbg rb fpovpiov aipu (Thuc. 7, 3), 'E-KayytiXapivov tov ' kyriaiXdov Tijv arpaTuav, SiSSa- aiv 01 AaxiSaifiovwi 'offairep yTtjaev (^Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 3). (lIptffjSuTsp^j vtuirkpuiv trdv- Ttiiv apxHV Ti Kai KoXa^tiv irpogrkraKTai, PI. Rep. 5, 465, without a pronoun to koXo- Zuv, although it governs a difierent case from apxHv.) e) Sometimes a demonstrative pronoun is put superfluously to enforce some sub- stantive notion preceding in the same sentence ; especially oirog after substantives which are separated by a parenthetic clause from the rest of the sentence : KXeapxoe ToXjLit^jjv 'HXeiov, ov krvyxaviv ?xwv irap' eavrtp, Kr/pvKa apiarov rGtv tots, toutov dvinriiv hiXcvas, ktX. (^Xen. An. 2, 2, 20). Tolg dyaBolg KOKiSg xP'^^rai xai roTg iifeXiiv Svvafuvoig Toiroig ^Xdirruv Tovg avjiTtoXiTivoiiivovg ikix^ipovatv (^Isocr. Nic. 4). § 101, 103.] DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 81 More rarely and without emphasis aiirSe : 'H Kai, wjirep ruv aWuv rexvUv exo'/^^" [§ ' &v tivelv '6,Ti ipyov haarrie, ovtid Kai rije oiKovoiiiag dwaifiiB' &v I'nriiv 'i^ri l^yov 100.} airijf iariv ; (^Xen. CEc. 1, 2.) In comparisons Ikhvoq : '0 8ebe liSaiKSV oArotf (rois AaKeSaijiovioig), wgirip vjiiv icard 9aKaTTav tvTvxiiv, ofiroij eKeivoif Kard, frfv (Ken. Hell. 7, ],9). Rem. Adverbially ravTa, therefore (§ 27, a. R. 2), xai ravra, and that, and that too (Wkviava oifK iZ,r\TU o dvQpujvog, Kai ravra Tap' 'Afiiaiov iiv row Msvavoe Kevov, Xen. An. 2, 4, 15), rait in the expression ni vvv rade (§ 14, b. R. 2). In the structure of the relative proposition there are various pecu- § liarities, of which we must note the followina;. 101. ^ _ (322) a) The substantive defined by the relative clause, is often drawn [attracted] into it, in prose most commonly so that the relative clause precedes the demonstrative : IIoAXol to. xQ-fifiara KaTavakwaavrig, S)v 7rpo(T0Ev dTrsi\ovTO KEpSuv, alff^pd vofxiZovTig, Tovrtov ovk oTTE^oi'Tat (Xen. Mem. I, 2, 22). Kvpog, u nva 6pwy KaraaKevat^ovTa, ^e apxoi Xwpag, Kai TrpoQoSovg TTOiovvTa, ovSiva av irwitoTi d(j>£i\iTO, dW an ■n-Xsiw irpogeSiSov [Xen. An. 1, 9, 19). (With oene : Ilav, o,Tt ■Kaay^v Tig irdOog avoiav icx^'j voaov irpogpifrioV' PI. Tim. 86.) Rem. Sometimes the substantive, when separated by the relative clause from the remainder of the sentence, takes its case from the relative, but without being drawn into the relative clause : NiBijparoe dpyupioj' fxiv fi xpwffioi' ovS airig Ipii KaraXiiriiv ovdkv, a\K& rriv dXXijv ovaiav, rjv KareXive r', ravTfiv apiara Kai cuTTaaiaarorara dvdyKi] oixfXir&ai (PI. Rep. 7, 520). This however is an irregularity (anacoluthon) and occurs most fre- quently in poets. (T6v avSpa tovtov, ov waKai SijteIs, oiros iariv ivBaSe, Soph. (Ed. C. 449.) b) Especially the substantive is drawn into the relative clause, when it is a new term annexed to the preceding: 6 warrip, Sv fiovov tixofuv /3oj)0ov, awJjv, ^ 6 fxovog fdoridog Sv tl'^Ojuav. An adjective or genitive belong- ing to the antecedent is also often drawn into the relative clause : Adyoug dicouffov, ovg aoi SvaTVx"£ Vkii> ^'spuv (Eur. Or. 854). Iltpi biv neyiariav Kai KoWiaruv ifftxtipei Xlyfiv "0/t>)poff, TToXI/tiDV re Kai arpaTiiymv Kai SioiKriaiiDV ■itSKiiov, iiKaiov irov ipiarav aiiTov (PI. Sep. 10, 599). Oi AaKiSainovwt rove l/tTopous, o»£ EXaiSov 'Aenvaiuiv Kai tSiv Iw/i/idxojv, iv okKaai vXeovTag, iwtKTcivav (Thuc. 2, 67). Oi 'ASrtvaXoi rovg dxeroig ruiv 'SvpaKovaiiav, oi kg rt/v noXiv vrcovofiriSbv ■ttotov viarog iiyjikvoi tiaav, Si- eipeiipav (Thuc. 6, 100). a) A demonstrative pronoun standing alone as antecedent to a rela- x tive, is often omitted, especially in the nominative or accusative : 102. Ole nakiara to Trapovra apKH, rtKiara to)V aWoTpiivv opiyovrat (Xen. (324) Conv. 4, 42). Tie niaiiv SvvaiTO av, ip0' ov tlBiirf koXoc re koI ayaOog vofiiZofiivog ; [Xen.) Sometimes even in other cases : OvSsju/a Trap- tanv, ag tJkeiv exP^" (-^^**^' Eccl, 19). ^ Avay KaiovavTOig kari SiaXi- G 83 PART I. CHAP. IX. [§ 103. [5 yiadai irap' Siv av Xa^wai tov juitrOov {Xen. Mem. 1,' 2, 6). Ov Trepl '-' oyOjuaroc ■q oju^tejSijrija'tc, O'C toctovtmv iript aKiXpig irpOKEtrat [PL Rep. 7, 533). "Ocra TTwiroB' aTravrts vfiUQ rifiovXriOriri, oiiStv TrunroB^ v/iaQ ttt(pvyiv (Dem. 14, 15). 'AvaXtincouertv ovk tie « Sft (Xew. tEc. 3, 5 ; = «'e raura, eij a, omission of the demonstrative and of the preposition which should be repeated before the relative) . Rem. The demonstrative in all cases is frequently omitted, when its place is supplied by the attraction ; see § 103. Before relative adverbs of place demon- strative adverbs are omitted : KaTaHdriiu iraXiv oQcv av 'haara Xa/tfidvu) (^Xen.'). (S24, ijj The indefinite pronoun which is the subject to the verb and the ■ ' antecedent to the relative in 'ianv 6q, Bialv o'l, &c., is usually omitted : Oi fiiv iroWol KarifiEvov, ^(rav Si, o? ujrt)(Ciipouv aiiv r(j) paatKu [Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 3). T&Jv avfXfiaxtov vfiiv elaiv, ot SiaXeyovTai Trepi (piXiag ToTe TToXEjutoic {Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 24). Rem. 1. As tanv oe, tariv a, SO, without change of the verb, lanv o'l (oiif, &v, olc, sometimes even oinvto), and this tariv o'l, thus declined through all the cases, is sometimes treated as a single word, in the sense oi some, certain, like the word ivioi thence formed ; 'EvravQa tjSaWov rale /JwXotj Kal ianv di hvyxavov xai 9b)pdKtjjv Kai y'ippttiv (^Xen, Cyr, 2, 3, 18). EtVs juof "'Eariv ovQTivaQ dv9^wir(ov TidaifiaKOQ iiri aoflq, ; (Xen. Mem. 1,4, 2.) (With the negation : Xlpoyovaiv KaXct tpya OVK tcTiv oiq fiuZto icai TrXeuj u7rap%«i fj ' ABrfvaioig, Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 3.) ^H\0£ rvKiTTiroQ arpaTidv ixi^v ix IleXoirovvijffOD Kal a-jro tUv cv Si/cfXi^ TrdXcioj' tariv iiv (Thuc. 7, 11). Oi A.aKe8aifi6vioi tuiv aWuv 'EW^vwr tov fSovKofievov ^KgXtuov 'ivaaBat 7rXr)i/ 'Iiivajv Kai 'Axaifiv Kal lariv S>v aWmv kOviov (Thuc. 8, 92 ; Hariv iv oTf, 7%uc. 5, 25, in some things'). (But also daiv o'l, Thuc. 6, 10.) But the imper- fect -qv dl for i}wv, koi aiiriKO e^eotoi irottlv {Xen. An. 3, 2, 33). Tig ri iiXpiXEia rotg dsotg rvyxavei ovaa arro twv Sojpwv, Siv nap' rifiCjv Xafi^avovaiv ; {PL Euthyph. 14.) 'AjTEarEXXEr' avQig av to rpkov TTpiafiug wg tov ^iXittttov etti ratg icaXnie koi fXifaXatg eXttio-i tavraig, atg Aicfxivrig VTrig iKi\pTi)VTO {Dem. 18, 18. Because the phrase is, a evrvxwa, the good fortune 1 have had). Rbm. 1. This attraction, however, can only take place when the relative clause really serves to assign and define the matter in hand, i. e. is essential to complete the sense ; never, when it is only added in continuation or as a remark, e. g. Ilav- Tiav, Siv ilxov, ayaBCiv ffoi fitTeSuKa, d (not wv) ai) toti fiiv \6yip k/ieyaXweQ, vvv S^ favXiHeig. The attraction is also not unfrequently forborne where it might have place, both after substantives and after demonstratives standing alone : Oi Koptxdioi j-« (TKa^ij fiiv oix i^Xitov avaSovjitvoi rStv vtSiv, Slq Karadvaeiav, Trpog Si roig (ij/0p(5?rowc BTpairovTO (Thuc, 1, 50). MeiivriaQe tov vo/iov Kai tov opxov, ov o/iui- fiSKaTc (Ism. 2, 47 ; but Lys. 10, 32 : BotiBriaaTe toi£ vS/ioig Kai ToUg Spicois olg d/iWHOKaTE). "EvstTTiv I'lfuv TVX^'^v irapA twv '"EWyviov Trjg rt/xijff TaVTrjg, ^vjrep oi tv AatciSai/iovt /SaffiXtTg wapa rSiv ttoXitCiv txovaiv (Isocr. de Pac. 1 44). Ov avu^i- povTa kKflvois, oOe lyKiuiiidZovai, Troiovaiv (Dem. 14, 1). Tomirijs nvig rjiiiv ttrutTriiirig Sii, f) IviaraTai xpijoBai TOVTip, 8 av jroi^ (PI. Euthyd. 289). It is very unusual for the attraction to be omitted where the relative corresponds with an omitted demonstrative ('O/ivu/ii injuviiv d oov kXvu, Eur. Med. 753). Rem. 2. It sometimes happens, that a neuter relative which ought to stand in the nominative (coincident in form with the accusative), passes by attraction into the dative or genitive : EJ ffot Sokh ipifikvuv olg apTi Uo^ev ij/ucr, i'wou (PI. Prot. 353). BXaySijooi'Tai at tSiv noXtixiiov vrjsg d^' Siv i)iiiv iraptaKivaaTai (Thuc. 7, 67). ('AvaXioKovaiv ovic tig 8. Sii fiovov, dXXd Kai ilg & pXdjiitv fipii, Xen. (Ec. 3, 5, = tig TavTu, & — .) Likewise the dative of a relative now and then passes by attrac- g2 84 PART I. CHAP. IX, [§ 104. [§ tion into the genitive: Hap' iiv porjBtie, oA/e cnroKfiipy xrJpu' (^sck.2, 117, = 103.] vapct TovTiav, olg — ^) '. Rem. 8. Sometimes the accusative of the neuter relative which is changed by attraction, stands, not as object in the proper sense, but to denote the whole extent of the predicate (by § 27), especially in the plural : 'E5 wv rd aavTov eiraivils, rivt Swaitp \6yifi row /itixavoiroiov Kara^poviiQ ; (PI. Gorg, 512, fiom what thousayest in praise of thine own.) hUtiv i^oi'KovTo \a^uv S)V iirl tSiv aXKoiv iriBsavTo MiiSiav Dpaaiv ovra sal l3Sekv(iSv (Dem. 21, .3). By this means, an attracted relative in the neuter plural sometimes approximates to the signification of a demonstrative with on. ('A.vff mv, in requital for that — , i. e. because, forasmuch as: OV'EWrjveQ rd, TtixV Vf^Qv KaGeiXov dv6' utv Tjfieig TCCKtivbJV SKbjXvcrafiEV TTBiniv, PL Meneoc. 244 ; mostly poetical.) From an attraction, and a coalition of a demonstrative and a relative adverb, result the expressions, used as conjunctions, d^' 0^ (= d.1! SKtivov, ore — , dv' ixeivov row xpovou, ore — ), t? oi, tv if, p«XP' oS (jikxpts o'^t but also simply /isxpi, f expi av, w'ithout o^), dxpi oS (in Herod. Ig 8), together with e0' (^ or ig, o6tv vTri^kBevTO, TvaXSag icai yvvaiKctg (Time. 1, 89, = kniidtv, ovoi : attraction in relative adverbs of place). /) Toi/rwi/ OS jSoiXii sKaarog (PL Gorg. 317, for ovriva, quivis ; ogrtg jSouXei, PL Crat. 432). (326) § 105, 106.] DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 85 fioXa sS6kcis QavnoH^HV airSv ; (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 38.) 'Ap' olvTavra riyii a& ilvai, Siv [§ av af%yQ sal k^y aoi avToig XP'J'S'" o," dv ^oi\y ; (PI. Eutkt/d, 301.) "Oaoirbv 104.] Sfj/tov iroWA. Koi ayaOd flpyairfiivoi liaiv 60ei\crai S" ahroiQ ^apiv KO/tiiraaBai vap' ifiHv /iaXKov rj Siktiv Sovvai Tuiv ireTrpayfisviav, oin a^iov Karct tovtuiv vnoSextaBai SiajSoXag (Lys.^a, 11). The indefinite relative Sejrif (in which no attraction of case takes place) is used in r some connexions as a simple relative, viz. : 1 ^y. a) In. denoting apeivon or thing which can or shall be something, which serves for something, both after ah indefinite substantive and after an indefinite pronoun, which is usually omitted (J 102, a) : "Hyt/jova airriaoiicv KOpov, igTig rjiiag cnrd^a (Xen. An. 1, 3, 14). Aiff^ivijs avvt^ovXtvcv v/uv irs/ivctv rivciQ ii£ 'ApuaSiav, o'irivig kaTriyopiiaovai tSiv t& ^iXittttou irparrovTiav (J)em. 19, 306). Oiis l^o^Ef, 'irov aXrov i)vt]a6fii9a (Xen. An. 8, 1, 20). Ouic ianv, ortfi eyii tcaraXii^ia rbv kjibv oIkov (Xisn. Cyr. 5, 4, 30). OiiSlv irposStojitQa ovre 'O/J^pou kvaivkrov oire 'oQTig tinai rb aiiTiKa TspipH (Thuc. 2, 41). b) After iariv (without indefinite pronoun, § 102, b. Rem. 1), but mostly after a negative, or in a question equivalent to a negation : oV'EWriveg kirei vpotdouv tA dpixara ipsp6fi£vay StiffravTO' tort Sk 'oQTig Kal KaTsXrj^dr], uigTrsp kv lirTTodpofn^, kKirXayeig (Xen. An. 1, 8, 20). EiVs /jof tanv ojignvag dvOpitiruv Ti9avp,aKag etti tro0t^ ; (Xen. An. I, 4, 2 ; with unchanged inTiv, as in tanv o'l). "Eariv otij> dWif irXtm kmrpkirug 'rj ry yvvaiKL i (Xen. CEcon. 3, 12.) Rem. Especially note the expression oiihig o'ens ov (oiSiv o,n oii), with omitted IdTiv, in the sense every, all: Kal tteJAc kuI vrjtg nal oiiSiv o,ri oiik ajriiXiro (Thuc. 7,87). The origin of the phrase being forgotten, it is treated as one word, and oito's conforms itself in case to the following ogng : 'ATroXKoSiopog KXaiuv sai dyavaKr&v ovSkva 'ovTiva oi KariKXaat r&v irapovruiv (PL Phced. 117). OiiStvbg otov oil iravriav dv vfiiav Kaff iiXwiav 7rarr)p eii/v (PI. Prat. 317). SmKpdrrjg wapsx" savrbv ipmrdv Ttav 'EWj/j/wr Tt^ ^ovXofiev(p Kal ovSevI onp oi}K diroKpiviTai (PI. Jl^enon. 70) ^ c) After ovT(ag in negations, or questions equivalent to such : Tig oiirw /laivtrai, ogTig oij (iovXsTai aol ipiXog ilvai ; (Xen. An. 2, 5, 12.) (Also og : Ovdtlg dv ykvoiTo ovTb>g dSajidvTivog, og dv nUvsuv iv ry diKaioaivy, PI. Hep. 2, 360.) d) In relative sentences which single out, in a definite subject, a particular quality, or a particular circumstance, as the ground or explanation of what precedes (quippe qui, a person who — , one who — ) : IliSf ov Kaxiarog dirdvTiav dvOpilnriuv SiKatmg dv vo/iiioto, ogrig, w Kardparc, Trtpi vXtiovog ^aivy Toiig KaKovpyovg ■jrowvp.tvog rijg ■narplSog ; (Dem. 24, 107.) OuKOUj' SiKa'uitg (lirviyov at Kal ivkxpi^ov), ogrig oiiK 'Evpnridtjv kvaivtig ; (Arist. Nub. 1377.) (In the same sense often og, og yt, Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 15 ; PI. Phced. 96, &c.) Rem. Otherwise o'sris for og is found only in single, in part uncertain, passages of the poets and Herodotus. Yet i| oVou is used as k^ otJ (J 103, R. 3) with attraction (Xen. An, 7, 8, 4). The relative adjectives oiocj ooroe, iiXikoc in the accusative are § attracted into the dative or genitive in the same manner as tie : MjjSwi;, 106. OfTWV IwpOKa, TToXu OVTOQ 6 iflOQ TTOTTTTOe KaXXlSTOg {XeU. Ct/V. 1, 3, 2). Totaurae kiriSoaug al woXeig ov Xaju/Sdvoufftv, rjv firj tiq aiirap SioiKy ' Oidands oiriag (s atifiaivuv airif (to let him [Cyrus] know), biroTi (crX. (Xen.) 3. Now and then, even a^iaiv avrolg, (!liivog, ovg oi ' ABrivaloi irpoTrape/SaXoiTO aipiaiv (7%.). — 2) ^vvk(paadv-oi, Kai kt\. (^Xen.), 5. "Eauroi; (airoC) sometimes refer to the^rst or second person. Ovria iraiSiicig Toig iavrije fiXovg (amicos tuos, Xen.). MrjStv kTriSiiKvig tuiv kavTov (rerum mearum: Isocr.), 6. When it is sufficiently understood from the context that the action is mutual, the cases of the reflexive pronouns {kavrov, &c.) are used for those of the reciprocal dXX^XiDv (especially when the opposed notion is others). ^Bovovaiv kavroXg fidWov fi Tolg aXXoig dvBpunroig (Xen,). ' ToioSroi elaiv ol Troropoi, di o'iag dv Kal Trig y^Q pkioaiv (PI, Phced. 1 12, i. e. as the land through which). 2 Principally from Kriiger. PART II. THE RELATIONS OF PROPOSITIONS ONE TO ANOTHER, ESPECIALLY THE WAY OF DENOTING THE MODE OR MANNER OF PREDICATION, AND THE TIME OF THE THING PREDICATED. CHAPTER I, The Moods in general, and especially the Indicative and its Tenses : the Indicative ivith av. To denote the relations of propositions, the Greeks have four personal § and definite moods : the indicativej the subjunctive (conjunctive), the 107. optative, and the imperative, of which the subjunctive and optative are related in point of conception ; and besides these, the infinitive and the participle. Both to the indicative (in certain tenses) and to the optative, as also to the infinitive and the participle, may be annexed the particle av (Ionic and Epic kI and kev), to denote what is predicated upon the assumption of something being so and so, which is not actually so and so. The same particle, moreover, attaches itself to relative words (oe av, 6rav, &c.), and takes the subjunctive to denote an indefinite contingency. The Indicative is the mood in which a thing is predicated abso- § lutely, without any accessory modifications, or in which a thing is 108. enquired about in the same way. It therefore stands in all both (331, principal and accessory propositions, where no special rules, to be ^^^^ presently described, demand a different mood. 'O Trar^p riBv-qKiv. UoOev iiKSig ; Aeyovaiv, on ^ iroXig ^'pTjrat wro tCiv ifoXefiiwv. Uoir)- Tta ravTtt, hrii vfiiv SoKii, Tovtov I'veko oiic fiXOov, liri ipfSeii; to yivti- aofjieva. El Oio\ Ettrt'v, eoti koi apya dsQv. Ei fiiv Oiov vibg ^v 'AitkXij- 88 PART ir. CHAP. I. [§ 109, 110. inli "'"'f' """^ ^'^ ola^poKEpSrig, d Se alaxpoKipSrig, ovk ^v 6eov {PI. Rep. 3, ■■' 408. A simply conditional proposition, without any accompanying regard to the condition as actually obtaining or not). 'OXoijurjv, si TOVTO JTETTOirjKa. El jujjSev eTTiTroiriKEig, ri s^o^ov ; Rem. In some kinds of dependent propositions, wliich, especially in Latin, are expressed in the subjunctive, the indicative is retained in Greek: on this see at end of Chapter III. § The principal times, together with imperfect, plusquamperfect, and 109. future perf. passive, are expressed in Greek by the simple tenses of the verbs, and only in some passive forms by corresponding com- posite forms. To denote other relations of time, there are peri- phrastic combinations of the perf. participle with the tenses of alfii, or of fieXXu), am about, with the infinitive. § a) The Present Tense is used of that which is, or is conceived to be, 110, now present : 'Ouokoyd rovroie "Ourjpoe- (334) „ n, ^ (234, Rem. 1. The present is often used of that which has been for some time, and R.) still is, going on, especially with vraXai [where we used our progressive form for the perf. have been — ing] : lidXai tovto (fKoirw. Ov TrdXai col Xeyw, Sri ravrov 0ij/it Aval TO ^bXtwv Kal to (cptirroj/ ; (PI. Gorg. 489.) DoXXd vSri (.tti iv 'A9rivatQ okeiTe. Rem. 2. The present of certain verbs denotes, by an idiom of the language, either generally or in certain special senses, the past action as still going on, or still continued in its result ; e. g. jJkm, am come, ipwyo), am in exile, oixo/iai, am gone : oTSa, 'oirr) oIxovtm (^Xen. An. I, 4, 8). (So sometimes : aSmSi, am in the wrong in what I have done, dTrotrrepai, am keeping a person out of possession of — , vikS, am conqueror, have conquered: 'ATrayykXKtTt 'Apiaiif, 'on fifiUQ yi viK&fiiv ^aaiKka Kai ovdug ert yifiiv fidxsTai, JCen. An, 2, 1, 4.) Rem. 3. Sometimes the present is put for the future, in speaking of being about to do something immediately : Ei ^i/ik toiovtov ti elvat, SuKdriii xai vapaaxe, Kayij Kara^alvii) (JDem. 19, 32). (El/ii, livai, Iwv, present and future.) • (336) b) In lively connected narrative the prmsens historicum is often used : ^EirsiSrj Se iTeXevrtjere Aapsiog kol Kariarri Etc rTjv fiaaiXdav 'Apra^cp^rie, Tfo-o-a^lpi'i)? Sia^dXXu tov Kvpov irpof tov a.iiX(p6v, wq eirijiovXavoL avrt^- 6 St iruBiTai re Koi avXXafifdavEi Kvpov wg airoKre- vwv {Xen. An. 1, 1, 3). (336, K,EM. More rarely in the protasis with ivtiSi} : 'Eiriih) Sk AiKaioyivriQ oidrt R. 1) i/iae Sivarai llairaTav, TreiBu ileveUvov ruidg TrpoSovvai {IscB. 5, 13), or in stating an individual fact : Aapciov kuI napvadnSoe yiyvovrai iraiSte Sio {Xen. An, I, 1, 1, there were born to D. and P. — ; D. and P, had two sons). But the poets often put the present for the aorist even in speaking of a single fact : Ti's /i kicfiajipoTiiv i (Soph. (Ed, R. 437.) AwvvaoQ, 'bv tUtu ttoS' ij Ka^/jou Kopjj (^Eur. Bacch. 2). § 111.] ' THE INDICATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 89 In the past the Greek distinguishes two states : the narrative, § denoted by the aorist, and the absolute (in English, have, am), de- 111. noted by the perfect \ The Aorist is used in accounts and narratives of past occurrences, (335, in historical connexion, or in stating a past occurrence, without rela- °) tion to the present and a present result : Uavaaviaq 6 KXtofifiporov iK AoKsSaifiovog oTjoarjjyoe viro 'EXXrivfov i^etrififdn) fitra iiKoai viwv airo riEXoTrovvjjcrou' IuvettAeov Si icai 'A0?)vaToi rpiaKovro vaval Koi IdTp ar tv aav If Kinrpov koi avrriQ to ttoXXo KorEOTpE- 4'avTO [Thuc. 1, 49. Of tweirXsov, see § 113). 'Qg ridpoladri Kvptjf TO 'EXXtivjkov (the Grecian troops), ore Itti tov aSiXfov 'Apra- ^Eo^ijv EtrrpaTEUETO, KOt oaa ev ry avoBo^ iTrpa\6i} koi wq ri fiaxv iytviro Kol wg 6 Kvjooe Er£X£iirj)(7EVj kv t(^ ifnrpoadtv A6y(^ §ESjjXa)Tai (Xen. An. 2, 1, 1. On SsBriXwrai, see § 112). Ov/xog irarfip KiijtaXog tTniadri fiiv viro JIepikXeovc e? Tavrriv t^v yfiv afiKiadai, tri) Bi TpiUKOvra i^Ktiaiv (Lys. 12, 1). 'Q,g (ettei) EtSoi' tov waTipa, riairaaafiriv. {See Plusquam- perf., § 114 c.) IloXXot noXeig eTrsicrav ttoXejuov apaaOai Trpbg tov- Tovg, v^' S)v oi irnadivTEQ aTrwXoiro [Xen. Cyr, 1, 6, 45 ; of that ■which has sometimes happened : Many a time (ere now) have states let themselves be persuaded — ). . "HSt| Se koI Tiva oiik WiXovTa aviara- adai aXXa Trpo'Ufiavov avTov rolg woXsfiioig koi tTraiaa Kat ifdtaarafxriv TTopEvscfBai (Xen. An. 5, 8, 14. It has happened now and then that I-)- Rem. The Aorist is sometimes used in a somewhat peculiar manner : a) The Aorist is used of that which has often happened, and consequently (in (335, cases singly occurring) is wont to happen ; in which sense it may then be found R.3) coupled with the present (which expresses the general relation absolutely) : Tag r&v ipav\b)V ffvvovffiag dXiyog ^pdvog S teXva s, rag Sk rSiv GTrovSaiMV ^O^iiag ovS' av o irag altav k^aXsbJ/tisv {Isoci'. Hem. 1). 'O rvpavvog ToXg ]ilv Trpwrai? rjiik^aig irpOiyEK^ T£ Kof ctairaZiTat Travrag iiriaxvuTai re iroXXd Kai iSif Kai Sriiioaiif, ^ptSiv Tt ■^\ev9ep ojae Kai y^v disviine irjjiif re Km rolg iripl iavriv Kai iraaiv 'iXtijiQ re Kai wpaog iivai irgogiroiiiTai (PL Rep. 8, 566). "Orav wfiffi ra-brcL avii^kpy TOtg fi€TSxovfft rov ffoXe/*ou, Kat trvfiiroviiv Kai ipkpeiv Tag ffvfi^opag Kai fikvtiv ^SsXout atv oi avSpiiiirot' orav S' Ik TrXtove^iag Kai irovtipiag ng dgirep ^/iXiirvog iaxiay, ri irpiirri irpo^aaig Kai juKphv irrdiaiia Hjiavra avixalrusi Kai SiiXvacv (Dem. 2, 9). b) The first person of the aorist is sometimes applied to the expression of one's state of mind by words or gestures, occurring at the moment of speaking (the past tense referring to the preceding emotion which is in the speaker's thoughts) : 'Q 'yaBi, Kai airbg IjiiauroB vvv Si/ Kariyi\a)vae S(aj3Ej3Xj)KE KOI TravTag rpoirovg TEraAanrwpjjKEv {Isocr. de Pac. 19). 'O Sijfiog ry ^ovXy TToXXoKig ttjv iroXiTeiav kyKtxsiptKtv {Dein. 1, 9). Rem. 1. Sometimes it makes little difference, whether a thing is denoted as a result, in reference to the present (perfect), or whether it is simply represented as an action and occurrence of the past (aorist). iKviLTO TWV TTapd l3a(7iXiwg TTpog K5pov, TTavTug ovtw SiaTiOdg aircTrifi- TTiTO wgB^ iavTw fxaXXov (ptXovg elvai rj jSofftXEi. Kai twv Trap iavTtJ^ jSap- § 114.] THE INDICATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 91 ^apuv ettsjueXeito, bigvokefiitv iKavol c'lnaav. T?)v Se 'EXXijvikjjw Svvajuiv t§ ijOpoi^Ev wg juaXtora eSuvoto E7rtiC|0«7rTOjU£voej k.t.X. (Xew. An. 1, 1, 5 ; '-' in the description of Cyrus's preparations for the war with Arta- xerxes). liXlap-)(og Aa/cESaijuovtoc (pvyag ^v. Tovrt^ (rvyyivofiEvoc 6 Kupoc riyaaOri te koi Sidwaiv avri^' fjivpiovg AapuKOvg' 6 8e XajSoiv to Xpvaiov aTparevfia (tuveXe^ev otto twv xpii^o^wv icai sTToXEjUEt ek riEXoTTOvvijorow op/xwfiivog role 0p?Si koI u^^Xei tovc "EXXtivoc {Xen. An. 1, 1, 9 ; was still carrying on the war, at the time in ques- tion}. Kpirtae Kai 'A\KtjiidS7]Q qijK dpstTKOvroc aiiroiQ SwirpaTOUC ( = oifx ore rjpsaKsv aiiToiQ SwKparijs) i>iiiKrii/ov7ia£ iTrpa^aro, .^en. Mem. 1,2,60; never once demanded). Kopiv0ioi oiiiv tovtuiv iirriicovov (Thuc. 1,29; said of their state of mind as a whole, not of a single determination). Rem. I. Sometimes the imperfect denotes something about to be done, what a person was going ov proposing to do : 'Hylffrparog Karafidg Trjg vvktoq Etc koiKtjv vavv SiiKoirre tov irXoiov ri iSaijioe (JDem. 3^, 5, was beginning to cut through — ; he was hindered from doing it). 9>iXi7r»roe 'AXovvritrov iSiSov, Ajj/uoffSlvi/e Si aTrtjyopevc ;ti) Xa/ifSdviLV (^^sch., 3, 83, was/or giving, offered to give. — And so iSiSow is fre- quently used). {"EvuSov, I sought to persuade, tiriiaa, I persuaded.) 'Hv a^toc dyuv, OTt oiixt 'AOrjvaiiuv ftovov ot ^vpaKovaioi TrepuyiyvovTO dWd Kai rwv aXXwr Svin/iax'^v (Thuc. 7, 56, had the prospect of conquering — ). Aid ravra oX Aamoai- fjLoVLOi iiTOii\cavTO ryv ^viifiaxiav Kai to Udi'aKrov evOiig KaOypiiro (JThuc, 5, 39, and they immediately were beginning to pull down — , proceeded to pull down). Kem. 2. Sometimes (especially by Herodot. and Thucyd.) in continued narra- tive, an imperfect is used with but little difference from the aorist, the action being denoted as the beginning of one or more undertakings, or as a proceeding of longer duration : Touro troii)aavTiQ oi nXaraitis ££ te rdc 'ABrivag dyyiKov iittji- TTOV (set about sending) Kai Toie viKpove viroairovSovQ direSoaav toTq 6i){Saioig rd T iv ry vSXh KaBiaravTO irpbg rd itapovra, y iddxti avToXg (Thuc. 2, 6). naptX- BovTfc ol 'A6iji'aio« fXtyov ToidSi (Thuc. 1, 72 ; but ch. 67, HapcXBovrts Si ot Kopiv- 6iot eIttov roid^E). Toiavra dr) dipiKOVTO dtaXeyojuEVOt fi^XP^ "^^^ opitov ttjq Ilepaidog' iirti Sk aiiToXg derbg de^ibs ^avsig Trpoj/ytTro, Trpogev^dfiivoi Qeoit; Kai ijptixri roig Hep- atSa yijv KaTexovaiv oiirii) Siijiaivov rd Spia (set about crossing — ; proceeded to cross). 'EveiSr) Sk dd/iriaav, irpogev xovto aiStg GtoXg roXg MtiSiav yijv Kar- ixovaiv {Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 1). [So especially verbs ^/uientij et mittendi: irin'rruv, dwo- tTrlXXeiv, keXevcii', po>]6iXv, &c., Schmidt.] The imperfects jfiv (ya), ^kov, and l^iyv {inquam) are used at the same time in the aorist sense. Rem. 3. The imperfect r)v is sometimes found where we might expect the present, in reference to an earlier condition, or an earlier appearance : Gi dpa rd i^iiXoitiva tKaaTif diroSiSovat ptjai ti£ diKaiov ilvai, rovro Sh 5r/ voeX airif (has for him the meaning), rote l^iv ixSpoij ^Xd^riv 6peiXia6ai irapd tov fiKaiov dvdpdg, toXq Si 0iXotj u^lXciai', oiiK r\v aopbg 6 tovto dirutv (PI. Rep. 1 , 335 ; viz. as he before seemed to us to be). IloXXoi dvdptuTrot dvo6vt]aKovai vpoTcpov irpiv SrjXoi yevia9ai, olot r)aav (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 9). . a) The Plv,squamperfectum is used of that which at a certain past 114. 93 PART II. CHAP. I. [§,114. L§ time had already taken place : 'H Olvojf, oiktu iv fisOopioig Trig 'Arrt- ■■' Kijc Kot Boiioriag, trtTE^Xidro koi avTt^ ippovpi^) oi ''Adr\vaioi Ix^iiivro {Thuc. 2, 18). b) Instead of the simple plusquamperf. in the active, we have sometimes a periphrastic expression by the participle perf. with ^V. OvTTW Suo 77 rpetg Spofiovg mpiEXriXvOoTE iJoTriv o Eiitfwoij/ioe icat o AiovvaoBoypog, sat tlgipxiTat K Aft viae {PL Euthyd. 273). c) When by means of the conjunctions Iitei, etthSi? (Ionic lini te), after that, or iig, lohen [lag Taxiara), it is denoted that one action fol- lowed upon another, usually not the plusquamperf. is employed but the aorist, or, if a state and continued relation be denoted, the imper- fect : 'ETTEtS)} IriKivTrjai Aaptiog Koi KarkaTi] ug rijv (iaaiXsiav 'Apra- ^EjO^jje, Tii(Tap£voi tovtwv Oavarov t(jut)(tet£, TrJ avT-^ 4'^ Toig ts aXXoue KoapiuTcpovQ iroir]aiTt ij vvv ilai, koI irapa tovtiiiv oikt/v EtArj- ^orte itricrde [Lys. 27, 7). Ei irapcXdwv slg oqtiqovv SvvaiTO SiSd^ai, Tig irapacTKevri ■)(pricnpos 'iarai ry ttoXu, irag 6 irapuv (jiofjog XeXvairai {Dem. 14, 2). Ti yap Trovnati (6 Otog) ; ^pate, koI viirpa^iTat. {Arist. PL 1027). Marnv pot KeKXavatrai {Arist. Nub. 1436 ; in vain shall I have wept) . (T^c SwdfUUQ ^fiSv tie atSiov toXs iiriyiyvo/iivoie livfiixt] KaTa\t\ei\piTai, Time. 2, 64 ; of a future action conceived of as an abiding result^ • Rem. In those verbs in vrhich the perfect middle has the signification of the present (§ 112, R. 2), the fut. exact, has the signification of the simple future : lic/ivi'iaofiai, KiKTriao/iai (shall possess, different from KTTjuofiai, shall acquire^, kikXti- aofiat (shall have the name'). Likewise two others (dpriaonai, hSrtaojiai). The verb piXXu) with the infinitive of the future or present, rarely 5 of the aorist, forms a peculiar mode of denoting the future as some- ug. thing which one has at this present time in hand, and is about to do (341 ,' [futurum in prasenti), which notation by means of the imperfect 342) (ripiXXov) is applied to the past [futurum in prteferito) : MAXw vpag Si^a^Hv, o6iV poi 7) Sia(3oXfi yiyoviv [PL ApoL 21). 'Evcdvpovvro oi "EXXrivsg, on ayopav ovSiig tri irapi^eiv ^peXXcv [Xen. An. 3, 1, 2). • Sifecero, kd.v iroiriaia, see Subjunctive. 94 PART II. CHAP. I. [§ 117. [§ 'Akouw Tiva SiajiaXXeiv, wg eyb) apa tSan-arijirac v/xiaQ /itXXw aysiv ilg ^^^■■^ ^aaiv (Xen. An. 5, 7, 5y. Rem. 1. Especially frequent li fieXXw, if I am to — , and 6 fiiWuiv, he that would, in denoting that which must be done in order to secure some object : Aei arpariav, ti jikWu irpa^iiv t& Siovra, firiSiiroTt ■jtaitaBai toiq itokEjiioiQ Kaxd, Tropaivovaav {Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 17). T6v fieXKovra t-i yeupyijanv Sit roig ipydraq Kai irpodifiovQ vapaaKtvaZtiv Kai TrtWiaSai BiXovTag (^Xen. CEcon. 5, 15). But also 'AvSpuov Sil ilvai t6v evytvij veaviiTKov, etTTtp iv fiaxiirai (^PL Rep. 2, 373). Rem. 2. Of the simple indicative future (not fut. in prnteriio) instead of the optative in propositions dependent on a verb in the preterite, see Optative, § 1 30, b. R. 2. § a) With the addition of av the imperfect, aorist, and sometimes 117. plusquamperf. of the indicative is used to predicate something which, (347) under the supposition of a certain condition, would find (or have found) place, but which does not do so, because the condition does not exist. The condition is expressed in the indicative with el. Of that which, as it is, does not find place, but would do so, and of a condi- tion assumed in opposition to the actual present state of the case, the imperfect is used {d idvvafiriv, kiroiow av) ; if the condition and condi- tional result, under the same supposition, belong to the past, both of them stand in the aorist (ti sKsXevaag, iTroiTjtra av, ti firj ekeXeuo-oc, oiik av ETTotJitra). The plusquamperf. with av in conditional propositions, is used only when an action (then or now) completed, and a state which has (then or now) ended, is meant to be denoted. (A plusquamperf. having the sense of the imperf. is used as imperf., e. g. el yBeiv, eXe- yov av.) The time in the conditional, and that in the principal, pro- position, may difier according to the sense. (There can rarely be occasion to use the plusquamperf. in both clauses.) E'l ri efiov exriSov, oiiSevoQ av ovtwq fi aTroarepuv E^uXarrou, iiQ a^iwfiarog Koi rtjujje {Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 34). Oix ovrwg av TrpoOviiwg ini tov ttoXejuov Vfiag irapeKaXovv, el firj r^v elprivriv laip(i>v ek toi; TroXi/xov KaXfjv koI fdefiaiav yevr\;Xi6io£ om SiXaKiliv ^aivea9ai role avvovatv l/3owX6ro' kS6KH S' dv ajitpoTifa ravTa, ei Trpoayopivwv (if arrb 6tov ^aivdjuci/a i/'roSd/icvof itjiaiveTO. AijXov ovv, 'oTi oiiK av wpolXcytj/, li /ui) IviffTtvtv AXriBiiativ {Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 6). 'Eycu ixSiQ, (I jifi TToXXoTff SienvKTtvaa, oix dv iSwajiiiv ffoi TrpogiWilv {Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 53). AivovTCQ rdg Tatsie irfioBkovTeg apirdZetv ijSiXov xal ruidv vXtovcKTsiv' el Sk rovTO iravreg kirotovficv, UvavTce av diriaXoneda {Xen. An. 5, 8, 13). The aorist is put instead of the imperfect in the principal proposition only when, with less accuracy, the relation is referred to the past or to a different time : Ei fikv rb a&iia iviTpiirtw ae eSu t({1, StaKivSwevovra ^ xpfjorAv avrb ycvia9ai ri irovripSv, ttoXXA. dv TTEpiciTKEi/'bi, 6ir' IjTtTpETrreow Eire oS, Kal ti's av/i^ovX'^v roig tc ^iXovg dv TrapcKaXfig Kal Toig oiKeiovQ, OKonovfiivog r/itipag avxvag, 8 Sk itcpi vXtiovog toS ato/iaTOg riyii, rijv \j/vxvv> Tfpt Si tovtov oirt xv Trarpi ovrt T(p &SeXfv, ^vvcyiyviiaKtre Sijirov dv /iot, ti iv iKtivy ry (jiiavy re Kai Tip rpdir^) EXeyoj/, iv olfTrtp irtOpdiijiiiv {PI. Apol. 17). Ei irXovTif Kai KepStt apiara iKpivero rd Kpivofieva, d ivyvii 6 piXoKtpSijg Kai l^iytv, dvayKT) av ravra dXri- didTara tlvai {Pi. Sep. 9, 382). ''SLikiag dv KaXXiKXei in SitXtyofiiiv, siag avrif rrjv Tov ' An^'mvoQ direiuiKa prjaiv dvH T^g rov ZrjOov {PL Gorg. 506). 'Exprjv roiig pi]TopaQ fir) irpdrepov wspi tSiv o/ioXoyovfiiviav av/iliovXeviiv, irpiv irepi tSiv o^^ig/Sij- Tov/isviav fjudg kSilaiav {Isocr. Paneg. 19). b) The condition which does not obtain, is not always expressed in a proposition of its own, but may be given in a different turn of expression, or be implied in the context of the passage as a whole : Booe iXovTcg (TWfia, avupunrov 0£ yvw/Jiriv, ouk av riSvvaniOa ttouiv a ifiovXofitOa {Xen.' Mem. 1, 4, 14). "Qgn cnnXdaai XaXSaiovg awb rovTwv T(ov aKp(i)v {in order to expel), iroWaTrXafna av iSioKa xpVf^aTa (5v av vvv 6X"? "■"P' ^z""" {Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 16; I would have given), SiEvoe oiSele cKplKTUi j^povou paK0tji&piiiv Siarroptvo- luvog, inroTt itpog^Xk^tu Tivag tS>v iv Tolg rditai, TOTi fiiv Atnv dv' (would say) ""Q dvSptg, oif riiii vjiiov rd irpogtoira BidaaaBai' rori S' aS iv a\Xoi£ IXc^ev' 'Apa IvvouTS, dvSpeg, k. r. X. (Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 10.) ' AvaXafijSdvtav ovv tCjv rpaytfidoiroiSiv Kai TSiV BtQvpap.^O'iroLtitv Ta TroirnxaTa, d /tot kSoKH fidXiffTa TTSTTpayfiaTSvadat, Jii/pwrwv dv aiiTovQ, Ti Xkyouv (PI. Apol, 22). I In some cases, however, the apodosis has the imperfect without dv, although , ,% depending on a condition which is intimated as not existing. (348) a) In speaking of what in a certain case in the past or present would be right, suitable, allowable, &c., but was not done, or is not done, the imperfects ^XP^") wpogrJKev, iSn, f)p/torni' (KaXSig iTxiv), klfiv (rtv, virtipxtv), and adjectives (also § 118.] THE INDICATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 97 gerundives) with rjv (kAXKiov, SiKawv, Bpeirrov), are put without Sv, in order to denote [§ the duty or proper conduct unconditionally. Ei livavrtQ w/joXoyoB^Ev kcTaTa 'Iwviav Kai ^EWrjgTTOVTOv svBig dxov o^ ^roXsjuiot, kwXvttjq 'AXKilStddrjQ kykvero (Thuc. 8, 86). Ourc wg d-KOKTHvaitv oi Qtoi rb rStv dvQpuiTotv ysvog, elxov — ai Tiftal yap airoXg Kal t& Upa rd -jrapd rStv dvQptjiinjiv ri^avi^iTO — ovffoinag ii^tv d(jikyai,viiv(Pl. Conv. 190). Tavra jrpafac (had I done this — , by such actions), R oirog fiov KarijyopeT, iKiphaivov ftiv ovSkv, ifiavrbv o' tig Kii/lvvav Kadlartiv (Lys. 7, 32). ('Hv is also now and then put, without this meaning, for ijv av (wouldhave been), the hypothetical being rhetorically repre- sented as actual : Mtrd t^v iidxiv tiOig 6 Stj/iog, Iv avToXgroig Seivoig E/i/3f]3))KW£, f/viK oiS' dyvuiiovrjirai ti Bavjiaarbv r/v Toig »roXXoii£ irpbg kfik, jrcpt auTtjpiag rrjg w6\eii)g rag i/tde yviifiag ix^ipoTovu, Dein. 18, 248. Other omissions of dv are very ques- tionable.) ^ Rem. 1. Of W tlxov (that I might have) without dv (hypothetical ^na/ sentence) see Optative, § 131 b. R. 3. Rem. 2. The aorist with oXiyov, within a little, almost, always without dv : 'OXiyov lijjirarijffdc /i£ (PI. Meno, 80). Rem. 3. The present and perfect indicative never take dv. In the older poetical language (Homer, Pindar, Choral Odes) occasionally dv (ksv) occurs with the future indicative by a mixture of a simple mode of assertion with a dubitative (Pres. or Aor. Optat. with av). In Attic writers (except in Choral Odes) this usage is very questionable. Rem. 4. On the place of dv, its repetition, &c., see Optative with dv, § 139. ' 'HPovXoiiriv now and then for ^PovXoixriv dv (e. g, Arist, Ban. 866). ® 'H TToXiQ kKivSivsvffe Trdaa 8ia(p6apiivai, ei dvejing ^TTfytvero ry fj)Xoyi, Thuc, 3, 74. '^Kivivvtvas stands unconditionally ( — and would have been ruined, if — ). Oi ydp Sif trou GOV ye oifdev riuv aXXwi- Trgptrrorcpov irpayiiarevofisvov eireira rotrairrj 0}/juij re Kal Xoyoc yiyovev, ti firi Ti eirpaTTtg aXXoTov ri o'l dXXoi (PI. Apol. 20. A mixture of an unconditional expression : has not arisen without thy doing — ', and a conditional, if thou didst not — ). H 98 PART II. CHAP. II. [§ 119, 120. CHAPTER II. The Subjunctive {Conjunctive) and its Tenses. S Both in the Subjunctive and in the Optative an action or state is put 119. as a conception presented to the speaker's mind, without his at the (34t>) same time enunciating it as real : but the subjunctive denotes the thing as said in reference to present or future time, and to reality, as something demanded, or as something purposed and aimed at, or as a case of possible occurrence ; whereas the optative denotes it either in reference to the past, as something that was once purposed and aimed at, or a case conceived as having occurred in the past, or also as a quite indefinite possibility' (as a wish, or dubitatively with av). The Greeks, however, in certain kinds of dependent propositions, not unfrequently omit to intimate the reference to the past, so that the subjunctive is put for the optative (but never conversely). In other kinds of dependent propositions, where the optative should stand, it not unfrequently happens, that the relation is left unmarked and the indicative is used. Rem. The subjunctive and optative are far from being constantly used in all sorts of dependent propositions which denote something merely conceived and thought ; they are employed only where a need had been felt for denoting this, while in others the speaker, not caring to denote this, uses the indicative (see after Optative, at the end of chapter 3). In certain kinds of subordinate proposi- tions, e.g. in object-sentences with oVi and wg, or in dependent interrogative sentences, the modi6cation is not denoted, when they belong to a governing sen- tence in the present or future (they stand therefore in the indicative, not in the subjunctive) ; but is denoted, when the tense used in the governing sentence is a prcEteritum (then they stand in the optative). With less exact accuracy, and by reason of a certain liveliness in the expression, it sometimes happens, that, some« thing which is part pf a conception belonging to the past, is put as part of a conception belonging to the present, and so the optative passes into the subjunc- tive, or (where this is not used) into the indicative, without in any remarkable way affecting the thought. I a) The Subjunctive in the first person (in the singular not usually 120, without a preceding ^Ips or ays) is used in exhortation and demand, (352 a, affirmatively, or with the negation fii). "Iwjuev. Mjj ipojioifisBa. i ' Sri, Tcig naprvplaQ vfiiv avayvb) [Dem. 18, 267). fl>£pc Sri koi oirovg avTog iXvaafiriv twv ai)(^fiaXwTwv, uirw Trpog vjuac {Dem, 19, 169). b) In the second and third person, the aorist of the subjunctive stands with fifi in prohibitions : Mjj iroiriayQ tovto. See Imperative, J 142. § ISl.^. THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND ITS TENSES. 99 Rem. Rarely, and poetically, jujj is used with the first person, in praying that something may not befall the .speaker : 'AWd ji ik Trjgde yijg iropOijievaov iig T&xiaTa n-qS' airov 9ava (Soph. JVach. 801). Stibj, dubitativus.] The subjunctive is used in simple interrogations § or in doubting questions (expressive of disapprobation, displeasure, ^^l- denial), of that which shall come to pass, is to be done (what one is ^^^^^ challenged to do, what one is required to do by the will of another, what can and shall be done), both when they are direct, and when they are dependent on a leading verb in the present or future ' : Ti (t) ; Ti opdj ; Tlu)Q ovv Srj wepX avruiv rovriov Xiyiofxsv koX ttwc notiiifiev ; (i'i- Phil. 63.) AoKet xprivai, S) 'Epu^i/xaXE ; imdHinai ti^ avdpi KOi riixwpr\(iia)fiai vfxwv ivavriov ; {PI. Conv. 214.) Ai^iude rifxae ri airiw- nev, (PI. Conv, 212. Will ye receive its, or are we to go away?) Iva nvv rpioKOVTa avBpoiiroi Xeirovpyriawaiv rifxlv, tovq cnravrag airlg- TWQ irpoQ rifiag aiiTOvg SiaOiofjisv ; (Dem. 20, 22.) 'Apft, e^jj 6 SwKjOarije, fxi) alarx^uvdw/xev rbv Ilsjjffwv jSamXea (iifinaaaQai ; [Xen. CEcon. 4, 4.) ndOev ovv TiQ ap^tjTai, iroXXfic oi)(tt)c TrejJt to afi(j)iQBt]rovfxeva jua^lC ! (PI. Phil, 15.) 'Tivog EVEKa e^' ■}]jiu)v TtpojTov KaTaSii^dy toiovtov ipyov ; (Dem. 20, 117 ; why is such a deed to be done for the first time m our days ?) — ^Aimpw, rriv t aSe\riv ottwq IkSw koi toXX' bvoOiv - SioiKio {Dem.27, 66). BovXevofiat, wiog (T£ airoSpio (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 13). OiiK e'xw, oTTwg aoi eI'ttoi a vouj (PI, Euthyph. 11). 01 KaTrtjXot ^pov- Tuiovaiv, o,Ti iXaTTovoQ TTQiafxtvoi TrXiiovoc airoSwvTai (Xen. Mem. 3, 7, 6). Td EKTTWjuara ovk oIS' ft Xjouoravr^ rovrt^ Sw, ettei koi rrjv 'iSpav (TOW v(j)tipira o, ti (6) with the subjunctive often occur in the sense, have something (nothing) to — .' OiiSfv SoJicparEi StoicEi, lav fiovov £j(^, otoj) StaXtyiirai (PI. Conv. 194: somebody to converse with). 'EKorEpot s\nv(jiv e^' oIq fiXoTifiridbiatv. Isocr. Paneg. 44.) Rem. I. When the speaker is less concerned to mark the notion of requirement (the is to be), it is not unfrequently omitted, and such a question, whether direct or indirect, is put in the indicative future (as a question what will happen) : Ti ovv 'iroiiitTOftev ; wdrtpov bIq ttjv TroXiy iravras tovtovq irapaSt^onitia jj Toiig /iiv, tovq S" oi ; (P/. Hep. 8, 397.) ^Ap' ovv BriaojxtQa vojiov 5id ravra firtSk ri Xoiirbv i^etvai ry ^ov\y ftriSi Tip Siifiip iii)Tt xpojSouXEVEti' /i)(rf xiipoToviiv firjlkv ; (JDem. 20, 4 ; shall we make a law ?) OiiK ix^Tt, olp,ai, o, n Troirjixfre {Dem. 8, 32). Hence the phrase is either oiiK tx<^, 'o,ti xpiiaiaiiai. Tip av9pi!>irip, Tip &pyvpiip (what to do' with — ), or, sometimes xf>V'^'>h'"- (Eijrw^tv f; myCipiv, ?j tc Spaaoptv ; Eur. Ion, 758. 'AjiiK- Xfij/rot, oTTorepoi ^BriirovTai Ttjv v6\iv ayaBov ti iroiriiiavTiQ, Isocr. Paneg. 79.) Rem. 2. In deliberating with oneself or others what to do (say, think) now ' Viz. regularly ; of the subjunctive instead of the optative after a leading verb in a praeteritum (§ 119, R.), see Optative, § 130 b, and also the following §§. h2 100 PART II. CHAP. II. [§ 133. [§ immediately, the question is sometimes put in the first person of the present 121.] indicative : IliSe ovv, u> 'AXKi^idSri, nowvu^v ; oinig ovre rt \iyoiJ.ev ivi ry k«\ibi our' tirq.^ofxtVy aXK' dr&x'^^^ itiQirep oi 5t}pbjVT£g iri6jxt9a ; (P/. Conv, 214, What do we then, Alcibiades f Directly afterwards we have ' AXXii H ■KoiSiynv;) Rem. 3. Of the dubitative question in the optative with av, see Optative, § 136. § The subjunctive stands in propositions of intention [final sentences) 133. with the conjunctions Iva, wg (poet, o^po), o-n-ui^, in order that i^ivafxr], (355) j,^ ^,'j^ oTTwe (uj), sometimes simply fxri, that — not ; lest) after a governing verb in the present or future. 'Qg and oVwc in this sense sometimes take av, never 'iva or the simple juij '. "Ottwc (without av) and oirtug firi, however, sometimes take, instead of the aor. 1 of the subjunctive, the future indicative, whereby the thing intended, is brought out more independently, as a thing that will occur. (See note at end of following §.) B^ffiAauc alpsirai, ov\ 'Iva lavrov KoXihg tTrifiiXriTai, aXX' 'iva koi of iXofiivoi Si' avTov iv trpaTTOjcnv {Xen. Mem. 3, 3, 3). AokeT fxot Kara- Kavaai rag afid^ag, ag i^Ofxtv, 'iva fifj ra t^tvyri rifiuv arpaTriyy, aXXa TpairwfitOa, otti;) av Ty aTpariq. driT£ toO TroTofiov koi Trig Siwpvxog (Xen. An. 3, 4, 17). Etc KUtphv ijKCig, oTTOjg rfig Si'kjjc aKOixryg irapwv Trig afx(jil tov naTpog [Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 8). 'Eav Tig aoi Ka/nvy twv oIkctwv, TrapaKaXiig laTpovg, oTTwg jujj airoOavri [Xen. Mem. 3, 10, 3). Talra jiyviTai, ov\ OTTwg Toiig avrovg aiXjjrae kiraivibaiv oi ttoXTtoi ovS' oirwg Tovg avrovg TToiriTag aiptJvTai, oiiS' 'iva ToXg avTo7g I'lSwvTat, aXX'ii/a Toig vonotg udOojvTai (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 16). Su, w ■koi, av awtppov^g, rovg dioiig irapaiTiiay avyyviLfiovag aoi sivai, £i ti iraprifiiXriKag Trig /xriTpog, firi (re KOI ovToi vofxlanvTig aj(apiaTov elvai oi/K idi\i»(Tlv iV ttoiuv [Xen. Mem, 3, 3, 14). — TovtX \a(5wv fiov TO aKiaSiiov viripi-)(i avwOtv, ilig av firi' fi opUxnv oi Oioi [Arist. Aves 1509). 'O Tvpawog TroXifiovg rivag ael Kivii, 'iv' iv XPf'? riyefiovog 6 Srjjuoc y icat, iav Tivag vtratrTivy iXivOspa ippovrifiaTa 'ty^ovTag firj iTTiTpi^siv avTi^ ap\iiv, owiog av TovTovg fura ■7rpo(paaiwg airoXXvy, kvSovg Tolg iroXenioig [PI. Rep. 8, 567). — Oj c!vixfia\oi ov/8e Si' iv aXXo TpeipovTai rj OTrwg fxayovvTai inrip rwv Tpi- ivrag {to put the persons denounced upon the rack), oVtue jui|7rpo- Tcpov vi)^ tarat Trpiv TrvOiadai rove avSpag anavTaQ (Andoc. 1, 43). The subjunctive stands in object-sentences annexed by ottwq or § oirwQ fxri to the present or future of verbs or phrases denoting, to 123. endeavour {to take care, to work upon others) that something may, or (^^^' may not, be done (as iirifiiXiiadai, (jTrouSa^eiv, irapaaKevaZtiv, TrparrEJv, ^^^' firixavacrdai, irapayyiXXtiv, Trpovoiav tx^tv, irtpi ttoAXou iroiHcrdai, irpbg TovTo Tov vovv ix^iv, &c.). But the future indicative is also used, in order to mark the object prominently as something that will occur, or as a state that continues in the future, and this is the most usual form ; somewhat less frequent the subjunctive of the present and aor. 2, while that of the aor. 1 active and middle is even very rare in object-sen- tences with oVwe- Now and then av is added to otrwg, and then aWays the subjunctive : "A\\ov tov apa EirifisXriad vfJ-tv iXdwv tirl ra Trig TToXEwg irpajfjiara rj oirtog on JBsXtkttoi o'l TroX'iTai wfiav ; {PI. Gorg. 515.) "SiixiBnj^ KiXtvu Ssvo^wvTU TrpoOvfistadat, oiraig Siaj3^ to OTpa- revfxa {Xen. An. 7, 1, 5). El' t'iq aoi twv yvixipifiMv KivSuvivti Bi" svosiav a-KoXiaOai, ovk o'ki aoi a^tov tlvai iTTifiiXriOfivai, ottwq Siaaudrj ; {Xen. Mem. 2, 10, 2.) ^iXimroc wveirai Trapa rdv Trpiajiewv, oirtog fii) inrliDfitv £K MaKtSoviae {Dem. 18, 32). — "Qi^irtp tov TTOifiiva Sit In- fisXelirdai, oVojc awai Tt tcroirat at ouq koi ra eirirriSHa i^ovmv, ovtio KOI tov arpaTnyov iTrifisXsirrdai Ssi, owoiq cwoi te oj arpaTiwrai taovrai Koi TO. iiriTi'iStia 'i^ovmv {Xen. Mem. 3, 2, 1). KaXov ■n-apanKcvdZuv, OTToie we f5eXTi, 4ooJ. (El riv ixSphv KaswQ voirjTBOv iariv, KOKbv dk nkyiarov airri )y aSiKia iariv iv ry ^vxy ivovaa /jijW TijUii^iq, UKaBaipo/ievri, idv riva aSuty 6 Ix^pog, iravri Tpotrtft irapaaKfvaaTkov, 'iirmQ firjCk e\9y napd rbv StKaari'iV iiv Si fX9p, /trixavtiTiov, oiriaQ av haipiyy Kai fiij S(ji SiKijV, (iW, iav ti xpvciov ijpTraKiig y voXv, /irl airoStSi^ tovto SlW ^x""" avoKiaKy /tSiKiDg Kai dSeuf, iav ra ai Gavarov a^ia ^Siktikms y, oTriof fi?) airoOavsXTat, fiaXwra fxiv piriSkiTOTi &.Xk' Addvarog iarai TtovripbQ uv, ei Se /ir], oVws (If TrXtiffrov xP^""^ (Stiiairai, PI. Gorg. 480.) Rem. 1. "OffWE is originally an interrogative particle (how), in whicli significa- tion it is frequently used. Verbs like aKoirtlv, ^ovKtitaSai, &c., denote therefore, in the first instance : to consider how a thing may be done (as intention), in which sense the fut. indie, is exclusively used ('AvayKq agoveiv, ottwc tcL vpaynara ' SivcDffelj TiuaaitDva Ki\(iovai irpodTaTivaai, oirms hwXivay »J arpanci (Xen. An, 5,6,21). 102 PART II. CHAP. II. - [§ 124. [§ auBriairai, Dem. 9, 63. Ti/uoeparije role jroj'ijpoif, oVwfi jiij Sdiaovai Skriv, oSiv 123.] SiUvvaiv, Dem. 24, 106) ; consequently, at the same time, to take measures that it may be done, in which sense the subjunctive may also be used. (Oi finvov ■^7]ipiX,i(jBai Tr/v itpijVTjv dti, dXXti Kai /3ou\£veo'0at, oVwc d^ofXiv avT\)v Kai [xi) TrdXiv iiQ Tag aiirdg KaTaaTTiaofisOa rapax^Qt Isocr. de Pac. 25. Tovro fioi doKU (JictirHov ilvai, oVwe ait; iKaxwra fiev Tpaviiara \d^u}fiev, ojg tXdxitrra de aio/xaTa avdpwv diro- PiXoiiitv, Xen. An. 4, 6, 10. SkottsI, oViof /uj) t'iapvoq tan & vvv Xkynq, PI, Mulhi/d. 283.)' Then it comes to be used with all verbs which denote an endea- vowing and an acting in order to a purpose, with loss of the interrogative sense, and consequently with mixed construction, rarely with aor. 1, which so much resembles the future. Lastly, it also denotes merely the intention (§ 122), in which sense the subjunctive predominates, and the fut. indie, is more rare. Rem. 2. This construction of ojtws must be kept quite distinct from the relative oVwt in the expression oiic iariv oVws, there is no way in which — , it is not possible that (§ 102, b. R. 2), which never has the subjunctive. Rem. 3. After verbs like CKoirS), iSouXtio/iai, &c., there may also be attached by otruiQ a dependent interrogative sentence with (potential) optative and av (see § 137), of that which may probably take place : SKOTrw, ottioq dv b /liv Tralg iiSt 6 adQ Kai r} iralg ijSs b)g p^ara didyotev, Vfteig 5' dv fidXiara evfpaivoifisOa Qewfievot airovg (^Xen. Conv. 2). Rem. 4. EUiptically oVwe, oVug jtjj, fiithiq, &c. stand often with the second, more rarely with the third or first person of the fut. indie, to denote a com- mand, a prohibition, instead of the imperative (see to it, tliat") : "Ottuc olv iataBe dvSpeg ajiot rijg iXivBepiag, rjv nUrriaBe (Xen. An. 1, 7, 3). "OTroJe Ejrtlfi Tifi fiiapif Kai jxi) SiaXiaji (Dem. 21, 216. Prosecute the rascal, and make no terms ^). "Orrws Toivvv TTspi Tov TToMjuoii fXTiSkv spatQ^ ovSeiQ yap ovdkv aiTiaTat TTEpi avTov (T£ (Dem, 19, 92). (Tovroig iyw dTroKpivovftai Ka8' tKaarov aKpi^Sie' Koi 6'irue, ioaTTip Bpuiruiat irpoGifiuig, ovTui Kai voitXv WtKriaovBiv, Dem. 8, 38. "Ottws Si ri aifi^oXov Xa/Soirte imiTa irXriaiov KaBtSoviitBa., Arist. Eccl. 297.) (The aorist subjunctive only in uncertain passages.) (Of another elliptic use of ovidq fiii, see § 124, b. R. 1.) Rem. 5. After /3o«Xfi, poiXeaOe (mostly interrogative) the aorist subjunctive is used with oVws omitted (never the fut. indie.) : BovXtaB' ovv i/uv avTOvg irapa- axSijiai [idpTvpag rovrovai, on irdvTa Tavavria iiioi Kai TOVTOig wsirpaKTai ; (Dem. 19, 205.) Rem. 6. Rarely uig for oirwg in object-sentences : Oi jiiv tovtov iirijuXovvTai, iig ^Xy otiToig, 01 di oix l-nmiXovvrai (Xen. CEcon. 20, 8). § a) The subjunctive stands in pi'opositions with jUiy after verbs and 124. phrases denoting fear and apprehension (St'Soiica, (jw^ov/iaL, ikvw, ^^•MK'i ^P""^''^*^' oiiSiv Sttvov, there is no danger of, &c.), or taking heed and •'precautions against {^vXaTTO/xat, tiiXajSoiJjuai, dpw, (tkotto)), to denote Cf. YKOTTovaiv, 1% oTov Tpoirov 01 MtyaXoiroXXrai 0iXoi vfnv fn) yivr)aavTai (Dem. 16, 19 ; shall be hindered that they may not become — ). 'Apiartig iTi-paaat, oirt) ii^tXttd Tig ytvijatrai (Thuc. 1, 65 ; negotiated how succour should come'), 2 The present of eT/ui is treated as future. § 124.J THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND ITS TENSES. 103 that of which one is afraid, or against which one is on his guard (we ; [§ fifj 01), ne non) : dpw and ctkottw, ju/j often merely denotes a suspicion '■' or surmise [see whether — not). Of a fear, in reference to the past, fxr) is mostly used with the perfect indicative : AtSoiKo, jut) iwiXaOio/ieOa Trjt; o'lKaBt oSoi) [Xen. An, 3, 2, 25). povTi%w, ;ujj Kpancrrov y fioi aiyav KivBvvevw 7ap air\o)g oi/Stv elBivai [Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 39). Ta TTspi rrig 4'^xriQ TroXXrjv cnrKTTiav (mistrust and fear) Trapt)(ei rote avOpwiroiq, fii), sTreiSai' airaXXayy tov (rw/iarog, oiiSafxov in y aXX' tKitvy ry tinipq Sia^0£i'pT)Ta£ Koi aTroXXvtfTai, y av avOpwirog airoOavy [PI. PfuBd. 70j. Tiuv ^vXaKwv Iv cavTotQ juj) orao-ia^oirajv, ovSiv Stag, firiTTOTS ri aXXri troXig Trpoc tovtovq St^^otrrar^o-p {PI. Phced. 465). EvOvSr]fj.og vXaTTiTai, fj.ri So^y tov SwKpdrtjv Oav/iaZEiv tiri ) oi tovt y XaXeirov, BavaTOv iK^vyiiv, dXXd iroXii xaXiiriiiTipov, irovripiav' Qclttov yap Bavdrov 9ti (PI. Apol. 39. I fear the difficulty is not — ). 'AXXii jitr) oix oiiriog e^V' ^ XiifcparES, dXX' dvayKoiov y HS6Ta TiBiaOai rbv nSe/iEvov rd dvi/tara (PI. Crat. 436 ; that he who gave the navies mttst have given them after knowledge of the things). See b. Rem. Rem. 3. From putting ouk (ovhic, ouicsn, ovkovv) before the elliptic jiii (/irfroTt) with a subjunctive, there results the denial of a fear {I am not afraid that = oiSkv Suvov, jjifi, there is no danger, no fear, that — ■, or, of — ), which is frequently used merely as a strong denial of the thing itself ; a future with strong negation. Instead of the aor. subjunct. sometimes (cf. R. 1) the fiit. indie, is used without percept- ible difference of meaning : 'E?ri toIitov tov 'Ittvov xai Siwkoiv, ov dv BiXigg, aipriims Kal diroxnipi^iv ov /if) dtiays rbv iroXe/iiov (Xen. An. 7, 3, 26). Swepdri/e, oTrdffov av KtXtvy TiQ,lKTrmv oiSiv iiaXXov lirfiroTi fiiSvaBy (PI. Conv. Hi). 'Edv drto- yvCiTt Ti]V ypatpfiv Tavrriv, ciiravTCg tiaiv djrtjXXayitkvoi Kal S'lKr/v ovStli; oiiSsiiiav fij) S((i {Dem. 2'2, 39). — Toiovtov icrTEprjiiai itriTriltiov, olov oiSiva jiijirOTt lupijaia (PI. Crit. 44). KaXXiKpariSag (lirtv, oVi i; STrdpri; ovliv firi kukiov oiKiilrat avTov aTToBavovTog, ipivynv d" aiaxpbv ilvai t^ij (Xen. Hell. 1, 6, 32). Rem. 4. From the use of oi pii], explained in the preceding remark, we must care- fully distinguish the use of ou p;, with the second person of the fut. indie, (never the subjunctive) in questions expressive of a peremptory and vehement prohibi- tion, the iii] with the verb forming a negative notion (mil thou not give over doing ■ it — ? wilt thou not not-do it f). A positive command, in the shape of aquestion, may 104 PART II. CHAP. II. [§ 135. f § precede with simple ov, or follow with &\\a : Oi jxfi \tipiig oix riSeiae icaQtvBriatTe {Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 30). Rem. 3. (To § 123 and 124.) On the mood in object-sentences afler a prse- teritum, see Optative, § 131. § The subjunctive is used in conditional sentences with lav {fiv, av, 125. from d av), which are only used of that which is possible now or at a future time : "ATrac Xoyog, av arri^ ra Trpayixara, fiaraiov ti (paivi- Tai KOI Kivov [Dem. 2, 12). "Hv tiq a.v6i orav, S>v av livig tiq, kqi ToKtidis ojuoS htiiij (Dem. 22, 22). Rem. 2. In the poets this subjunctive is found with the relative put indefinitely, even without av ; e. g. rk^oj/ra B' 6pBovv ipXavpov, 8s vios ireiry (Soph. CEd. C. 393 ; to raise up when old one who fell when young). Rem. 3. Quite distinct from this use of the subjunctive after the relative with av (belonging to the relative) is the potential optative with av (§ 137), or the hypothetical indicative with av (§ 117, b) in a relative sentence : 'Apto^at kv- TivQiv. oQtv Kui iifitlQ p^tyr' av fiadotTe Kayixt ra;^i(Tr' dv Sidd^aifii (Dem. 29, 5 ; Jrom the point, from which you may most easily apprehend, and I most speedily unfold thi matter). The subjunctive stands with all conjunctions of time to which av § is annexed {orav, ojrorov, etteiSov, sTray, riviK av, coag av, sqt av, jus^^pie 13' • av, jUEXpt ov av, wpXv av) ; they serve to denote the indefinite point of time, and contingency in the present or future : Touro koi vvv woiovaiv oi /3apj3apo( jSacrtAEtc, ottotuv (whenever; when) aTpaTOTnSsvwvTac Ta(j>pov iTipifiaXXovrai sinriTwg Sia rrjv noXvxiipiav (Xen. Cyr. 3,3, 26). "Eojc 0.V (so long as) (rwZriTai ro aKa(j>og, tots ^p?} kqi vavrriv tcai KvfBip- vi'irriv Kai iravT avSpa t^fiQ irpodvuovg ilvai' iirnSav Se 17 OaXatTa viripaxy, fiaratoQ t) o-ttouSjj (Dem. 9, 69). Nvv fiiv aTTitfii tu'e fiamXia' iTTiiSav Se Biairpa^wfiai, a Slo/iai, I'l^io atra^wv v/iag ilg rrjv 'EXXaSa (Xen. An. 3, 3, 39). Ouk ava/iivo/xev, eojc av (till) ij fifiSTipa X''''P<* KOKwrai, aXXa ^flavovTEC rjSj) S^ovfitv rriv riov woXiftwv yfiv (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 18). SttovSoi iaovrai, juE'xptf av fiamXit th Trap' vfiwv SiayyiXOij (Xen. An, 3, 3, 7). 'Eav (paivwfxai aiiKiXv, ov xpri /x ivdivBe cnrcXdiiv, rrplv av Sw SUriv (Xen. An. 5, 7, 5). Rem. I. Without av these conjunctions stand with the indicative, partly to denote the definite present time ("Ews in vioc lijii, Ttjv \l/vx^v yvuval^ia. 'Ev iilv rtf arpa- 106 PART II. CHAP. II. [§ 128. [§ Toir8S(^ ot apx^vreg 9r£ptEwpwv * A\Ki(3tdSrjv v-Trb travTutv ffjOOffjjXflKiSojUsvov, ItteiStj 5h 127'] v/iag Su vap' avroii SUtiv XapilSaveiv, ;^apt^6/jEi'0( avTifi jf/tvSoiJiapTvpouixiv, Lys. 13, 6 ; also liTti, siriiSri, on, hiroTi, in causal siffnification : since, whereas) \ partly to denote a past time. Of Trpi'v with the infinitive, and its difference from (ou — ) TrpiV av, see Infinitive, § 167. Rem. 2. JIpi'v, ^e^pt, euj, ign sometimes in the poets take the subjunctive with- out av (Ml) arkvaKf, irplv fiaOyg, Soph. Phil. 917) : vpiv and jiixP^ (C'XP' <"') also in some individual passages of prose writers ; e. er. Oh irportpov avrhv diroKnv' vvvai dn, Trpiv dvdyKTjv rivd 6 Qabg iirnrkfiyj/y (^Pl. Ph(Bd, 62). (*'0r£ and tini only in Ionic poets ; itni ri in Hdt.) Rem. 3 (to f 125 — 127). On the mood, in sentences of the kind here spoken of in the oratio ohtiqua, after a praeteritum, see Optative, § 132. § (The Tenses of the Subjunctive.) a) The subjunctive has no 128. narrative tense, and no tense of the relative past, because it never denotes an action in reference to the past. The subjunctive has also .no separate future, as the reference to the future results from the construction of the sentence itself, and in some instances is made prominent by the transition to the future indicative (see § 123 and 124). The subjunctive of the aorist, as it does not at all express the past', comes very near in point of signification to the present, and the differ- ence is only this, that the aorist denotes the action as single and trans- ient, or as taking place at one definite instant distinct from the actual present, while the present denotes more in general the action and the state as going on, or at least not as occurring singly and with limitation to a point of time. Hence the aorist, both in object- sentences and in final sentences (of intention), contains a reference to the future (^ojSoCjuat, \xrt yivojfiai, I fear I shall become, juj) yiyvwixai, Zes^ / become), and denotes, especially in sentences with sav, or with relatives or temporal conjunctions with av, a single and separate future action (like the Lat. futurum exactum in temporal and con- ditional propositions : mav opw, quum, quoties video, orav iSw, quum videro). This reference, however, is not always made prominent, so that the present stands where the aorist might have stood, to mark the action as less transient ; and conversely the aorist is used of a present action, to denote it as transient and single. Sometimes the difference almost entirely disappears. fiv ottwq ckSw (once for all) icai tcIXX' oirodtv BioikHj (with continuance, and generally ; Dem. 27, 66). 'Eav tic kojuv^ tujv oIkitwv {is sick ; Kofiy, should become sick ; should fall sick), TrapaKaXsic larpovg, oTrwg fir) awo- Odvri [Xen. (Econ. 11, 9). ToStov r\fiHQ b)VTa irpo- OvfiucrOai, oViue Biafiy to CTTpanvfia {Xen. An. 7, 1, 5). EiiSuSij^uoe ^vXaTTSTai, firi So?^ rov SaiKparijv davfidl^fiv tTjl <70(j>li} {Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 3 ; not to get the appearance as though he — ). (So usually after (pvXaTTo/xai, svXafjovfxai, cf. on oiJ fxr), § 124, a. R. 3.) 'ETTftSav SioTrpd- ^wjuai, a Siofjiui, ^?it) dira^iov vfjLaQ ilg rrjv 'EXXaSa {Xen. An. 2, 3, 29). EiKOC, Toi/c 'AOtivalovQ, orav yvioaiv i)fidg T£Tpv\u)fiivovg, irsipdasaOai vwo aipaQ TTOiiiaOai {Thuc. 4, 60). — 'EtteiSov av (iovXrj SiaXijEadai, log ijw dvvafxai 'iiricrdai, tots aoi SiaXi^ofiai {PL Prot. 335, of the being willing, as a continued state). "Hv tiq avOiaTfiTai, irsipatrofitda \iipovcf6ai {Xen. An. 7, 3, 11). Ouk ava/xivofjuv eoic av r) rjfxeTtpa x^9'^ KaKwrai, aXXa (j}ddvovT£g r/Srj Syovfifv tjjv ekeivojv jrjv {Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 18). — 01 firj KoXwc j3ej3ouXeuju£voi, sav koi KaTopdujirwai (as single act) Trepi Tivag twv Trpa^Ewv, fiiKpbv SiaXtTrovTsg tig Tag avrag airopiag icar- EOTjjcyav {Isocr. Areop. 11). 'EtteiSov at liridvpiai iravawvTai Kararst- voii(7ai KOt \aXn(i(i)tii, iravrairaai to tov So^okXeouc yiyvtTai' ciairoTwv ■trdvv iroXXuiv e'ot( icai ftaivonivwv airriXXaxOat {PI. Rep. 1, 329, said of something that happens to the man at a certain particular point to which it is confined, have come to cease). — ^"Hv n a-' lyio favib kokov TreTTOiriKwg, opoXoyio aqiKtlv' av f^ivTOi firioiv (paivuyfiai kokov Tmroiri- Kiog /iijSl fiovXtjOiig, oh koi av av ofioXoyriasig fxrjSiv vn ifxov dSiKtt- adat ; {Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 13.) (In elul, el^i, and other verbs which want the aorist, the distinction falls away.) b) The subjunctive of the perfect serves to denote the action as past and completed, in opposition to the present, after idv and relatives or temporal conjunctions with e'iv. In verbs whose perfect has the signifi- cation of the present, the perfect subjunctive is also used as present : 'O Kviov, ov av yvwpifiov 'iBy, daTrdZsTai, kSv jutjSev rrwrroTe m avTov dyaObv TreirovB)} {PI. Rep. 2, 376). "Orav ot SiairoTai iawovSaKuat, KXavfxaO' rifjiiv {rolg SovXoig) yiyvtTai {Arist. Ran. 813). — ToaovTi^ wXiiw oi Qrifiaioi Troii)aovTai Qipavtiav vfiwv {will show you SO much the more attention and regard), oaii^irtp av fxaXXov rrEpl o-^wv avrHiv StSiwaiv {Isocr. Plat. 36). ' Airixtade tCov aXXorpiwv, \v da^aXiaTipov Toiig o'lKOvg Toiig vfitTipovg avTwv KtKTriadi {IsoCT. Nic. 49, from kektjj- fxai, possess). 108 PART II. CHAP. III. [§ 129, 130. §] Rem. Now and then the perf. subjunctive denotes as purpose the complete 128.] 6nishing[ of the act : Xpy aicovaai, d top re Sixawv na'i rbv aSiKov TeXevTrjaavra mpi- jisvu, (Va TEXEhtg EKCtrepog avruiv ctireiKrifj^ tcl virb tqv \dyov SfuXofteva {_Pl, Rep. 10, 614, may have received). CHAPTER III. The Optative and its Tenses : the Optative with av. ^ The Optative (on the meaning of which see § 119) in independent 129 propositions serves only to denote a wish that something may happen, or not happen, now or in the future : often with prefixed Et, d yap {if but — /), £i9e {oh that — /) — (in Homer ai yap, a'idi). 'ETTEtSr) iravToog opij vfiag, ^A6r]valoi, ajpfirifiivovg arpaTtveiv, ^vvsviyKoi ravra {Ihuc. 6, 20). TovTuov ijiv tiriv {Eur. Were I but one of these!). Si) avTog airavTa iinar^ail, av iyio ^ovXioixai. 'AAXa f3ovXii6drie {PI. .Euthyd. 296. Would that thou mightest will it !). Mvjte GrjjSaToi ^tote ttou- (jaivTO, EI ap^ iv^aadai SeT, tovq eavroiiQ ayadov ti Troiovvrag artjud^ovTEC, jUJ?^' v/Mig, Ta ivavrta tovtoiq, rovg tvEpyiraQ TtjuwvTse {Dem. 20, 109). EiO', w Xt^dTE, ot) roiouroc S)v (j>iXog fifuv yivoio {Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 38). OvTuic ovaiuds T(ov ovTOJV ayaduv rifxiv, fxri TTEpitSjjrE fiE aTroXXvfiEvov {Dem. 28, 20 ; so may you enjoy — , as you do not suffer me to — ). Rem. 1. Different from the simple wish is a question about possibility in. the optative with dv : 'Q Ziv, irSg av rbv ai/ivXiltTaTov oXkaaag rsXoe Bdvoijii icavTog ; (Soph. Aj. 388. How may I find a way to destroy that most crafty man, and then at last myself to die? i.e. Might I but — .) IIws dv hXoijxrtv ; {Eur. Med. 97.)' Rem. 2. A wish relating to the past which can no longer be fulfilled, is ex- pressed by u6t with the indicative : EiSt aoi tote avvEytvojiriv, 'ote Suvorarog aavTov fjaBa {Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 46). By ui(pe\ov (debebam), EiBt {d ydp) aiftXov (might I) : negatively, /«)) w^eXov, with the infinitive, is expressed a wish that cannot be ful- filled, whether relating to the present or to the past. Ei yap lifeXov oloi te tli'ai ot TToXXot rd /isymra KaicA. ittpydZEadai, "iva oloi te i\Bav av nai AyaOA, ra fikyiffra (viz. E^tpyaZEdOai, PI. Crit. 44). (El yap liipEXov, O, if that could but be! I wish I might; PI. Rep. 4, 432, with infinitive understood.) Wrfiror w^tXoj' XitteXv t^v S/cSpor (Soph. Phil. 969 ; oh that I had only never — ). S a) The optative (by § 119 with Rem.) is used in dependent sen- 130. tences which put something merely as a thought, and belong to a principal sentence in the past (aor., imperf., plusquamp., or historical present) ; in this manner it is put first in object-sentences with on, ' In the editions often erroneously without the note of interrogation. § 130.] THE OPTATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 109 uiQ after verbs denoting an expression, opinion or knowledge {verba [§ dedarandi et sentiendi), and in dependent questions both about ^^'^ what is, and what shall be). (After the present and the future, the indicative is used ; in questions of that which shall be, the sub- junctive or the indie, future by § 121.) nepucXijc TrporjYoptuE toTc 'Adrivalotg iv ry ekkXtjcti'^, on 'Apj^/Sojuoe fxiv oi ^ivog tJjj, oii ixlvroi iw\ KaK(^ yi Tflc ttoXewc yivoiro [Thuc. 2, 13). Upoayopevu), on — scrriv — lyiviTO. Kvpog /[isTairifnpantvog Toiig (TTparriyovg rwv 'EXXj)- vwv iXsyev, on ri oSoc taoiTO Trpog fdatrtXia fiiyav ilg Ba(5v\wva {Xen. An. 1,4, H). Ejrei ravTa ekjjjout^Oj/, eyvojaav ol OTpaTLwrai, on kevoc 6 (pojioe dri {Xen. An. 2, 3, 21). 'Ettei o^ikovto oi Trpiajitic o'LaSs, Tov Ti/xayopav aiTEKTEtvav ol 'Afliji/atot, Karjj-yopoOi/Toe row Asovroe, on fiiTa UsXoTTiSov iravra jSouXeuoito {Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 38 = e/SouXeweto in the oratio recta). 01 'IvSoi eXe^uv, on iriixipsie trtjiag 6 'IvBHiv fiarrikiVQ Koi KiXivcriuv ipoiTcv, iS orov 6 woXc/xoi; Eiij MtjSoic te koi ^ Arravpiotg {Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 7). Tors syvuxrOti, on ot j3apj3apot tov avOpwjroi' VTroTTS/l^paiev {Xen. An. 2, 4, 22). T^ vaTepait} ^kev ayytXog XEywv, on Su£vvE(T(<: XEXotTToie Eit) TO OKpu (Xcw. An. 1, 2, 21). 'Ti(Tcra(j)tpvrig SiafiaWti TOV Kvpov irpoQ tov aStX(j>6v, WQ iinjSovXevoi avTi^ {Xen. An. 1, 1, 3). — Hpo/r&jv noXvKXfi'a, Et ai'aTrXEuo-EiEi' {he had put to sea) ixwv apyvpiov {Dem. 50, 55). "ESo^ei' avToTg weipcKjai, il SvvaivTO sm(j>Xi^at Trjv woXiv {Thuc. 2, 77). Ot 'ETrtSd^uvtoi irifi'tpavTfQ ig AeX- ovg TOV 6ibv lirfipovTo, il TrapoSoiEv KopivOioic Trjv ttoXiv {Thuc. 1, 25 ; whether they should deliver). 'AX/ctjStoSijc oTropwv, 6,ti T^pijo-airo To7g Trapovari KOKolg, tcXsvtwv ettI AaKiSai/xoviovg rivayKCKxOri KaTatpvyuv {Isocr. de Big. 9). Rem. As the perfect denotes the past in reference to the present (as a still existing result), a dependent sentence after the perf. does not take the optative : *Qc 7]9poitT9tj Kvpq> TO "EXXjjviKoi', ore IttI ' ApraXsp^rfV KOTparfUETO, Kal otra iv ry avoSqi sirpax^T], Kal wc n I^^XV iy^vero, iv t(^ tfiTrporrOev Xoyt^ 8iSr]\b)Tat (^JCen. An. 2, 1, I). The historical present, in reference to the dependent sentence, may be treated as present or as a praeteritum. An infinitive with a participle or a prse- teritum itself acquires the force of a praeteritum. b) Often, however, the speaker, instead of denoting the relation of the dependent sentence, puts this in a livelier way immediately in the mood and tense which it would have in the oratio recta; consequently in the indicative (in questions of what shall be, is to be, in the subjunc- tive or future indicative) : eIjtov, ort eXeiISepoc eiijv and on IXivdipog tlfjii. Where in the oratio recta the present indicative would stand, sometimes the imperfect is put (of that which coincides in time with the principal sentence), so that the mood, but not the tense, is retained from the oratio recta ; ■^Siiv, on hpivSov. "EXEyov oi Ejrtrj}- 110 PART. II. CHAP. III. [§ 130. §] Siioi fxov, wQ iXiriZovat rfjv ttoXiv s^siv fioi xapiv virtp tCiv ilprifiivuv ■■' (Isocr, Phil. 23). , DoXXawc iBavfxaaa, rial ttots \6yoig ' Atitjvaiovg iTTSiaav oi jpaxf/afxivoi 'EwKparriv, WQ a^iOQ eI'j) davarov {Xen, Mem. 1, 1, 1). "Eyi'W ^ Ap)(iBaixog, on oi 'A0r)vaiO£ ovclv ivSwcrovtnv [Thuc. 2, 12). "RiSh "A^o/3oe aaffog, on i^^Xtyx6ri(7tTai (Bern. 29, 9). 'Hkev ayyt)ai- prtaiTai {Thuc. 1, 2 ; since they couldnot tell when . . .). '2ipfi(ov Xiyovrog iravv iOavpaZov, ii tl 'i^u Tig xpi^craaOai tw Xoytf avrov {PL Ph ^()Vvixoq, oti tffotro Trcpt rfjg TOV 'AXKifSidSov KaQoSov \6yog /cat oVt 'A9rjvaXoi kvdkXovTat a-brriv (Thuc. 8, 50)"''. Rem. 2. In this use of the indicative, the special notation of the frcEsem, frtste- ritum, or futurum in praterito consequently falls away, except where the iniperfect is put for the present of the oratio recta. The beginner must especially notice how the aor. is retained from the oratio recta where we expect the plusquamperf. : 'Eyvwi/, on rtpwrayopac oi/c ii^iaiv aiirbg avrif rale aiTOK^iatai ralg liivpoadtv (PI. Prot. 335). 'Ejr^pou ju, d ri fioi o JiJdffKaXog vyuiag iripi iXe^ev icat pu/tijf (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6. 12). ' So always after a hypothetical imperfect or aorist (with av, or in the sentence with tl). ' ToT£ ZriKov ly£j/£j-o, oi 'ivtKa ol 6p^KE£ rdj aKianiKitag Itti Toiiq KtipaXaiQ fopovtnv (Xen. An. 7, 4, 4. Statement in the praeteritum of a relation existing in the present time). § 131.J THE OPTATIVE AND ITS TENSES. Ill Rem. 3. A hypothetical indicative with dv (or an imperf. without dv, put hypothe- [§ tically) never passes into the optative when the verb of the principal sentence be- l^O.] comes a prseteritnm, because this would obscure the sense : Qt/itcrroicX^j dirsKpivaro, oTi ovr dv ai/Tog ^spitpipg &v dvofiaOTOQ sysvero ovr* CKcTvof, 'AOr^vaXog (viz. wv, PL Sep, 1, 330). Aioviatog IXcyev, on 5uffru%6ffrar7jv kKeivrjv tiTJi^fv tTTparuav karpa- TiVftsvoi, KpiiTTOv S' rjv (would have been) avrifi roTt (viz. iv Tip iroXeiiifi) diroSavtXv ti oticaS' iXdovTi Toiairy Tvxy XP^<'^<" (Ay*- 1^, 25). Rem. 4. To an object-sentence with Srt or oig in the optative, or in the indica- tive instead of the optative, a continuation may be added in the optative by oiv, or ugre (so that — , with indie, in oratio recta; see Infinitive, } 166) : ' XiroKplviTai noffti^iTTTTog 6 Kv^£pvi]Ti]Q, OTI TpLTjpapxog Ts £yw TTJg vfwff strjv Kul Thv fiivQov Trap' Ifiov Xapi^avoc irXtwaoiro oiiv, oi iyu) xtXivui, dg Qdaov (Dem, 50, 50). A^ucvovvTai Tivtg ELTrayykXKovTig^ ort 6 TraTijp fiov d^sirai (was set at liberty') jcoi Sarup^ oiirwc IKTankXfi tHu TrarpayiikviDV, wgre viartig r&g psyiarag StSuiKutg eii; (^Isocr. Trap. 11). A continuation of the reported speech or opinion, with yap, also stands after an optative in the optative, after an indicative either in the optative or in the indica- tive : *Hkowov Eytuyf, u SuKparfg, SKaffroTS Fopyiov iroXKaKig, ug r) tov irtiQHv {jkxvrf) TToXw Stafspoi iraoSiV Tixvii>v' iravra yap ixp' avry SovKa Si fKovrwv (with people's consent) dXK' oi Sid jSiae ■koioXto (PI. Phil. 58). 'BiSuv, on TloXvKKijg irapaXapiiv rt)v vavv KaxCig TJiiiXXs rpiripapxvotiV oiire ydp ToXg iwipdraig ovri ry virripeai^ XPV'^oiro' oiiSdg ydp avrip Ttapafisvel (Dem. 50, 44), a) The optative stands in sentences of intention {final sentences) with § "iva, JiCjOTTweCpoet.o^pa), and in object-sentences with o;rtt»e and jurj after 131. a principal verb of past time (in aorist, imperf., plusquamperf , or histori- cal present). (After a present or future, the subjunctive is put, or in certain cases the indie, fut., § 122, 123.) Mevwv 6 QsTraXog SijAoe ^v iirlOviiCjv fiiv irXovTtiv l(T\vpwQ, iirtOvfiiov S" ap^siu, oirwc ttXsiw Xafi- (iavoi, iTTiOvfiiov Bi Ti/iaadm, 'iva irXtiij) KSpSaivof ^I'Aoe r' EjSouAtro f'l/at ToTe /liyiaTa Swa/xivotg, 'iva adiKWv firi SiSoijj oiktjv {Xen. An. 2, 6, 21). Kvjooe (piX(i)v (jiETo Siiadai, wg avvepyovQ e^oi {Xen. An. 1, 9, 21). — 'ETrEjuEXttro KvpoQ, OTTwg firiTTOTe aviSpwroi oi uTpariwrai Itri TO apiarov Kal to Btiirvov tlgioiav {Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 29). KXeapx^i' airaKpivaTO Kvpit), tirt aitTt^ piXoi, orrwg icaXwc 'i^oi {Xen. An. 1, 8, 13). "ESeio-ov ot"EXXT)v£c> ju'J °' Wipaai irpogayajouv irpbg to Kipag {Xen. An. 1, 10, 9). ^iXtTTTroe ev 0oj3({i koi ttoXX'p ayojvi(} ^v, jur) iKjvaToi rove ^^PP-^xovq kSiSitcrav o-^tor, firj awoarwaiv {Thuc. 5, 14). K.vpoQ ir\XoQ ^v Tzaaiv otl {nrepi)i>, firi airopriirwat Xoywv Sia to TroXXa vSr, elpHcrdai {PL Conv. 193)'. Rem. 1. Occasionally the optative and subjunctive alternate and are coupled together : TifioBtoe davsU^eTai (hist, press.) x'^^'-'^e ^P'tXI^^S "'"P' ' AvrKpdvovg, 'iva dtaSiSoirj roig 'BoiwrloiQ rpcj^pap^Oig (cat Trapajikvtitaiv ewg dv avTi^ ri Koiaig ■yivriTM {Dem. 49, 14). Tlapavlaxov (likewise lifted up) ical 01 e/c Trjg iroXimg UXaTmrjg airb tov reixovg ^pw/crous TroXXoi'ig Trportpov trapiaKtvaajiivovg (plusquam- perf.) iiT airb tovto, oiruig daafij rd arijiiia Trig ^pvKTUpiag ToXg iroXcfiioig y xai ui) ^otjeoiiv (Thuc. 3, 22). Rem. 2. Some writers, as Thucyd., use the subjunctive (indie, fut.) oftener than others. Rem. 3. In stating why something that has not happened, ought to have taken place, or was to be wished, "iva (iig, oVwe) with the indie, imperfect or aorist is put after a prseteritum : E/ ydp w0eXov oTot re Hvai ot ttoXXoi rd nkyiara KaKd l^epya^efffioi, 'iva oioi t' rfaav aZ Kai rd dya9d rd p-iyiara (iKipyd^iirdai, PI. Crit. 44). Kat ut)v alwv y fjv dKouaai. Ti Sk ; i)v S' kyii. (How so f) "Iv iiKovaag ( = that you rmght have heard^) dvSpSiv ^taXsyojuevwv, 01 vvv (rotpuraToi tim rStv Trepl touq toiov- Tovg Xoyovg (PI. Euthyd, 304 ; of those who have to do with — ; who occupy them- selves with ■ — ). Rem. 4 (to§ 130 and 131). When to an object-sentence or sentence of intention dependent on a prseteritum, another such sentence is attached and made dependent on it, the latter, as a general rule, also takes the optative, but may also take the indicative or subjunctive : Kvpog -TrpogKaXuv roig (fiXovg iavovSaioXoytXro, i)g SrjXoiri, ovg ripq, (Xen. An. 1, 9, 28). Tbv aofiaT>)v £i7ro/*6v, on dTTOpoZfiiv, eig oTrdripov Toiv Svolv liSoiv Giiaoiuv (PI. Soph. 264 ; we should put) ; but when the first passes into the indie, or subjunctive, the latter is also treated as after a present : 04 ' So for the most part after a hypothetical imperfect or aorist. ^ [Properly (where = ')in which case you heard (for conditional, would have heard).] § 132.] THE OPTATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 113 TovTov ivena ^pxcfitfla SiaXiyoiuvoi, 'Iva eBpuuev, t'i vot oAb tar kirtHTnuT], a\\& H iariv (PL ThetBt. 186). a) In dependent sentences with relatives or conjunctions which are § accessory to an object-sentence, or sentence of intention, or infinitive 133. clause, or single infinitive; and are put as forming part of the object (the thing said to be spoken, thought, perceived, &c.), or of the thing intended, and which in the oratio recta would stand in the indicative of the present, future, or perfect, or in the subjunctive (with av after the relative or conjunction), the optative is used (without av), when the principal verb on which the ort, ottwq, &c., depends is a prffiteritum, and so the following verb would regularly be in ,the optative by § 130 and § 131 : Htoti Kupoc, on, u ti /xaxn^ defiaot, ek tmv (jilXtov avrt^ koi TrapaaTaraQ koi ETrioraTae A»)7rTEov" uri {Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 10 = Ei' ti fi. Ofriau, \riipoi.iai). GijpajUEVije ilwev, on ovSiv aiiTi^ niXoi tov v/xETepov Oopvliov, ETTEtSq TToWoiig fifv^ Adt)vaiii>v EtSfiij Toiig TO ofioia irpaTTOvTae avT(^, SoKovvTa Se AwerdvSptj) koi AaKtSaifiovioig Xiyot '{Lys. 12, 74 = OvSiv fxoi jueAei — , ETTEtSjj — olSa — SoKOvvTa Se — Alya)). 'Ava^i- (5iog CLTTiKpivaTO, lin jSovXiveroiTO ircpi twv arpanwTwv, 6,n Svvairo ayadov {Xen. An. 7, 1, 35 = fiovXtvaofiai, o,n av Suvwjuat ayadov). ' [These rules have been defended by Madvig in a separate publication, where he lays them down thus : a) In the oratio obliqua, clauses dependent on an historical tense pass into the optative ; but not, if in the oratio recta they would have the imperfect or aansl of the indicative ; for then these forms of the verb are retained ; 4) except in clauses wUh oVi {=: because ; therein that — , in that [he, &c.]), in which even these tenses pass into the optative. a) Thus whilst the sentences S & dwriao/iai or & av iSipa, SiSiDfi & t\ii>, m/xij/o) orav Svvr]dS> become regularly IXiytv 6Vi Siaaoi (t^ij Siiativ) & SvvriiroiTo, d eSpoi' lri SMvai a e^o'i ^i/i^iiv ore Svvtidiiti, but may also, from the freedom of Greek construction, be expressed thus : iXeytv on Siiati a SvvriatTai, a dv tiipjc l0)j irin^uv, orav SvvriBy' on the other hand the sentence tSuiKa a tlxov can appear in no other form than IXeyev, on ioi'i; (tduKiv) S. elxiv: and so, oVe £7r£/xi//a Tov ayyiXov, ovirto ravTu yduv, becomes eXeyev, on ravra ovino ydri (eMti/;), or' eirt/n^c rbv dyytKov : or, c0ij, or' Ejre/iipe tAv dyyiKov, ovwu ravra fidkvai, b) He has convinced himself, he says, of the limitation expressed in b, since the publication of his Syntax, from a comparison of the two following passages, to which at present he cannot add a third. Xen Hell. vii. 1, 34 : dxe ydp Xkytiv (lltXoTriJac) d)£ AaKtSaiftovtoi Sia rovro jroXe/jqireioj; airolg (rols OtiPaioiq), on oiiK iBiXi'iaaiiv jxtr 'AytiaiXaov sXBiiv kit' airbv (rbv ^aaiXia) ovSi Ovaai Idaettv avrbv Iv AvXiSi ry 'Aprkjiih. The other passage is Herod, u. 121,5: air- TjyTiffaaOai avrov (tpaatv), ui; dvoanorarov fikv till elpyaofiivoQ, on [in our edd. ore, which would be against the rule, but Madvig 'has no hesitation' in reading oVt] row &diXr}(TOl KOI TEXEurii<7avTa 0di/»oi {Isee. 2, 10. Skottw, ottwc eotoi ocTte — Yriporpo- tpriasi — Oa\pu). 01 'AOttvdioi igjiavTig kg rrjv oSbv rjjv 'FiXwpivrjv etto- pEuovTO, OTTOJC, ETTEiS)) yEi^oivro TTOpd r({) iroTafii^ Tw KoKUTrapEi, irapa rov TTOTOjUOV lOlEV CtVOI StO jUEffOyEiaC {ThuC. 7, 80 := OTTtiig, EJTEtSaV JEVtx)- fiida, 'lojfiev). 01 nXaraifig acraipri to, ^trifitla roTc ttoAeiUioic ttoieTv efj.rt\a- vwvTO, OTTWQ fiTj |3oj}9o,Tev, TTpiv acfiijv ol avSpEf ot E^toiTEe Sia(j>yyoiEv {Thuc. 3j 22 ::= iiri^avilineda, ottwq ju?) — • fiotidwcri, rrplv av — Sia^v- yiocriv). VEOtifjiBTplav SojKpaTije jUEXP' tovtov £^»i SeTv juavflavEtv, ewc iKqvoQ TiQ yivoiTO, iiTTOTE Ss/jiTEfEj ■yiji' jUETptj) Qpflwc ^ TTapaka^HV rj wapaSovvaL fj diavEipai (Xen. Mem. A,7,2; := otl, I'loe «v — YEvijrai, eIVote Sei'((TEI, — ). Ti(TtTa(j>ipvriQ wfioatv 'AyritjiXat^, Et (TTTEicraiTO, Ewe eXSojev, oue Triff\pEU TTpoQ ^aaiXia ayylXovQ, Btairpa^eadai avri^, ae av eX^wo-ivj; oSe Trifiipto — , SiairpaKofiai). Rem. 1. If, on the other band, the accessory sentence in the oraiio recta would stand in the aor. or imperf. indie, this is retained in the oratio obliqua, because the optative wpuld not express the proper relation of time. We even find, not unfrequently, the aorist indicative, where the oraiio recta would have the perfect indicative (and where, consequently, the optative might stand in the oraiio obliqua) ; of. § 112, R. 1. Ot AaKt8aifi6viOL eXsyov, firj ^TrrjyykXBai Tcta iq AaKeSaifiova rds ffTTovSag, ore kckire^^pav Toi)Q oirXiraQ kg Astt^cov {Thuc. 3, 49). 'HpojUTjv, ti riveg thv ftdpTvpEQ, fbv IvavTiov dirkdoaav {Dem. 30, 19. ^Apa rtvtQ fidprvpkg eltxiv, ~ direSoTS ;). "BKOuaa, art TltpiKXijg TroXXdg k-KiaraiTO k-JTipSag^ ag k'Jn^Sit)v Ty -jroXst k-TToUi aijTriv ^iXtlv avTov {Xen. Jlfem. 4, 7, 2}. Akyovai riveg Q^fiiaroicXka ixovdiov tpappdKtp diroOaveiVy dSvvarov vofiiffayra slvai ktrirtXeffai ^aaiXel a hirkax^To {Thuc. 1, 138. 'Advvarov iariv lir. a Inreaxriiiai). Rem. 2. Sometimes the optative stands even in a sentence dependent on an object-sentence or sentence of intention (one with on, oirmg, &c.), which has itself not taken the optative : 'ESriXoiae Kvpog, on 'iroiiiog ^ari ndx^ndai, ti rig i^kpxoiro {Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 1). 'E0oj8eiro GejuiffroKX^C) P'^t oi AaKeSaip,6vioi Tipdg, owore aafittg dsovauav rd irepl to Tttxog, ovKkri d^Sicriv {Thuc. 1, 91). Usually, however, in this case the indicative or subjunctive is used. b) Often in such sentences the same form is retained as they would have in oratio recta (cf. § 130, b, and § 131, b). But instead of the indie, present sometimes the imperfect is put (in the same tense with the governing verb ; cf. § 130, b) : IlpouAEyoi;, (5 "S^u/Kpareg, OTi TtdvTa juaXXov '!roir) 337). "EXeyov 01 ayy eXoi, on tJkoiev riyeixovag i^ovTsg, ot avroiig, iav ai airovSal yivwvrat, a^ovatv, svdcv i^ovai ra ETTirjjSEia {Xen. An. 2, 3, 6. Regularly, ot, d — yivoivro, a^ouv, 'ivBsv e^oiev — ). Kvpog § 132.] , THE OPTATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 115 ETTTipcSra Tov Tiypavriv, iroia ti'j) twv hpiwv, ulroQtv oi XaX^atol Kara- [§ Oiovrec Xiji'Sovrat {Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 1). noTi^diarai ^Xdov kg AuKtSai- ^^^'^ /nova fitTo. Kopivdiwv, 07ra»e trot/xacraivTO Tifjtwpiav (= jioriOetav), fjv 8iy {Thuc. 1, 58 =; u Btriaoi). Oi arpariioTai KaTa(T\i(7tiv rag irvXag stjtaaav, d /iri fKovrec oi tvSov avot^ovaiv {Xen. An. 7, 1, 16). Ot nXaraiiig rotg Qtifialoig eX^yov to. e^w rije ttoXewc juij oSikeIv" e! Se juij, Kot a4roi I'^atrai' aiiriov Towe &vSpag aTroKTiViiv, ovg i)^ov(n Z^vrag {Thuc. 2, 5). HapriyyuXav oi arpaTtijoi, ettejSii Binrvrimiav, av- tiKevaaap.ivovg iravTag avajravsaOai KOimicyOai, riviK av Tig wapay- yeiXy {Xen. An. 3, 5, 18; observe the alteration of the two forms). Ot (TTpaTiioTai ovK ifaaav Uvai, sav juij rig ^^pijjuara SiS<^. 'O Si Kvpog viri(i\(tTO avSpX EKOcrrw Silxruv irivn apyvpiov fivag, kirav dg BajSuXtdva VKbXTiv {Xen. An. 1, 4, 12 and 13). KXiapxog i(j>n xP^''<"j "* «»' E^EXEyT^flwo't SiafiaXXovTsg {those who should be convicted of circulating calumnious reports), wg irpoSorag ovrag rifiiopn^fivai {Xen. An. 2, 5, 27). 'PiXiTTTTog, El TOVTO Twv TTOjo' kavTov irsfiTTopivwv iepofivriixovwv elg- rtyolro Tig, vTr6\p£adai to irpayfia evo/xc^e koX Tovg GijjSatovc koi rowe QiTraXovg, 17 v 8' 'Adrivatog y 6 tovto iroiwv, evTrdpwg Xriaeiv {Dem. 18, 148). — K.vpog vTria\iTO rote MtXijcrtotc <^vyaaiv, u KviXCog Kora- Trpa%iiiv, £({>' a ktTTpaTSvsTO, fxri irpoaOsv travaeadai, wpXv avToiig KUTayayoi o'ikuSs {Xen. An. 1, 2, 2 = rjv KaTaTrpa^w, e0' a aTpaTsvo/iai, oil — iravdOfxai, Trpiv av icaTayayw). Miya to Siog tyeviTO, juj) oi nEXo7rovvi}(7(0(, £t Koi fiTJ cisvoovvTO fiivuv, Tropdui or ^jreiSi) SoKijiaadtlriv). (Soph. Track. 687.) c) The same rule and exception hold for accessory sentences dependent on a participle which has the force of an object-sentence {see Participles, § 177, b. 178): 'H ah-la wpoBriXog fjv ett' EKEtvoue ij^oviiriv jitroiaHe (Soph. Phil. 961).' present or future, as compared with the time of the principal action, except in two cases. (1) One of these is again (cf. note on p. 113) that of clauses introduced by ' oVi. And since here no change or ambiguity is possible, I assert, without hesita- tion, though 1 have not any example at hand, that as Thucyd. 2, 21 says TltpisKka bkAkiKov, on, ovK ivt^dyoi ivi roig ToXe/iiovg, SO he might have said oVi oi/c i^aydyoi, in the sense of because he had not led them out." " (2) Then an additional thought, referred to the person sppken of, may be attached, by means of a relative pronoun, to a single definite notion ; and in this added thought, that which would have stood in the amst of the indicative, if there were no intimation of its being the thought of another, may be expressed by the aorist of the optative, because here, in the case of a principal verb in the present, no ig av with aorist of the subjunctive is conceivable, and therefore no confounding with an aorist of the optative, as representing an Be av c. aor. subj., can take place. The only instance I can at present produce is Soph. CEd. Tyr. 1246 : \ivi\^ii\v tzdXamv (TtirtpfiaTtiiv txovff', vip' tov Qdvoi fiiv aitrSg' Ti)v Sk TiKTOvaav Xiwot ToXg olffiv a-brov SiariKvov iraiSovpy lav." Madvig, p. 17.] ' Occasionally the optative is put, irregularly, in sentences dependent on an § 133, 134.] THE OPTATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 117 The optative (present or aorist) stands after conjunctions of time § (without ay), relative words (without av), and u {if, i.e. as often as), 133. in connexion with a leading sentence whose verb is a praeteritum, when the thing denoted is, not what took place in a certain individual case, or with a certain individual person or thing, but what recurred and was repeated so often as a case befel, or a person or thing of a certain kind occurred [opt. of indefinite frequency]. ("OTrore AtpUotro, when he came^ if he did come, whenever he came ; ore aipistTO, when he came, Srav a0iKiirat, when he comes : "Oo-ow!; elSov, so many as I saw on the whole ; oaovQ ISoiju, so many as I saw from time to time, so often as I saw any.) Ki)poc, iraptkavviov Tov "ttttov tig TO TrpoaOsv r\(Tvxo<;, KanOiaTO rag ra^tig' Kot ovp fiiv looi svTUKTWQ Kat (TiwTTy lovTug, TrpoQiXavvuiv avToig, rivtg re ehv, VpiTO Kai, iTTiX TTvOoiro, iiryviC il Si rivag dopvjiovixivovg a'ladoiro, TO aiTiov Tovrov OKOiriJv tcaraafievvvvat rrjv Tapa\riv tTrEiparo {Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 55). SoXwv iv airamv, olp sTldti, vofioiq Trepi t^c TToXtTEiae fiaWov ianoviaZ,iv r\ Trapi tov rrpayfiaTOQ avTov, ov TiOtiri tov vo/jlov {Dem. 22, 30; about which, whatever it was — ). Of ovoi, tTTft ti^ ciwKoi, Trpoopapovrsc av eiarriKiaav' koi iraXiv, iirti TrXijcria^ot 6 iTrjroe, TavTov lirolovv {Xen. An. 1, 5, 2. Of av, see § 117 b, R. 3 ; slarfiKStrav counts as an imperfect), nepufisvopev iKaaroTS, 'iiog avoixOdt) to Sta/jtw- TTipiov {PI. Pheed. 59). ('Omre tXBoiev, oi aiXi^iaQai Biot, fiiKaKas KaBiaTaaav, with the relative sentence necessary to the completion of the notion likewise in the optative.) (The Tenses of the Optative.) a) In object-sentences with mi and § (uc, and in dependent interrogative sentences, which in their inde- 134. pendent form would have the indicative, the tenses of the optative correspond entirely with the same tenses of the indicative (so that the aorist is a prasteritum), yet so that the present at the same time com- prises the imperfect, and the perfect the pluperfect. In connexion, therefore, with the same leading verb in the praeteritum on which the optative sentence depends, the present acquires the sense of the pra- sens or imperfectum in praterito, the aorist and the imperfect that of the prieteritum in praterito (but with the same distinction which ap- pears in the oratio recta between the aorist and the perfect), and the future that of the futurum in praterito. See the examples in § 130, a. Siut in a dependent question which in the oratio recta or after a present might have e subjunctive, the aorist has not the signification of a preeteritum : 01 'ETriSd/ivwi tov iv AeX^oIs Bebv etrripovTo, ei rapaSdiiv S.opiv6ioiQ rffv ttoKiv. Thuc. I, 25 = TrapaSH- jiiv or wapaSiiaofuvJ) Xen. An. 7, 4, 10. Mem. 4, 2, 10 (okovSiv o,ti iiroKpivaiTo) and Herod. 5, 67, ixptioTtipiaZtro ti iKjSaXoi (where even Dobree, with Werfer) would read kK^aXKy. infinitive in general reflexions : ToB airbv Xeytiv, a /i?) aa^Se siliiri, ^ciSeaBai hi {Xen. Cyr. 1,6, 19 ; what one does not himself know). Ei'it^ KpaTurrov Jqi/, oirug iivaiTo Tis {Soph. (Ed. R. 979). 118 PART II. CHAP. III. [§ 134 [§ Rem. As in the indicative the aorist stands now and then where we should expect 134.] the perfect (J 1 12, R. 1), so also in the optative : Oi ITXorai^e KripvKa IJIn-f/nl/av irapd Tois OtiPaiovg, on ri nnroitjiiiva ovx oaiws Spaaiiav ( Time, 2, 5 ; almost ^ itSpaKari), b) In the sentences treated of in § 133 (optative of the thing repeated [indefinite frequency]), the present optative corresponds with the imperfect indicative, and denotes the action in the dependent sen- tence to be contemporaneous with that in the leading sentence ; the aorist with the aorist indicative after conjunctions of time (§ 114, c), and therefore denotes the action of the protasis as a single act recur- ring each time before the action of the apodosis ; often, however, the difference is very slight : 'OTrort ot tote ^amXivovng avrov niv Evayo- pav 6p(j)£v, E^ETrXijTrovTO icai £^oj3oi5vro irepl ttiq apxrJQ, ottote Se eIq Toiig rpoirovQ cnro^Xirpaitv, o-^ojpo iiriaTivov {Isocr. Evag. 34). c) In all other sentences the present and perfect of the optative answer to the present or perfect of the indicative or subjunctive, the future optative to the future indicative (therefore never in sentences of intention after 'Iva or wV). The aorist answers to the aorist subjunctive, therefore loses the sense of a praeteritum, and differs from the present only as giving prominence to the consideration of the action as trans- ient and occupying a single point of time, usually with more express reference to the future. (Cf. § 138.) Mevwv iinOvfist apx^iv, ojrwg TrXiUfi \aix(5dvoL {Xen. An. 3, 6, 31 ; to get more, in general or for ever). 'EoEtirav oJ "EaAjivec, fxr) 01 Xlipaai irpogayayoisv irpog to Ktpag {Xen. An. 1, 10, 9). "HtSst Kvpoc, on, h ti /ua^ie irori Ser]aoi, ek tCiv (piXcjv avT(^ Kol irapacTTarag koi iiruTTaTag Xrinriov ur\ {Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 10). 'Eo£(trav 01 Kipatxovvnot, jutj Xvaua rig wgTrep kiktiv i7ju(i' i/irre- wTWKoi {Xen. An. 5, 7, 36). See further examples in § 131 and 133. Rem. 1. As in certain sorts of sentences the distinction between future indie, and aor. subjunctive is but small (with oTrwe in an object-sentence, ei Sdaio and sdv Su)), so in the same sorts of sentences the distinction is also but small in the optative between the future and the aorist. It should be remarked, however, that in object-sentences in the optative witli oVwf, the aor. is much more frequent than the future. (Both tenses in connexion : Tbv IfivpoaGev Xpovov t^iav iiTrb ttoW^q tirtfieXeiag OTrwg wg k\dj(^t(TTa ftkv c^oiiirjVf sXdxtffra S' A-Kovaoifiriv, eXaxiara d" ipoiftr/v, Xen. CEcon. 7, 5.) Even more rare than in such sentences is the optat. future in sentences of intention with oViDg or ^Lij. \^ Ay a^kfivuiv riypiaivtv kvTtWofitvog Xpuffy vvv t£ dinkvai (cat aZOig jii^ l\9tlv, fii) avTifi rd. tov Qtov arkjifiaTa oiiK eTrapKSffoi, PL Rep. 3, 393.) In con- ditional sentences in the oratio obliqua after a prseteritum, el with the aorist rather denotes the action as a condition going before (ei Soiriv, si dedissem = Idi/ Soi, si dedero), the future, on the contrary, denotes it merely as going on at the same time (tl Sdiaoi/ii, si darem = u Sd>aio, si dabo) ; sometimes, however, the future (occasionally even the present) is put where the aorist might stand : 'Ewo/iijt Jiaalav ti fiiv kv 'AOiivaig fikvuv iTTixdpolriv (immediately, where T already was), lKOo9ri(7(a0ai fi virb ttjs iroXiiag ^aripifi, ei S' nXXoak not rpavoiftriv, ovHv § 135.] THE OPTATIVE AND ITS TENSES. 119 fieXriaeiv aiirifi^ (ftp Uaaiiavi) t&v l/iaJv \6y(i>v, cl S" etevXivaoijjiriv dg rbv Tlovrov, [§ avoQaviiaQai fic nird roB varpbg uiri 'Sarvpov (Isncrj Trap. 9). '0 r/yifimv (c jSsXriaTOi eaoivro, airiig idKojru (Xen.). — (4) Very seldom with fxri (without oiriag) after verba timendi. I have only remarked PI. Euthyphr. 15, D ; and Xen. HeUen. vi. 4, 27. — (5) In final sen- tences after oVwf (oVwe ^r\), the fut. of the optative must be looked upon as dovbtful." (Madvig.)] (Optative with av, and in conditional sentences in the oratio recta ^) § a) With av the present and the aorist stand in the optative (now and 135. then also the perfect as denoting the now existing result, besides the perfects which are present in signification) to express a possible con- tingency, which will be actual under a certain condition, which it is admitted does not at present hold, but is easy to be conceived as occurring, and which for the moment one chooses to assume and pre- suppose. The condition is expressed by eJ, with the optative of the present or aorist. The apodosis here approximates sometimes to a simply conditional apodosis in the indie, future, sometimes to a hypo- thetical apodosis in the imperf. indie, with civ, so that the thing put as contingent is more opposed to the actual state of the case, yet with a certain reference to what is still possible or probable ; sometimes this form is merely a more delicate mode of expression instead of the imperf. with av. The aorist differs from the present only in the way explained above (§ 134, c) : "Oaov al fiovapxiai irpoQ to npa^ai ti tHiv ^iovTwv Siaiftipovai rdiv oXiyapxiwv Koi rwv StjftOKjOOTtwi;, oiirojc 3v ' Printed obliqua in Schneidewin. ^ Not to be confounded with the optative after e/ in oratio obliqua after a prae- teritum (§ 131, 132) and the optat. of recurring acts (^ 133). 120 PART II. CHAP. III. [§ 135. I ill ''''^^"'■'■<' diioprfaaifiiv, el rap juayioToe roJv Trpa^fwv Trap aWi]\ag ■-' TtSlvrEc i^fa^ftv iirtxeipri<^atfisv {Isocr. Nic. 17 ; we might perhaps best see, if — ; and therefore we will do so). Et apeXfiaai So^oi/uev VaCaTa, tov rocravTa r\fiaQ uxpiX-qKOTOQ, iroioiq \6joig aAAou? irsiOoif.tiv av xapH^eadai ti rifiiv ; {Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 33. And therefore we will avoid this appearance.) Xprj v/xag, S> 'A0»)vaToi, Toiavra OLO i Ovtuq ovv Kal Trepi TTJg oUovofiiKijs iroirjfftj (^J^en, CEcon. 2, 15). b) The condition, instead of being expressed in a sentence of its own, may be intimated by a single word, or by the context : 'Ek twv ip.iTopi (r)(rifiaTi Kai firi TraXiv avafdidxTKOiTO, ap ov TToWrj avajKri, reXivriovTa iraitra rsdva- vai KOI firiSiv Zrjv ; {PI. Phced. 72.) ' — (b) OuS' av eT? avTiiirai, i,^ ov (TV/x(pipu Ty troXu, koi AuKtSaifjioviovg aadeveig tivai kqX Qtjjiaiovc {Dem. 16, 4). Ej n^ \iyoi avOpwirov eotjjkoto, Kivovvra St rag xeipdc Tt Kai TTJv Ki(pa\r)V, on 6 avTO<; £otj)k£ te koi Kiviirai, ovk av a^ioTiHiv ovTO) Aiyeiv ctiv, aXX' on to fiiv n avrov eotjjke, to Bi ti KivsiTai {PL, Rep. 4, 436). irpwpivg r^e veoic oStwc ETrtorarat tKaaTwv riLv Iv T(^ 7rXoi({» r^v \wpav, wqts koi oTroii' av iiiroi, ottov CKaaTa KUTai Kai oTToo-a Etrrtv {Xen. (Econ. 8, 14). Oiik av 'ixoifii y UTTtiv, ort 011 wpoQ- ii-)(pv TOV vovv Ei)6uSi)/if[j KOI AiovvaoSi^pt^ {PL Euthyd. 272). — (c) ME-ya av ovriaaiTe to CTTpaTsvfia, il iTnp.tXr)dilriTS, ottiuq avTi twv diroXuiXoTcov wg TaxicfTa aTparrjyot' KaTarrTadwcxiv (Xen. An. 3, 1, 38). 'Okvojjjv av tig to. ttXoTo tftfiaivuv, a Kvpog r)piv Soijj, jujj rifiag avTalg Talg Tpiripicn KaraSvuy {Xen. An. 1, 3, 17). — 'H EjUj) ^uXokj) twv ivBov, E^ij 17 yvvri, yeXoia Tig av ^atvoiTO, ti firi av yt ettijueXoTo, oirojg t^itiOiv Ti ilgipipoiTO {Xen. CEcont 7, 39). AvTog av £\wv rjjv aXXrjv Bivvap.iv irtipt^priv fir) Trpocw vfxojv tivai, 'Iva, t'l ttov Koipoc titj, inKpaviiriv {Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 17). mi/ senses, for Indie. Fut., J ]24 a. R. I; hvow /tri being inserted without influencing' the hypothetical form of the sentence). ' Dependent sentences containing a statement of the past in the indicative (§ 132 a. R. 1) ; Tig owK dv ixiaiiautv ^iKiTrirov, ii ipaivoiTo tovtoiq kvijiovXiviov, iiTrip (iv o Trpoyovoe avTov vpoiiXiro Ktvdvviveiv ; (Isocr, Phil. 77.) 124 PART II. CHAP. III. [§ 139. [§ Rem. 1. Now and then, however, a relative or conjunctional sentence has the 138.] subjunctive with av, as after a condition put simply in the Indicative : MaXiura av .alaOoi^eOa, '6 ^rjTovfieVf et rotovde TTotrjtraifisv ry Stavoi^' dovrsg k^ovaiav EKarspif) troiiiv 'o, T( 5v |8ou\i;j-ai, Ttf TeSucaiij) (cat r^J aSixtf, tlr iitaKokovQiiaainiv Oiiifitvot, TToi r'l kvidvfiia eKarepov ajfi {PI. Rep. 2, 359). A dependent sentence which states something independently as matter of fact, has the indicative : Tivi &v 9i(f ii^Xofitvog KaWiffT av tKBoifii Ttjv oSov, ^v kwivoiij ; and consequently in the oraiio obliqua after a prseteritum : Sevo^Siv STrrjpeTO rbv 'AttoWo), tivi av Be^ tixd/jt vos ko\- Xutt' av i\9oi Tt)v oSov, rjv sirivoeT {Xen. An. 3, 1, 6) or IttivooT by § 132, a and b. Rem. 2. (to § 135 — 138.) Whether av with the potential optative is sometimes omitted by Attic poets, is uncertain : in prose this is never the case. 'Av with the fut. of the opt. is found only in doubtful readings. , Ji. On the use of av in general, and with the indicative and optative, remark further : a) In the copulative, disjunctive, or adversative connexion of two verbs, av is commonly put only once (with the first), except where the addition of special defini- tions to each verb, or the emphasis of the passage, causes the two notions to stand more apart, and gives more prominence to the hypothetical character of each severally: Ei o ^iXnrirog v/ids i^cXBtiv ifSovXriBti, owk av vote roiig xp^'"'vs aviKuiv, kv oIq 7jSvvr]Bt]T av e^eXBeCv, TTjviKavT' kKaXsit oiid' av s/ifi, rtviKa 8ivpo diroTrXtlv kPovXofiijv. KaTiKti}\v€Vf oiiSk ToiavTa Xkyuv Aiffxivy irpogkraTTiVt ^K ^v i^KiaB' v[iiiQ iriii'eWfr l^ievai (Dem. 19, 51). (It is never repeated, where two predicates are put comparatively : "HStov av airoBdvoiju q to. 'oTrXa Trapaioiriv.) Sometimes av is left to be understood from a preceding clause, rhetorically corresponding with the latter : Tt ETToirjaev av ; ij SijXov, 'on wfioffev ; {Dem. 31, 9.) Tt o^v Ttp Beq! to ^//fO^of xP^^'" /xov ; iroTtpQv Sti, to /j») ilSsvai Ta TcaXaiA ;^€wJotro av ; FeXolov fxkvT av, Ipri. 'AXXct Stliiig Tovg ixBpoig \j/tvSoiTO ; IloXXoB yt Sei {PL Rep. 2, 382). b) Usually dv is put before the verb, when the emphasis lies on some defini- tion of the verb that stands before it (the verb) in the sentence ; otherwise directly after it. In this way, dv often comes to stand at some considerable dis- tance before the verb, being attached to an interrogative word, a negation, or some other emphatic word in the opening of the sentence : Ei /liv EjraivH ^EvBtiv, SiKaiujg dv ile Kai aiTit^aBE Kai fiiffoiTE' gi 5i, irpotrdEV avTt^ irdvTOJV ftdXitTTa 0i\oe lav, vSv irdvTwv SiatpopiliraTSg tiju, TrSig.av (or ovs dv) eti SiKaiiog, i/idc alpovfitvog dvTi ^ivQov, iiif vji&v aiTiav Exoijii', {Xen. An. 7, 6, 15.) OUrw ydp Ka\ liTOfiEvoi dv tpiXoi Ti^ Kvptji Kai TpoOvfiot EiroifiEBa Kai diridvTEg daijiaXiog dv dTriotiiEV {Xen. An. 1,3, 19. The dv of the principal verb is often put in this way, where a participle precedes the verb). When dv is thus removed to a distance from its verb, it is sometimes repeated in immediate connexion with the verb : "QgvEp dv, «' T}/iuv dWd iravriav tSv dWiov "EWriviov fidliuiv yeyovc, ri xpi) iroielv ; wgirep dv ti rig vaiiKKtipov iravr' sn-i atitTfjpiif Trpd^avTa tlra, avvrpijievTUv airtS t&v BKtvSiv, ttiq vavayiag aiViwro (Dem. 18, 194). 1 ^ (Concluding Remarks to Chap. 1, 2, 3.) With respect to the cases in which the § Greeks do not mark by the mood of the verb, that the thing said is not absolutely 140. asserted as actual, though there might be occasion so to mark it, but, deviating from the Latin, and, in some cases, from the English idiom, retain the indicative without dv (besides those cases which have been named as exceptions in the preceding rules on the optative and subjunctive), the following require to be specially noted : a) declarative object-sentences (with on and iig) and dependent interrogative sentences after a present or future (after a praeteritum in the optative, see § 130) ; b) relative sentences denoting an intention and definition, after a present or future; cf. J 115 a. R. (after a praeteritum in the optative, see J 132 d); likewise those which express the consequence of a quality (Lat. Gr. J 364, qui = talis ut, &c.), or a cause (Lat. Gr. § 366, qui = quum is), or which belong to a negative statement: Oix eKovai SelKai vofxav, xaff 8v tfqv avroXg ravra wpd^ai (IscB. 18, 1 1). c) Acces- sory sentences which belong to a hypothetical sentence in the indicative with dv, or to a condition in the indicative put as not existing ; see § 117 a. R. 2. d) Rela- tive or conjunctional sentences which, as members of a dependent statement, are necessary to complete the sense of object-sentences, or sentences of intention, or infinitive sentences (or statements expressed by a single infinitive), where the prin- cipal sentences have the verb in the present or future : ^KevTeov, jifi Trportpov TovgSe ytvkaBai iiiyaKovQ idaiDiitv i) eKilvot piiKpoi yevrjaovTai (Dem. 16, 5 : except in the cases where the relative or conjunction is used with dv and the subjunctive). (For inferential (or consecutive) sentences with lasre in the indie, or infin., see Infi- nitive, § 166.) ' "Qsirsp dv et jrais, as if one were a child = 6ke a child (PI. Gorg, 479). 126 PART II. CHAP. IV. [§ 141. CHAPTER IV. The Imperative. § The Imperative expresses an entreaty, a command, an instruction or 141. exhortation, together with a concession and permission ; in the pre- sent tense quite generally, or when the action is continued and recur- ring ; in the aorist, when it is single and transient. Sometimes the distinction between the present and the aorist is small, and it falls away, where only the one or the other form is in use. The imperative of the perfect middle with passive signification is used where the entreaty, command, &c. relates to a completed action. Where the perfect in- dicative has the signification of a present, the perfect imperative (active and middle) is used in the same signification. Oappsi. Toiic fxiv deovQ (j)oj3ov, tovq Se yovete Tifj,a, tovq Be (piXovg alaxOvov, toIq 8e vdjuoic Trddov (isocr. Demon. 16). Boopvrwv (Arist. Ach. 186. Let them cry!). — Eliri fioi (tell me ; but Xiye, speak!). 'Eirhxeg {hold a moment!). AajSs rag juajirupiae koi avdyvwdi [Dem. 27, 17, et passim,, but also XajSI juot rag fi. koX avajiyviMxxKs, Id. 27, 26, because the reading, in comparison with the momentary act of taking, forms a continued action). SK07rd»ju£v Koivy, koi u tt^ e'x^'P avriXiyeiv tfiov XtyovTog, avriXeye {frequently and at greater length) kuI aoi irdaofiai. ii Se firi, navaai ^Sr? {cease at once, and have done with it) woXXaKig fxoi Xiyuiv Tov avTov Xoyov {PL Crito, 48). 'Eav SouXoe iXtvdepov otto- KTiivy Ovfii^, TrapaSiSovTOJv oi SiairoTai tov SovXov Tolg 7rpoeT)KOii(rt tov rsXtvT{](javTOQ {PI. Legg. 9, 868; but Ibid. 879, -napa^oTw tov ^ovXov b KtKTTifiivog). 'Oc av hpoavXiov Xri(jtOy, Iktoc twv opwv rjje xojpae yvpvog SKJiXriOriTW {PL Legg. 9, 854). Uipl twv l^iwv TaiiTa poi irpoiipriadw {Isocr. Paneg. 14; let thus much be said by way of preface). Mepvriao to)v Xoywv. KsKpaysTe. "laBi BvriTog wv. Rem. 1. Especially note the blending of interrogation and command in the expression 6la9' 8 (wc) ^pacrov ; (knowest thou what thou must do f lit. knowest thou what? (how f) — do it) with command following. (Poetical. In Plato: Ti ovv i reraxOo) fifuv Karci StifiOKpariav roiouroj ivijp, oig IriiiOKpaTiKbe 6p0wc av trpoQ- ayoptvoitivoQ ; ItraxOia, l^ij. Rep. 8, 562.) Rem. 2. Instead of the imperative in the second and sometimes in the third person, the older language used also the infinitive, and after this example some- times the A.ttic poets (but only for the second person), and occasionally Plato and Thucydides (so that the action is presented in quite a general way) : KaJ ravr ii)v Eitrw Xoyi^ou, Kav XdjiyQ fi k^pevajiivov, idaicuv t/i fiStj fiavTiKy firiSkv (pgoviiv (Soph. (Ed. R. 462). 'Eyii i\(Jv rovg lur i/tavTov, wpoQTriaoviiai Spofiij) Kard fiiaov § 143j 143.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 127 t6 ffrparoTreJoV ail Sk, KXtapiSa, 8ffrepoj», irav ifii opjij ^Jij irposKei/uvov, Toig inri [§ aavTov icni roic |u(u/idxouf dyav aitpviSiuie rie irvXae avoi^ag intKBiiv {Thttc, 6, 9). 141.] (On the accus. with inf. see § 168 a. 1.) Rem. 3. Instead of the imperative in commands and invitations, we have also oirmg (in prohibitions oVwj /iri) with the future indicative ; see } 123, R. 4. (IXp^E Tavra jrpaftis, olov dv BiXye, Soph. CEd. C. 956, thou mayest do — [as we could say : 'i/ou will do as you please']. An eager and vehement command is expressed in the form of a negative question in the future indicative : IlaiSig, oi aKi^iaSi ; (PI. Conv. 212. Look after it immediately, slaves!) Oix airolui^ttg aavrbv ctiri Trjg oiKiag; {Arist. Nub. 1296. Be off this moment!') Invitation or summons is also expressed by a negative question with Ti ow in the present, or (more commonly) the aorist : Tt ovv ov (TKOTrov/jtv, ttwc dv tGiv koXuv Kai dyaQmv ctvSpuiv ^i) Siafiap- Tavoifiiv ; (Xen. Mem, 3, 1 , 10.) Tt ovv oil StrjytjfftM) fioi t/jv cvvovaiav aov Kai IlpatTayopov, ti /iri ri ai KuiKvii; (PI. Prot. 310.) (Aiyoij av, t/tou mightest say; nearly = say ; see J 136.) A prohibition is expressed by firi (/uriSEie) with the imperative of § the present, or where, agreeably with the distinction assigned in the l^g. preceding paragraphs, the aorist is required, with the subjunctive of the aorist. Mij <()of5ov ! MijSeva 0iAov TrotoD Jrpiv ov t^tTaa^Cj irwg KtxprtTai ToTe TTpoTspov 0iXoie [Isocr, Dem, 24). — MijSevi avfiopav 6veiEi(ngg, Koivij yap ri tv)^t) koX to fiiXXov aoparov (Isocr. Dem. 29). MjjShc wTToAdjSp /i£ fiovXsadat kadtiv, tlrt tovtwv evia iricppaKa tov aiiTov rpoirov ovirsp Trportpov (Isocr. Phil. 93). Mij airovai fiiv toTc rpiaKOvra liTL^ovktviTi, irapovTag 8' a^ijre [Lys. 13, 80). M17 dijirOe vofxov firiSiva, aXka Toiig fig to Trapov jdXaTTTOvTag vfiag Xvcfuts [Dem. 3, 10). Rem. 1. M^ with the imperative of the aorist in the second person is not usual in Attic writers ; with the third person, it does now and then occur : Ov Ktco- a/itiiiBVOvg \6yovg dXX' aKoiaioGc tiic^ Xtyojiiva ToXg itrtruxovaiv oyo/iaffi" Kai iiTjSetQ vnwv irpogloKtiaaTO) dXXag (PI. Apol, 17). Rem. 2. A stern prohibition is also expressed by a question with oii pri (§ 124 a. R.4). CHAPTER V. The Infinitive and Us Tenses. The Infinitive expresses the notion of the verb in general in its § different tenses. By prefixing the article to the infinitive, the notion 143. of the verb is brought out as definite, and having a substantive exist- (387) ence. By this means, the infinitive is at the same time enabled to enter into relations with the other members of the sentence in the manner of a substantive in the different cases. 128 PART II, CHAP. V. [§ 144, 145. [§ Rem. The infinitive in Greek (as partly in English) is sometimes annexed, in a 143.] somewhat lax connexion, to a predicate for the purpose of defining it more nearly, so that it is difficult to assign the limits of the relation, and sometimes the same comhination may be taken in a different sense in different connexions, e. g. Swcitoq iroittv (see § 149, 150 ; able la do, and in one's power to do = possible to be done). In some constructions, instead of the mere infinitive (more or less rarely) with little or no diflFerence of meaning, the infinitive is used with ulere, which particle in general denotes an effect or an intention (so thai, in order that), though some- times the definite meaning of the particle almost entirely disappears. § The infinitive may stand, either as subject or as predicate-noun, when 144. an action is characterized in general (e. g. ToiJro fiavdaveiv KoXtiTm). (388) The infinitive as subject has the article, when it stands out as the given and first term of the sentence, of which something is to be predi- cated ; but it is without the article, where the predicate-noun with ioriv coalesces, so to say, into an impersonal expression which stands for- ward as the principal term, and is completed by the infinitive (in English : it is good, it is a sin, to — ), or where the predicate con- sists of a single verb which may be taken in the same way : To Si'/cijv SiBovat TTOTipov vaax^siv ti iariv rj iroisiv; {PI. Gorg. 476.) Oii;^ ovTwi; riSv idTi TO EX*'" XP''i"'"'° '"'^ avtupov TO cnrojdaWiiv {Xen, Cyr. 8, O, 43). IloXXa avfij5d\\eTai £iQ rAg Trpd^ng t6 evvovg Ix*'*' Toiig VTrTjpkraQn MtyioTriv I'jyovnat avpniaxi-cv elvai rb rd SiKaia Trpdrreiv (Isocr. Archid. 59). ToBriS ian. rb dSiKcTv, to TrXiov tS)V aWiav ZlTtlv ixtiv (PL Gorg. 483. So almost always with an infinitive, which is first intimated by a pronoun). — ^^X '^^^ irpXAouc i)(6poiiQ e\iiv (Dem. 19, 221). OIkovojuou ajaQov lariv eu oIkAv tov iavTOV o'lKOV {Xen. (Econ. 1, 2). "QfTrep iv 'LwTroiQ, ovTia Kal iv dvBpwTToiQ Tialv hyyiyvtrai, oaif dv EKTrXew rd Uovra lx<^n, roaoirif u/Spturortpoic Aval (Xen. Hier. 10, 1 ; it lies in the nature of some men to be ; but t6 atdilaBai iv Tolg TotovToig oiiic Evianv). "SoiiiaaTf drnjirnia fiijSlv tXarrov ilvai tuiv jiriSiv ^SiKriKOTUiv Karayvwvai fi Toig r/fff^ijKrrag fjirj TifnopitaBai (Andoc. ] , 32). ('HXf/ca Iffri rd Sid^opa kvOdSe y] Ikii woKc/iuv, oiiSi XSyov irpogSil, jDem. 1, 27 j how great the difference is — to make war.) Rem. 1. "Qgre before the infinitive, in this impersonal mode of expression, is very rare : 'ASiivarov vfCiv Sigrt Upuraydpov tovSc aoipurtpov riva iXeaSat /Jpa/Sewn/v tUv \6yiav (PI. Prot. 338). Rem. 2. To an infinitive predicated generally (without a definite subject), a dependent sentence in the third person may be annexed without an expressly assigned subject, this being the same as the subject mentally supplied to the infinitive (one, a person) ; (but more commonly rig is added), lb Sdvarov StSikvai ovS^v dWo sffTiv ri Sokhv ffotpbv tlvat fiy bvra' SokHv ydp fldsvai lortv, d oitK olStv (PI. Apol. 29). Otir' dvTaSiKitv Stl ovre KaxSig ttouIv oiSkva dvBptajruv, oiiS' dv oTiovv vdaxv ""■' avrSiv (PI. Crilo, 49). Likewise airog, eavToii may be referred to the subject implied in the infinitive : Oiik dpa tovt lari rb jikya MvaaBai, rb X TrouXv, II SoKu airif ( PI. Gorg. 469). 145. The infinitive stands (without article) with verbs, the meaning of (389) which refers directly to a certain action of the same subject, and its § 145.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 139 accomplishment, to indicate that action; likewise with impersonal [§ verbs which express a similar relation between a subject and an ^*^'^ action (e. g. possibility or duty), and with many phrases which have the signification of such a personal or impersonal verb. 'EirtOujuw aiiTOKpartop yiyvtaOai apxbjv [Xen. An. 5, 9, 21). "^yvuv {I resol- ved) Tov TTOTO/iov C(aj3))va(. 'H TToAte tKivSivivcTE iTCKTa Sia^Oaptivai (7%MC. 3, 74). Ov irstjtvKag SovXsviiv. Alaxvvofiai ■irTU))(iVEtv. 'Okvw AiyEtv. OojSoujuat SuXiyxuv aB. — AeSoktoi ijjuTv (eSo^ev) airiivai. 'E^ijv /xivsiv. Svve|3t) juot TTsartiv. 'Q Zeu, Xafitlv juoi yivoiTO tovq iroXsfiiovQ djQ iyoj ^oiXofiai {Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 11). 'Ek row ravd' ovtwq eX"" virap)(ei vfiiv aa^aXwg oikeTv {Dem. 23, 102). — 'Ev v(ji t\b) ekttAeTv. Ov\ Sjpa KansvSuv. *A Tvy\avti) ciKriKOWQ, ovSeig (pBovog Xiyeiv (Ph Pheed. 61 ; I am quite ready to — ). Rem. 1. Besides the verbs which in general denote a being willing (a require^ ment or demand, djioi), an ability (irkiiiv irouiv, Dem. 1,15. 'Avoyicij tie fioi Ik Tvxig JrapafiaWet imiteXtiBiivai TTJg jroXfuf, PI. Rep. 6, 499. TUv fwui/ tivcl ijivaiv e%£i TidaaiiioBai, PI. Pol. 264, = iri^vKtv. 'Ev airopip I'lxovTo oi 'ETTiJa- fiviot BioBai TO irapov, Thuc. 1, 25. ToTf ffrpanwraif opfifi Ivtinaiv licr«x'''<" rb Xoipiov, Thuc. 4, 4). Cf. Genitive of Infinitive, § 156, R. 1. UoXXoC, juicpov Siia voicXv Ti. 2/iiKpov Twog ivStfie li/u TtavT ix^iv (PI. Prot. 329). Bpa^i airo- Xeiironiv StaKoatoi ilvai (Thuc. 7, 70). Ilapd juKphv qXflov cntoBavAv (Isocr. Mff.n. 22). Rem. 2. Some verbs denoting a meditating and endeavouring (/ii)xavu;uai, ^povTiZa), are usually followed by ottwe ($ 122, 123) or an interrogative sentence (h iriDf, d>E av). Rem. 3. With some of these verbs and phrases &£iv Tnpi Tavrrig Trig vwodiaewg {Isocr. Phil. 10). EIp twi» arparuoTwv ilwt (proposed) (TTpaTtiyoiig sXiaBai aXXovg wg ra^tara {Xen.An. 1, 3, 14). Ot"EXAn- V£e ej3oti)v aAXijAoic ft-r) Qiiv Spofiij), aXX' iv ra^ci iTntrdai [Xen. An. 1, 8, 19; called one to another not to — ). 0? laTpol Travng airayo- pevovm Toig aadevovcn ju^ XP^'''^"' kXait^ {PI. Prat. 334. Of juij, see Negations, § 210). Tt ^tXiinrov kojXikth f^aSl^uv ottoi jSovAsrat ; {Dem. 1, 12.) — TlepSiKKag Trpogi(^epe Xoyovg rotg iiri QpqKrig XoXki- Sivai ^vvairoaTrivai {Thuc. 1, 57; made overtures to the Ch, — ). ^Ti^ldfia tiiTiv Iv vfiiv 'AptcTTO^wv eXtaOai Z^Tijrag {Dem. 24, 11). 'H TFoXig iv r(j) rrapovTt roTc TTOvripoig c^ovaiav SfSwo-t koX Xiyuv Kot ttoiuv 8,Ti av PovX-qdHxTiv {Isocr. Antid. 164). Ovk evSwo-o/usv irp6 iirixupV- aai (Thuc. 3, 102), 'A^iket-o IttiotoXi) Trphg 'karioxov ix kaKtSaijiovoQ uqri d.ito- KTtivM 'AXKijiiadriv (Thuc. 8, 35 : a letter to, or, that he should — ). § 147, 148.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 131 The infinitive stands with verbs denoting an opinion or utterance § {v. sentiendi et declarandi), when this concerns an action or state of 147. the same subject (^ijfti itvai, viriaxvovfiai iXiviTKrdai), and likewise with verbs denoting to effect {v.faciendi), when the thing effected is an action of the same subject {VvyriQ SiBirpa^aTo rwv ayytXaav jtvi- aOm rCiv trapa ^aaiXia, PI. Rep. 2, 360). See the more particular rules under Accusative with Infinitive, § IGO and 164. The infinitive is added in different ways to some verbs to denote § the intent of the action : 148. a) To the verbs signifying to elect or appoint a person to do or (4U, be something ; sometimes even to those which denote to ybrinff or ^- 2) convey to a place (send, leave behind), or (more rarely), give, in order to be or to do something, so that the object-accusative (in the passive the subject-nominative) of the leading verb is the subject of the infi- nitive. (But with the latter verbs, a participle as apposition is more usual, which may also be used with the former sort ; see Participles.) Ot TTpoyovoi rjjv IS 'Apslov Trdyov (BovXfjv inicrrriaav iTTipsXiiaBtti Trig EVKOufiiag {Isocr. Areop. 37). A^Aow, on KU^tpvav KaTauTadtig 6 firj iTnaTafitvog airoXtautv av ovq rjKKrra fiovXoiTO [Xen. Mem. 1, 7, 3). Kai yvvaiicaQ apa ai Toiavrai roig toiovtoic; avSpaaiv fKXiKTtai avvoiKiiv (PI. Rep. 5, 456 = airivsc avvoiKfi(TOvmv). ^evo^wv to ^fucrv tov (TTpaTivfiaTOQ KaTsXtTTE ^vAoTTEiv TO arpo/roiTsSov [Xen. An. 5, 2, 1). Ot 'A0»jvatot Seko tu)v vaiov npoviTEnipav ig tov fiiyav Xifxkva [t<1)v Svpaicoucriwv) irkivaai te icai KaTaaKiipacrOai, si ti vuvtikov ectti koOeiX- Kva/Mivov [Tfiuc. 6, 50. More usually trXivaovfiivag Koi KaTaaKtipofii- vag). BotwTOt Tovg 'nnriag •irapci)(ovTO rolg n.£XoTrovvr)7\.) 'O Sjjjuoc rov Eii^paioy iTTiTriSiiov eivai ravra TraOsiv e^j) {Dem. 9, 61 ; was fit to be so treated, i. e. deserved — ). Taircivri vfiOyv 17 ^lavoia iyKapTeptlv, a lyvwrc {Thuc. 2, 61). MaXaKOC Kaprapiiv irpbg riSovac ' Ts Kot Xvirag {PL Rep. 8, 556). Tjjv fdovXriv Kvptav iiro'triaav Trig evTa^lag iirineksicrdai {Isocr. Areop. 39). — 'Etoi/ioi fjcrav wavTa kIv- Svvov virofxivuv. Oh wpoOvnognc el SiSa^ai {PL Euthyph. 14). — 'Av?jp Setvoe \iyiiv. At ivwpa^iai Scival avjKpinpaL to roiavra ovdSri {Dem. 2, 20). nidavwrarog Xiynv {PL Gorff. 479).— "Agio'c dfii nXnyuQ Xajjilv {ArisL EccL 324). 'H ttoXiq a^id \v {Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 15). Also sometimes iKavog is followed by wfre. "AKu>s has also an active infinitive in the same sense as the § 150.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 133 passive, by § 150 a : 'Alioc Saviiaaat (3%ac. 1, 138). {'AvaKia ij /3ov\i) ireiroitiKe Tov ampavioBiivat, Sem. 22, 36, by § 156.) a) An infinitive (active in form or signification) stands with adjec- § tives, to denote that the quality is ascribed to its subject in reference 150. to a certain action conceived as performed upon (and taking place, or (412) going on in) the subject (so that the subject of the adjective is con- ceived as the object of the infinitive, or as the dative with those verbs •which govern this case) : Xpijorflaj rote p4<^toiq tvTvjxaveiv [Xen.- Mem. 1, 6, 9 ; what is easiest to meet vnth). 'Avfjp xoAerroe avZijv {PI. Pol. 302). Aoyoi ifxol fisv avayKaioTaroi iTpotnrtiv, vfuv Se ■xptiai/ioi- TOToi aKoixjai {Dem. 21, 24). KaAoc (aiff^poc) opav, iSeiv (to behold). Aoyoe SvvaTog Koravo^crat {PI. Phced. 90). OiKi'a ijSforj} tvSiotTao-flat {Xen. Mem. 3, 3, 8 ; to live in. So very often the infinitive of verbs compounded with iv). Rem. 1. A passive infinitive is rarely used here (so that the subject of the adj. would also be taken as the subject of the infinitive) : 'S.ivtQ a/iop^oi kuI aiaxpai opaa9ai (^Xen. Cyneg, 3, 3). Rem. 2. In the same manner an infinitive (especially A.Koimv, aKovam, opav, iSiiv) is sometimes added to intransitive verbs and phrases denoting a quality : *AKovaai ovTiaai irayKoXttiQ £;^Et rh ^rj^tfffia (Dem. 19, 47}. OvSiv oiroi Sia({>kfiovatv iStiv xaXfcIbi^ ^aXoKpov Kai fffiiKpov {^Pl, Rep. 6, 495}. (Updyfiara oi 'liriroi irapk^oiiffiv iviiii\ii70at, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 46, wiU give trouble, i. e, loill be troublesome, to attend to. 'H orpario, iroXXi} oiaa, oi Traffjjs earai w6\e(Ds viroSiiaaOai, not one for every city to receive, Thuc. 6, 22.) b) Sometimes the infinitive with the adjective denotes a reference to the action of a difierent subject, which action is conceived as going on,' not upon the subject of the adj. as its object, but in, with, or at the same (as place, instrument, material, &c.), especially with adjec- tives denoting qualified, adapted, or sufficient, or when the degree of the quality is mentioned in reference to the action : 'O xpovog jSpaxwc a^iiog Btriyriaaadai to, irpayQivra {PL Menex. 239). 'H oSop ri tig acTU eTriTtiSeta Tropevofiivoig koi Xiyciv koi aicovEtv {PL Conv. 173). Ilortpov Xovaaadai ipv^poTspov to TTopd ao\ iiSwp rj to iv 'Afifiapaovi {Xen. Mem. 3, 13, 3 ; to bathe in *.) (Also : -^vxebv t6 iSup li'sre XovaaaBai, Xen. ibid.) ('O airdg XP"'"'S ^pt" tvi re iiipii leot van Trtjroi^fffloi rd kirirTiScia, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 5, for the promsiom to be prepared.) c) After a comparative with tj, the infinitive stands in the sense too {great, &c.) to. — The infinitive may not only be referred, either actively or passively, to the subject of the adjective (as in English ' But ibid. : srortpov rh iraph aoi 'iSiop Bepiionpov irulv rj to iv 'AfficXqiriou ; (to drink; by a.) 134 PAET II. CHAP. V. [§ 151, 152. [§ too weak to go, i. e. than that he could go ; too heavy to bear, i. e. ^^''■■' than that it could be borne), but also (by b) so that the subject of the adj. is neither subject nor direct object of the infinitive : 'H avdpwwivri ^vcrig aadevKTrepa ecttiv rj XajSeiv te^viiv wv av y inreipo^ (PL Theat. 149). To v6art)ia fivZov v iX.ovg w^eXeTv [Xen. Hell. 4, 8, 23). $oj3o5jua£, jujj Ti fici^ov v iogre (jtepsiv Svvacrdai Kaicov Ty iroXsi avfipy [Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 17). (Also wg, § 166 c. R. 2.) § An active infinitive with wc (more strongly Sjq yt) is prefixed to an 151. infinitive for limitation, to denote the reference to a certain manner of treating the thing, or a certain intention ; in general, a certain measure in relation to which the predicate is spoken {if we confine ourselves to this — , if the question be about this, &c.). It is not required, that the infinitive itself should have the given subject as its subj. or obj., but this rnay happen : Ot TToXifiioi aoTrXoi tlaiv wg ek x^'po? fJ-axiaOai {Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 16). OvTOi oi avOpwTTOi aTOTTuyraroi Tivig tlaiv, wg y' iv ^tXotroipoig riQivai {PI. Rep. 5, 4)75 ; when one speaks of reckoning them among the philosophers) . Eu Xi-yu 6 avjjp (i>g jt ovrtaai aKovaai {PI. Euthyph. 3, to listen to in this way). Tavr ovv, log virofivriaai, vvv iKavwg Et/>r|Tai {Dem. 6, 37). ('Qe iiTi irav ditiiv, PI. Euthyd. 279, to speak generally, Q (iirXwe liirtXv, i>Q awtKovri dirilv, cf. } 38 c, to speak it briefly.) OiiS' Eytit ipiyw tovtovq TOvg avSpaf, log ji SiOKOvovg tlvai noXsuyg {PI. Gorg. 517, when the question relates to their being servants of a state; considered as servants of — ). Rem. 1. With aKoveiv and especially smelv in certain current expressions (Ss may be dropt, more rarely with other infinitives : 'Ef ri ciKpi^ks liireiv (aKpi^Hg uirHv), oiSi A.Siicii)Q ■Kartarpi^aiiESa roig 'luivae (Thuc. 6, 82 ; strictly speaking. (Siv 6tif dvtlv, in God's name; axtBbv uTrtlv, so to say, almost.) (Cf. § 168 b.) Rem. 2. The infinitive elvai stands in a restrictive sense with the adj. Uiiv in negative sentences (to be willing, i. e. at least willingly), rarely in affirmative sen- tences (= and that willingly) : Ovk i^jnqv inrb aov tKovrog iivai l^aTraTtjOrjffsirQat {PI. Gorg. 499). In the same manner dvai stands with certain constructions of a preposition with a case, or of the article with an adverb, which are used in a limiting and restrictive sense ; thus, Kard Svvafiiv (tig Sivajtiv) dvai, according to one's ability, ri Kurd, rovrov iTvai, as far as concerns him, as far as depends on kirn, 7-6 fir' kKiivoig ilvai, so far as is in their power, to vvv tlvai, ri r^/itpov dvai, for to-day. {'Qfioaajitv tv ttquIv aXKiiKovQ Ik tov liriXoiTTOv xpovov, Kard Svvafiiv elvai, Kal \6y lastly, as definitive genitive (§ 49 a) : 01 'AOrtvaioi fiirdyovTo Trpbg tov woTapov tov miiv iTTiduuiq {Thuc. 7, 84). To tv irpaTTHv Trapa rrjv a^iav afopptj tov KOKwg ippovuv Toig avorfroig yiyvtTai {Dem. 1, 23). Dovoue tov Znv riBitog riyepovag vopiZiTs {Xen. Cyr. 1, 5, 12). 'A^flij? tov KaraKovuv rivog {Dem. 1, 23). 'EttijueXou- pai TOV wg (ppovipwruTog ttvai {Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 55). 'E7r£(T}(o/XEi/ ro5 BaKpvHv {PI. Phced. 117, stopped from — ). 01 spiropoL rd jtXdyri oiairepbiaiv evcKa tov irXslut iroi9i(Tai ttjv {nrdp\ov(iav ovaiav {Isocr. JJem. 19j. ('Avew TOV tippaivav, besides givi?ig pleasure — , avri tov oTro/cpi- vtadai, BK TOV ravra yvwvai, in consequence of knowing this — , iirlp tov /t-^ iroieij' to § 156.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES, 137 irpoQTaTT6ncvov, for the sake of having no orders to execute — , lurct rov ffpogo^XtTi/ [§ alaxivnv, along with the incurring a disgrace, so that one incurs a disgrace withal — , 156.] a-epi roB TinuipuaOai $iXi!r»rov ij ipxv rov ttoXI/joi/ r/v — , *iXMrjros '6aa 7rpoXa/3oi irpd Toy Tove opmue anoSovvai, /Stratus e^uv ij/ofn?£j<, Dem. 18, 26. — elu dvai row KaKdg TtdaxHv — &c.) Rem. 1. When a substantive with a verb (as subject vrith icTtv, yiyverai, or as (-417 object with a transitive verb, or as case to a preposition with an~intransitive or R. 2) passive verb) forms a phrase which corresponds with, or in point of signification approximates to, one or other of the verbs mentioned in §§ 145, 146, it is followed, as a general rule, by a simple infinitive, see § 143, R. 1 ; moreover, o^oXiiv StSovai or daxoXiav iraptxeiv rii/i irouXv n, dSuav, ikovaiav SiSovai, aaipaXHav iroiiiv, irpo- ^aaiv Ttapix^iv rivi Tcoulv n, &c.), and but rarely the genitive (vapdSuyfia iarai rov jx-fi viidq dSiKiXv, Lys. 27, 5, but shortly afterwards (§ 6) irapaStiyfta iroiiiatTe rote aXXoiff ItKaiotg ilvai). The poets go still further in the use of the simple infinitive instead of the genitive : ^6j3), the simple genitive is almost exclusively used. ('E7ri;uEXoS/iai rov eZvai and 'OTTIDE !i, § 123.) Rem. 8. Especially note the interchangeable idiom with verbs denoting to restrain, exclude, withdraw, deliver, and sometimes escapefrom (iK^ivyiiv), and with some kindred phrases (e.g. iv dSiif, iv da(jiaXil iTvai, especially i/tn-o5v fiv avToiQ /xj) rov S-q/iov fStfiaiue irpofffravai (Tkuc. 6, 28). — c) ToC SpaTTCTiviiv Siaiioi£ 01 Seairorai tovq otKEroj tlpyovatv (Xen. An. 2, 1, 16). TA ^ivSojiivov faivioBai Tov avyyvdifiiiQ Tivbg Tvyxavuv IjinoSiav jiaKiaTa dv9piiiroiQ yiyverai (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 9). — £) 'O diSKhq Svo dvSpas s'jfi row jui) KaraSvvai (Xen. An. 3, 5, 1 1). 'EinroStav ti lysvcTO rov (ifj ei9is Tore Stfcdaaa9ai (Dem. 33, 23). 'H jToXis fUKphv dv'tkmt tov jifj roTe Iff^araie avftipopaie TTipurtatlv (Isocr. Antid. 122). (To the simple infinitive sometimes oicrt is prefixed : Ol 'ASi/j/aloi ri irpSiTov djTiixovTO {igre fiij i/ilSaXXeiv rivi. Tkuc. 1, 49.)' Rem. 4. Verbs of withholding, restraining, occasionally in affirmative sentences take the accusative of the infinitive with ^^ (ro /i^), so that the action hindered or forborne may be said to stand loosely in the sentence (almost := so that — not) : Ot 'A9jivaioi liTTT-ilg rbv vXttarov iSfiiXov tSiv xpiXuv elpyov rb nr) irpotJuSjras t&v oirXoiv ( = ro5 irrparoTreJou) ri iyyig Ttjg irdXiug naKOvpyitv (Thuc. 3, 1). Such ' KuXviD, with its compounds, very rarely takes the genitive of the infin. 138 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 157, 158. [§ an infinitive with to firi is added even to verbs and phrases in themselves incapable 156.] of takings an infinitive, but which denote a hindering or forbearing, in order to. assign an action forborne : Kiiiuiva 'ABtivaloi irapd rpilg aftlaav jpi'i^ovg rb nrj Qav&Ttf ZtiiuHaai (Dem. 23, 203 ; acquitted him by three votes so as not to condemn him). Lastly, the infinitive with to nit and rb jn) ov (to cancel the preceding negation, see Negations, § 211), is frequently put after a negation of a leading verb (or phrase) denoting to withhold, hinder, forbear, omit or deny, prove that — not, to denote the action which is not forborne, &c., even when the verb or the phrase is not capable of taking the infinitive or its accusative : '"E/uriaovToe varspov \6yov, 8rt XvaiTtKsffTtpov r) dSiKia rijQ ^iKaioaiivtjQ, ovK dTTStTXOfiiJv to jur) ovk ^ni rovTo iXBtiv cctt' Uiivov, o trpoTcpov iaKOTroviiiv (^Pl. Rep. \, 354). OvSiv tovq ykpovrac kiriKverai rf ijXtxria rb fiij ou^t AyavaKTsiv Ty irapovffy Tvxy (^Pl. CritOy 43). Tie M^Smv jj OTOc j) ykpav aov dtriXelifiBti rb /ir) rroi aKo\ov9uv ; (^Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 23 ; so that he did not follow thee?) OifS' dpvijffig kariv a-broiQ rb fir/ ravQ' virip ^{K'nntov jrpaTTUv {Dem. 19, 163. They cannot deny but that they act in Philip's interest). 'O 'I<7fitjviaQ ciireXoyeiTO fiev, oi ftkvToi ^TretOs ys rb fjii^ oit fjteyaXo'TrpdyfjLwv re fcai Kasoirpdyiuiiv dvai (Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 36). Rem. 5. On the genitive of the infinitive in the sense of eVeico, see } 170 c. R. X Sometimes a notion is represented first by a demonstrative pronoun, especially roiiro , JL (aiiT-A TovTO, with addition of an adjective, tovto fiovov, sometimes of a substantive, tovto ' rb irdBog), and tlien more closely defined by an infinitive [epexegetical infin.] as ap- position to the pronoun, with or without the article, according as the latter would be required or not, if the infinitive were attached immediately to the governing word ; the article, therefore, is almost always used where the pronoun is dative or genitive : Aft Kai rovTO TrpoBvfLtjQijvai fffjv ^aptv, dTToSd^ai^ iry Swarbv ravra yiyv&aBai (^Pl. Rep. 5, 472). ('EKeXtutra tovto fiovov bpdv Trdvrag roitg orparibirag, ti^ irpoaBev 'iinaBai, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 8, referred to itciXtvaa.) "Oaoi dvlpdiroSa voXXd KiKTtiVTai, tovto ye" ^pogofioiov exovffi roig Tvpdvvoig, to ttoWwj/ apj^eev (JPl. Rep, 9, 378), AorcGt jioi rooTij} StaipEpuv dvrjp rStv dXXiitv l^wtav, Ti^ Tiftrjg opkyiaBai (^Xen. Hicr. 7, 3). Tt TovTQv fiaKapiwTtpov Tov yy fiixBrjvai ; (^Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 25.) (But ^Apa rovSe iTTiBviiiiTe, kv Tif aiiTif yiviaBai TOTrq) ; PI. Conv., 192^ after iviBvjiS) yeviuBai.) In the poets the article is sometimes omitted, contrary to the rule. (TdSe n-oioBvref SvoXv dyaBoiv ov ffTepTjtTOfisv Ti]V ^uciXiav, 'ABrjvaib)v re diraXXayijvai Kal oIkhov TroXifiov, Thue. 464.) a) An adjective, participle, or substantive which, as predicate-noun or as apposition belongs to an infinitive with or without the article, stands in the accusative, when the infinitive is not referred by the go- verning verb (or phrase) to a definite grammatical subject : KpEirrov £(TTj ovv TToXXoTe oiKOVvTa a(T(j)a\(i)Q rapKovvra EXetv ri fxovov StaiTdtfisvov iTTtKivSuvwe Travra KEKrijtr^ai [Xen. Mem. 3, 3, 3). Ta ToiavTa iS,BaTiv apidfiriaavTat; rj fisrpi^aavTag dSivai {Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 9. Such things as these one can get to know by counting or measuring them). § b) If, on the other hand, the infinitive is referred to a definite sub- 158. stantive word in the sentence, as its subject, then the predicate-noun (393) or the apposition always conforms itself to the case of that word, if it be nominative or accusative, usually also if it be dative : but in the § 159.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 139 last case the accusative also is used, especially of a (predicative) apposi- [§ tion, e. g. a participle {jES,eaTiv rifuv amtvai to. oirXa ixovrag). After a '^^'^ genitive, the predicate with slvai or ylyveaOai usually stands in the genitive (after the genitive of a participle of a verb declarandi or sen- tiendi always so), but an apposition appended to the infinitive stands in the accusative. 1) (Nominative) -. 'E^/^q^jWo-fts HABitv ^ot,0r|- (Toyrsc. OiiSfv iariv oveiSoc, otov voppioTipu icftIv ri iroXic rifxibv rj ToD ipOovspa SoKctv shai {Dem. 20, 140). 'Avrt tov tTrskduv aiiTol a/jivveaOai fiovXiaOi fiaXXov (TriovraQ {Thuc. 1, 69). SKtTrre'ov, oirtog fXV Tavao^apj), aaTpa-miv iivai SiSwpi MijSwv TE Koi 'Acravpiiov [Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 11. Examples of this kind with the predi- cate to iivai in the accusative, are rare). "E^ecrriv vpiv, u fioiXiadt, XaBov- rag oirAa, oldirsp rifxeig e^ojuev, sIq tov uvtov ifi^aiviiv kivSvvov [Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 15). Ov TrpocJjKSi vfiiv ttiq tmv Qrt^aiwv iroXiiajg ttXuii) woirjaacrOat Xoyov rj twv v, Ivdvfxovfxivovq, iig oit roiig KivSvvovg, aXXa Tag aSo^tag (pojisiadai iraTpiov v/xiv laTiv [Isocr. Plat. 39). ('AvayKt] fioi i\v SvoXv Gdrepov eXiaSai, f) /Ji) jSovXtiOsvti KaruTruv tovq tout-o TToiiy- aavTag Kai irtpl l/iou (cat ittpi tov irarpoQ b^piaSilVy ri KarenrovTi rd ytyivr/fiEva avTov fiEV dfptdsvTa firj TtQvdvai, tov Si irarpbg jiij fovka y^vkaOai, Andoc. 2, 7.) — 4) (Genitive) : '^HXflov hri riva roiv Bokovvtwv (to(J>wv ilvai {PL Apol. 22; ibid. 41 : rwr ^aaKovTwv ciKaaTQv slvai).' 'ESeovto Kupou wg irpodvfiOTarov irpbg tov iroXepov ysvitrdat (Xen. Hell. 1, 5, 2). — 5) (Accusative after genitive) ; 'ESe'ovto pov npoaTaTriv ytviadai [Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 23). Aiopai vpCiv KaTaipr\<^i(iaaBai QiopvriaTov, tvOvpov- pivovg, oaog poi 6 aywv laTiv {Lys. 10, 31). The accusative with the infinitive is used to express a proposition as § the object or subject of another proposition. The accus. with inf. stands 159 (•3941 (394) ' TwK SoKovvTuiv T I ilvai {PI. Gorg. 472 ; tlvai n, a phrase not admitting of gram- matical change, as dvSpl otojiivip t i tlvai, PL Menex. 247). 140 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 159. [5 (primarily) after verbs and phrases denoting an utterance (say, deny, ^^^'^ answer, relate, narrate, concede, assert, declare, judge, &c.) or opinion (think, assume, make to believe, hope ; verba declarandi et sentiendi). The verbs of utterance sometimes take an object-sentence with on or we, the verbs of opinion sometimes one with wg. Tbv koXoi' KayaBov aySpa tvSaiftova elvai 0»)jui {PI- Gorff. 470). 'OfioXoyw aov to tvprifia ilvai. 'YTTitrxou [ioriBeiav fioi j^S,iiv. Ti ttote \iyoviiiv oi Ktv£i(T6ai ro iravra airo^aivofiivoi ; {PL TheoRt. 168.) 01 avBpwiroi inroXan^avovin, Tovg dtovg Sia tCiv opviduv ra trvft^ipovTa miixaivciv {Xen. Mem, 1, 1, 3). 'Akoww Koi aWa eOvij ttoXXo ToiavTa iivai {Xen. An. 2, 5, 13). niiTHaOe aBiKiav diKaiO(rvv>)g afxtivov ilvai {PI. Rep. 2, 368). 'EXttic TTavra KoXiog 'i^siv. Reu, 1. Of the verbs to know, perceive, see, show, remember, which take a par- ticiple or a sentence with on or i!>s, and of the verbs to hear, team, which take a participle, an accus. with inf. or 'in, see Participles, § 178, a. with R. 6. Rem. 2. McrariSt/iai, tvSaijxoviarkpovQ ilvai roiq Koafiiovg rHv aKoXdaratv (Fl. Gorg. 493), I change my opinion, and assume. 'EXeyx"^! refute, AND PEOVE. So the ace. with inf. often to a sense indirectly contained in the verb. (Kart^poi/oi/v ol AaKcSaiixovwi, lid rdfi linrpoaOtv Tvxae, lit)Sev' &v kvixiipiioai a^iaiv, Xen. Hell. 4, 5, 12 J despised the eneviy, and thought that nobody would — .) Rem. 3. Whether, in any given case, the ace. with inf. shall be used, or a sentence with on, or one with iig, is, for the most part, optional with the writer, and depends on his view of what is required for perspicuity and suitableness in reference to the structure of the dependent sentence as a whole, and of the period. It may be remarked, however, with respect to the difference of these three constructions, that affirmative »erAadec^ara»rfj (put simply, without secondary meaning) almost always take the ace. with inf. or on : but that i>Q is put, when the thing said is marked as an uncertain or untrue assertion, pretext, or evasion, therefore also after a negatived verb (oi XeyiD, me — , or, if the thing uttered itself is nega- tive, oi Myw, (ig oi). After verba sentiendi, only i>Q, not on, is used, and in this also there is apt to be involved the secondary notion of a false opinion (TrciSw, i)Q — , seek to persuade that — ). Jlapk^ovrai vS^ov oiiSkv TTpogixovra rySs ry ypcupy Kai \i%ovt!iv, i>Q eial Ty 'ttoKu Svo vo/ioi kei/ievoi irepi riov xripvyfiaTitiv {.^sch. 3, 35. Often T-oBro ipii, ixtivov ipii rbv \6yov, (!)£ — ). Tiffffa0Ep)/i/j iia^aXKti rbv ^vpov •KpoQ rhv dSe\ip6vj wg ettijSouXeuoi aiir^ (^Xen. An, 1,1, 3). Oi fikv 5ij ovdk tovt' av TiQ Eijroi, i)Q Toiig KUKoipyovg Kal aSiKovg KSpos Aa KarayiKav {Xen. An. 1, 9, 13). Oi rovro \kyio, ti)g oi; 5h ikvai iiri roig TroXE/itouf {Xen. Cyr, 5, 4, 20). "Exoukv n Trapd Tavra Xsyttv, wg obx oSrue Ej^Et ; {PI. Pliced. 80.) — No/Jtjouffiv oi i«dvy dv9pii)7roi, lif "H^ojffrof x"^"^^^'- (Thuc, 3, 88). Oi aoipwrai trupUvTai jnWuv Toig KEwrlfiouj, iig, tju avTolg irXtjaidZwatv, a ■Trpaicnov iartv, naovrai {Tsocr. Sophist. 3). {"Eyviaaav oi Mavnvug ag, ei fiij dvoKpoiiaovTai roig nia9oip6povg, iirt ttoXXoi afdv KaraKovTiaBriaovTai, Xen. Hell. 6, 5, 13.) For wg after a negatived verb of utter- ance or opinion ottws is sometimes used : Ovdi ye, oVws aippiav iarat ij i(/uxj;, IvtiicLv Tov aippovog dhfiaTog Slxa ysvtirai, oiidt roSro Trinsia/iai (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 20). "OiTug oi ■wdvToiu rovnav EfftjuEXijreov, Ht 'lipuv, oi Xiyai (^Xen. Hier, 9, 1). At6n § 160, 161.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 141 for 8r«, that, is rare in the older writers (usually, because), in later writers not [§ infrequent. (The poetical olivcKa, oBovvtKa, because, sometinies also for 6Vi, that^ 159-] Rem. 4. Soihetimes a report of a view or speech, begun with on or iig, is con- tinued in the accusative (nominative) with the infinitive, or vice versa : Ol AaxiSai- juoviof ilirov, on a(liiai fikv SokoXsv SlSikiXv ol 'AOrivaloi, PoiXioBat Sk icaJ tovq ■navrag iv/inaxovg irapanaKiaavTes yp^tjiov lirctyayfXv (Thuc. 1, 87). "Awrog IXtyiv, on oiix ovTb) SiaKsotvTO (were not in such a condition') &qt( niiiaptloQai rivag tuv ix^fHv, aXKdt vvv jilv Seiv aiiToig riavx^av Ixeu', ei Sk o'lKaSe KariXBouv, Tore xai TinaipijaoivTo Toig aSucovvrag (Lys. 13, 78). By a negligence (anaooluthia) it may even happen, that one and the same sentence begins with oVt or iig, and then, commonly afte:* a parenthetic sentence, is continued in the ace. with inf. : Akyug aii, ia ffarfp, b)g kfioi SoKfX, brt, lagirsp o{}Sk yeujpyov apyov ovShv oftXog, ovTbtg oiiSk arpaTtiyov apyov ovliv oij)t\og tlvai (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 18). (Conversely, a sentence begun in ace. with inf. passes into a dependent interrogation : Toig ^svj-oi "EWijj/nf Toig Iv Ty 'jLaiq, oiKovvTag, ovSev iru aaipiig Xeytrai, ei 'ijrovrai. Xen. Cyr, 2, 1, 5.) If the subject in the infinitive clause is the same as that of the § governing verb, as a general rule only a simple infinitive follows, 160. referred to the leading subject (nominative with infinitive, cf. § 147) ; (401, but the accusative with infinitive also occurs, sometimes with a view ^' to give prominence to the subject of the infinitive as opposed to others : 'OjuoAo'y&i aSttctTv. Nojut^o) ouSev xiipuv slvai twv aWtov. "E^apvof ioTiv 6 avOpwrrog firiS' iSstv fie ttwitote {Arist. PL 241 = apvuTui). UiiJTevii) StaXvt7tiv T-qv SiafdoXriv (Time. 1, 101). SwicpaTije, £0»/ 6 KarriyopoQ, roiig iraripag irpoTrrjAaici^ftv BiSaaKU, irEiduv rovg avvovTag avri^ aotoTepovQ woiiiv riov iraripuiv {Xen. Mem, 1, 2, 49; persuading them that he makes them — ). TijuoAeoc rag xiXlag Spaxfiag iSiq E0r| Savtiaai rov iraripa 'Avrijuaxtj) ical ouk avTog Xajiilv [Dem. 49j 44). KXewv ovk i(j>ri avTog aXA' IkeTvov (NiK(av) arpaTtiyuv [Thuc. 4, 28). — OTjuai ifxl irapa aov woXXije koi koX^c aofiag irXi)- ptoOriaeadai (PI. Conv. 175). (Airiav exio fitaoStinog iivai, PI. Rep. 8, 566. 'Xvo^iav iraps^ovai jii) ij/ilrtpoi Avai vanpig, PI. Menex. 247. "Yttotttos el ^vyeXv.) Rem. When priiii, »/yo5juat, ol/iat ought to be followed by xPVvai, StXv (dimiov elvai), and an accus. with inf. with the subject of the leading verb, sometimes the riyoviiai, xpnvai,&c. is considered as one verb followed by a simple infinitive (nominative), especially oI//ai SiXv, I think I must, think it is necessary for me, to be, &c.: 'A\Ki0idStie iPptaTtjg <}eTo SeXv eivai (Dem. 21, 143).' When a verb of utterance or opinion should be put impersonally in i the passive, and followed by an accusative with infinitive, the per- jgj^ sonal expression in the nominative with infinitive is frequently used [as (400) often in English] ; but the impersonal form also occurs : $Dvai 6 ' riXiviroQ Ki'ipvKa irpoTriiiirci ToXg 'A9iivaioig Xkyovra (= Xiyiiv KtXtimv), ei PoiXov- rai iliivai cK Trig 'SiuXlag irevTt itixtpSiv, eVoi/ioj elvai airevStaBai (Thuc. 5, 8). 142 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 162, 163. r§ K-upop X^BTai Koi ^Serai 'irt koi vvv viro Ttov j3apj3apwv ilBog fxsv koA- -' Xiirroe, ^vxnv Se (piXavdpbJiroTaroc [Xen, Cyr. 1, 2, 1). 'ii/xoXoYijrat 6 larpoQ aivftarwv ilvai ' Tara Zijv xaXETwrcpo)/ fri ?§ 6 Tvpavvoe (PI. Rep. 9, 579). — Aiytrai, 'AXkj- /3(aSi)v, TTpiv UKOtjiv Itwv elvai, n^pdcXeT roidSa StaXex6j}vai irspt vofiwv {Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 40). 'OfioXoytiTai, rove oto Atoe svyevcaraTovg tCov r)fuQiwv iivai {Isocr. Evag. .13). ("HyytXroi ij /ioxij iaxvpci yeyovsvai xal iv avry ttoWouc rtQvavai^ PI. Charm. 153.) Rem. The verb SokSi (videor) is usually put personally, of the person or thing of which something is supposed : ev Myetf fioi SoKein (even airejrXwgav, f r. n. ISokei) ; 5oKui fioi and simply £oKu, / seem to mi/self to — , it seems to me that I — , / think that I — , e. g. eSo^a aKovaai ovojxa airif elvai 'AyaBujva (PI. Prot. 315) ; with the infinitive of the future (of the aorist with av), I believe I shaU — I will; SokH fiot KaTaKeiacaSai. AoKtt /ioi (tivi) impersonally with an accus. c. infin. is unusual, except in a clause subsequently annexed ; 'EWkei 'fiifvo^jiSivTi, fSpovr^s yivo)ievrie, SKi^nrbs Trsailv ilg Trjv irarpt^av oUiav, Kai tK tovtov XdfnreuBai iratjav (Xen. An. 3, 1, 1 1). (Diflferent from this is SokH, it is decreed that something shall be, J 164.) Aokw is also used in the sense / believe, I think. AoKtls av rj Xyar&i; f; KXivTag irpa^ai av rt iv- vaaOaif el aSiKoiEv dW-fjXovQ; (Pt. Rep. 1, 351.) T^ Trarpi, ^oicJi, IIvpiKdnTrrjg ovopa f/v (PI. Farm. 126). (Kai tovtovq ri SoKtiri ; Xen. An. 5, 7, 26. Quid hos putatisf Lat. Gr. § 395, R. 7, fin.) § When the word which is the subject of the infinitive is itself governed, as dative 162. o"" genitive, by the verb of utterance or opinion, the 'infin. attaches itself immediately to this case (without a separate subject in the accusative) : TiiaTiviit aoi iroiriirnv, I trust thee that thou wilt do (and thence oti aoi irdvv iriartvu) isavif tlvai, PL Euthyd. 296, as Tnartvit} rdSe dXTidij tlvai). OijSsvi kvQp^iritiV v^eiprjv hv ij^tov ifiov j^s^tuKkvai ^Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 6). KrijtriKXtoug o dijfioQ liiraQ KartxupoTovtiaiv dSiKilv (Dem. 21, 180). KareyvwKa efiavTov pi} ttot Slv Swarbg yevetrSai roig avSpai; iKaviog ^yKW|r fuaaai (PI. Tim. 19. Avvarog to the subject of the principal verb, J 158 b). (Passively, by § 56, R. 2 : KareyviiaBtiv dSiKiiv, Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 20.) (Airmnai riva K\iwTtiv elvai. 'EiTidBri 'AdelpavroQ vpolovvai rdg vavg, Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 32.) S ^ a) Besides the accus. (or nom.) with inf. immediately dependent on a leading 163 ^^''^' ^^^ continuation of the utterance or opinion may be carried on in the same form, so that the verb is to be supposed repeated : Avolv xp1<''P'"-''' oi SiapaprriataBai Ttjv TToXtv rjyovpjjv irXevirdvTbtv ypCjv (twv ■jrpetTJ3eti}V irpbg ^iXiirirovy fi y&p ^iXnnrov, d fikv ei\ffv iron oi Trpoyovoi ^PX"" (Thiic. 8, 52 ; it is settled that — ). Nofiov BriaoiitBa, /ji)Je*t iUivai dpxeiv, og av fiij (TTpaTivariTai. 'AaTvdytjg ajrjjyoptw /iTj^lva /HdXXttv, »rpiv Kvpog kftirXriaBsiii 9iipuiv (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 14). 'Eyiyj/oiTO airovSai TOiaih' AaKtSatiiaviovg fiiv Tagvavg T&g iv TV AaKiaviKy ira(rag, oaai ijaav fiuKpai, TrapaSovvai Ko/iiaavrag ig UvXov 'Afiij- vaioig Kai 'oirXa /i^ evupepttv Tif TiixiaitaTf 'ABjivaiovg Sk TOig iv Tyvhaif dvSpaai (nrov' kav Toig iv Ty riirtipif AaKeSaifioviovg iicjrkfivHV tuktov k.t.X. (Thuc. 4, 16.)^ — Et Tiva Tbiv yvwpifiwv fiovXoio KaTipyaZ^tidai koAeTv (te SJrt Sstirvov, rt av TTOtoiijc; {Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 11.) liaaa^ipvm iXiyiv,^ on Sia- TrejrpayjUEVoe ^KOt irapa fiaaiXiwc, dodfivai avTio awZ^v Touf "EXXtjvac [' The infin. present is common, as in Lat., after verbs^of ordering, decreeing, &c.] ^ AoKoCwroc Tov 9i/i/3pwvoc ovSiv ttouTv, mn^ovaiv oi ifopoi, iwoXmovra Aapwaav arpaTiitaBai iiti Kapiav (Xen. Hell. 3,1,8, send him orders to — ). 144 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 165. [§ (^Xen. An. 2, 3, 25). 'Qvovvrai al ttoXhs, lit) &StKcia9ai Totie irap' avrSv JbttXIow- l^'*-] rag k/tvopove (Dem. 8, 25). 'EycJi ainog, /Ji) KoXwe ff£ d7roKpii/a(r9ai, oVt oiJ KaXSg i}p6/i))v (P/. iv PovXofiai, tovtov « iraQtiv Siv d^ios iariv, Dem, 24, 8.) Rem. 1. After the verbs under b and c, the ace. with inf. sometimes takes iSgn (so to arrange that — ), rarely those under a (cf. § 145, R. 3). nci/oacro^ac woiq- aai, (Sgre at vo/ilZetv KoXwc PcfSovXivaOai (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 29). 'Ey(i kov r^c '/'"X^E ■/rpiaifiiiv (Hqts iirjiroTe Xarpewtrot rfiv yvvalKa (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 36). 'H oiei ;|/i)0i'- caaQai av t6 jrXijSos ffuvtXflov (i'ert roig (cpaTLaTovg Kai rt/idie Bai ^oipoic ttXeowkt-eiv; (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 20.) Swipt) liBiig /lerd Tijv iv 'Afi0t7roXei /laxriP iligri woM/iow /ij/5iv tn a-^aadai firiBiTipovg (Thuc. 5, 14). (AtoTrparro/tat wgre /*)} KoXa^tfffloi, P/. Gorg. 478.) Rem. 2. The verbs which denote endeavour (to effect), take an object-sentence with Snag, e. g. KaraaKtvaZui, SiatrirovSaZot (§ 123). With imiiiKtlaBai, firixava.- aBai the ace. with inf. is rare. Rem. 3. Sometimes the subject-matter of an agreement, resolution, stipulation, &c. is expressed by the simple infinitive, as the subject is easily sefen from the context : ''Kaav ai ffvyypafau wgirep eitit9affiv Hiraaai. aiaBsitrrjQ T7)g VEutg aTroSovvai , TO xpw""''' (Dem. 32, 5 ; were to this effect,.that one should pay). In some cases the construction may be either ace. with inf., or a dative with simple inf. by § 146. ITpoerarrw Tivi leouXv (order a person to do) and rivd iroiuv (that some one should do). Xoipeiv Xeyw rivi and rivd. 'Avutoj 'Ayoparif ainoQ iyiviTo fifj anoBaviiv (Lys. 13, 82). ToB /ij) \a^iXv ' AfupiiroXiv iravruiv aSrog ainiiraTSg lariv (Dem. 23, 152 ; viz. iiuv). (Also alriog tov ti ylyviaBai, § 170 c.) Oi iripi rbv Xapo- jrov, avvBejiivoi ToXg ' kpKaaiv l;ri|8o)j6tIj/, KaTaXapt^avovai Tt)v aKpSnoXiv (Xen. Hell, 7, 4, 15 ; having agreed with the Arcadians that these should come arid help them). § a) The accusative with infinitive stands as the object of a mental 165. judgement expressed impersonally (icaXov iari, xpv> &c.). KaXov aBek- 0ov>c aXXr}\oig iTriKOvpuv. HtpX ttoAXoS 7rot?)Tlov, jUtjStjutav irp6<^aaiv EoOtivai roig SiafiaXXovaiv. Stortjpia aXXij ovSspia ^v, j? irvOirrdai 'A0j)- vaiovg travTa to Trpaxdivra [Andoc. 1, 58). (Tig /tijxavi) Itfl oixi iravra KaTavaXmBfivai iig ri TtBvavai ; PI. Phced. T2, = aiivaTov.) Xlpogriicti fxoi jrouXv and i/ie jr. Rarely Utarl fit irouXv. Rem. The adjective S'lKawg is usually (instead of the impersonal form UKai6v iari followed by ace. with inf.) put personally, of the person who is bound (entitled) to do something, with infinitive added : Kai av iiiiiv Sixawg (SiKaiorarog) il avTixapOitaBai (Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 20). TloWif jtiiZoviav en 5uptai» lixawg tijii rvy- xdvHv (Dem. 18, 53). (Similarly : "Hv avviStiv Tif irpoelx'"'''' ''^'' vovv i) ^aaiKkag dpX') ToXg nr]Kiai rmv oSuiv Kai rif SuardaBai rdg Svvdfutg daBevijg oiaa, Xen. An. 1, 5, 9 = 'IIv avviltlv Triv dpxfiv — ojiaav.) So sometimes a participle express- ing something that is becoming, befitting, or a duty, stands personally with the infinitive, instead of impersonally : Aoyoj npogiiKiiiv ptiBijvai (PI. Pol. 283) := iv § 166.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 145 TTpoe^KSi p. Td rifuv ii apxfje wapayytXflEvra (jrposTaxBsvTo) SiiKBiZv (^Pl. Tim. [§ 90) = u rijuv TrapijyyIXfl)) S. 165;] b) An ace. with inf. is sometimes put as an apposition to a demonstrative pronoun {rovTo, ToSe, sometimes to a pronoun with a substantive), to denote a conceived rela- tion of which something is predicated : T6 SiKaiov tovt knH, irKkov Ixnv roiiQ apxov- Tag Tuiv dpxoi^kvwv (^Pl. Gorg. 491). ObStvi jriiiroTE SiSiixaTi rrjv Suipi&v ravrriv, l^iZvai rove tSiovg l;](;9poiig vlipi^uv, oJror' av /3ouXi)rai (jDem. 21, 170). a) The accusative with infinitive stands with ojQTt, so that, to § denote the way and manner (the degree) and the consequence of what 166. is predicated in the principal sentence, when the clause with &ct£ con- tains a mere mental representation which is not put by the speaker as actual. (Where the subject remains unchanged, the simple infini- tive is used.) If the proposition with wcte is put as actual, then partly the indicative (or potential optative) is used, especially almost always, with narrative statements in the aorist : partly the infinitive, whereby the sentence coalesces more with the leading sentence, and has less prominence in itself {as to c. inf., but often, so that). Where wc,i . ex- presses merely a consequence or inference {so that consequently, there- fore), but not the way and manner. Or the degree (so that ovtwq or roaov- Tov could not precede), the infinitive is rarely used: IloXXaf iXiriSaQ tx'^ apKOVvTwc Ipilv, {oQT v/xag firj aTro\ii(j)6fivai tuv Trpay/xaTtov {Dem. 27, 3 ; so that you shall not be left in ignorance of the state of affairs). OvTTW ol KaipoX TrapEXriXvOamv, Ioqt j)Sj) fiarriv tlvai to ixefivriaOai irepl TovTwv {Isocr. ; so that it should be in vain — ) : Kai \6ytuv koi /3oi»- \tVfiaTlj)V KOlV(i)VOV av <78 Ot TToXiftlOl WOIOIVTO 8(a TO TTiaTSVUV, WQTE luri^E I'v (7E XsXriOivai', Sjv fiovXofiiOa dSevai {Xen. Cyr.Q, 1, 40). OSrw aTOTTOwe Tivag Iv t7j iroXu koX Sucx^/oeTc avOpwirov^ Aiffi^ivije' iMjEv ilvat, loQTt oiiK al(Txpvi(s6ai Xoidopov/xivovg ^iX'nnro^ {Dem. 19, 308. In the oratio rectci it might be ovTwg — tlaiv, Sj^te owk alaxdvovrai, or &gT£ firj alaxvvsaOai'). Oi AaKtBaijiiuvioi ilg tovto airX-naTiag riXdov, wgTs ovK i^ripKi(Tev ai/roTe eXE'" '''Vv kuto. yriv apxh^ {Isocr. Panath. 103). O'vTuiQ Tifxiv TOVTa Taya9a vavTog a^ta slvai SokeT, o!>cte to kutu- \nritv avTo. ttqvtwv fiaXioTa ^ivyop.Ev {Xen. Mem. 3, 3, 3). Se'pSic Trjg ireZrjg oTpartag ovtwq awupov to irXijdog ^ysv, SigTE kol tu iuvt) Ta fiET avTOV aKoXovdfiaavta ttoXv av spyov t'iri KUTaXi^ai {Lys. 3, 37). Kai XnQx] Koi navla iroXXctKig iroXXoXg Sta Trjv tov amfiarog Kax^^av ug TTJv Siavoiav Ifnr'nrTOvaiv ovfiisg, wgn Kai Tag iiriaTriixag tK^aXXeiv {Xen. Mem. 3, 13, 6). 'H tiov 'Adijvaiiov iroXig ifnropiov iv /xifrt^ rrig 'EAXa- Sog TOV IlEipam KaTtaKtvaaaTO toctuvtijv e^ov virtp^oXriv, wgd\ a irapa twv aXXtuv EV Trap' EKuaTwv x"^^^°^ '"^^ Xo/BeIv, TavS' airavTa trap" aiiTvg pqSiov thai iropiaaaOai {Isocr. Paneg. 43). Etc tjjv vaTipa'iav ' [It might be ucte ouk alax- (taken as the opp. of aiax^vusBm) in mat. reci.— Ed.1 146 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 166. [§ ovx ?K£v 6 Tiffda^^jovrjc' wcO' oi "EXXijvsc i(j>p6vriZov {Xen. An, 3, 3, ■-' 34). "Qqtb (in consequence of the foregoing explanations) ^iv njl irpciry voXijiif ti} SiKucTU Kal ry iitT avrbv vTtoitTif avasaxv «"' '"'i' liaripov i% aiiTrJQ voXefUfi eipiiaei rig ToaavTU trri (Thuc. 5, 26). (SuvrfraKrai Kai avvaKoKovBn toXq fnkv irXovTotg Kal SwaaTtiaiQ avoia Kal aKoKaaia, raXg 5" hvSeiaiQ Kal Tate rawuvoTriai aoxppoaiivti Kal ucrpioDje" (i'ere x"^^"'"" «^»''" diayvdvai, iroTcpav av tiq ^IJoiro rSiv fiipiSurv Toiiniv ToTg iraial toIq a'uTOv KaToKmiiv, Isocr. Areop. 5.) Rem. Even after a condition, or after a question equivalent to a negative (vchere therefore the consequence is not a fact), iSgrt may stand with the modus finitus, if the condition or the question essentially concerns the proposition with oicrs: Oiirwfi a.yv(i>ji.6vi3>Q txtre, w dvSpeg 'ABrivcuoi, iign, Si iiv ek xpijirrwi' ^av\a rd. wpdy- Mara ttiq iroKtiiiQ ykyovt, hth roiriav IXTrt^ere rStv aijTwv Trpd^siav Ik ^avXiav avrct Xpriari. yivriaeaBai ; (JDem. 2, 26 '.) b) Likewise won before the accusative with infinitive, or, if the sub- ject be the same, the simple infinitive, denotes a fixed condition [so that something shall happen, under the condition that), or the price and reward [so that in return), sometimes altogether the object and the means {so that something may). Just so the ace. with inf. (or simple inf.) with li(Ti Kora^uyjjv, £i oetJoteu {Xen. Hell. 3, 4, 8) '. — Ti)pi/3a^oe EJTTEv, on aiTEiaaaOai (iovXoiTO, l^' (^ firiTe avTO^ Toiig"EXXrivag oSikeTv ju<)t' sKeivovg Kahtv rag oiKlag {Xen. An. 4, 4, 6) '. (The verb can or shaU lies in the construction, and is not separately expressed in the Greek.) c) For ToiovTog wgTE we have also Toiovrog olog, or simply oToe> so ' Td irpaynara opw elg rovro irpoijKOVTa iHgre, ottidq fii) vewojiiBa avTol jrportpov KaKuiQ, (TKk\j/aa6ai Siov {Dem. 3, 1 ; participle instead of infinitive with ugrs after a participle preceding, by a kind of attraction). ' Mrixaval jroXXot tlaiv iv kKaaroiQ Tolg KivSvvoig (i'fire dia(ptvyiiv Bavarov {PI. Apol. 39 ; so that one can escape, in order to escape). ' 'E^' If {ip re) with fut. indie, in Herodot. and Thucyd. : Ol iv 'iBiiiiiy Meaarivioc %vvk^r)aav Trpbg Tovg AaKeSaifiovlovg, tf' tp ts k^iaiyiv SK IlsKoirovviiffov Kal fi7]8kiroTE iiii^iiaovTai airrjg' rtv Ik Tig aKiBKt)Tai, rov \a^6vTog Avai iovkov {Thuc. 1, 103). § 167.] THE INFINITIVE AND ITS TENSES. 147 that Otoe is put in the case of the rotoSroc preceding (or understood), [§ not only with the simple infinitive where the subject is the same, but ^^'^ sometimes also with ace. with inf. Likewise {tooovtov) o(tov {roaavra ocra) for ToaovTov ti't;r£. Oi UtpcrtKOi vo;UOt STrijutAovrat ottwq ttjv ap-)(rjv jUTj ToiovTOi taovrai oi iroXtrai oTot irovripov Tivog ri alaxpov tpyov h^Uadai {Xen. Cyr. \, 2, 3). Oi-k fiv ilipa o'la apSiiv to tteSiov {Xen. An. 2, 3, 13 ; the season to irrigate the plain). Al.(rxi<^ra anaX- AoTTOvrat Aotoojoouvrse Te koi HTrovreg koi aKOvaavTsg Trspl (Tipiov avrwv TOiavra oTa koi tovc Trapovrag axOsardai {PL Conv. 311). 'EXeitteto Tijc vvKToc o(xov (TKoratoue roiiQ "E\Xr}vae SiiXOstv to irtSiov (Xen. An. 4, 1,5). Rem. 1 . From oloe in the sense roioCrof lilgre arose the frequent use of oldg rs with (Ifjii and an inf. by § 149, in the sense of, in a conStion to (to be able, &c.) : Ovx oiof ri tlfu PotiBijaai s/iavTtf (/ am not able [i. e. am not sack a one as to do it]. PI, Gorg. 408). Impersonally : ovx °^°^ " (iariv^, it is not possible ; mg olSv re. Reu. 2. For (i'ere in the sense so that, Herodotus and the Attic poets, some- times even Xenophon, have oij : "H 'VoSCnrig oiiru Si) n kKhvi) iyiviro, iig icai trdvTsg ot "EWrjveg 'Po^wTrtog Tovvofia E^efjta9ov {Herod, 1, 135). *Ev06v opij ^v vTTtpviprjXa, svOev Sk 6 iroTafihg roiovrog Ttt ^dOog, d)g fi7]dk r& dopara inrepex^i'V 5r«- poi/isvoig Tov j3d9ovg (Xen. An. 3, 5, 7). (Also K&Biava (pipovrai, we apiaaaOai iie Tov worafLov, X.en, Cyr. 1, 2, 8, in order to. Tag dcKiSag fisiKovg l^ouffiv ri wg ttoimv rj opav Ti. Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 17.) » An accusative with infinitive, or, for the same subject, a simple § infinitive, stands after irpiv {irponpov irptv), when it denotes a simple 167. relation of time to an action which has taken place, or to one merely conceived, which is hindered. If Trpiv after a negative sentence denotes a condition which has not yet taken place (before the fulfilment of which something will not happen), then Trpiv dv is used with the subjunctive by § 127, or irpiv with the optative by § 132. Of a condition which has already taken place, irpiv is used with the indicative, } 114 c. R. 1 ; likewise where jrpiv denotes merely a change which has taken place : until. 'H/itTc (oi AaKidaifiovioi) Msaarivriv eiAojuev Trptv nipo-ae Ao/BeTv TTJv (5aaiXiiav Koi KpaTricrai Trig riTrdpov koi Trptv oi/ci- adfivai Tivag twv iroXewv tuv 'EXArjvtSwv {Isocr. Archid. 26). Ovtw Ttvig siirtiOeig tlaiv, Sjgre, 'Trptv dSivai to irpogTaTTOfiivov, TTporspov ireidovTai {Xen, Cyr. 2, 2, 10). IJptv ixtaQai to. ampa ovilv iSitaOs ilprivrig {Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 12). IloAAoi aTroflvyjcncoiio-t TrporEpov irptv SijAoi JSVSaBai, oloi ^aav {Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 9). AoKsXg fioi oiSaiiag it' d^iiatw vplv dv ilvai (PI. Phmd. 228). 'O SJvpog vTriax^TO rdig ^vydai prj irpoaBcv vavaeadai irpiv avToig Karaydyoi oiKads (Xen. An. 1, 2, 2). Oi irporepov iTravaavTO Trpiv tov ' AXsi^idiitv SB row aTpaToirkiov ftfrtmiiipavTO (Isocr. de Big. S). Toie KipKvpaioic oi/x eiopiivTo oi vijtg, nai lOaviiaKov Toiig KopiJ/Siotic wpifivav Kpovop.kvovg- irpiv rivfg ISovrig tlteov, on vijeg iKtlvai htnr\sovaiv (Thuc. 1, 31 ; imtU at last some saw). l2 148 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 168, 169. [§ Rem. For irpiv, the poets, Herodot., and sometimes Attic prose- writers, use Trpiv 1670 ^. As vijith Trpiv, tiie infinitive also occurs, but more rarely with Trpdrepov ij, liorepov T] : ' AirayyiKQivTOQ 'iTnritf, 'on "lirTrapxof avBBijyiv, etti tovs OTrXiraf Trporfpov fi alaSkaSai ivBvQ Exwpjjcrej/ ( T/iuc. 6, 58. Uusually f; jireovro). (^Sai/u ij with ace. with inf. for (pBavai irpiv, Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 40.) The infinitive instead of Trpiv av with the subjunctive is very rare. 5 a) The ace. with inf. in some places stands without a governing word, expressing igg merely the thought present to the mind in the form of an indefinite sentence : 1) In commands (legal language) and communications of orders : Toic Op^icaj airikvai, vapuvai d' lis ivrjv (the day after to-morrow. Aiist. Ach. 172. A herald is the spealccr). In laws and treaties containing several regulations, among the direct commands expressed in the imperative are blended accusatives with inf , which may be said to attach themselves dependently to a term of appointment or stipulation, &c. understood : it is enacted, &c. that ■ — . (See e. g. PL Legg. 6, 760. Thuc. 5, 18, and 23. Z>ffm. 24, 20.) 2) In entreaties and wishes : "Ep/i?j 'inroXaii, rrjv yvvalKa t))v l/ii^v ovria fi airo- SoaOai rr]v t l/^auroS ixtjApa (Arist. Ach. 816 ; that I could but so sell!). 3) In exclamations of wonder at something happening [like our : to Ihinle of his not having, &c.J] : Iovtov S' ifipitnv ; avairvilv Si ; 8v si Tig If t,fiv, iyairav tiu (I)em. 21, 209). More usually with the article prefixed : lb Si /triSi kvvtjv oIkoBiv iXOiXv 6fi£ rbv KaKoSaiftov ixovra (Arist. Nub. 268. That I should not even — .'). (Also simple infinitive : T^j /jwpiaf, rb Ata voiiiZiiv, ovra rriXiKOVTOvt, Arist. Nub, 819. For a wan of his years to believe in a Zeus .') b) As a simple infinitive, so occasionally an ace. with inf. is added [in a qualifying or restrictive sense] to a statement with wt; or oaov (so far as — ; see § 151) : 'H oiv i^utypatXnnroc aXXa ri^ SiKaioTcpa a^iovv rovQ Qri^aiovc V vfxag {Dem. 2, 13 ; but by reason of the Thebans making a more just demand), llavra ravra ovk fiv ifnrocwv Ttjl rove $WK£ac (TwZsadai {Dem. 19, 73). c) The genitive of the accusative with infinitive stands, as objective genitive, with the same words which can take the genitive of the simple infinitive : 01 wpoyovoi to. ttXjjOjj kol rag uKpifisiac; ran/ vofiwv arifitiov iivai ivofiiZov tov KaKwg olKittrOai rriv iroXiv Tavrriv [Isocr. Areop. 40). OuS' lTrffii\y)Qr\v TOV StSoCTKoXov fJLoi nva ysviaOai twv iTTiaTaftivuiv {Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 4). Ahiov ^v tov raOro Tolg voXXolg apitJKSLv, OTL jUfjuaOjjKOTEC ?i(Tav ipyaZiiyOai kol (pdSiaOai {Isocr. Areop. 24. Cf. $ 164 with R. 3). "AvEu tov toIq wpayfiam firj av)X^ipuv to ■ipri 171.] Boi ai povXrinaBai ^i\ov ■^fuv ilvai (Xen. An. 2, 5, 12). 'Xiriaxvovfiat xc^vv HKOva avaSriOiiv (PL Pheed. 235). "Qfioaav 3 jirfv ^ori&rtauv. 'O Nu/x^ldJwpos tov iiri QjifKrie ttoXijiov virtiixiTO Ka-aXiauv (Time. 2, 29). Occasionally, however, the present is used, where the notion of future time is not meant to be prominent : "Q/ioXdyeis {ivvhQov rf/uv) xard. roiiQ vofiovQ irdKvnviadai {PI. Crito, 52). The verbs of hoping and surmising are also followed by the inf. of the aorist with av, see § 173. (Of the aorist without dv, see § 172 a. R.)' Rem. 3. Occasionally (especially in Thucydides) the inf. of the future is put instead of the present after the verbs named in § 145, 146 (e.g. Siiva/iai, diavoov- fiai, diofiai, ttUBu, &c.), to mark expressly, that the infinitive action is later and impending : Oi DvpaKovvtot rb arofia tov \iji.kvoQ Suvoovvto KKyativ (Thuc. 7, 56). Ot KopivSioi iScjiBriaav tSiv Miyafsmv vaval afag ^vfi'irpoirkii^tiv (Thue. 1, 27). > (That the shall, by which in English we denote what is matter of will, condition, endeavour, is not expressed by the inf. of the future, but by the construction, has been already noted, § 164, § 166 b, and § 170 c.) b) After the prseteritum of a verb declarandi vel sentiendi, the present, perfect, and future infinitive are put of that which at the time of the principal verb was present, past, or future, consequently as imper- fectum, plusquamperf., and futurum inprmterito : Oiik i^aaav rag vavg irapuvai. Toue (rrpariwrae rj^tiv ivo^it^ov. 'ApfioSiog Kal 'Apiaro- ytiTbJV ivofiLcsav fKfirivvaQai (Thuc. 6, 57). "A^ojSoc wjuoXoyEi kekojui- uQai rrjv TTpotKa {Dem. 27, 14; to have received = that he had received the dowry). (B-ysiTO Trjv fisyiarriv viaTiv iaioBai SeSojkopc. Isocr. Antid. 125.) Rem. 1. Sometimes, especially after eipfiv, the inf. present is used even of a more remote past time, .where otherwise the aorist is used (see the following §) to denote continuance, state, and recurrence (answering to the imperfect in the oratio recta) : Mtra ravra 'ApiffrdSij^os l^ij o^ag ftkv Smrviiv, rbv Si ^inKparti oig tlgisvai' TOV ovv 'Ayddiava TToKKaKiQ KiKivtiv lUTairiii-^aisBai rbv SaiKpaTt), 2 Sk ovk iav (PL Conv. 175 = ISeiirvovfitv ~ iigy^i' — iKkXivtv — eiwv). Suvrv^etv itpri XiaxiVTiQ ^ATpeffHStf iraph ^iKittttov leoQiVOiikvi^ KoX fier' aitTov yvvata Kal iraiSapta iig TpioKovra PaSiZnv, avTog Si Bavfiaaag ipiaOai nvd, tSiv avBpiiiriav, Tig dvOpiiiirog ian Kai rig ox^og o fiiT airov (Dem. 1 9, 305 = avviTvxov — ijiaStZiv — tjpofirjv). Rem. 2. Even after the present (the future or aorist without preterite significa- tion, also the perfect) of verbs declarandi vel sentiendi the inf. present is used (simply and in ace. with inf.) with the sense of past time (instead of the aorist, see the following §), to denote, like the imperfect, continuance, state, or recur- rence ! AaKiSaifioviovg (paaiv iv Jl\aTai.aig, liriiS^ irpbg Tolg ye/Spo^dpois kyivovTO, ouK efleXetj/ fiivovTag vpbg airovg ixaxeirBai, dWd ^ivyiiv, i^iruSi) Si iXiSjiaay a\ Ta.%ag tUv UepaHv, dvaarpeipoiiivovg iigirtp ivnkag fiaxiaOai Kal ovto) viKijaai rijv ' OuK 1^1} nopiycaBai (Xen. An. 1, 3, 7), because, oii ■nopimnai, I am not going, may be used as ^ / will not go. 152 PART II. CHAP. V. [§ 172, [§ i/cEi ftaxiv (^Pl. Lack. 191 = tj9i\ov — t^svyov — i/uaxovro — IviKijami). AoKo^iiv 171'] Tov "jrapiXBovTa xpovoif aXai^ovtvtaOai Kal rrjv fikv tpvffiv o^otoi roig dWotg slvaij Ta7g S^ atfivoTtjaiv imrXaanivaii icjxpfiff*''" {Isocr. Archid. 98 ; people will sai/ of us : tjXaZoveiovTo). Oi/xat Kai oiKoi r/fids tovtov svexiv aaicili' Kai yaaTpbg KpiiTTOvg dvai Kai Kiphktov aKaiptaVy 'iv\ £i n 5eoi, SvvaifxiOa avToXq av^tpoptitg xp^ffSnt (^Xen, Ct/r. 4, 2,43. Not aaicoviJtv, but ijaKov^iiv, as 'Iva Jiwaifitfla shows). Ti S' o'l QerTaXoi ; dp' OtCff^f, OTt TOVQ TVpdvvOVQ ^iXtTTTTOQ t^E/3a\\f, TVpogSoKaV TTjV KudiOTiiKJaV VVV SiKaSapxiav laiaBai; (^Dem. 6, 22 = oil ■npoQiSSxinv.) § a) The aorist infinitive (without av) has the signification of a prae- ^^2- teritum, as in the indicative, when it is governed by a verb declarandi . vel sentiendi, or by a phrase of the same signification, and likewise in the ace. with inf. when it has the article, except where it serves to denote a purpose : Uarphc \e.yiTai b Kvpog yeviuBai KajujSuo-ov {Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 1). liaXaiOTaTOL XiyovTai sv fltQti tivX t^c ^iKiKiag KvKXoiTTEe oiKijtrat {Thuc. 6, 2). 'AOrivaiiov to TrXriOog "iTVirapxov olovrai vg iroiiiv, el jurj Swarol ^crav, Kot Toiig avdpwTTOvg k^airarwfiivovg tov iravra \p6vov oiioIttot' av alcrOeadai ; [Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 16 = 'EvE^uo'av av — oiiSettote av yaOovro ;) — 'Apa fiiKpa avaXwtrai av tov fifi ra SiKOta ttoihv oj ttXow- moi SoKOvmv ; [Dem. 18, 107 = Mticjoa av avaXcoaav ; think ye they would have sacrificed little, not to — ?) AokeTtI juot iro\v jdiXnov av TTEpi TOV TToXifiov j3ov\evc7a(Tdai, d TOV TOTTOv Trig \djpag, TTpog fjv ttoXe- jueTte, kvOvfjiriOiiriTS [Dem. 4, 31 m (iovXniaaurOs av). Aokoi SeKUKtg av Kara Trig yrig KaTaSvvai T)§tov rj 60rivai ovtoj Tairtivog [Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 9 := "HSiov av inroOavoifiL rj o^flsiijv — ). AijjUOctGevjjc ttiv Ta%iv TOV TtpwTog Xiyuv oiiK av iii irapaXnrtiv ovS" tTTiTpi'^peiv Tivl TrpoKaraXa^HV to, tov ^iX'nnrov wra [^sch. 2, 108). Oi ^ AKapvaveg ri^tovv Arifioadivrjv airoTSi^iZuv Tovg AsvKadiovg, vofiiZovTsg pqSitog y' av eKwoXiopKriaai TioX^bjg te aei ac^iai iroXtfilag airaXXayfivai [Thuc. 3, 94). 01 AaKaSaifiovioL ov Toaovrov iiXiriZov skit Bail v av IlepiKXia, 8 avSptQ ' AQrivaioi, ovd' d (ixoXoyow- jikviiiv TOVTuiv jir) IGiKiiaavTcg &Kovaai KaTaiprifuraiiivoi tUv iaxo-Tutv TijiiiaaiTt, oiiK &v aKpiTovg aiiToiie dvoKuXkvai, aWd ti)v irpoQiiKovaav SiKijv StdmKevai (Lys. 27, 8, OAk av axpiroi ciTroXiiXiaav — , it could not have been said that they perished — ). Toig Tavra ayvoovvrag SwKpdrjje avSpaTrodtbSsig av 8iKaiit)g K£K\rjtT9ai riysiro (^Xen. Jlfem. 1, 1, 16 ; from KhXruiai, I am called). (With the inf. with article : Ilais ixnQ fpAc rb WsKiiv S.v ikvai aicXjjrof ijri SCiwov ; PL Conv. 1 74. OvSilq ivTiXire Sid rb /Ji) iivaaxBsBai cLv TfjV iKKkriaiav, Xen. An, 1, 4, 20 ; because the assembly would not have put up with it.) Rem. 1. The av belonging to the inf. is often detached from it, and placed earlier in the sentence (of. J 139, b) ; in this way it comes not unfrequently to stand with the governing verb (o'iet av, oiiK av fioi doKS, &c.) : "Ta9i avotirog Siv, li oiei av TTiv vjierkpav dpiTtjv TrtpiytviaSai Trig PaaiKku^ cvvaiumg (^Xen. An. 2, 1, 13 ; § 174.] THE PARTICIPLE. 155 cf. above, Xen. Mem. I, 4, 16). 'E/ioi jiiv oUiv av Soieel tovtov ntlZov evpieijvai [§ TeKfiiipiov {Devi. 31, 5). Then sometimes av is repeated with the inf. itself, and 173.] so stands twice : AoKue av fi iroXiv ij arpaToinSov fi Xyarctg fi KXiirrag ij aXXo n IBvoe, Saa Koivy iiri ri Ipx^rai aSkug, 7rpa?ai &v n SvvaaBai, ii aii/coitv ccXXri- XovQ ; (PI. Sep. 1, 351. Cf. § 139 b.) ' Rem. 2. 'Av with the fut. inf. in Attic writers, must be regarded as an errour of the editions, the dv being either improperly inserted, or the aorist changed by mistake into the future. CHAPTER VI. The Participle. a) A participle in Greek is partly used by way of apposition, to § denote the relation of time and other circumstances in the principal 174. sentence, partly in nearer connexion with the principal verb, as part of the predicate ; likewise by way of apposition to the subject or object (Se('kvujui riva iroiovvra n), partly as simple attributive, or, with the article, as a substantive instead of a relative circumlocution. b) To denote the relation of time in the principal sentence, its man- (424) ner or other circumstances, such as came, occasion, means, condi- tion, purpose, opposition (by the assignment of a simultaneous, pre- ceding, or subsequent action belonging to some substantive term contained in the sentence), the participles in Greek have a wide range, inasmuch as the language has participles for all the principal tenses and for the narrative aorist, both active and passive : Tavra ilmov cnrytiv. Tavra Xiyovra aitTov ol arpaTioJTai Kara^aivctv ekIXevov. 'A7rr}vr?)(7a $(Xf7r7r(t) airtovri t/St). 'lirirlag rpia ett) Tvpavvsvcrag e^ettect-e TJje ap)(ri^. SuKpoTTic Trpoi(XiTO fiaWov Tolg vofioig ififxevwv awoda- vEiv 7j irapavofiiov ^ijv {Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 4). Kvpog irapayyiXXsi KAEajo^fj) Xaj3ovrj tjkeiv oaov ^v aiiTi^ orpaTEujua [Xen. An. 1, 2, 1). Tt(7(7a0EpvT|e iropsvETai wQ jiaaiXia 'nririaQ e^wv u>q TrevraKoaiovQ {Xen. An. 1, 2, 4. So, frequently, ex^v, aywv, fiptav, where in English we should say with : "QiipOri ^i^og sxwv). KaXoe koI ayaOoc vofii- Zofisvog iravra pqov S(a;rpa£^. Tou ke/oSouc cnrs(Tx6fiJiv, ai(7Xpov vofii- Zitov. Ala Ti ytyvwiTKwv 6 avOpwTrog to, koko oti koko lortv, oju(i>c aira TToui; 'Hrrii/iivog virb rijc fiSovriQ {PI. Prot. 355). O'/ei av "AXKijortv VTiip ^ASfifiTov cnroOavsiv av, fifj olofitvriv aOavarov juv^juijv ajOEriJe TTEpi iavTTJg iasaBai ; {PI. Conv, 208.) IlapiXriXvda avu^ovXsvcrwv ' 'Av belonging to an infinitive understood : 'Ap' 8.v dXiya Totavra iv T cLTnovree, dg AiyoaOiva TrJQ MtyapiK^s aijiiKvovv- 175.] rat {Xeii. Hell. 6, 4, 26). _ (In Herodotus also loeri.) Sometimes wv in an apposi- tion with are, ola Sri, i>e is omitted : Toic rije i-payv«iac TroiijT-de sif 7-)}v voXiriiav ov vapaSi^dniea clts TvpavviSog vixyriTag (Pt. Rep. 8, 568). Uuvtiq ol tovto ImrridevovTeg aKovTiQ iviTtiSevovuiv lag ccvayKoiov dXV oiix i>e ayaBov (^Pl. Rep. 2, 358). d) 'Qf with the participle denotes the thought, opinion, supposition, purpose, pretext, in, with, or under which the action is done : ' XyavaKTovatv lie ijeydXwv Tivuiv dircirTipriiievoi (PI. Rep. 1, 329 — thinking themselves deprived). Ol 'AQtivaioi T&v U(ptK\ka kv aiTiif tXxov i>Q ViiaavTa a^aq ■jroXi/itXv Kai Si SKiXvov rals ivfi^o- pnii; 7re pi TTE IT rcuKoT-Ee {Thuc. 2, 59). MvBov Tiva XlapiJitviSrig ipaivirai fiot lirjytiaeai iraialv i)Q ovmv ruiiv {PI. Soph. 242 ; to children, as if we were such; to us as if we were children"). ' AfTaUo%r)Q avXKajx^avu Kupov wc airoKrivSiv {Xen. An. 1, 1, 3). Ot KaKiSaipovioi iv oXiywpi'^ ivoiovvTO i)Q pfSittig \riip6iievoi /Siji t6 x'^P'"" (^Tiwe. 4, 3). (Of the omission of uv, see under c.) Rem. In denoting the purpose after verbs of motion (ii/jii, iJKia, ipxe/iai, irdpufii, nifnTu), dyio, and more special verbs of this kind, such as airoTrXiia) the simple participle is used. See the examples, § 174. ("Hia ipuv, I was going to say.) (JlapanRivaZopLai iig airiiiv, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 13, and "lirirapxoQ TrapeaxtvaZtTo Trpo- TTj/Xairiwj' rbv 'ApfioSwv, TAuc. 6, 34. Also with the infinitive : irapintvaXtTO TrpoQ^aXKiiv ry voKu (Xen. Hell. S, \, 17); wapaciKwwC.optvoe TroXioprafffii' (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 12). e) An antithesis is denoted by Kaivep (although, albeit) or simple xai (even) before the participle (poetically trip or irtp EjHTrije after the participle), with sometimes ojuwf (nevertheless) before the principal verb : Kav av, Kaiinp oKrw aoovvTBs tSiv \6yav aiTupoi yiyvovTM, ols XP") XP'^/'"""' o/iiXciv toXq avBpiiiiroig (JPl. Gorg, 484 ; which one must use in converse with meji), ^vvtkkyi] Arj^oaQsvtt rb aTpdrevfia, 8 tSst exovTa dg T7]V SiKfXiav (SorjQHV {Thuc. 7, 26). Ou 5tcXoytffaff0f, virep ola TrsirotriKOTiov &v8pbtir(ov Kivduvsvaere (Dem. 18, 98). — Hbv toiovtov t^tnTiv iTri Ko^iptiQ TvirrovTa jui) SiMvai S'lKiiv (PI. Gorg. 486 ; one can smite such a man on the cheek without heing punished for it). Ol 'ApytLoi iroXKoLKiQ 'A9r]vaiovg ^KsKtvov (Txovrag ftdvov aiiv ottXolq kg T7]V AaKb}ViK7]v Kal ri iXaxtorov /itTcL a^Siv Symaavrag cLiriXQiiv (Thuc. 6, 105). Rem. Especially we may note the expressions ri (o,ri) vaQiiv and ri fiaBav, where, with surprise and disapprobation, one asks (directly or indirectly) why a person did this or that (most commonly iraOdv, denoting affection by some external circumstance, or impulse generally [what possessed him to — ], /laBiov, some notion which the person has taken into his head [what induced him to — ] : Aegov Sri /^ot, Ti iraQoinrai^ ctTrep vetpeXai y daiv dXriQSjg, 9vr)Taig e'l^aai (^oiKflffi) yvvai^iv ; Arist. Nub. 341, what has come to them, what ails them, that they — .) (Depend- ently, without express question, merely attached to the expression of surprise or vexation implied in the principal sentence ; Ti a%i6g cl/u itaBilv jj imoTiaai, o, ri /laBojv iv Tip ^iif ovx rjavxiav r/yov ; PI. Apol. 36, what do I deserve to suffer because (God knows why — , or, for some crotchet or other that I had got into my head — ) / did not keep quiet. (Ti SrJTa txi^v arpeptt ; PI. Plued. 236.) c) The participle, (put as apposition to the subject of a preceding sentence,) gives the character of an action or expression of some other person, mentioned in that sentence, or asks what was the ground or cause of it : Sot, li> 'Zmxpareg, Itpti 6 Qpaav/iaxoc, xapijopai. Eu y£ av iroiHv (PI. Rep. I, 351 ; it is well done of thee). 'ATTopw, Ti XPV TTon iLTTtiv ovTttig eivai rhv (ro(pi(TT7]v. EiKOTwg ye av aTTop&v (Pi. Soph. 231 ; no wonder thou art at a loss). 'O iixbg irarrip rbv dvSpa awknTeiviv. Ti Xa^ijv dSiKovvTa ; (^Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 37 ; what wrong had he found him doing f) 'Epurw, d SoKU) dv vfiiv TTEpl irXdovog Trjv ^tXtTTTrow tpiXtav Trig tS)v Tzaihijyv awTripiag iroiriaaaBai ; TToUiiv KparriQiiQ rfSovcjv ; ri tI 'irti)irore aaxri^ov eveKa ^pjjjuarwv "Trpd^ag ; (JEsch, 2, 152.) The speaker himself interposes a parenthetical tZ iroiZv, KoXSig ■noiSiv in the sense, tuith good reason, happily : Tovto toIvvv, ti TrotoJii', ov avvk^ri (Dem. 23, 143). (A remark parenthetically interposed in a report of what some person has said: HaptXB^v Aiaxivrig, 'AyvoeiT, t^ri, w ^ovXri, rb rrpdyiia ; Kal Tbv airbx^ipcc sxovTeg (Xeyuv rbv 'ApiaTapxov) ixiXKin Kal ?)jT£lr£ ; Dem. 21, 116. Apposition to the subject of Ifrj.) Rem. Certain participles are attached to the subject, to characterize the action in respect of its circumstances or manner, almost with an adverbial signification, especially dpxbfitvog, at the beginning (oircp apxi/itvog tXtyov, PI. Thecet. 174), dp^d- fiivog in the construction dp^djisvot dvo Tivog (^oiKpdTovg), first S. and then the rest, beginning with S., TtXivrHv, at last. (Oi "EXXrivig Kivri9rjvai ovic UvvavTO Ik tov Xiopiov, dXXd TiXiVTwVTig Kal dirb tov iiSarog upyov avrovg oi OpfKcg, Xen. An. 6, § 177.] THE PARTICIPLE. 159 1, 8.) (In the language of common life: d.viaae avoiyt, make haste and open! [§ $\t;apci£ fx"". See the Lexicon.) 176-] d) Sometimes several participles stand together, either attached, without con- nexion among themselves, to the same leading verb in order to define the action on several sides of it (by nearer and more remote circumstances), or so that one par- ticiple attaches itself to another as its leading verb, especially participles put accord- ing to the rules in J 177 and 178: 'aJiboi ovng mpdavovukv re xal Xiaaoiievoi {by praying) uTrcpjSaivovrEe Koi aiiaprdvovTcg (when we transgress and siri) veiOovTeg rovg Oeoi:£ dZr)iuoi d'traXka^ontv (^Pl. Rep. 2, 366). ^avfiaerai 6 BeaiioBhrig, vEiaBug bTroaifM}i!oTt apyvfiif, KaBv^tig rbv dywva (IJetn. 21, 39 ; that he has given up the suit, induced by — ). (In the genitive absolute : Ol eij/Satot ^arspov irafiiyivovTo, ijdri tSiv dvSpwv tSiv )iiv iu^Bapfikvarv, rSiv dk Sod/twv IxoA"^*"^") ^'huc. 2, 5 ; being alive in prison. ToB a.Trt> tSv 'ABrivaiuv KrjpvKog, oiSiv iiricTaiievov rSv ycyevrinkvoiv, tXBovTog oi 5roXi Sorepoj' avBig irtpl t&v viKpStv, airiSoaav ol Eoiuroi, Thuc. 4, 101 ; without knoumg what had happened.) e) Sometimes a participle of circumstance is, less accurately (where one would have rather expected a dependent sentence or a double genitive, 9 181) attached in the nominative to the subject of the principal sentence, although this cannot, quite unchanged, be the subject of the participle. Namely, either (I) the passage begins with the participle in the plural referred to a plural term (especially one that has been the subject of discourse so far) or to several individuals, and then is carried on in the principal sentence in reference to a part of the plural term or some of the individuals (sometimes even with an extended reference to a larger plural than the one just mentioned), or also (2) after a general statement concerning a plural, a participle follows with an annexed partitive or less comprehensive subject. (1) "Qc Kpavyfi Kai KTvirog iylyvero, aiaBofievoi 01 tvSov rov ©opv/Sou, KeXivaavTog tov jia- aiKkiag ani^aaBai, ri tJij ri Trpayfia, sicBsovai Tivig dvoi^avreg Tctg vvXag (Xen. Cyr, 7, 5, 28). ''SivBavra /laxoitcvoi ical fSaaiKiig Kal KCpog ical ol d/a^' airoig virkp itcarkptav, OToaoi fiiv Tfjjv dfifpi fSautXea cCTTsBvtjGKOV, KTrjoiag XkyEL, Kvpog Sk aifrog ts direBavE Kal dKTO) ol dpwroi twv irepi airov (Xen. An. 1, 8, 27). Kal TruiravTsg [ol 'ABrjvaloi\ roiig Kvfiiidxovg liBig ixiipovv liri 'Op^o/itvij' rbv 'ApKaSixbv irdvTig irXriv 'ApyciiDv (Thuc. 5, 61 ; all, viz. the allies as well as the Athenians). (2) UiffTetg eSoaav dWtjXotg ol 'EXkvriv fivriaTivovTig, rj fit]v fforiBrjativ, si rig diroaTepoiij rbv d^uuBsvra Xaj3Elv airfiv, vo/iiZtav EKaffros Ti/v iTriKovpiav TavTtjv avTif irapaaKcvdZeiv (Jsocr. Laud. Hel. 40).' Rem. Sometimes an irregularity in the case results, where the sentence begins with a participle in the nominative, and then the construction is altered so that a different case is required. See Anacoluthia, § 'i\6. (Of a different irregularity in the case of the participle, see ibid. R. 2.) a) With sundry verbs, mostly intransitive, a participle is (by way § of apposition) so constructed with the subject, that it belongs at the 177. same time to the verb which is predicated of the subject in relation to the action (or state) expressed by the participle ; the leading verb ' Al 'ArTiKal vijfg -TrapayiyvofjiEvai roXg KtpKvpaiotg, el iry TruZotvro, ^6(5ov fiiv irapiixov Toig tvavTiotg, lidxig ^^ "iiK ^pxo", SiSioTig ol OTparijyoi rryi/ irpo^priaiv tSiv 'ABrivaiaiv, Thuc. 1, 49 (4, 73). 160 PART II. CHAP. VI. [§ 177. [§ being in itself incomplete or undefined, and the participle serving to ■' complete it into an entire and definite predicate, in the same manner as an infinitive is used as complement of the predicate. Such verbs are those which denote continuance and perseverance, or weariness and cessation, satisfaction or dissatisfaction [shame], superiority or its opposite, the being early or late, also being right or wrong {piaTtXa, Sidyu), Siayiyvofiai, avixofiai, Kaprepiii, Kctftvia, airtiptjKa, iraioiiai, iicKciirta, Xrjyoj, xalpb), ayairut, i^Sop-ai, poet. rspTTOjuai, &yavaKrSi, aiax^vo^ai, d^Qoiiait fitTajiE* Xojuai, ;\;aX£:r(3c ^epw, vikS), tivTutfiat, gXXEtjrojuai, dpx(*>t ujrapxu), ipOdvb), ddijcw, dfiap^ rdv(o, IV, KaXuie rroiio). SwKOan/c oiiOEV aXXo TTOiuv Siaytytvr)raL rj Sw- aKOtribv ra re SiKOia icai ra ciSiKa [Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 4). 'ATTEipijica rpE;^'^'^ (Xera. An. 5, 1, 2). OvSiv TravofisOa £tc TO avTo TnpKJtifiofisvoi (PI. Gorg. 517). ToTc KaXiog spwriuaiv aTTOKpivo/jLivog X^'P*^ [Pl.Prot. 318). ^apvdPaKoQ rrje Aio\idoQ xaXeirwc liptptv dirsaTiprijxkvoQ (Xen. Hell. 3,3, 13). OiSk Tov dSi\(jibv yaxvvtro rbv in Zuii'Ta ovtuiq iXiyov ^povrO^ovaa row teBviHti's (Isocr. JEgin. 40). 'Edv rig t'ludg li irotiSv virdp^ij {first confers benefits upon us), TovTov Eic yi Sivajuv ovx yiTrtfaojiiBa iv vmovvrit (Xen. An. 2, 3, 23). Td TfJQ ttoXews oiirwc iwijpxcv £x<""'<' (Dem. 18,235; were in this posture). 0'i."E\\i]vss fGdvovaiv £7ri T(fi dKpqi yivofiivoi rovQ ?roXE/j(ouf (Xen. An. 3, 4, 49). '0 tni,aQ arpardg tSiv *AOjjvaiij)v (fiOdvH dva^dq kiti rag 'EiriTroXdg irplv rovg SvpaKovaiovg TrapaysvkdQat (Thuc. 6, 97).. 'ASikhtb toXI/uou dpxovreg Kal aTrovldg Xvovreg (Thuc. I S3). 'A9))vaToi Toig ek rrig vrjaov Sidjxmrag jiiTifiiXovTo diroSeliDKOTeg AaKiSaijiovioig (Thuc, 5, 35). b) In the same manner the participle stands with the verbs and phrases Tvyxavto, XavBavw (riva), SfiXoc ilju, (ftavspoQ slui, (jialvofxaL [show myself, am seen to — ), which are used personally of the person who accidentally, privately, or openly does or is something : "Etvxov oTrkXrai Iv ry ayopq KadevSovreg wg TTivrfiKovra [Thuc. 4, 113; soil was that they were asleep — ). "EXaOtv a^ivra ttovto icat Kora- povU)V fiov [PI. Themt. 189). KriSsToi rtg jjidXiara Tovrov, Tvyxdvti tpiXuiv (PI. Rep. 3, 412). Oi QT}^aloi ^avipoi irdfnv rjaav dvayKa- cSricoiitvoi Kara^ivyuv iip' iftdg (Dem. 18, 19). "H i^«X') dBdvarog ^aivirai ovaa (PI. Phced. 107 ; it appears that the soul — ). Rem. 1. When av with an adjective is the participle, it is sometimes omitted, especially with verbs denoting continuance, and with rvyxdvia : SwKpdrijj dwiro- BrjTog Kal d%irb>v hiriXn (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 2). Vlyvirai voXig, l-n'uS)) rvyxdvei ifiiSv cKciarog oir/c airdpKr)s dXXd irnXXdv ivdtrjg (PI. Sep. 2, 369).' (Poetically : sv dypoig Tvyxdvii), with a preposition, or with local dative, dypoig. Soph. El. 313.) With (paivofiai, the omission of uv is the usual practice. ''Srevdijg ^aivirai 6 rmSpvag (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 4). ' "0, rt, oVot), oV^, ojrorE rvyxdvoi, rvyxdviig, &c., what (as it) may chance (with me, thee, &c.) i nEpiETp6;(0v, oVj t-ux"'/" ('■"'■ Conv. 173). § 178.] THE PARTICIPLE. 161 Rem. 2. With XavBavu), S^Xoe, and ipavip6c h/u, sometimes a sentence with on [§ follows : Ot itoXe/iioi SijXoi rjaav, on ImKiiaovTai iv ry KaTa^aaniXen. An. 5,2, 26). 177-] Also \avBavu (jiva), Sf)\6v lari, (jiavspov i. are put impersonally with oVi : Jlaffiu 7iv ^avspoVf tin fidWov riaQrjtreGBe Toig irapaKoKoviriv vfiag kiri rbv TroXefiov t] toXq irtpi uprivi]£ aviipovXfvovaiv (^Isocr. de Pac, 5 = ^avtpoi rire ^trdijcrojUEVOi). Rem. 3. Xiaxivonai Xsyoiv, lam ashamed qfsayingit, (even) while I say it, attrxvvo- fiat Xayeiv, / am ashamed to say (and therefore forbear to say), ^aivofxai has the infini- tive in the sense seem (seem to myself) : 'Byutyi /loi (jiaivo/iat Svo KaBopav liSt) ttjs liavTiKiJQ (PI. Soph. 235). (' ATroKafivii) n-ottiv n, J give over doing something.") 'Apx"/"" (middle) has usually the infinitive, rarely the participle. Some other verbs and phrases of kindred meaning occur now and then constructed thus with the participle, e. g. irapSiiiai ^aaavV^iav n (PI. Phil, 21 ; make an attempt at testing something, Kupioj elfu wotui/ n (Thuc. 5, 84 ; have a right to do something), avjipaivu Ti ytyvoiuvov (and, without iHv, itiyiarou KUKbv avji^aivii ij aSma, PI. Gorg. 479), lieaTog liju dvfiovfitvog (Soph. CEd. C. 768 =: Kajivoi, am tired out and sated). Rem. 4. As SrJiKoQ u/ii, so, in the poets, and sometimes in prose, apKu, Wavos, Kpe'iTTOiv, ^iKrioiv lijii are used personally with a participle instead of an impersonal expression with ace. with inf. (dpKcI ini — ) : 'Apiceiru Ovrimova' lyw, (Soph. Ant. 547). KptiTTOJv tiv 6 TTarfip aov jifj \uTOvpyqaaQ fj roaavra rHv iavTov avaXutrag (Lys. 26, 4). Rem. 5. With some impersonal verbs and expressions, which denote the conse- quence and advantage of an action, sometimes, instead of the infinitive, a participle stands as apposition to the dative, so that the use or advantage during (after) the action is denoted : 'AfiqvaToi irkfi^avreg kg AEXtpovg kTnjpMzwv rbv dsSv, ti TroXsfiovffiv afuivov tarai (Thuc. 1, 118; also XvainXriiru, avvoiaei). 'H/ittg i^yavaKTov/iiv /ikv ivl Tolg Xeyoiisvoig, irXiov S' ovSiv rjv ayavaKTovaiv i/fiiv (Dem. 35, 31). In the same manner : MtrajiiXu fioi oxiriag voiiiaavn, to have so acted; of having so acted.^ Rem. 6. The verb ipdaviii in negative, dubitative expressions is used of that which, when it takes place, will not take place too soon ; and, in the second person, (oiiK dv ^Bdvotg, (pOatioirc) expresses a challenge or summons to do something immediately : Oiic dv ^Sdvoig Xkyiav, A n ya9t}aai fit 0i\rpov kwurrdiiti/ov (Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 11)."^ (More rarely in the third person, of that which, since it must be done, may as well be done at once : Et /ti) riftiopriaeaBt rourouf, oiic dv pBdvoi jb irXqflos ToiiTOtg SovXivov, Dem. 24, 143). a) A participle is likewise attached to the object of certain verbs, § to denote that the proper complete (logical) object of the verbs is not 178. the grammatical object, in itself, but that state or action of it which the participle expresses ; so that the object and participle together have the same meaning as the accusative with the infinitive a.iie.vverba decla- randi : Ae'iKWui nva woiovvto. ti. If the subject of the leading verb should also be its object, the participle is put in the nominative and re- ' 'EotKoe T^v ivSaiftoviav oio/ilvifi rpv^riv Kai iroXyrkXaav tlvm (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 10 ; thou art like one who thinks s thou seemest to think). ^ In the editions often incorrectly pointed as a question. M 162 PART II. CHAP. VI. [§ 178. [§ ferred to the subject : Aeikw/il iroiriirae ri {that I have done something). 178.] ^^^^l^ ^^jjg passive, or the forms used intransitively, the participle is re- ferred to the subject : Aetx^naofiai iroii'iaag ti. Such verbs are those which denote to see, mark, know, experience, remember, show, prove, find {find oneself), siffnify (verbsof knowledge andexperience) : (.opS, alaBdvofiai, &KOVIM, irvvBavofiat, jiav^avia, Karaji., olSa, i'lriarafiat, yt^vittSKia, fifjivrjjiai, ETTiXovfla- vofiat, Sti\k>, SuKvvjU, iwiS., airoS., avoijiaivii), IJeXeyxw, dyyfXXw, tvpiaKU)). OjOOJ Tov TToXifxov vfiiv iroXXwv KCiKMV aiTiov yiyevrinivov {Isocr, Phil. 2). 'ETTi'Sei^a Aiaxivnv ovSiv aXrfiiQ cnrriyytXKOTa aXXa (psvaKiaavd^ vfiag {Bern. 19, 177). Ot"EAX»/v£c ovk yStaav Kfipov TaSvijKoVa {Xen. An. 1, 10, 16). "AvOpwiroi KaXo\ KayaOol iwii^av yvwaiv cnriaTovfiivoi, oil ^iXoiiai Toiig cnriarovvTag {Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 17). ^iXncTTO^ iravS" 'iviKa iavTov irotwv i^sXr'iXsyKTai {Dem.2, 8). 01 twv ^Adrivaiwv arpar- jjyoi To7c Tt itri\iipriiiaaiv iwptov oi» KaTopOoiivng koi touc arpar- idiTUQ axdoficvovg ry juovp {Thuc. 7,47). KXiapxoc fjKOVi Kipov e?w ovTa TOV 'E\\t]viKov tiuivvfiov ^aaiXka {Xen. An. 1, 8, 13).' ' Airitpavriv avyapopaQ /liv ovStfjiag aiTiog yeyevrtfikvoe, 'iroWd 5k icayaOd tipyaajikvoQ TrjV iroKiv {Ltys. '21},^ 4), Mifxvrifiai iytayi rai nais (!>v (even from my childhood) Kpirij T(fdi Kvvovra as (PI. Charm. 156). 'laBi di/oijroc iHv (Xen. An. 2, 1, 13). 'S.kovovjuvoq ilipiaxov oiSajtwe dv dWug, 3 ^^vXS/iriv, Biairpaid/itvof;, irX^v ti ypaftiij \6yos iSi,7rep ukuv rqe ifiqs Siavoiat (Isocr. Antid. 7). Dpoiroe ^aaiXtl KSpov kKifiouXeiovTa ^yyeiXa (Xen. An. 2, 3, 19). Rem. 1. But instead of the nominative referred to the principal subject, occa- sionally a reflexive pronoun stands with the participle in the accusative (cf. ace. with inf. for the nominative, § 160) : "H dit^ov ov vtiroiriKora ravra aavrbv fi liKtiv fiirtxt (Dem. 2'2, 29). From aiaBdvoiiai Ijiavrbv TrfwpaKiiQ comes the construc- tion avvk^q IJ.01 aiaOkaBai i/jiavTov irtJrpaKOTi (Dem. 18, 46), by } 157, b. Rem. 2. Instead of an object with participle attached, the participle of an impersonal verb or expressii)n may also stand alone : 'Opw Kal aoi tovtidv Serjaov (Xen. Mem. 2, 6, 29). Elcov ol AaKtSainovioi dSvvarov ov ninoptiv roij; dvSpdmv (Thuc. 4, 15). (Totg ^vnndxotQ irapdSiiy^a ffa^kg KaraarifffaTe, og dv a^tur^rai, #i QavaTtp ^rjfinoaopivov, Thuc. 3, 40, = Sei^are.^ * Rem. 3. Rarely (for the most part poetically) a>Q is prefixed to this participle : 'Qf firiSiv ilSoT laOi li S>v dvinTop&g (Soph. Phil. 253). Rem. 4. With these verbs also (cf. § 177, R. 1) the participle av is sometimes omitted, e.g. with dwo(jiaivta, olSa : Bi Tig ex^i ^evS^ diroijiijvai, d ilpriKajiev, XeyeTOi (PL Rep. 2, 366). ' 'Akovui Tivd fiKovra, I hear (learn, am told) that some one is come, aKovui rtvbg StaXiyojikvov, I hear some one speak (hear him speaking), § 58 a. R. 3. 'Apiotoc ya9cT0 KCpor iTtwTiiiKOTa (Xen. An. 1, 9, 31), A.perceived, became aware, that C. wasfallen ; ya- Gtiaai iraiTOTi fioii avKo^avTovvrog ; (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 11,) hast thou (thyself as present) ever perceived me acting the part of a sycophant (practising chicane)? This distinction, however, in the use of ahBdvo/iai is not always observed. § 179.] THE PARTICIPLE. 163 Rem. 5. The verbs mentioned have also, some more frequently, e. g. oUa, [f others less frequently, a sentence vi'ith 'on (or wc mostly after a negation, see 178.] § 159, R. 3) with no difference in point of meaning, but only as the convenience of the general form of the sentence may require : Toij xtiporixvac ySti, on tipfi- (FoifiL TToWd Kai fcaXd kinaTafisvovQ (^PL ApoL 22). *Hiff0ovro oi "EWijvtc, on fiaaiKiig aiv T icai aWa iSvri iToXKa TOiavra ilvat (^Xen. An, 2, 5, 13). nwddvo/jiai ixkWeiv AriiioaBkvtiv icar- apiBiiiiaQai Trpof ii/ia£, oaa TTtiroXiTtvTai (^JEsch. 3, 54). (Ev vvv iTriarit) Tuivls fi alaxvvrtv l^tiv. Soph. El. 616.) Ttyvuiaicoi has the ace. with inf. (not the par- ticiple) in the sense perceive, assume, consider, KvpoQ aySJvag KaHaTtjaiv cnravruiv, oTToaa lyiyvu)(TKev aaKuadai aya9Av iivai virb aTpan(UTa)v (^Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 22). (TiyviiaKia, give sentence that something shall he done, — see § 164.) ' Airo^aivia, dwopaivoiiat, declare (that something is ; not to prove'), has the ace. with inf ^ : a'nkfrivav rovro disaiov Tolg dpxoiiivoig ilvai (PL Rep. 338, e). Rem. 7. ^vvoiSd Tivi ij^iioj/jej/^ (Dem. 21,2) and (the meaning o{ aiv almost disappearing) Suvitratri r o i g irpb aiiTuiv TtTVpavvevKorag roig /liv inrb rdv yovimv dvnprjfisvovgf Tovg dk virb t&v Traihttiv, Toiig Sk inr' dSsXipatv (^Isocr. de Pac, 113). 'Siiivoiia k/iavTiff k^piva/ikvog and i^evtrfikvif). b) So likewise a participle is attached to the object, to complete the predicate, with the verbs ttovw, cause a person to have done with some- thing, TTtpiopu, overlook (allow something to be done before one's eyes), and (more for the purpose of merely denoting a circumstance) with svplcFKb), KoraXafifiavu), (pmpw, find, catch a person doing some- thing (passive oXiaKOfiai), troiw, represent in a poem, iyypaiXoao(j)tav Travaov ravra Xiyovaav {PI. Gorg. 483). "Afxa StipQv Tt irinavfiai ical ajua -fiSo/jitvog Sia tov iriveiv [PL Gorg. 4:97). Mrj TTspuStofiiv vfipiadtiaav Trjv AaKfSatfiova koi Karafpovriditaav {Isocr. Archid. 108). ('Qv with eipto-Kw omitted : 'E/ie ivpriatTe oil kukAv oiiS' dxpnarov, Ists. 7, il.) (Hepiopffl n yiyvea9at, roig Mavnvelg dpxeiv rrjg'ApKaSiag, Thuc. 5, 29, = 1(3.) In a special manner (mostly, however, in the poets) a participle of the aorist is x joined to the verb exw as apposition to the subject, to denote at once the , Ju preceding action and the present state, almost as a mere periphrasis of the perfect : ■'•'='• • Mkuvtifiai, olSa, ore (vviKa), — I remember the time when —. ^ Mav9dvia dpxtiaOai, emaTajiai \kyeiv, /iiiivtiao iirtiTTtiv, &c., by } 145, do not come under this head. M 2 164 PART II. CHAP. VI. [§ 180. Sou 5' iyiiiye Bavudaag l^w ToSe (^Soph. Phil. 1362). Tbv \6yov aov irdXai Bavjxaaai ixu), 'daif) KaXXftai row Trponpou ivapyaaiD (PI. Phad. 257). § a) A participle stands, with or without the article, and with or with- 180. out defining accessories, as attributive to a substantive, with the sense y^' of an adjective or of a relative periphrasis : IloXtc koXXei Sia^Epouo-a. 'Av)7p KoXdie TTiirai^ivfiivo^. O'l Trpia^stg oi wapa ^iX'nnrov irefitpOivTSQ. 'H Mu(Twv Xda Xtyonivri {the so-called booty of the Mysians ; the proverbial Mysian booty). Ai AloXov vijo-ot KuXovfiivai [Thuc. 3, 88). 'Ev Tijf Miaarmq. ttotI ovar} yy {Tkuc. 4, 3 ; in the land which was once Messenian). Ai apiarai SoKovaai tlvqi (pvang {Xen. Mem. 4, 1, 3). (On the position of the words when the participle, as attributive with the article, has accessory definitions, see § 9, R. 1.) Rem. It should be remarked, however, that the participle perfect in Greek, much more rarely than in Latin (docius, eruditus, rectus),, assumes the signification of a pure adjective, merely denoting the property in general without reference to the action by which it was produced. ('Eppw/jli/of.) On the other hand, the participial constructions, instead of the relative periphrases used in Latin, are rendered very frequent by the use of wv and dotcdv. (425) b) A participle with the article (with addition of case and other definitions) can likewise stand substantively instead of a relative peri- phrasis of a person or thing (cf. § 14) : 01 KpaTovvrtg. ''Hu Se 6 Trjv yv(jifit]v ravTiqv eiwhiv Ylsiryavdpog (Thuc. 8, 68). "ESei rriv iroXiTiKrjv aoipoiig ttoihv roiig woXiTag koi iTTicrTrifiriQ fiETaoioovai, i'nnp efitXXtv avTr) tlvai ri ufEXovcra re koi evSai/xovag iroiovaa {PL Euthyd. 293). ^AfptKTtOV TUIV TOIOVTWV T({) (TU)^pOVHV SwVl)(70JU6V(i) {Xcn. ConV, 4, 36).' , Ilapa roTc apiaroig ^OKOvaiv Hvai {Xen. Mem. 4,3, 6). Tois 'ApKdSwv afiTspoig ovai {.viifiaxoiQ (Thuc. 5, 64 ; those of the Arcadians who were — , partitivel^, see J 50 a). Toie -nSiq SiaKHfiivove Xd^ouv av oi towvtoi jiadtiTaq ; (Isocr. Antid. 222 j see 176 a, and 198 a.) _ i, Rem. 1 . On the other hand, it is more rare for a participle without the article to be put substantively, to denote indefinitely persons of a certain kind, or who do some- thing (cf. J 87 a) : nXlo/iEv iiri iroXAag vavQ BEKTij/jtvowe (Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 19). No/IOC kariv, orav iroXeftovvTij^v Tr6\ig a\^, Tutv eXoVTOiV alvai rd ^^p^^ara tojv kv ry jroXei (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 73). Mfi-d ravra dipiKvovvrai dyy'tWnvTtQ (with the intelli- gence'), 'oTi 6 Ttarfip dfiXrai (is released; Isocr. Trap, 11 : so frequently, "HKouffiv, rjKOv \syovr£g). ("Orav rig Qt&v ^XaTrry, Svvatr' dv oifd' dv iff^wwi/ ^vytiv. Soph. Ml. 697. Elsewhere almost exclusively in the plural.) To denote a person as one who can, shall, will do something, the article is usually put to the participle (of the future, rarely of the present : persons who do), both adjectively, and especially Tivag KaXsTv eSei irepouc J rovg, or' «yw, yeyovviag l}5j} T^g eiprjvrjg, dTrb Trjg vars- pag r]Kiiiv irpia^iiag, ciiaBofitvog ^evaKi^o/ulviiv T^v ira'Xjv, irpoiXeyoj' koi Sieiiaprvpo/iriv icai ovK I'ltDv TrpokaOat IliXag oilk 0ii)Kkag, \syovrag, i)g iyia SiaxoXog etui rtg dvBpiiJiroe (Dem. 6, 29). § 181.J THE PARTICIPLK. 165 substantively : OiSe rove 5ouXo«s v^pit,av oi"E\\ijvec aXiovaiv, iXKa vo/iov Stmoaiif [§ rdv Tavra KioKvaovra rsBuvrai (JJem. 21, 49). 'H ^wpa iroWi) kul ayaB^ r/v Kai 180;] evijaav oi IpyatroftEKot (JTen. An. 2, 4, 22 ; people to tili it). 'O ■nytitroiiivoe oiStls (ouk) corat (^Xen. An. 2, 4, 5). (lloWoiie c'lo/iEf roij Eroi/i(U£ Bai 7rpo6u/i(0£ X^s, that (part) of the mind which represents (images) ; rb Kparovv Trjg voXtiag. Partitive genitive, § 50.) c) Some few present participles, viz. Sia^kpuv, ix'^'" ''^"''h an adverb (e. g. saXKiar 'X'"''). irpoQtiKiiiv, ■KphiTfav, Siov, i^ov, avij(pipov, sometimes occur, as adjective predi- cate-nouns, with ci/*i or yiyvojiai, occasionally also others in connexion with an actual adjective : Ti iror iarlv ovTog 6 |8io£ Ikhvov Siaij:kpii)v ; {PI. Gorg. 500.) To«s AaKiSaifiovioVQ ov Sia rrjv dpar'^v air&v eaiiaaTC, oXV iirt av/i^ipov rjv ry ttoXh aStQ eivai {Detji. 19, 75). AeX ?roXi ^ev Tovg dpxovTag ETTi/XEXetrrepouc ysvsaBai rovg vvv roiv irpoaBiv, ttoKv Si tovq dpxofikvovQ evTaKTorkpovg Kai weidoiiivovs /iciXKov roig apxovci- vvv 7) TrpoffSEV {Xen. An, 2, 2, 30). d) A participle of the present or aorist with ei^i, as a periphrasis of the simple tense of the verb (in like manner as the participle perf., under certain circumstances, is joined with ei/ii) is a poetical licence of not very frequent occurrence ; in the prose passages where it does occur, there is apt to be a certain emphasis in the several and distinct expression of the action (the participle) and its existence (ei/ii). "Av y BiXovaa (ij yvvri), iravT ifiov Ko^i?erai {Soph. CEd. R. 580). Ois tig oXEflpoj' ; ov ffiwirriaag Etru ; {ibid. 1 146.) Jlavrdiraai Bavfidffaifi dv, A ti jite rovTiav Siaire^evyev. 'Hv jUEv ovv iierd TroXXqj riSovrjg Kai iratSidg Tore dKOvo/itva {PL T5m. 26). "H tovto owB lari yiyvoitivov irap' ii/iiv ; {PL Phil. 39 ; or, is not this a thing that takes place — .*) 'Hv ydp 6 0f/it(TroKX^£ fSe^aiOTUTa ^votuig iaxvv SiiKb)(yag Kai Sia^epovTiog n kg aiiTO fidWov Mpov d^iog 6avnaaai {Thuc. 1, 138; a man who, in a pre-eminent degree, manifested — ). (With yiyvo/iai in command and prohibition : M»j, u Uve, iijiiv riiv ye irp&TTiv alrtiaavTiav xdpiv ditapvr\dtig yivy. PI. Soph. 217.) A subject with a participle, conceived as one notion, and put in the § genitive {genitivi conseqtientm, double-genitive [usually^in English, '■geni- 181. tive absolute'^) is (in the manner assigned in § 66, b) attached to a sen- (428) tence, where a simple participle could not be annexed, to denote the rela- tion of time of the principal action, its way and manner, circumstances, ground or cause, &c., as the simple participle would do : Twv aiofiarwv Or\\vvofiivii)v KOL ai ipv)(a\ ttoXv appwaTOTCpai yiyvovrai {Xen. (Ecdk. 4,2; if — ^. OwK av ^XOov Sevpoy v/iQv firj Kikevadvrwv. "OAjje rijc TToXiWQ £v rote iroXeixiKoig KivSvvotg iirirptTrofiivrig t<^ arpaTriyi^, psjaXa rd T dyada KaTopBovvTog avrov Kai ra Kaica SiafiaprdvovTog sIkoq yi- 166 PART II. CHAP. VI. [§ 181. [§ yveaOai {Xen. Mem. 3, 1, 3 ; where the whole city is made over — , — if ■-' he succeeds, &c.). Ot Orijiaioi rijiovXovTO rjjv nXaraiav m sv tlpfivi^ T£ KOI Tov iroXifiov /xriiTU) (pavepov KadiaTurog (= ysjsvtifisvov) irpoKa- TaXaptlv {ThuC. 3, 3). ('A^/etro Siv^o j-A ir\oiov, yvovTiav tSiv Kei/iaWrivuv, avTi- TrpdrTovTog ZrlvoQEniSoc, odtv ^^fTrXevfff rb ttXoTov, kvTavBa Kai KaranXeiv ahro. Devi. 32, 14 ; when the Ceph. had determined, in spite of Zh resistance, — . A double- genitive attached to another. Ti rStv ^uiKfMv fj aX\o» nvbg avOpwiruiv fitT& rovg irap' Aiffxivou \6yovg i^a/xapTovTos oiiK aTrijiri t& vtc' airov tots ptiOkvra ; Dem. 19, 75 ; fjr what offence of the Phocians — f See § 176, a.) Rem. 1. The learner must observe, that as the Greek has the whole series of active participles, the use of the passive double-genitive (as in Latin) is hereby excluded, when the action spoken of is that of the subject of the principal sen- tence : TavTa uirovTiQ dnyjitv, not rovTiav XsxSkvruiv, which signifies, after this was said by others. Rem. 2. The relation between the principal sentence and the participial sentence is more specifically marked, as is the case with the simple participle, by certain ad- verbs: see §175. n66tv,U)Siincparig,aiSLal3o\aiaoLavraiy£y6vacnv; ov yd,p 3rj nov, aov ys ov8kv twv a\\b)v irtpiTTorfpov irpayfiarevopsvov, iiriiTa roffavrrj (pijfiri re Kal Xoyof ykyovtv (^Pl. Apol. 20), '9'ri(pi(riia typa^a vXiXv ini Tovg TOTTOvg, kv oTg £tij i'lXtjr- TTog, Kai Tovg opKovg rrjv Taxi-<^Tr]v aTToXa/ijSavfii/, \v' IxoVTbiv rStv Qp^Kaiv toiv vfieTt' pdiv ffu/t/ta%ti>v TCL X'^9^'^ ravra, rb ^ippiov Kal rb Mvpriov Kal Tt]V 'EpyiffKTjv, ovrui yiyvoivB* oi opKot (^Dem, 18, 27). ^lovvaohtopov fieraKb ravra XsyovTog b KXeivlag irvxev airoKpivafiivoe (PI. Euthyd. 275). Especially frequent is the double- genitive with wg, to express the thought and supposition or pretext under which something is spoken or done (^because, as though^ : ^vXXiSag Kai MkXXmv iKijpvTTOv h^ikvai -Trdvrag Qtil3aiovg, b)g t&v Tvpdvvuiv rtQvi^TU)v (^Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 9). Ovx '^S ToTg "EXXijfft 7roXipriij6vTCi>v riijicv iiirov, & iIttov (^Xen. An, 5, 6, 3). Cf. § 175 d. Especially note the use of the double-genitive with ug in connexion with verbs or phrases denoting an opinion or utterance, to assign the purport of the opinion or utterance (to be of opinion as though, i.e. that something should be done), usually with the imperative, or at least in speaking of that which is to be thought or spoken (bften with emphatic ovTuig before the principal verb, after the genitive) : 'Qg iftov y£ Kai dytjivioviikvov Kal, oTroXog dv rig w, Kurd rijv d^lav TifidaQai d^ib)(Jovrog,^ oiirwc, w Yivpt, ytyviaoKt (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 15). 'Qg ip,ov ioirof, oVi/ dv Kai v/iEig, o^Tto T^v yv^fjtrjv fx^''^ (Xen, An. 1, 3, 6). "AXXo ri btg ovrot aov vofilZovrog diavow- ficBa ; (PI. Gorg, 472 ; are we not to assume that this is your opinion f On dXXo ti, see 9 199 C.) EtTrare Kai irfpl tovtov, iroTtpa fitvHTE Kal aTOvSai tlaiv f] ii)g TroXkpov ovTog Trap' ifiuv dnayytXH (Xen. An. 2, 1, 21 ; or, whether I shall report — ). ("Oipeade, wpTrep SovXutv aTroSiSpaaKovTUV svprifikvuv, rovg pkv iKETEiJovrag rSiV tto- Xs/iiaiv, rovg Si fivyovrag. Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 21 ; just as when — .)' Rem. 3. Sometimes a double-genitive and a simple participle referred to a case (most frequently the subject) in the principal sentence, are connected by and, or by liEv and Si as co-ordinate definitions (e.g. of time, cause, thought, &c.) : KXiwv Trdvra Siairpa^d/ievog iv ry iKKXtjaif Kal tf>i](piaaiiivv dHiiuiiv Xkyuv, idv fit) Tijg dStiag SoBelarig (Dem. 24, 46). See J 175 e, foot-note T (o). § 181.] THE PARTICIPLE. 167 UvXifi (TTpaTriyCiv 'iva irposEXo/iEwoe ^tiiioaOevtiv rrjv ivayuyr/v Sii T&xovg iTroieiro [§ (7%«c. 4, 29). Oi"EXXii,J"C (rTpaQ ravry vpogiovToe PaaiXkaii; 181.] Kal St^ofttvoi (^Xen. An. I, 10, 6). Rem. 4. a) The subject-genitive in a double-genitive is sometimes omitted, when it is a pronoun easy to be understood from the context and the preceding mention of the same subject, and with no emphasis on it : Ei;rovro Si rolg MoairvvoiKoiq tUv ''EWrjvtitv TtvsQt ov rax^kvTSQ iurb T&v ffrpaTijywv aW'apffay^g cVffcci/. Ot Si ttoMjuioi, TTpOQiovTiiiv, TibiQ fikv r/ffiOxfl^ov, £7r€t S' Eyyufi kykvovTO TOV xtitpioVt ^icSpapoVTtg Tpivovrai avToiq (^Xen. An. 5, 4, 16). (The pronoun of the first person omitted in an assurance by the spealier himself attached to what goes before : 'Epwra, e^i], w TLvpi, i>Q TdXijS^ ipovvTOQ, Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 9.) b) Sometimes the double-genitive is a participle plural with an indefinite subject of the third person understood (the people ; one) (cf. J 6 b) : Ovk Hairoi- liiVOQt oiiK 'AjLi^iKruoj'iKdg SUag iirayovnov, oifK airtiKovvrioVj ovk kKayyeWopkvuiv, ovSapioQ ^yw TTpoSeSioKa Tt)v tig vpdg tvt'otav (Dem. 18,322 ; not wlien I was demanded to be given up, not when they were for bringing me to trial before the Amphictyons), c) A double-genitive of participle without a subject is formed from impersonal expressions with adjectives in the plural (eVoi/ia lariv, J 7 b. R. 2), or from a verb put impersonally to which some general notion of things can be understood as its subject (e.g. ix"> ^"■paxSi;), usually in the plural, and from the verbs denoting the state of the weather {§ 7. a 1). (Comp. the double-accusative, § 182) : 'Eri ovTiDV aKpiTcav dmWaySiitv {^Thuc. I, 7). Oiirwe ixovrtuv (under such circumstances, such being the case, more rarely ovriag exovrog), liKig rolg jtiv TroXe/uiois ivavriovg (Ivai Tovg Oiovg, riiilv Si avfifiaxovg (Xen. An. 3, 2, 10). Tovrov rbv rpoiroK irpax6tvTii>v, Trjg ttoXews yiyvirai rd. xP''ll"'Tn (Dem. 24, 12 ; such being the facts of the case). ' A\Kt^ia.Si)g avriyayiTo liri rijv K.v^iicoi', vovrog ttoXXoC (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 16). d) A passive participle neuter (usually plural, cf. c) of a verbum declarandi is (429) sometimes put in the double-genitive, with a sentence with oVi added : ItipiicXfig tpX^^o Kara Taxog kirl Kavvov Kal Kapiag. igayytXSkvTUiVt on ^oivuT(7at vTjeg kiri TOvg 'AOtivaioug nKiovaiv (Thuc. 1, 116 ; but StiXmBivrog, on — , I, 74). Rem. 5. The omission of the participle wv in the double-genitive is very rare : Uav iv riaixft irarsp, titan ipuivtXv, i>g iiiov jxivrig irkXag (Soph. (Ed. C. 83). (Nuciai/ Kai Ar/fiotidivtiv oi SupaBoutrioi asovTog TvKiinTOv cfzria^aKav, Thuc. 7, 86, and f^oB oix hovTog, Soph. Aj. 455, as if iKiliv, obuv were participles.) Rem. 6. The double-genitive is usually put only where the subject of the par- (428, ticiple does not stand in the principal sentence in some other case to which the R. 5) participle might attach itself. Sometimes, however, although the subject of the participle does so occur, the double-genitive is nevertheless used, in order to give more prominence to the participial sentence as a Special circumstance : Aia/3e/3ij- KOTog iiSri '0.ipiK\iovg arpanf eg Ev/iutav, ^yylXSij aur^j, on Mtyapa a^iariiKtv (Thuc. 1, 114). Tpiwv Si'puii' oiiaSiv, ag ISii fit SitKQiXv, airaaai avi({)yiiivat Itvxov (Lys. 11, 16). Su fiiv oig ipdoKovTog tiSsvai^irtpi uiv ipiorui, Trpos^lpp irpog iiis (^Pl. Charm. 165 ; iitov omitted agreeably with the concluding remark in R. 4, a). Rem. 7. Sometimes a substantive takes a participle as apposition, and then, by means of a preposition, especially liiia or avv„\s attached to a sentence as a defini- ■ tion of time : A/ia rJXi^j aviaxovn qXfle XIpoicX^S, o ItvOpaviag ap^uv {Xen. An. 2, 168 PART II. CHAP. VI. [§ 182' [5 1, 3). "Aita Tif ^pi tiiBig df>x''/'^''4' "''' l^ifiyvoiiivov 6epoV£ oi kv ry SikeXi'^ IBl.J 'ABtivaToi dpavTCe i" ''^S E.aTdvric iraplirXeuffav Itt! Meydpwv (Thuc. 6, 94). 'H 6pyt) avTt] iiTTo te twv AyaBCiv (the advantages) veiravBfiaiTat xai avv rifi ipo^if \iiyovTi airam (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 21). (IIpA ijXiou Svvovroe, ^sch. 1, 12. 'Ertt itiinrrif /xitA SvpaKOvaaf oiKwBiiaac, Thuc. 6, 3. 'Eiri KoSpov fiaaCKdovTOQ, Lye, 84. 'EttJ x'^'"'- itcovay, Hdt. 2, 22, after the falling of snow, after it has snowed.) § Instead of the double-genitive, the accusative {double-accusative 182. [accusative absolute']) of impersonal verbs is used (e. g. Seov, e^ov, TTpoeijicov, Trapl^'"'* /liXov, /xtTa/xiXov, also Sokovv, So^av, a* [when, siticel it is, was, decreed) or of passive verbs used impersonally (with an infinitive added, e. g. irQo^axBiv, eiprtfikvov, yevofievov Itt' i/jioi, as it was in my power, &c.), or of impersonal expressions of tifii and an adjective (e. g. aSivarov ov). The double-accusative is also used of impersonal expressions (ejiie woiijo-ovra) after we and wQvep, in the opinion, supposition, belief that, or, as though : "Orav avayKuaO^ Tig SvoXv kokoiv to eTcpov aiptlaOai, ovBiig to jueT^ov aipriatrai, i^bv TO 'IXoTTOv (yiz. aipsiaBai. Pl.Prot.358). OV Adtivaloi fiETifiiXovTO, OTi jUETu TO Iv IluXij), KoXwc Trapa(T\6v, OV ^vvif3/i<7av {Thuc. 5, 14; a favorable opportunity having offered). 'Q,q Kvpog kyiviTO iv MtjSoic, (TvvS6%av rij! irarpi Koi T'g firyrpi, jafxii Trjv Kva^apov OvyaTipa {Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 28). npoi;Ta)(6iv fioi vtto rov Sri/iov Mivwva Tov (TTpaTTiyov ayuv ilg 'EXXijeirovrov, (i^\6iir\v avayofxtvog Sia TCf)(ovg {Dem. 50, 12; I put to sea with speed). Oi ^vpaKovmoi TrapsKeXtvovTo Koavyy oiiK oXiyij \pwfisvoii aSvvarov ov Iv vvktI nXXtj) rfj» arj/xrivat {InUC. 7, 44). KiJpog avriTraptaKEvdi^eTo B^ptajxkviag, b)g fM^VQ s^"' dsijaov (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1,26). Ol^ai T& irXrjQos ^rj'pisiffdai, fl /SouXopcQa, lifia ^ikv vfiStv t7vvayopev6v- to)v, li/jia Sk Kal aiuxp^" o" &VTi\syiiv (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 20). Oi TraTipsg Toiig vitig atro tiov irovripijjv avOpdoTrwv upyovaiv, log Trjv plv tHjv ^priaTwv bfiiX'iav aoKmaiv ovaav Tr\g apsriig, ty^v Se roiv wovripwv KaraXvaiv (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 20). ' Aire fiXiipaTS frpog aXXriXovg wg aiiTog fxlv EKOoroe oi) iroiriawv TO So^av, tov 8e TrXritrjov irpa^ovTa {Dem. 14, 15). "Evioi ^iXovg fiiv Krwvrat wg |3oT)0(«Jv 8eo/ievoi, tHiv S' aStXipCiv afxeXovcriv, liygiTip £K TToXiTutv jUEV ytyvofxivovg ipiXovg, i^aSsX^wv S' oi yiyvofiivovg {Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 3).' Rem. 1. After verbs that themselves express opinion, the double-accusative with we of personal verbs is very rarely put instead of the double-genitive with tag (§ 181, R. 2) ; but where the notion of thinking is merely implied in the tie, the double-accusative is even more usual than the double-genitive. Rem. 2. It is very rare to meet with the double-accusative of a personal expres- sion without iig (with ov or a participle which is commonly used impersonally, or ' Hence tvx&v, properly, it having chanced, as it happened, is used quite as an adverb, perchance, mayhap. § 183.] THE PARTICIPLE. 169 with the neuter of a pronominal word as subject), e.g. irpoQrjKov k/ini rov KKrjpov [§ fiEpo£ (/iffi. 5, 12). 'HJij afupoTipois /liv Sokovv avaxi^pitv, Kvp(i>6kv dk oiSiv, 182.] OTrijviKa ^p^ opfjidff9ai, ot MaicE^ovES KaTatrravTSQ kg atfviSiov ^vytjv Ix'^P^^^ ^^* oiKou {T/iuc. 4, 125).' Reu. 3. Now and then in this construction the participle iSv is omitted : ^&.pa TTiv Siairav fiov ^avXlK^ig b}Q yTTOv'fiiv ityuiv^ kaOiovTog e/iou Tj aov, ijttov 5k iff;^iij/ iraps^ovro, fj i)Q xaXtirtirepa (viz. ovto) iropiaaaBai rd i/ii SiaiTJiiiara tCiv a&v Sii TO iroXvTcKiaTepa ilvai ; (JSen. Mem. 1, 6, 5.) The Tenses of the Participle, present, perfect, and aorist, correspond § with the same tenses of the indicative (so that the aorist is a praeter- 183. itum) : *Hv firiSlv falviofiai kqicov e Tbv 'Aarvoxov, tSv AaKiSaifiovluJv vaiapxov, Kpvpa liriirrtiXas, on ' AXxtjimSrig aiiTtiv to, irpayiiaTa v datv oi Xoyoi, diKatoTar' dv raVTtiv £;^ot rr)v airiav, obx b toKtunkpog obS' 6 fxtpnivr)oag rd hiKaia Xkyav vvv (JDem. 21, 192). § (The Participle with av.) The participle of the present and aorist 184. with av is used in a hypothetical and potential signification, so that it corresponds partly with the imperfect and aorist of the indicative with av, partly, and that more frequently, with the present and aorist of the optative with av. (The aor. as in the opt. or inf. with the signification of a dubitative future.) In this manner the participle may stand both to denote a circumstance (§ 174), and also after the verbs mentioned in §§ 177, 178, in circumlocutions with the article, and in the double- genitive or double-accusative. (By this means, the Greek has often a brevity and flexibility of expression unattainable by languages in which such a hypothetical statement must necessarily be expressed by a finite verb.) fl) (Corresponding With indicat. with av) : 'tifidg iirtl riKOvaafnv, on tari ri \onrov epyov, 8 ' AtXiiBafitv dfifoTspiDv lig rb fifffov TrtiTTioKOTcg (PI. Thecet. 180). KarartiVaf (isvvTHvag) Xtyui, kpm (PL Rep. 2, 358), as forcibly as I can ; i, e. with exertion of alt my powers (after collecting them and bending them to the task). § 185.] CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 171 OH s^spya(jav ilSkoiQixiv &v tXf yx^'"'"'"''. '' '■' M") ciKtiBig Xlyw, TjSeuig S' av iXtySdvTiov, el rig Ti fiy iXritikg Myot, owe drjSiaTfpov fiivr av iXiyySivTiDV fj iXiyXavTiDV {PL Gorg. 458). SivoipHv Sia^ag r-qv x^^P^Spav aiv toiq XoxdyolQ IffKOTrtiro, irortpov £tjj k^httov dirayaynv Kai rovg Siafii^qKoraQ fj Kai Toig OTrXirag StaPij3dZtiv, dig dXdvTog dv tov xmpiov {Xen. An. 5, 2, 8 ; in the hope that the place might be taken). 'EXtti^iu roig 'ABrivaiovg KarairXayevTag Tip dSoKTiTqt KaraXvaai dv tov nXovv, dWoig re Kai tov tfiTrftpordTov Tiav GTparrjy&v aKOVTog riyovfikvov Kai daftevou dv irpo^aciv Xa^oVTOg^ tl ti d^i6xpi**iv d^' iffiuiv tiipQiiri {Thuc. 6, 34 ; especially as the most experienced of their generals takes the command against his will, and might, or would, gladly catch at a pretext — ). {XpiifitOa ti^ voni^ TOVTip eiSSreg Kai vfjidg dv Kai dXXovg, iv ry airy Svvdjxn rffiiv ysvofitvovg, dpSiv* rag dv airo. Thuc. 5, 105 ; double dv as with the infinitive, see J 173, R. 1.)' Rem. The participle of the future with dv rests (in the Attic style) on passages in which the reading is corrupt {Kvvriauv or \vwriaag dv, not Xvirijcuiv dvy. CHAPTER VII. Peculiarities in the connexion of Co-ordinate Sentences, and of Principal and Accessory Sentences. Interrogative Sentences. a) Co-ordinate sentences (in prose) are connected copulatively § 185. ' OvSi Tavra TtiiOKpartig aTrXSig Kai dSoXaig ^avifaiTai ytypa^iig, dXX' dig dv /idXiard Tig vfidg s^aTraTrjaai jSovXa/iivog (Dem. 24, 79. Elliptical dv, as J 139 c). (Elvai tUv SwaTuiv dv Kplvat, PI. Rep. 9, 577, one of those who might be able i dv belonging to the omitted ovtidv.) P Kriiger defends this construction. — Ed.] 173 PART II. CHAP. VII. [§ 185. [5 by KOI, and (te, and), ri — koi, or, koi — koi, both — and, and (with ■-' negation) by oufil, and also not, ovts — ovre, neither ' — nor. (Tc after the connected word or the first word of the second clause =: que.) Rem. 1. A single rk for icai, by which the second member is joined to the first as an addition, is poetical, and very rarely occurs in prose : Tiaiav Si Topyiav tc iaaoijicv tvSuv (PI. Phmd. 267). Thucydides uses rl to connect a new sentence which serves to corroborate, continue, or enlarge upon the preceding one (almost in the manner of Kai — 5e} : Kat fisxP'' ''o^^e TroWd Tijg ^'EWddoQ ti^ iraXaif^ rpoTTiy vkfisTai, Trept rf AoKpoig Toic OJoXae Kctl AiVioXoig Koi ' AKapvcivas Kal n)v ravry rjiriipov. To 7e Gi5jjpofopiiff9at TOVTOiQ TOLQ ■^•7reipb}TaiQ airb riJQ TraXaidg XytTTuag kfifiSfikvrjKEV (Thtic. 1, 5). (On TB — ovTt, ovTC — re, see Negations.) Rem. 2. By annexing a Sk to xai (km — ik), the new member acquires pro- minence as a special corroboration and enlargement of the preceding (and — too, and also') : Ta •jrapaTtOsftsva aei laa avTty te ti^ Kup*^ Kal toiq KaXovfxkvQiQ Itti SeiTTvov ^V Kai Toig afifi rb (TTpaTevfia 5k virTjperag iffofioipovg "Kavruiv dei eTTOiet (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 31). *H(5£t ILvpog ' ApTa^sp^rjv, 'oti jxkaov E;^ot rov flfpffiKou aTpartv- fiarog, Kat TTavng 8' oi Tuiv ^ap^apoiv dp^ovreg fisaov ixovreg jjyoDvrat (Xen. An. I, 8, 22). Rem. 3. By icai — Kai the two connected members are marked each by itself, as several and co-ordinate members, more stro-ngly than by the usual re — Kai, by which they are rather connected so as to form a whole : Kai KCiv Kai nXevTriaag (PL Rep. 3, 414). Kai Trpwrov Kai fioKwra (PL Rep. 3, 413). Kai avroi kfidxovTO Kai Tolg dWoig vapiKtXsiovTo (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 68). TLaXkwT&v re Kat dpiarov (Xen. An. 2, I, 9). Kspavvog ts on fikv dvbiQsv ctfieTai, SijXov, opaTai S' ovr STriiltv ovre KaTatTKriypag ovre aTriwv, Kai avEfioi aiiroi {ikv oiix opwvrat, & Sk Troiovirt, ipavepd i)fiiv kariv (Xen. Mem. 4, 3, 14). Te — re (^ Kal — Kai) is frequent in the poets, rare in prose : 'EXdwovro rutv OTparitdrutv ot re di£f9apfi£voi vrcb rijg x^ovog rovg 6f9a\iiovg o'i re vTrb rov ^vxpvg rovg baKrvXovg riov ttoSuiv dTroffeffriiroreg (Xen. An, 4, 5, 12). Merd rd TpoHKd '/) ^EXXdg tri fiETaviffraro rt Kai KaTf^KiKero. 'Botbtroi re ydp ot vvif e^rjKOffri^ eru [ierd 'IXiov iiXoKTiv f| "ApvTjg dvavrdvrtg virb BeffffaXSiv rrjv ICaSfiijtSa. yrjv KaXoviitvTjv lyKiaav, Atapitig t£ bydorjKOffrtp eth ^iv ^HpaKXfiSaig JleXoTrovvrjirov iaxov (Thuc. 1, 12). Kai — re (et — qiie) is a poetical licence : "laGt ydp Sokuv kfioi Kai ^Vfj^vrevaai rovpyov tipydtjQai Q\ 'baov fir^ X^P^*- ^aiviitv (Soph. CEd, R. 347). Rem. 4. Where te — icat connects two single notions which have a common article, the re is sometimes attached to the article instead of following the first of the connected terms : rovg re eioTrXordrovg ej^ww koi tittSearaTovg (Xen. An. 2, 3, 3 ; having those who were both the best-armed and the best-looking) ; and so usually with a common preposition: Iv rt r^ Qcpnorkpif Kai -i^ivxporkpij) (PL Phil. 24). ('Ev roaavry re dypvTrviij, Kai Xiiry, PL Crit. 43.) Rem. 5. Sometimes rk is followed, not by Kai, but by U, alone or with another particle (evetra Ik, li/ia Se, dfia Si Kai, In Si Kai, btgavrg Sk, voXv fidXXov Sk), the copulative connexion being abandoned, and an adversative put instead of it, either because the latter member is intended to be made specially prominent, or because it has become remote from re : " ErrenTpev rijidg ri ruiv 'StvoiirkdJV v6Xig irraivkaovrdg re iifiag, on kviKure'EXXriveg bvreg PapfSdpovg, (veir a Si Kai ^vv)]tT9riaoii.kvovg, on Sid woXX&v re Kai SeivSiv Trpayfianiv aecoiaixevoi Trdpeare (Xen. An. 5, 5, 8). Ti^iaioc T e oSe, eivofiuTdrnig i)v irdXeuig rrjg Iv 'iraXif AoKpiSog, oiaif Kai yjj/ti oiStvbg iarepog § 186.] CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 173 Siv vav eicei, t&q iiiylaraq fikv apxag re xai Tifid^ Iv ry woXei /icraKE^Eiptiri-ai, ^iXo- [§ aortas S' av icar' Ifi^v SoSav Itt' dcpov OTrdffijs JX^XtiSc Kpiri'av 5s jrou iravTee ol 185.] rpJ" (ffftcv oiiSivbe Miiirijv ovra div Xlyo/acv (PI. T%m. 20). 'Ev t-e tj tUv IvSv TTotiiatt voKKaxov Si Kal dXXodt (P/. Rep. 3, 394). (On the irregularity where two members denoted by rs — Kai, as co-ordinate, are not accurately connected, see AnacoliUhia, } 216, R. 1.) Rem. 6. The copulative particle is omitted in oratorical recital, of several (short) members. (Between two members the omission is rare, and poetical, e. g, ToB rhv K^aTr}pa wXijffaff 0ti> ; "Y^arog, yLfKiaar^Q' firjSk irpogtpspuv [ikOv. Soph. (Ed. C 481 J in prose, in certain particular set phrases of two contrasted words, e.g. dvio KUTiit = avw Kai Karu).) Kai is omitted before eIto, eirtira, in the sense and then, marking continuation and further consequence (especially in conditional and object-sentences) : Ei TrpoijffofisQa, w dvSpeg 'A9rjvaZoi^ Kai tovtovq Toiig avBpu)' TTovSf ilr "OXvvBov v6v k(ji' ij/uaj dyayiaai tov iroXt/zow, rii tuiv 'Afi^iKrvovutv So- yfiara irpoaTTjffdftsvoit etr' iTriffffafffiwffiv Ejcaffrot irepa tov cvfifspovTog eavTOig fjfiiv ■iroXe/iijaai (Sem. 5, 19). b) A copulative connexion with koI (sometimes rl — ko'i) is used in Greek, where in a narration it is stated at what point the matter stood, what had taken place, when a change or new event occurred : OvTitt Sv t] TpsTc Spofjiov^ ircpuXriXvBoTS ijarriv (EiiSuSijjuoc Kot A(ovu(ro- Sojpoc) KOI il^ipj(STai KXeivioc {Pl.Euthyd. 27J3). EicraToe rtKwv Itv-^- yavov KOI r\ fi.{\Tr\g Hovaa jue koi irpogiiTraaa rriv ypv\riv a^^KEV [Dem. 50, 60). 01 AaKtSainovioi oiiK s^flijo-av irvOofitvoi tov inpi Tjjv 'ATriKrjv TToXsfiOv 'Koi TravTwv Twv aXXad/ aiJsXr]v Tig firixavri, w SaiKjOartc, SiKaioavvr]v Tifiav iOiXeiv, <^ tiq Svva- fiiQ vTrap)(si i/'Vi^ije r; ;)^pi}juara)i' rj awfxaTOQ rjyivovQ, aXXa firjytXav iirai- voujUEvijc uKovo vTa ; {PI, Rep. 2, 366 ; and not rather laugh when one fiears tt praised,) 'A\\A yap lutag fitra fiiKpdg Siaf^Xijg rj ^ai/Xiav Karriyooiav sKivhvvtvov, &XX oil diA t&v l^pu}ft£V€(7TdTiov Kai \kyeiv Kal irpdrreiv (^Andoc, 4, 37). Rem. 1. Sometimes aXXa merely adds something that does not correspond with what goes before, but without setting it aside : Koi o 'AjSpaSdrag elwiv' 'AWd rd fitv Ka9' rifiaQ sfiotys SokUj to KvpE, KaXSjc %xiiv' dXXd rd TrXayta XuTret fit (^JCen, Cyr. 7,-l> 16). The use of dXKd (alone or with other particles), further than as serving for the grammatical connexion of the sentence, must be learnt from the Lexicon : in part the dXXd elliptically intimates a thought not expressed. Rem. 2. With the adversative conjunctions may be reckoned the exceptive particle TrXr/v : WdvTiQ Trjv ;rd\iv i^iXnrov TrXijv oi rd icajrriXeia Ixovreg, Xen. An. 1, 2, 24, except, only not — ; irXijv ti, irXfiv on, TrXj/v oaop, (§ 91, R. 2.) § By Se is denoted something which is distinguished from what goes 188. before, but does not set it aside nor contradict it: ISvfiirovriatrs iv rn TToAeI fKaOTOl iv (Utptt, TOV §£ TTuXvV XpOVOV IllT dXXrjXwV OtKij(T£r£ Iv rw KaOnpi^ [in freedom and rest, PL Rep. 7, 520). Ae^ ti fionOaiag; rj fxarriv sfoliriOrig, o'l Si TroXifiioi ovk ep\ovTai (Xen. Cyr, 2, 1, 3 ; and the enemy are not coming ?).' Hence Bi serves as a particle of transi- tion (adverb), to annex each successive term of the discourse which is not connected with the preceding by another adverb (e. g. a con- clusive, ovv, a causal, yap), and does not commence a new series of thoughts. Answering to a preceding fiiv, it forms a partitive con- ' But sometimes also xal ov (pri) and simply oi (pri), e. g. dv Si iroty, fitj Xeyy (Dem. 21, 183). ^ Occasionally, especially in poets, for dXXd : Oi/c iirpaiav, d r/fSoiXovro, dirrjXeov Sk did rdxovg {Thuc. 6, 79). (But never ov /jo'vov — U, or the like.) § 188.] CONNEXION OP SENTENCES. 175 nexion, by which two terms or clauses (or, with SI repeated, several) C5 are made to stand out in opposition to each other. ('O fiiv fiaatXti^ **"■-' — , 01 Bt arpartCjTai — . Alyug filv iv, TrpaTTttg S' ovSlv. Nvv fiiv — TOTE Se — . rioAXa fisv Koi aWa Swo Se fiiyiara. El (itv viKriaiig, — El 8e ol 0EOI aXXwg (iovXsvovTai, — . Opposed or contrasted accessory definitions, denoted in two independent sentences by juek and 81, by which particles, at the same time the two sentences are connected, have often a different grammatical form : tw juev vpu)T^) erei — , ETTfi Si — . ripiv JUEV T^v ftaxriv yiviadai — , viKijo-ae Se — . In English, the relation is denoted sometimes more strongly by but. however, but then, sometimes more weakly by and, or by the mere position of the words and the accent.) Where juev and Se connect principal sentences, they are often separated to a distance from each other by a number of clauses attaching themselves to the first clause, in consequence of which the connexion becomes less apparent. See e. g. Xen. Anab. ii. 4, 2 — 5 (toTc juev iroWoig tCiv 'EXAjjvwv ovk i/jOEctkov — Yt.\iap\og Si, Cyr. viii. 2, 2—7).' Rem. 1. Mfi/ and Hk are placed after the word in which the opposition lies (which word with Si is always at the beginning of the sentence), or, where the opposition lies in an entire dependent sentence or a relative periphrasis, after the conjunction or the relative (In-eJ Sk, ILq jikv, ojq nkv). With a noun with the article nkv and ik come after the article, Sk also (more rarely) after the noun : rd. filv avBpiiiraa vapkvrce, ri, Saijiovia Si aKoirovvTic (-Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 12. Usually rd U d.). With prepositions, iikv and ^1 are apt to come immedfately after the pre- position (irpds itiv utatiii^piav, also with o ftkv — o Si), e. g. kv fiiv dpa rolg av/jKpio- vovfifv, kv Si role oil. (Pl. Pheed. 263.) (In the poets some anomalous positions occur.) ('Hv S' iyii, fi S' oj, after an entire sentence.) Rem. 2. Especially note the use of nkv and Sk with the article (as demonstrative pronoun 6 fikv — 6 Si, in later writers also 8f fikv — nq Sk) and demonstrative adverbs of time and place (toti /ikv — Tore Sk, lv9a juev — iv8a Sk) to denote an indefinite and general antithesis : the one — the other ; this — that (also o /ilv rig — o Sk Tig), now — now, here — there. ('0 /ikv — oi S' 'A0tivalot, with definite term in the second member. 'AXytl, toti Si x«'P"' ■^'- P^^- 35 = Tore iiiv aXyit, Tore Si xaipEi.) In Herodotus, when the opposition with /tkv and Si is between two predicates of the same subject, in the second member an A referred to the subject is inserted and the Si attached to this : TkXwv rairtiv /iiv t))v oSiv ^jiiXtim, Si dWtig ilxcro (7, 163, = dWrig S' lixtTo). ' Rare constructions are : iieiivt]nivog,opiiv S" ov {Pi. Theest. 164. The first member put absolutely). ('Q iraX UriKiiag, irarqp f kptog. Eur. Hec. 534.) (Kni ai jiiv y ijSi] kdauj, rbv Si Xdyov tov Trtpi row "Epurof ireipooojuai i/uiv SuXGilv. PI. Com). 201 ; /iiv made more prominent by yi. El /tiv Ji) Siicata irotiiaia, ovk olSa' aip^uo/jni S' oiv iifiag Kai avv vfuv, o, ri av Siy, irttffojitai. Xen. An. 1, 3, 6. See likewise the Lexicon for ixiv oiv, /tivToi, &c.) [They are given in the Appendix of this Translation.] 176 PART II. CHAP. VII. [§ 188. [§ Rem. 3. [jinaphora.] Often in the opposition of several members, the term (espe- 188.] cially the verb) which is common to all is emphatically repeated with fitV and Ss, instead of a copulative connexion : IIoW/) aOvfiia r/v rolg "EXXijffij', opSn jiiv row TTOTa/iov rriv Svgiropiav, opaliii Bi Tovg Sta^aivuv KiaKvaovrag, opiiai Si ToXg Sta^aivovnv sTTuciKtoiikvovg Tovg Kapdoixovg omaBcv (^Xen. An. 4, 3, 7). "Svv ftiv aol ■waaa fiiv {ipiiv odbg tviropog, irdg 5k irorafibg Sia^arogt dvEV Si aov naaa fiiv St& OKdrovg ij 65(Sff, irag Si iro7-«/xit" Sigiropog, irdg Si ox^og 0O|3Epos (Xen. An. 2, 5, 9).' Rem. 4. When the opposition denoted by ftsv and Si lies in a relative sentence, and to this a demonstrative reference is annexed (o'l — , o^rot, 'ottov — , IvravSa), often fdv and Si, or one of them, is put twice, first with the relative, then with the demonstrative : npiaTayopag \iyii, iig, olo iiiv 'iicaaTa ifiol ^aivtrai, roiavra itev iariv ijioi, oT.a Si trot, roiavra S' ai aoi (PI. TheiEt. 152). Ot liiv av tUv aarpa- TTwi/ Ti>v apiQfibv rbv riray^ivov rStv fiia9o^6p(i)v tK^rXfwv txovTeg faiviM}vrai Kal TOVTOvg SoKifioig 'iTnroig Kai ^OTrXoig irapeaKevacriievovg 7rapl;^W(n, rovTOvg fiiv roig apxpvTag 6 {SaffiKeiig Kai rifiaig av^ti Kai Stitpoig fi^yoKoig KarairXovTil^H, oig 5' av tvpy Twv SipxovToiv KaTafieXovvrag, ToOroug xaXi-jriig koXoZh (Xen. CEcon. 4, 7 ; only liiv repeated). The same takes place, when to a participle with the nominative a demonstrative is afterwards annexed (by § 100 e). Isocr. Paneg. § 60. Rem. 5. Sometimes /isv is put to denote the opposition to something following:, without a corresponding Sk to follow it, when either (a) this is considered super- fluous because certain adverbs are used which themselves express an opposition to what goes before (liriira, ilra after TrpSirov jiiv, riaig fiiv), or (b) the opposition is more strongly marked by fiiiv, yet (yt \iiiv)t or fiivroi, however, or (v (PI. Phced. 89 ; remarked tohat impression the discourse had made upon as). (6) Oi fiiv iraSovrcg, aSriXov ijv, ti dSiKutg iTiTifiiiprivro' ij fiivToi aXKtf iroKig iv Tip vapovn izipi^aviSg iiipiXriTo {Thuc. 6, 60). (c. Xen. Anab. 1, 10, 16.) (rf) Et'/cAg fiiv, tipri, oBc av nj riyrfrai xpqffroug, ipiKiiv, ovg S* dv Trovfjpovg, fiwiiv (PI. Rep. 1, 334). '*Ap dv bXiya Toiavra 'EvavSpov iv ry dpxy Sianpa^aaBai irpogSoicare ; iyi) ydp fiiv oiiK av oifiai (Lys. 26, 7).^* (Other irregularities in the construction of the members denoted by fiiv and Si, see under Anacoluthia, § 216, R. 1.) Rem. 6. The particle Si in the more ancient poetical language (Homer) is frequently used with a certain emphasis (akin to Sif) in the apodosis after relative sentences or conjunctions. In Attic this is rare (especially in prose), and occurs only where the apodosis after a conjunction or a relative adverb of comparison (i>g, wfin-fp) is made to stand out with special emphasis by a demonstrative word or a personal pronoun denoting an opposition to some other term, and in the same manner after a participial construction containing an opposition to the leading ' B'k} fiiv, ofiwg S' avixovrai (PI. Rep, 10, 607 ; they refrain perforce, but still they do refrain). ° TovTovg ovv TrdvTag ^iXoaofovg jiifaofiiv ; OiiSafiiSg, ilirov, aXX' bfioiovg fiiv ^iXo- aoipoig (PI. Rep. 5, 475 ; the antithesis piXoao^ovg S' ov lies in what precedes), § 189.] CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 177 sentence : Ei oiv iyii ntj yiyvumu /j^rt rd '6ata /i^re ri Sixaia, vftiig Si SilaKaTe fit [§ {Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 33). 'En-ti Si yy Ikcito rKfinmv ('loicdffTi)), StivA. S' ffv T&.vQkvS' 188.] bpav {Soph. (Ed. R. 1267 j cf. T/itic. 5, 16). 'ETrin/ifi raXe fiovnpxioiE. Sri, Skov Tois novapxovQ Tr)v ippdvriiTiv AoKtiv fiaXKov t&v dXKiav, oi Si Xf'po" ^atSeiovTai T&v iSuDTav (IsocT. Paneg. 71). Rem. 7. Especially note the use of rb Sk (the article as pronoun) to attach a sentence which, in opposition to some less correct statement which has just been made, says what is the true state of the case (but in truth ; whereas really) : Oiovrai lie iKaarore ot ffapoj/T-es ravra airbv tlvai ao(pbv, & S.v aXXoi' iJeXlyJu* t6 Si KivSvvivii, b) dvSpeg* A9>ivaioty T(p bvrt b Bebg ao^bs tlvat Kal iv ti^ \pritjfu^ Tovny TOvroXtytiv, on ■n cLvBpuiirivri ixo^io iXiyov Tivbg diia iariv {PI. Apol. 23)i The expression originates in the omission of a sentence merely intimated by t6 (rb Si uSe Ixti' xivSwiiei IC.T.X., PI. ThecBt. 166). a) The Greeks not unfrequently use two sentences connected by s fikv and SI, when the scope of the discourse does not refer to each X89. sentence by itself, but to the connexion of the two and their con- (320, joint matter ; which relation would be more distinctly expressed by R-) making the sentence with fiiv a subordinate sentence, appended by a conjunction to that with Se. Two sentences connected in this manner are put either interrogatively (enquiring whether both can subsist together; whether the one beside the other is probable), or negatively (so that the negation of both precedes), or they are joined in the infinitive, accusative with infinitive, or by v. (oie, on) to a statement denoting something absurd or wrong. Sometimes in this manner a clause which asserts something actual, and a hypo- thetical clause with av are connected, it being asked whether the actual state of the case and the supposition accord and can be con- ceived to subsist together : Tt ovv ; ot filv apo v'lmQ 'iviKa ttoXijc ' icai Spofiov iToXiiriaav airi'XtaOai Xcyofiivov irpayixaTog vtto twv iroWwv fvSaifiovoQ, ot 8e rifJiiTipoi iraiSeg aSvvaTriaovai Kapripttv ttoXu KoXXiovog EvcKo viKjjc 5 {PI- Legg. 8, 840.) 'Ap' I? laov out eTvoi SuicpaTig, dljrc irpoadtv /liv oi irpogt^iitiv laviiaaaBai, iiSbjg, 'oTi, avaXbtaag, o, ti dv Xa/3u, oitx £^fti ^iroSovvai, vvv dk /tot Sokw dg tpywp ai^opiifiv virofuvuv aiiTb woiijirai (Xen. Mem. 2, 7, 11 ; that although hitherto I never took to borrowing, nevertheless I think that J — ). § When the nature or quality of an action or a relation is first 190. denoted in a merely general way by a demonstrative pronoun in the neuter {tovto, toSe, rotovSE, tolovtov, tuvtov, as object or as subject to yiyvofiai), by a demonstrative adverb, by an adjective of reference (roiivavrioi/, ra ovriorpo^a), or a similar expression, in order to be then more precisely assigned in a new sentence, the latter in Greek is attached without any connecting particle, in the same mood, even in the infinitive. (Apposition of an entire sentence.) Ti Si ; ol Koufuoi 1 Obx b ftev, S' ov (dXX' iivavrtg). Denial of a partitive representation, because the truth demands a universal statement. § 191.] CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 179 aiiTwv ov ravTov tovto imrovOaaiv, aKoXaaiq rivl atixppovie tlmv ; (PL C5 Phced. 68.) AISoikO) (i-q rovvavriov, ov ^ovKofim, ttoiui, atpoSpa aicpi- 'J ^(Hc SsiKviivm TTEfpwjUEVOc StoxXti TToAai ToOr aiiroiic iijuoc £i8oTae (Dem. ly, O^y). 'Qg ot Ti)v £iKaeo(Tvvijv liririiSivovrtQ aKOVTig eiriTijSkifovfft, /laXitrr* av aiaBavoificSa, tl ToiovSe iroiriaatiJiiv ry Stavoif, Sovng tiovtriav iKarifiif ttouIv, o, rt dv PoiXijTm, Tc XlyEiC) <^ avdpbjne, et oitt kivSvvov viroXoylZeaBai tov Z,r\v ij TiQvavai avSpa, otov n koi afUKpov o^iXog {PL Apol. 38). ('Att- sKpivannv, on ov, I answered. No.) b) A report of a person's speech commenced in the oratio obliqua (in the infinitive, or with on or wc) often (even in a sentence dependent on the oratio obliqua) passes suddenly into the oratio recta, so that the words of the speaker are given in their own proper form : Kvpoq oTTEKptVoTo, on uKovit, 'A|3poKojuav tTTi r({» Eii^parp troTOfiif elvai, air- i\ovTa SwSeko cttoOjuouc' irpbt; tovtov ovv 'iipri ^ovXeadai iXdilv' kuv fiiv y Iku, Txjv SiKrjv s^rj ■xpyZeiv inSeivai aiiri^, Sv Ss ftvyy, rifiitQ ekei TTpoc ravra jjovXsvmifXiOa (Xen. An. 1, 3, 30). Meto tovtov oWoq avE ravra txH, Xlye juoi to roS lHaWiaBkvovQ •^rt^wjia (fiem. 18, 37). 'Qq S" uKora iroiovjitv, Kai raS' kyvoriaari (^Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 34 ; consider also what follows). t The verbs SokS, SokH /loi, olfiai are often put before a sentence or are inserted in it, 1 QQ without grammatical connexion, to denote the thing said as opinion or conjecture ; ' in the same manner we have oiet (oUaBe) with a question, and d laBi (iare) with an assurance ; also ^tifii, ^aaiv, liiri /loi are inserted in the same way. 'Aya6oic op" uvSpag oiiK i^oiXtTO UipinXris iroiijaai roiiQ v'ltig ; AoKu fiev, l/BovXcro, dWa firj oil Ma- Kriv J {PI. Menon, 94 ; but I fear it is not, see f 124 a. R. '1). THiuiTtpog irpea^irepov ovTi dWo fitaiCiaBai imxupriaii irori ourt rinrHV, i>Q to etieoe' ol/iai Si, oiSi aXXiae drifiaffet (^Pl. Hep. 5, 465).^ 'Av6vt}Ta St) irovSiv 6 6.vt)p oijK, ottt, civayKaaQiiatrai TiKivrSiv aiiTov Tt jxwtXv (cat Tfjv Toiairr^v irpa^iv ; (PI. Rep. 6, 486.) Rem. The expression J^Xoi/ oVc, which originally introduces a declarative object- ' Ofujpog 'QKtavov re 6t aoi oh iriidopai, St MIXijts, alfiat i" oiSk aXXof avBpiiiirov oiSiva (PI. Apol. 25). § 194] CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 181 sentence, is then also appended after a sentence with the sense of a mere adverb, [§ assuredly : 'EXqttw U riJQ iroXeiag cLvtiiJUJiaaQ rj ol xwXoi re icai tv^XoI Kai ol dWoi 193.] Avdirtipof ovTii) ffoi SuKJiepovTbiQ tS>v aXKuiv 'AdrivaiMV ijpeaKiv ij jroXtf Kai 4^E(£ at vd/jot SiiXov oTi (PI. Crit. 53, and, of course, we Laws likewise). (AijXovcSri.) The expression li oU' on (oW oVi, eu ia9' art) is usually inserted in the sentence before the verb, so that the proper signification clearly appears (e. g. EJ ns fpoiro" Eittc/ioi, rijs vvv ovaijQ 'EWaSog Tavrrjai lad' o, rt ^Jwir' dv vtrb tSiv vvv ixovruiv 'EWijviav, it ffii rd-s dpcrd£ virkp abrHv kxeivae ol MapaOwpi Kai "SaXaiuvi Tropsoxovro ol q/iET-cpoi vpoyovoi ; ovS' dv elf li oil' oVi ^r/fftitv, Dem. 19, 312) j but it remains with the infinitive and participle (with the signification of an adverb of assurance) ; e. g. wgre iravrae i/iSf ilSsvai rd /icri ravra Kai t\ttXv ev oW oVi roig otu^^cis xat ToKaiTriapovQ &v9pinrovs, Dem. 19, 309. (Moviiraroc ydp el ai vdvruv alriog, Kai t&v KaKuv Kai tOv dyaBHv, ti 'laQ' on, Arist. PI. 183.) a) Conditional propositions are denoted by d, \av (^v, av, see § 125, § R. i) ; t'/jTEp, kavwip, £176 {if that is: if at least ; wenn sonst, falls 194. dann, wenigstens wenn ') put the condition with a peculiar prominence. A plurality of cases in which something equally holds good, are de- noted by HTB — the Isive — site] {ht ovv, or be it that), lav n — lav T£j more strongly by tire (lav n) Kai — . e'iVs koi (e. g. t'irt kuAoc ute wXovaio^ EtTE KOI yevvalog Iotiv eite koi ravavTid tovtiov, PI. Menon, 71. 'Edv TE KOI avn^iXiJTai lav re koi juKrqrat, PI, L/ys. 213). Rem. 1. More rare combinations are tire — ri, li — eirc (the latter poetical). On ei and eire, as interrogative particles, see § 199 6 and c. Rem. 2. Especially note the use of et, et tcoiq, iav vug, in the sense, whether per- chance (= to try whether — ). ^idKiaag rbv SuXXoyov 6 'Apx'^"/"'£ MeXqirtxiroj' jrpurov dTTOffreXXei eifi rds 'ABfjvag, avSpa Sn-apruirijj', el n dpa /g AaKiSai/toviovg) kv 6Siiti dvri Trjg Tifuapiag TovTif (Dem. 18, 274). Sometimes to one condition there is added another, of a more special and precise character : Ei iriyxavdv at iputrSiv, rig ean rHv Ziaypd- ijiiov Zti%ig, ei /loi ei;re£, on d rd Z,Sia ypd^mv, dp' ovk dv dixaiuig ae ^po/itiv, o rd TroTa T&v ^limv ypdpuv Kai irov ; (PL Gorg. 453 ; — and then thou shouUest say — .) b) A negative condition is denoted by eI fir\, which also indicates an exception : if not, except if, unless (eJ juij apa, unless after all, unless perchance, sometimes ironically ; of a case which is possibly to be excepted also h /iri ti, nisi si, ei juij apa el : 'O xprinaTiariKog tiji; tov P M. therefore rejects (I think correctly) Hermann's ' wide difference' between eiye (as assuming the truth of the condition), and etTrep (as leaving it doubtful).] 183 PART ir. CHAP. VII. [§ 194. iqll "l"^"^^*" nSovijv rj T^v row fiavOavtiv ouSavoe a^iav ^r\(fH itvai, d fifj £t '■' Tt avTbJV apyipiov Troiil. PL Rep. 9, 581). Siliiiri, without a verb, denotes, not only the opposite to an affirmative condition preceding (if not), but to the pre- ceding condition and discourse generally, even if that be negative (in the opposite case) otherwise : 'Iiroif oilite oiSkv ai Kaxiv Ipti, dv /iri riva Xvwgs' ei Sk ftri, ixoiaii »ro\Xd Kai ava^ia aavrov (PI. Crit. 53, ^ dv Ik nva Xmryj). XlptiQ tZv 9i&v, Si Kvpi, ftf) oSriu Myf ti Si jii), oi) Oappovvra p,' e?eis (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 85}. Conversely, ei ii especially after il pXv PovXu (Pov\ia9t) for et' Si fifi ; Akyia vdXiv, Uirip rore, ei piv fiov\ea9(, lis waiZiDV, el S", &q trvovSa^iitv (PI. Legg. 3, 688). (Ei pti Sii rijv 'Ap^'- tdpov piWtiaiv, Thuc. 2, \S,ifit had not been for A.'s delat/ing ; but for that.) Rem. When what seems to be the natural and desirable condition, what one must expect and assume, and upon which the consequence follows as matter of Course, has first been put with ei pkv ; and then, by et Si pit, its opposite, and what would then follow, the apodosis to the first condition is often entirely omitted (e. g. ei ixei, then it it well, or generally, well and good) : E£ piv roivvv, tipti o SuKpdriif, Kai StayiyviioKuv ae Toii ayaBoig Kal Toig KaKoic iiiSa^eV el Si pii, H aoi o0c\os Stv IpaOes; (Xen. Mem. 3, 1, 9.) 'EXSojtwv tuiv AokAvuiv tXs^e Xappivog' El piv av rt lx«Ci 2 yi^SoaaSeg, wpSg ipae XiyeiV ei Si pr/, ^pelc vpog ai exopev (Xen. An. 7, 7, 15). c) With verbs which express a feeling of approbation and joy (pride), or of disapprobation and surprise (shame), the Greeks often use a sentence with d, instead of an object-sentence with 6ti {that, for that, became), even when an actual fact is denoted, this being con- sidered as condition on which the feeling depends : Mij rouro fiiiov So^ijre exeiv, il oi Kvpsloi, Trpaadcv aiiv rifxiv TarrojuEVOt, vvv a^earij- Kaaiv tTi yap ovtoi KUKiovi^ elai twv u0' rifib)v riTTrifiivwv {Xen. An. 3, 2, 17). TjjX(KOi)r&)v KOKWV aiTwg yeyivrifievog ArijuocrSEvrie ovk ayairq, £t fifi OiKijv Se8&>k£v, aXX' ei ju^ kuI \pvatif OTt^avt^ g fl ToiJTOv T&v rpoirov ; 8f (thou who) ti)v npnapiav, rjv oiiSi Kard tiSv mXiiKtyn'tvutv SiSoaffiv 01 vdfioi, ravrriv Kard rStv aKpiruv typaipag (^Deni. 23, 36). 'K.aXovfxai as (I sue thee for) riSv SwSiKa fivtSv, dg iXa^tg ^voifiivog rbv 4'apbv Wttov. "Ittttov ; ouk ciKovtTt ; Bv TrdvTtg vjicXg lart fuaoiivra WinKiiv (^Arist, Nub. 1 224 ; me, who, as ye all know — ; I to buy a horse, I, ioho — .»). d) To a relative pronoun pointing in a general way to what goes before, a more particular statement of the thing meant is sometimes appended by an infinitive, or ace. with inf., as apposition to the relative, or by a conjunctional accessory sentence : "O Kai SnvoTaTov dv eJij avfi^aXvov, roig ftiv ttoXXo Kai iitydXa TroiriaavTag vpag dyaOd lifj Tvxiiv ravTTig r^e Smptag, rbv Si vTrspwXrjQrj t^jjfiaprrjKOTa i^aiviaQai Itovoiav irap' ilxCiv Tov vapavofiiXv liXti^ora (IJetti. 26, 7). OBrw ii,tipTiip,i9a tSiv iXtriSiav, uigr' oiS' 01 KtKTUfpkvoi Toiig iityiarovg ^Xovrovg /ikviiv tiri Toiroig kOkXovaiv, dXX' del tov irXkovog 6psy6ficvoi TrepJ t&v vTrapxivTiDV KivSvvivovaiV ojrep a%i6v kan SiSikvai, fni) Kdi ^/itXg Ivoxoi yivAfiiOa ravTaig raXg dvoiaig (Isocr. de Pac. 7). Rem. In consequence of this, and by a breviloquentia, the relative pronoun in the neuter (8, 'oirtp) occasionally comes to have merely the signification of a con- necting particle (while, whereas) : Aia^ipovnug roSt ixontv {we possess in a pre- eminent degree the characteristic property), ligri roX/idv re oi airroi jidXiara Kai, irtpi S)v iirixaprjaontv, lKXoytZta9ai' 8 ToXg dXXoi£ apaOia /liv Spdaog, Xoyianbg Si oKvov (pkpu (Thuc. 2, 40 ; which in others is otherwise, since — , or simply, whereas, on the contrary). (In the poets o xai, d Kai, wherefore also.) 184 PART II. CHAP. VII. [§ 196. [§ e) The sentence annexed by the relative, has sometimes itself an accessory sen- 195-] tence, or an accessory definition in the participle, to which the relative also belongs, (237) and to which it often attaches itself in point of case : BovXov boi roiig aWovg inri r&Q tWmu'evag ayuv ffot Smpeag, d\Xd Toiavrag, alg K&v a "" — )• 'EtstXijJs Tig, oVt rovg (pvXaKag oiiK iiiSai/iovag ttoioi- /lev, olf e^bv iravTa i%uv to. tUv iroKiT&v, oidiv l\otiv {PI. Rep, 5, 466, = o'l, i^iv airolQ IT, i. t, t. ttoKitHv, ovdiv Ixottv), Sometimes the relative alone belongs to the accessory sentence or participle : Ol 'AXfic, ovg 'Iva StaWaTTuxn, KaratrxiXv roig ^piaQug •biKiw'irag (jit)tri, Tomirrig Tirvx^Kam SiaWayrig, ligr k^iKrjKavrai Kai avaaraTog ri v6\ig ai)To>v yiyoviv {Dem. 19,39). 'Apa viv ovtui ryle -y r/fiepg. Ei\^0n/iev, 8 naXai Kal n-oXXoi rdv aoipHv ?ijroSvr£j jrptv ivpilv Kareyrjpaaav ; {PI. Thecet. 202.) Rem. On relative sentences as expression of the purpose and definition or cause, see § 105 a, c, d, and $ 115 a, R. § a) The particle ya/o in an independent sentence often assigns a 196. relation or a circumstance which has been pointed at by a preceding demonstrative pronoun {oBe, the following, to(tovtoq, more rarely outoc) or adverb {ivOlvSe, hence zzfrom this; from the following circumstance, SKtidsv), and which might equally well have been annexed in an acces- sory sentence with on (or oo-(j» after TotroiJroi;) : AijXot Si fioi kol ToSs tCov iraXaiwv daOivsiav ov\ r]KiaTa' irpo yap twv TpioiKiLv oiiSiv ^aivtrai irporspov KOivy ipyaaafiivri ri 'EXAae {Thuc. 1, 3). 'Qg oi trcpi Tov KXsoufdpoTov to Trpwrov iTTEKparovv ry M"XV' (raipii tovto^ TEKjuripttjj yvoiri tiq av' ov yap av riSvvavTO avTov Z<'>VTa aTrevsyKiiv, el pfj ol Trpo avTOV fiaypfitvoi iiriKparovv iv tKiivt^ Ttjl xpo'v(j) {Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 13). "Ort iyw ruy^avw wv toiovtoq oIoc vtto rou deov ry iroXii SiSoaOai, ivdivSe av KaravoriaatTa' ov yap dvd.pti}Triv(^ soiks to £jue TWV fiiv snavTov airavTiov rifieXriKivai, to Bl vnerepov irpaTTUv dii iBtq fKaorrij) irpogtovTa oifTEp iraTepa rj dSe\<^bv irpsajivTtpov {PL Apol. 31). (In English, namely, or omitted [or that substituted for it] .) Rem, Such a sentence is often added to the elliptical expressions rcK/iripiov Sk,* atiiiilov Se, jiapTvpiov £i (viz. roSe iaTiv), SijXov It (viz. Ik tovSb eutiv), sometimes also to Kt>?1<'av kg rfjv voXw {Thuc, 8, 61). Sometimes (especially in Herod, and Thucydid.) the principal sentence attaches itself very closely to the parenthesis, something in the parenthesis being necessary to be understood in the § 197.] CONNEXION OP SENTENCES. 183 principal sentence : Kal — ^i» yap rt xai Iv ^vpaKoiaatg /3ovX6/ievoi/ roTg 'ASijvai'oif [§ rd wpdfijiaTa ivSovvai — iireKripvKtiitTo (viz. to ^ovKojUvov t. 'A. r. tt. kvS., the party 1.96.] which — ) itq rAv Nikiov koi oiie eta d^iffraoflai (rAuc. 7, 48). (Hence iCKKa yap, ■aXK' oi ydp, but then, but then — not, as a transition to sometiiing new.) A peculiar interchange and partial intermixture 6f different con- § structions takes place, where a circumstance appended to a preceding 197. statement, is marked as the greatest, the utmost that is to be said about it, or as being, in some other respects, the most remarkable feature of the case. This may happen (1) so that the circumstance is alleged in a sentence with on as a matter of judgement or reflection upon the case : To Se fiiyiarov (viz. Icrriv), on (the verb almost always omitted) ; or (2) so that the characterizing adjective is put foremost, as apposition to the sentence which states the circumstance : To Se fiiyiaTov, oiiS' ewpuKU Ttwirort tov avSpa. (Cf. § 19j R. 3.) Instead of the adjective in the apposition, there might, further, be a relative sentence as a premised remark : *0 Se fityDrrov (viz. tcrriv), ouS' kwpoKa TTiljiroTE TOV avSpa ' ; but, by an interchange between this form and the first, we have (3) : *0 oe fikyiaTov, on oiiS' iwQUKa itwirorc tov avSpa, where, therefore, both sentences have the form of accessory sentences and a principal sentence is wanting. Lastly, we have either (4) the adjective alone (which is rare), or (5) the relative sen- tence quite detached, as an intimation of that which is to follow, and then follows an explanatory sentence with yap (as in § 196, a) : To Se fiiyitiTOv' ovSe yap twpoKa TroJirOTE tov avSpa, or "O Se fiiyioTov' ovSi yap k. r. X. (1) To Se rravTtov vtrip^viaTaTov, on ev juev toIq iSloiQ oi aSiKovntvoi BaKpvovai koI sXectvoi tlatv, iv Si toTc Srifioaioig ol piv aSiKOVvTtg eAeeivoi, u/ueT? Se oi aSiKovfiivoi eXeejte {Lys. 27, 12). (2) To Se iravTU>v Shvotutov, vptig piv Aripoadivriv ov irpovSore oiiS' EtairarE KpiOrjvai iv ti^ tojv 'EXAijvwi' avvcSpiif, ovtoq Se vpagvvv TtpooiSiOKSv {/Esch. 3, 161). (3) *0 Se Travrwv KaTayiKaaTOTaTOv, oti T(I)v ysypap- fiivwv iv ToiQ opoXoyiaig to. ^lipiara Tvyx&vopev ^vXaTTOvreg {Isocr. Paneff. 176). (4) To Se piyioTOv koI TreptfaviaraTOv TravTwv' 6 yap aSiKTidelg koi ettj/SouXeuOeic vtt^ ipov, Stg ^tjo-iv, ovk iroXprias Tirraptov Itwv iiriaKTi^aadai ilg vpag [Lys. 3, 39; to make complaint to you). (5) *0 Se TravT(i)v ffXErXtaJTarov' otig yap opoXoyriaraipev av irovr)poTa- Tovg bIvul ro)v voXituv, tovtovq iritrTOTaTOvg fvXaicag riyovpeda Trig 'TToXlTtiag iivai {IsOCr. de Pac. 53). ("O Si iravTiav jiaKiara ayavaKTTJaai Ifrf avVTVXfiv ydp dirtuiv 'ArptariSf wapd ittMirirov iropjwo/jei'^j Kai fur' avrov yiivata Kal ' 'Qi Si noKiara riiiiSv Trpoexoi""". tJTTrowf re iroXXois Kticrqirot Kat airif oiVci'fi Kal oiiK iiraKTif xpwvrai ( Thtic. 6, 20). 186 PART II. CHAP. VII. [§ 198. [§ jraiJapm (is Tpiaxovra ISaSll^iiv. Dem. 19, 805. The character of the circumstance 197.] not expressed by a single adjective.) Rem. As a sentence with on (in the third form), so a sentence with li or with a temporal particle may be connected with a characterizing relative sentence : "0 Si TTavTtav dsivoTUTOv, orav tiq idy Toig rfjv rjysfjtovi^v rijg 'EtWdSog Ix^iv cLttovvrag Iwl Toii "EXXtivae Koff (Kaartiv rjjiBpav aTparivojiivovQ (^Itocr. Plat. 45 ; but the worst of all is, when — ). § a) Of interrogative sentences, it is to be remarked, that in Greek a pro- 198. nominal interrogative maybe referred to a participle, so that thequestion (424, relates to the circumstance expressed by the participle, see Participle, *^ § 176 a, and § 181 a. In the same way an interrogative pronoun may stand in an accessory sentence with a conjunction ; or with the word which characterizes a substantive notion with the article (an ad- jective, a participle, or a preposition with a case),— to enquire with what accessory definitions, or for what more precisely assigned descriptions of persons or things something holds good. (In English the acces- sory sentence or characterizing notion must be expressed as an interro- gative principal sentence.) Ilor' olv, & avSpae 'Adrivaloi, iron, a XPV> irpa^ers; ETrttSav rl yivriTai; {Dem. 4!, 10; literally, when what takes place ? = what must take place, in order that you — ? [before you will — .?]) BojjOouvraiv rifiwv etc "Apyoe, oiij^ fro£;UOV /xa^eadai Aoke- Saifiovioig ; 'iva ri yivriTai ; {And. 3, 26 ; with a view to what result ?) Olada TivaQ avdpwirovg a^aptarouc KaXoujuevoue ; Kai fiaXa, £0r) 6 V£avi(TKOQ. KoTaju€/ia0i)Kac ovv, tovq tI iroiovvrag to ovo/ia tovto airoKoXovaiv ; {Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 1.) Tovg irije SiaKUiiivovg Xafiouv av 01 TowiiTOi fiadriTug ; {Isocr. Antid. 222.)' Reu. I. Two interrogative pronouns may be connected in one sentence : Tivac itirb Ttviav €upoi/*ev av fin^ova evspytTiJiJievovs rl Traldag vnd yovetov ; (-X(?w. Jifem, 2, 2, 3.) Els rpoTtoQ opBbe ttovtoq iiraivov, Xdy^i SitKdiiv, oIoq o'iuiv aiTiog &v Tvyxavu vtpi oi av 6 \6yog 9 (^Pl. Conv. 195). Rem. 2. On the construction of a demonstrative pronoun with the interrogative, seej 100 b. Rem. 3. A sentence with olog, i>g is added to expressions of praise, blame, or wonder, to assign the reference to a certain quality of the person or thing men- tioned, in the sense : upon the reflection, or, considering, how, &c. (almost = 8ri TotoCrof, brt oirmg): KCpoj cmyti KaToucTtipiav rriv rt yvvaiKa, o'iov AvSpbg aripolTO, Kai Tov av8pa, oiav yvvaiKa KaTaXiTTbtv oiiKer' HipoiTo (^Xen. Cyr. 7, 3, 1<8). Eii)Sal]juav lioi SiuKparqs i(pah'tTO Kai tov Tpoirov Kai tSiv Xoyuiv, tog iSidg Kat ytvvaimg iriKiVTa {PL Phced. 58). ' Hence 'iva rt ; (viz. ylvijrat) wherefore? to what end? on tI ; '^brit) ri j) for what reason? (lit. becatise what ?) § 199.] CONNEXION OF SENTENCES. 187 Rem. 4. Note particularly the originally elliptic use of oToc, and especially 'oaog, [§ with adjectives which denote a surprising, or, generally, a strikingly and uncom- ^98.] (P/. Rep. 1, 350). {'YirepipvriQ tiq £)c /leyoXij jiXdjin, PI. Gorg. 477.) In the same manner adverbs of the same kind take &£ after them : eav^aarus (vireppvUs) i>e b) For the indirectly interrogative pronoun Sgrig (also og : Qtfu- ffroKX^e ^pa^et t<|! vavKXript^ ogrit; lori koI Si a ^svyei, Thuc. 1, 137. At' ac alrlag ra Trtpi rijv aKOrjv ^Vfijiaivii iraOrinaTa, XektIov, PL Tim. 67) not unfrequently the direct interrogative tIq is put in a more ani- mated way : Ai yvvaiKsg ripwrtov avrovg, rivig eTev [Xen.An.A, 5, 10). Oif ■Ka.vv lifiiv ^povTiariov, ri Epovirtv oi iroAXoi Vftac, aXX o, ri u tvaiwv irepi twv SiKatwv icai aSiKbiv {PI. Crit. 48), and in the same manner jroToe, Troffoe, 7rwc> for ottoToc, ottoctoc, ojriog. Ovk oiSa, OTToiq. ToXfiy rj noioiQ Xoyoig XPWfi.evog ipio {PL Rep. 3, 414). Rem. "Oaog and olof, in exclamations of wonder, occur in the form of direct interrogation : ''Q vavTre, oaa irpayfiara ixiig ev Tip Stiirvifl (Xen. Cyr. 1, 8, 4.) a) A direct question without any interrogative pronoun, or pronomi- § nal adverb, may stand in concise and animated expression, without a 199. particle to denote the question (e. g. with a single verb in the second person), especially with an expression of doubt or wonder, or after Xl-ys, fiTTE \ioi. OiiK olcrda, on ravra Xeyovai fiev ttcivtcq, ttolu S' ovSt'ig ; — M)j aTroKpi'vwjuai ; {PL Rep. 1, 337 ; am I not to answer ?) 'E;ue fiovov ov yiyviiaKsig, 5) Kvpe, rHiv avyytvwv ; {Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27.) Elra {and then) tovtujv fitv iirifisXtlaOai irap&JKivaaai, r^v Se firp-ipa OVK oi£t Siiv dipawavHv ; {Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 13.) Tt o5v ; ev ralg 6Xiy- • ap\ovfiivaig iroXsat TrTW)(ovg ovx opqg ivovrag ; {PL Rep. 8, 552.) Often such a question is attached by fi, or, sometimes as an expression of the conjecture and opinion of the person asking : Tt fiivofxiv ; q oiiK tTriaTa/JiiOa, &ti paaiXiiig v/iag airoXiaai trtpi wavTog av Troiriaano ; (Xen. An. 2, 4, 3.) Sv Se, sti 6 Xap/ilSrig, w ^vpaKoais, inl r(|i, fxiya ^poveig', fi S^Xov, on etti ti^ iraiSi', {Xen. Conv. 4, 52.) (pvSri,oi JijwoT-t, oil Sri irov, m ri irov, surely not f see in Lexicon [Appendix].) An mdl- rect simple interrogative sentence must always be denoted as such. b) 1. A simple direct question is denoted by the particles ^ (with emphasis, sometimes doubt), apa (apa ys), ap' oi (also apa alone of a conjecture, especially ap" ovv: perchance — ?), fiv (mostly expressive of doubt, or at least uncertainty), apa jujj (stronger), jutHv (from /xfj ovv), fibtv oil, fiwv fifi (strongly inclining to denial), and the elliptical expression aXXo n ft {is it any thing else than — , is the case otherwise 188 PART II. CHAP. VII. [§ 199. [§ than — , ought not — ), or, with Ij omitted, aWo ri (aXXo n rj ov — , ^^^■^ aXXo Ti oi», should perhaps ?), and lastly ovkow [not then ?). (See the Rem.) — 3. A simple dependent question is most generally denoted by tt, if, whether {A a^a, whether then, whether after all ; whether perchance), and more emphatically by apa, whether then, rarely by firf, viz. after verbs denoting look to, and consider (§ 124, R. 1) ; with the same verbs also iav {whether, perchance, cf. § 194 a, R. 3). (For the particulars of the special meanings of these particles, see the Lexicon [and Appendix].) ''H nai Trarep, amiiasKtlv robs aTparuliras ; (Xen. Cyr, I, 6, 17.) 'Ap', a 'AvTitrdtvegf eiffi Tivtg a^iai tpiXujv uigirep oiKtT&v ; (AcM. ^em. 2, 5, 2.) ^Apo ye, !> vaX, iv ToiQ arpaTtiyiKois Kai o'lKovofiiaq Ti aoi kirtfiviiiTdri 6 SiSaaxaXoe ; (^Xen: Cyr, 1, 6, 12.) 'Ap' ov (ap' o^v ov) Trdvva, oira vtrb fivQoXoyitiv ri ironi]Tbiv Xlyerai, diftyriaig ovaa rDyx""" >) yiyovoriav f) ovroiv f) jieWovTuiv .; (PI, Rep. S, 392.) EittI fiot, ei Seoi/icOa } dpxiTtKTUv jSovXci yeveaOai ; (Xen, Mem, 4, 2, 10.) 'Apa fii) oXXo ri Thv , Bdvarov sTvai iiyovfitQa yj rr/v rijg ^vxVG diro tov etltfiaTog diraWayTjv ; (PI, Phced, 64.) 'Ap' ovv, ifacav, fii/ Kai 'qfitv IvavTtuaiTai 6 dvijp Trtpt Tijg T&v aTpaTiiOTUtP dTrayuyijg ; (Xen, An, 7, 6, 5.) 'AXXa fiijiv Kai irpbg riiidg tovto Ttivet tv ri^ irapovri ; TlavrdTraai fiiv oiv, riv S' lyi> (PI, Rep, 5, 454). Ti Sk ; ol rriv ifSovriv dyaObv opi^(!/iEVO( fiiav jiii kXdrrovog 7rXavj;g IjuTrXeoi rSiv erspiav ; (PI, Rep, 6, 505.) Nuj' ovv, kiriiSi} aoi ri aoipia ii&vr) liSaifiova Kai evrvxif nouXv rbv dvBpanrov SoKtX, aXXo ti fi (paiijg dv dvay Koiov ilvai (piXoao^iXv Kai airbg kv vif tx"S aiirb iroiiiv ; (PI. Euthyd. 282.) 'AXXo n ovv, riv S' kytt)f fid9r}fia dvayKoiov ^o\tfitKtp dvdpl Qrjtrofiiv Xoyii^eaOai Ti Kai dpidfieXv SvvaaOai ; (PI, Rep. 7, 522.) *lp£ ydp, b dyaBbg dvi)p Kai iirl to JUXtuttov Xkyiov, d dv Xkyy, dXXo ti o\)k etKjj IpiX dXX' dn*oj3X£7r(iJv irpog n ; (PI, Gorg, 503.) A. Ovkovv Kai Xvjrai uigavTujg ai piv xP^'Tai limv, ai Si 'irovripai ; B. IliDs ydp ov ; (PI. Gorg, 499.) — OhK ol5a, li avyxQ ffi ifov, i) ^eT^ov t4 /ji) SiSovai, b)g aH iyu) orav juqScv tovtwv airjjv napaXviry, fir\T okoj} jur;TE oi//ic ;u^te aX-yijowv /x^te Tip riSovri {PL Phced. 65). 'A El', inr&rt firj aXXo n airovSaiOTtpov irpaTTOisv, ravry rg iraiSia sX^pwvTO {Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 20). ''H irou x"^'''''>'C "" Toiig aXXovg ird- aaifii av9piii)irovc, wg ov ^Vju^OjOav riyovfiai rfjv Trapovaav Tu^^ijv, orE ye ' Rarely 0o/3oii/jai, /iq — /iri : 'EBav/iaZt S jur/ cvvarai cnrooiSovai, oi SoKEi aoi Koi ouroc xaXtirbc i\oQ sivai ; {Xen. Mem, 2, 6, 3.) Etc ra irXola rove t£ aadevovvrag ivc(5il5aaav koi iraiSag koi yvvaiKag koi rajv (TKfuaiv o «i»C (T^aXepov tort to, a jut? oIM tiq, ravra Xiytiv Koi irpaTTCiv ; (Xen. Mem. 3, 7, 16.)' (e) TaXdiTrwpoc tiq av ye avdpiairoQ si Km oiSe'Aflij- vaToc, V ju^rs fltoi irarptjloi tio-t jujjte Jepd jujjt' aXXo juijSev koXov kui ayaflov (P/. Euthyd. 302). IIwc av opBQg ifiov KarayiyvwaKonc, vXaKtKo{ elm tovtov tov Soyftarog koi firire yoiirevonevoi firire /Sia^o- Hevoi tKJiaXXovmv {PL Rep. 3, 412). Also ftfi stands in dependent questions denoting a purpose (bow something can take place), espe- cially with Sttoic, see § 123, R. 1. TtjJ twv HepaiLv jiamXeX ovSev irpovpyiairepov eariv rj aKOirelv, e^ wv juiiSlirort vavaoneBa irpbg oXXjj- Xovg voXefiovvreQ {Isocr. Paneff. 134). Oii aKoireig, 6,ri fxrj Xvirriaeig Toiig aXXouc ttomv {Dem. 21, 135). b) In the second member of a dependent disjunctive question {whether — or not) the negative may be either ov or firi. In a dependent question denoting a distinction and separation {what — and what not) fxfi is used when the verb is understood, but either ou or jui) when it is repeated : Sico7rw*i£v, el TrpeTrEt rj ov {PL Rep. 5, 451). Sketttsov, itorepov BiKaiov i/ie evOevBe vetpaaOai i^iivai, juJj aievTb)v > Also TowvTos, $£ oil, where the representation of a consequence and purpose is not made, or not prominent : Totovruv Stj^ao/ievot wapiofitv, iv oT; kIvSwoq ovitiQ iveoTiv (Isocr. Plat. 2). With negative preceding it is always oiStie (ftijJetf) roiouTOC ofrifi (8f) o i — , oiliiQ oiVuc — , o'trif (8j) o i. Nd/iof ridc/iEV, oiicijaiv Kal TOfiuiov fitiSevl ilvai /ttiSiv roiourov, «ij 8 oA irSj o fiowKSiiivoe Hstitnv (PI. Rep. 8, 416). Mqffv tUv atitiiariav oiitcu; dv paitiv elvat ^aiXov, o, re yvfivaaBiv ovk dv itq ;3e\nov (IsQcr. Antid. 210). ' O'l KcpicvpaToi Kal airoi dvayKaadriaiaBat tijiaaav, Kopivdiuv jStaZofisvuv, v, V oi, S'lKaiov {PI. Crito, 48). Nil/ tfiaBov, g Xiyiig- ti U ^ akijBfe 7} JUT}, nBipaaofiai fiaOdv (PL Rep, 1, 339). Tour' axiTO, d ■xalpiig V jmj \alpiiQ, avayKti Sri irov at ayvoilv, kcvov j ovra iraatiQ (jipovrjaiug [PL Phil. 21). Oil Sft VflaQ £K TWV TOV KOTtiyopOV XojtOV Toiie VOflOVQ KaTafiavBavtiv, ti koXwc vjuTv KtivraL fj fit), aAX' sk tuiv vofiwv tovq tov KOTt^jopov Ao70ve, £t 6pBia)Q KOI voplfiwg vpag StSacrKOuai to irpayfia jj oi; {Antiph. 5j 14). — Ot EtSorap eaurove to t£ iTTirijSfto lauroie laaai Koi Biayiyvw(TKOV(nv, a rt Evvavrai koi a pri (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 26). 'AAXa Tot TTEp^ 7£ ^uXaKrie Tjje X'^P^f °^^' o" "■"' 'i^l p£piXl)KSV KOt diaOa, OTTOaai t£ ^vXaKOi tTriKatpol eiai koi hiroaai pr\, koi ottoctoi t£ 0povpol jKovo^ sifft icai 6iro(TO( jui) tiaiv {Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 10). 'O vo;uo- Ptrjie Sta/ojoij8i)v airiSii^iv, ovq ;^pij Sripj]yopuv koi ovg oi 8eT Xl-yfiv ev Tiff Snpv {-Msch. 1, 27). , § An infinitive (both simply, with and without article, and also an 205. accusative with inf.) is negatived by ju^ (a). But in the accusative (nominative) with the infinitive {b) the particle is usually oi after . ^ij/ui and the verbs which absolutely and without any special accessory meaning denote to think {olpai, riyovpai, voplZi^> viroXap^avb), also SoKw, oKoiw), and sometimes with other verba declarandi et sentiendi (e.g. Xiyb), viTKTXvovpai, IXtti^w, eikoc iartv, opoXoyu), but only when the governing verb is not itself in a form (imperative) or construction (ei, &c.) which requires prj for its negation ; for then the infinitive thereby governed is negatived by jutj (c) : (a) Alaxpov prj /SoijOeTv. na()£(TKEt/a(Tjuai jur)OEVi virEiicEtv. Mo/iai aov fir) iripiopStv k/ie AvoWifievov. TavTa vfioQ /iij ayfoetv q|3ovX^/iiiv. AiEirpa£a^>)V nnSeva tiiiiv ivavriu)9ijvai. MSoktm T&s vave /iriTiii tKjr\iiv. Ovtuq avaiaxvvToi tiaiv &sti fitiltvbe dwix^aGai tSv KepSog i>ep6vTotv (but wgre oiSivbe dTTExoirai). liavra Troiovaiv UTrfp tov lit) Sovvai SiK>]v. Ti iitiSe/tiav tuv iroXtdJK aXSivai TroXtopicif, fiiyiarov ian ffij/ntiov tov Sii roiiTove tth- aQkvTaq Toiie iiDKeag iiroKuiXivai (Dem. 19, 61). 'O vTthp tov Tavra iiij ytvhSat dyiiv (Dem. 18, 201). Xcipqvcc Toig avBpiiwovs iTtfSovaai kotiIxov tUqrc fiii diruvai Alt' aiiTav {Xen. Mem. % 6, \l). {b) IloXXovQ ^aai yiyvojaKOvrag ra ^iXriaTO. ovK iOcXiiv irpoTTUv {PI. Prot. 352). 'E^oi olpai, d rotavrriv prj Svvaaai v anavTtov (Isocr. Antik. 234, because vojiiZuv as infinitive after w£r£ would have jjiri)} Rem. I. From the oi belonging to the infinitive treated of in the paragraph, vre must distinguish an oi which, though it stands with the infinitive, belongs, strictly speaking, to the governing verb : Oi/c ejri Toirif KaBTirai o SiKaaTi)s< sf » rip xara- XapiZtodai tA dUaia, iW iirl r^T Kpivnv ravra, xai iixuijiOKfv ov X''P'"''6ai, oIq av SoKy ai)Tif, aWd Sudativ Kurd rowj vii/jous (P/. Apol, 35 ; he has sworn, not that he viUl — , but tliat — ; dfuifiOKc jit) ^^apicTcrdac, he has sworn not to — )■ (Xp»; — ov — oKKd — , and xpn — nh — dXKd with slight diflference.) (Ov 0)jjuJ iivai == ^j)/»i oiic t., and oub dt,i.C) = Tijv TToXiv eXarroui/, e i 9ri|3aToi ;U8V E^ouo-t 0E'.) Now and then, however, fijj occurs exceptionally with a participle of the circumstance, or a par- ticiple which, by §§ 177 and 178, stands with the subject or object : Ovx op?C. 'on 01 A9t'ivt](ri Sucaarai troWoie ^iti /i^Siv ASiKovVTac iiriKTHvav ; (Xen. Mem. 4, 8,5.) § 207.] THE NEGATIONS. 197 'E?oi5a, irai,(fivaH at jti) vt^vKora Toiovra ^iDVtiv iitiU rexvaaOai Kwea (Soph. Phil. [§ 79). {Ataxivofjiai nij iroi&v = il iirj itoia.) 206.] Rem. 2. A6Za Ape^ Bavav jrlpi icat j«)j (PI. Rep. 4, 430 ; = Trepi row, ri Seiviv Kai ri jiii, by 5 204 b). An adjective or participle with the article denoting generally a § certain kind and class is usually negatived by ntjj (a), yet sometimes 207. by ov {b) . But if it means some persons or things indefinitely of a certain class {persons who — , thinffs which — ; see § 180 b, R. 1), or individual definite persons or things which are characterized, then oi IS used (c). (a) At /ujj KoAat sTriOvfiiai. Mevwv rov firj iravovfiyov tuv airaiSevTwv ivofiiZcv dvai [JCen. An. 2, 6, 26). Twv arpanwrtov oi /i^ cvvafisvot SiareXiaai ttjv oSov iWKTtpivaav aaiTOi koi tivtv Trvpop {Xen. An. 4!, 5, 11). Ta opara koI ra jujj (viz. 6para. PL Phosd. 79). T^ TTOAEt TToWoKie /UtTEJUtXlJCTE ThtV fJLET Opjfig KOI jujj jUET* iXfy)(pV yeVOfti- vwv {Tsocr. Antid. 19). (Ti /iijJIv = r* ^>)5J 'h, not i-A ouJsv.) — (6) Noui- ^E^E StifioTiKUTipovt; ilvai TOVQ iiiOvovTag Twv vri6vT(ov KOI roue vovv oiiK E^ovrac twv eu (jtpovovvrwv (Isocr. de Pac. 13). Tow oiik opdiog ■XpwHivov ry priTOpiKy piaiiv SiKaiov, aW ov tov SiSa^avra {PL Gorff. 457. But shortly before : Oix v "x*"? "'''•'a tovtov, aW ol /ij) ^^pu'^Evoi, olitai, dpene). (c) OlSa riSri avdpwvove, tovq ptv ek StajSoX^?, Toi)e Se icat 1^ VTTOipiaQ, o* ^ojSijfltiTEc dAX^Xoue, (j)6a(Tai j3ovXd/i£vo( 7rpii< iraduv, BiT0iti 'ATTticjjv (Xew. itfem. 3, 5, 4). At oiiic opflat n-oXirEtat aSrat {PL PoL 302).' Rem. 1. (To §§ 201 — 207.) It is not uncommon for oi to stand in sentences which would require /i^, whea the negation concerns only a single part of the predicate, e, g. the object or an adverb, whereby a negative antithesis is annexed to the affirmative form, to make it more forcible (ovk — aWa, &\\' oii, nat oi, or simply oi, o6x iiring — aXka, oi iiriv, yet not, sometimes also ov n6vov). But we also find ju^. 'AvayKti rbv towvtov Ijiv oiic avOpiairov ^iov aWa rivof irXew/jovoj (/"/, Phil. 21 ; of a mollusc). Xpi) ti)]/ ailuppova 7ro\tv riv Iv T

^ aWa itfjS' dn/idZuv (Thuc. 3^ 42)i 'ErrathvBiiv o8r&)KE'ac £?j}7raTi)(TE ^iXtTTTroc, Sia raiiO' Siv vfxaq Ala\ivrig i^rfiraTricre, juj) Sorw StKJjv {Dem. 19, 77; let not jEsch. escape the punishment). Rem. 1. There are, however, some passages in which (by a kind of anacoluthia) an oi is inserted after an interposed sentence, merely to repeat the negative which stands immediately before the interposed sentence : 'Opag, 3r« ij voifpoavvti oix (llgTrep r/ dvSptia Kai r/ aoipla iv nepii rivi kxarspa evovaa r; /liv ao^iiv, ij Ik AvSpeiav Triv wdXiv wapeixero, oix oirut iroiii avTif, aXXd. Si o\)/c drixvUg rerarai (PI. Rep. 4, 432). OvS' &g TrpogtSoKmv KiXoyiZo/ttiv iyia irpwrag irapiaeaOat Stvpo, T&g 'Axapviuiv yvvatKag, ovx ijfovatv (Arist. Lys, 61). Rem. 2. Oi /jd rbv Ai', oi — (in answers) : No, by Zens, not — . (Also, without further addition, toerely : Oi no. rbv Ai', oi fjtkv Sf/.) § 310.] THE NEGATIONS. 199 b) A com{)Osite negation, which follows after another, simple or [§ composite, with the same predicate, does not cancel the former, but ^'^•^ continues it, either heightening and confirming it (e. g. ov — ouSl, non — we — guidem, ovSi — owSe, neque — ne — quidem, ov fiipToi oiiSi, ov nrjv ovSe, yet also not), or distributively (e. g. ovSslg — ovn — oiirs) or repeating it with the indefinite pronominal notion (pro- noun or adverb), often several times (e. g. oiti — ovStie ovSiv, ovSais ovStvl oiSlv) : Ml) \av9avirw (ts fxr]Si tovto (Xera. Cyr. 5, 2, 36). Ti 0£ av ; TTWQ iroiricrug ; oiSi yap ov^i tov abv iraipov Set TrapeXOtiv {PL Phad. 378). KXiap\og etti jciev roiic iroXtjufowe oiiK i^jeV ijSti yap aireipriKorag roiic aTpaTiirag' oil fiivroi oiiS" cnriKXivc, ^uXarrojuti'Ot', fxr) SoKoiri (jtivyuv {Xen. An. 3, 3, 16). 'E? ov tjjv iroXiv oIkov/xsv, owSeic ovre kIvovvoq ovts ttoXejuoc irepi tijXikoutwv to piyidog rifuv yiyove, TTEpi ocrayv vvvi fiovXtvaofievoi (7vvcXriXvdap.ev (Isocr. Archid. 7). "Avev TovTov oiidtlg tig ovSev ovSsvog av wjuaiv oiiSiiroTs yivoiro a^iog {PL PhiL 19). Rem. This last repetition of the negative with the several pronominal words is only used where the negative is emphatically urged as universal ; otherwise it is said : OiSiiq TruVore icdXXiav B&varov ijviyKtv rl ^u>Kpdrt)g (^Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 2). OvTi tZv iroKiT&v t&v ^Xiamidv ovSeig izdvv ri 67ri;^uipia^£i rd vvv *A9r]vai^e ovts rig ?lvof a^lKTai \q6vov evxvov iKtlBiv (^Pl. Pheed. 57). With sundry verbs which contain a negative notion, and are con- 5 structed with the infinitive or ace. with inf , fir] is attached to the 210, infinitive, to give prominence to the negation (only the affirmative part of the verb being in the speaker's thoughts). (M^ with rig becomes juijSsic.) Such verbs are those which denote a denial and a contradiction {apvovfiai, l^apvovfiai, f^apvog sl/xi, avTiXiyw), a prohibi- tion {airayopivw, otteTttov, oTroi/'ij^f^o/uat, aTrO)(cipoTOVh>), a desisting from or a retracting of an opinion or resolution {aTroyiyvojaKw., airo- SoKit, fiSTayiyvwOKb), avariOifiai, also airtv\ofiai), an acquittal {cnroXitJ, aitifii), a shunning or hindering and holding back or freeing from something (EvXajSovjuai, Trpiv Kwjooe lnirXr\a9i'n] fljjpwv {Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 14). Mavriviig inrtxpjt- ipicravTO Tolg ifpolg ^pi^fiaai ftrj \pria6ai {Xen. HelL 7, 4, 38). Tifiodsog 'Ap(oj3ap^av£t cnriyvw firj /Sotj^Eiv {Dem. 15, 9). Vlavcraviag Kotdaig VTTO Th)v '2iTrapTiaT(bv aniXvOri firj aSiKtiv {Thuc. 1, 128). EiXajSEtfffle ravra /xfj iroXXdJi' ivavriov Xiyuv {PL Euthyd. 304). 01 iiaKwXvaavn^ 200, PART II. CHAP. VIII. [§31]. [§ TavTa juij yivladai rhtg ^aav ; {Andoc. 3, 21.) 01 'A0r)votot ov irap- riaav toiq vavaiv, cnruTTOVvTcg rov SirdXicqv /jirj r'l^HV [Thuc. 2, 101). Rem. 1. M^, however, is sometimes omitted (e.g. 'Oici'ijffouffi, /tij iiroSo^y ij/ilv T&e avovS&e TToiiiaaadat, Xen. An. 2, 3, 9 : ivXa^v/iai i/ivtaiiv, PI. Sep. 10, 608), especially with verbs denoting a holding back, &c., and with ko)\v/ former purpose, to do.^ Rem. 2. Verbs which denote denial, contradiction, and doubt, may also be fol- lowed by an oii in a sentence with dc, which ov belongs to the affirmative part of the principal verb (dpvoS/iai i>Q ov = apvov/iat fiii, Xlytu, Sri ov) : Ol 'Adijvaioc oiSajtov avriiitov, i>Q ovk iSiKovai roij q/itrlpowg (j-iiij' kaKiiaiiioviiav) ^Vfifiaxove {Thuc. 1, 86). § a) After a principal verb, either directly negative or denying in the 211. form of interrogation, the negative (both the usual one and the super- fluous one mentioned in the preceding paragraph) is usually put twice by nH ov, the principal negative being repeated : OvStig oloe T iarlv aWtoQ Xiyiov firj ov KarayiXaaTOC dvai (PI. Gorg, 509 ; can help being ridiculous). ^ABvvara ^v (= oii Swarov), 'AdrivaltDv 'Qpw- TTOv txovTbJV, firj ov fisyaXa |3Xo7rr£JV to ■)(b)piov tijv EujSoiav [Thuc. 8, 60). Et aXi)&j) ToDra, t'iq ixri\avfj firj ovxi wavra KaravaXwOrivai tig TO TiBvavai ; [PI. Phced. 72 =: ovSifxia firi^avri). Tiva o'iet airapvij- aeaOai (= ovStig aTrapvrjfftrai) jujj ov\i iirioTaadai to SiKata ; [PI. Gorg. 461.) ("Hrrov li/jii Kai row hepov viidv, I'iqTt ?roX\o5 ikto fifi oil Sio ye iptvytiv. PI, Euthyd. 297. HoXXoD ikia as denial.) OiiSs to \pr\}jMTiZ,iaQai EufluStjjUoe Koi Atovuo-oSfijpoe aTov SiaKwXvfiv oiSlv juij ov irapaXaf^dv rijv (T^fTipav aofiav [PI. Euthyd. 304, hinder not the receiving). EJ yevriaofitOa itrl /Sao-jXet, tI ifiTroSwv juj) oi)\i iravTa to. SiivoTara iraOovrag vfipitofiivovQ aTToOavttv ; {Xen. An. 3, 1, 13.) OuStU" ^^vvaro KpvTTTEiv TO fifj ov\ 7lSib)Q av Koi wfiwv iadiiiv ruv 'SiTrapTiarHiv {Xen. Hell, 3, 3, 7). Rem. Rarely firi alone (04 IwriaovTai /i^ irtiOsaBai t-oij QriPaioiQ, Xen. Hell. 6, 1, 1), except with article prefixed (r6 firi, see § 156, R. 4) ; for here, after a denial, both ri ptfi and rb fifi oi arc used. With the genitive of the infinitive (rov nil) oil is not added. ("Qcre /ii) oii after a principal verb negatived.) b) In the same manner juij ov stands with the infinitive after expressions denoting a disappr'obation of an action thought of (there- fore a demand that it should be forborne), e. g. ^iivov, alaxpov, alu\vvi\ lOTiv, avojjTOv, iroXX?) avoia Iotiv, also a\aj(yvofiai : Haaiv ' ' Afiipig^ilTCi, maintain (in controversy with a difl«rent opinion), e.g. i/tf. t})v i/ifiv Tix"^'!' liiiZovog iyaBov alriav dvai, ipf. )ifi AXridii at 'Kkytiv. § 213j 213.] THE NEGATIONS. 201 alff^vvij Jiv jui) ou (Tvatrovda^Hv {Xen. An. 2, 3, 11). rjoXXtj avom ju^^ [§ oiixi I'v TE Koi raiiTov ■r\yii(jBai to hrX iraat rote aiifiaai koWoc (PL ^^^'^ Conv. 210). (More rarely simple /i4 : Sow 5rpo0u;»o« ovns alaxpiv yiyverai l/is yt /iij iWXeiv, PL Gorg. 458.) c) Mj) ov is also sometimes put (but in Attic prose rarely) with participles, or other accessory definitions denoting an exception from the negative or quasi-nega- tive statement of the principal sentence : A I iroXug iroWai Kal xoXcTral Xa/Seiv at rdv ^iDKsuv /tt) oil xp^^V ""'■ ToXtopici^ (Dem. 19, 123). More usually : Oh y&p rjv TrpaSai iit)Skv /ii) SiSovra Siopa (Thuc. 2, 97). (In the poets here and there with the participle merely in the sense without (doing, &c.) where the preceding prin- cipal verb is negatived : [O^ ydp av fiaKpciv ixvevov auroc, /ii) oitK cxwv n ffv/ijSoXov (^Soph. (Ed. T. 221).' "Hk«£ y&p ov Kivri yi . . . jui) oixi £e'/i' E/iot ipepovaa ti, CEd. C. 361].) Of special negative expressions, which at the same time denote relations of con- S nected sentences and clauses, the following are to be remarked : ( 1 ) oi /tovov, Tiot only oi 2 (oWa), (2) /«} iiri, not to say ; not merely (/ii) Bt-i iStiirtig ne aXX o fikyae ^aaiXivq) ; when a negative follows in the predicate common to both members, jui) on denotes (not to say not, i. e.) not only not (non mode) : 'Awarowpioe jur) 'on SiK&aaaBai aW oii^ iyKaXkaat /lot troXiiriinv (IscB. 10, I) ; the common negative may also be put first \ov — firi ort, aW oitSe') : T& ifioLTiov rf aXKo n, S>v KBKTTjaaif oitStvl av /i^ on irpoiKa Joi'ijs aXV ovii IXottov Trig a^iag \a^iiv (Xen, Mem. I, 6, 11). After a negative clause /irj on is (not to say, i. e.) much less (non modo) : OiiS" avaweiv, iitj on Xkytiv n Svvtia6iu9a (Xen. Conv. 2, 26).' (3) For /lij on, in the sense not only and not only not sometimes, but more rarely, ov^ on is used : Ty t&v 'SicudSv paaiXiif aSi- vara k^iaovaOat ohx on rd iv ry EupwTrj/, aSX oiiS' Iv 'Afft^ (9vog tv Trpbg iv ovk tanv (see J 209 a, R. 1), o, n Svvarbv S/cudatf o/ioyvioiiovovai naaiv avnarijvai (Thuc. 2, 97). Ovx on tTTparriybg 6.W' oiS" o Tvxv dvBpuirog (Dem. 23, 155). (4) In the sense not only not, we have also ovx ojruig : Ovx oiriog ti votqaaQ, avff Stv iH ljra9te, d^ioXg riiidg AiroTrkfiij/aoQat, dW airoiroptvon'tvovg ^fiag ovSk KaravXiffBijvai, ogov dvva- aai, kiriTpkiTiie (Xen. An. 7, 7, 8). Rem. For particular constructions of the negative particles with adverbs of time or of place (e. g. ouTrort, oSttw, oviclri, &c.), or with words which serve for transition, or to give a certain emphasis to the denial (e. g. ov yap, oi ydp adversative member the affirmative notion contained in them (wavrtg, iKaarog, ,,' keXew&i, &C.) is understood. Alyowui nveg, on oiSilg iiciiv SiKaiog, 6XK''vwi ivav-^ i-.' Spiag ^ yilpiag v nvog aWijg iaOirtiag i/zsyfi to diiKiiv (PI. Rep. 2, 366).' ' ]} But see Schneidewin in I. and on v. 13.] * Also (with a single noun) : fiij ri ye ('AKpot irtrnwraJ rocrovroi oiic dv ykvoivro, firi n Jr) pdaiXtig yc, PI. Pol. 292). ' 'A/iiKriaag, iSvircp ol woXXoi (viz. iirifieKovvTai), xpqjuanir/tov rt xal oiKofo/iia; icul BTpaTtfymv (PI. Apol. 36). 203 PART II. CHAP. IX. [§ 314. CHAPTER IX. Certain particular Irregularities of Construction. (appendix to the first and second parts.) § {The Verb understood.) In co-ordinate connected sentences, or in 314. accessory sentences of the same kind which mutually correspond, the verb is often understood, to he supplied in one sentence from the other : Su (itv rifirit;, rifitii; Ss rirrvxiaQ In-tdvjuov/icv. OitBi rauro ot irapayevofifvoi iravra, TrXrjv to Kad' iavrbv SKaarog ailSiv (Thuc. 7, 44). Ikovov tovto [loi TCKftripiov, oTi WQ aXridb)^ fiot evvovg tl, koj juifvj liri yE olog irappTfaiatitaOai, avrog ts 0^? koi 6 Xoyog, ov oXiyov irpoTipov sXeyeg, ofioXoyd aoi {PL Gorg. 487). Rem. I. Sometimes merely the infinitive of the preceding verb is understood after a new verb : T^ aiiry iSif iicitva re el^ov ol 'ABtivatoi Kai ri ivddSe vvv tu- puvrai (Thuc. 6, 76). OSre iraaxovrcQ Kasbv diSiv ovti /liXXovreg (Isocr. Panath. 103). Rem. 2. In some constructions, especially where the opposition between the other clauses of the sentence makes it plain how the words must be connected) the principal verb may be understood from the leading sentence in the accessory sentence (even the infinitive or participle, as in }} 177, 178, may be thus under- stood from the verb finite in the principal sentence), rarely vice versa, i. e. from the accessory in the principal sentence: 'Agytioi iroXsfiovcri ftkv, k^ oi^Trcp Ttjv iroXiv oUovffi, Trpig Tovg ofiipovg, w^Trep AaK^Satfiovioi' rotrovrov Sk Siaf'tpovaiv^ oaov kKtivot flip irpbg iJTTovg aiiT&v, oirot Si vpbg Kptirrovg (J[socr. Phil. 51). , see 105 b, R.) Rem. 1. In the first or second person lifii is rarely omitted, viz. in quite simple principal sentences : Zoi oix oXiyoi tuv vsuv TrXijirid^avin, Kai Sixaiwe' a^ioq ycLp rd T aXXa Kai yiu>iiiTpias 'iviKa {PI. Theeet. 143,_/br thou art worthy). (V/ith the adjective eVot/uoc it occurs more frequently : KtKTiov, IjreiJi} Kai av tVoi/aos okoXow- e&v, PI. Pol. 277.) Rem. 2. The subjunctive third person singular y is now and then omitted after, the relative with av : Tlapd. rovroiv KOftii^ovTai, Stv av aijToXg XP^*" {PI. Pep. 2, 870). b) Other verbs are omitted only in proverbs and similar expressions, where the object or some other accompanying definition points to the verb to be supplied : yXavK de 'A9rivas {dynv). 'Avoi ol voTaitoi. Also a verb denoting to do, or to be done, to happen, is omitted in certain frequent forms of interrogation with ri, e. g. 'A\\ci ri ; (/SovXci iroiS), and especially Ti Se, U — ; as also an imperative which denotes iii general an action or speech, with /ii) ovrio, /lii /tot oiiriii, and vrith /tr] /tot with an accusative {§ 32). (M^, Trpos o^ yovdriav, § 77, 3 d.) Rem. 1. Especially note the omission of the notions of doing, or being done, with ovShv dXXo ij (Ovf (pa/iiv piavBaviiv, oiliv aXXo ^ tiva/ti/tvijo'icoi'rai, PI. Phied. 76), whence this expression is sometimes used quite adverbially in the sense onlu, merely. (Ti dWo j; — , what else than — .* 'AXXo Tiij — dXXo rt — , see § 1 99 b.) Rem. 2. Quite distinct from the ellipsis of a single word in definite form, in the Greek as in other languages, are the phrases (derived from the language of common life) in which originally an entire clause of the thought present to the mind is omitted, but intimated by a single particle referring to it, or by some 204 PART II. CHAP. IX. [§ 216. [§ other word, or by the general form of the speech ; as in Greek by tA Si (§ 188, 215.] R. 7)j by the use of oKXd in the beginning of a speech, or in certain construc- tions with other particles (oi ydp aWa, &c.), by uiq with the indicative future in replies with assurance ('Qc ovns i/x^i TifS' vypdv Bijaci Kovtv, Eur. Phcen. 1664; think, sat/, do, what thou wilt i for — ), &Q. Of such ellipses the Lexicon must supply the explanation. § (Anacoluthia.) Anacolutha, or sentences which deviate from the 216. strict continuation, iri regular grammatical connexion, of the form in which they set out, are not rare in the Greek authors, though more frequent and harsh in certain authors who either (as Plato) imitate the freedom of oral discourse, or (as Thucydides) write, on the whole, in an embarrassed and perplexed style. They are caused, partly, by the circumstance, that instead of the form for which the beginning was calculated, in the further progress of the sentence, some other form is chosen as being more convenient and more impressive, or is induced through the use of other expressions ; partly, by the inter- vention of side-remarks and parentheses, especially when these are carried to a greater length than usual, whereby the connexion of the discourse is obscured, or its continuation in the same form rendered difScult. Where the anacoluthon is caused in this last way, i. e. by an interruption through interposed matter, the last part is often attached to what goes before by repetition of some words from the beginning, or by repetition, in a different grammatical form, of what has been already said — often, at the same time, by the particles ovv {then ; as I was saying), 8^ [well then) or 81, sometimes not so. '£«■£[ 8e Oopvjiov re yaOero Sevo0(uv icai, atiixaivovTtov aXXriXoiQ riov . nepl ^evdriv, KaTi/xaOiv, on tovtov cveko to. trvpa KCKavfiiva eijj ti^ '2iiv6y Trpo Twv irpo(pvXaKii)v, oirwg .ol fxiv fvXaKcg juij opi^vTo, iv ti^ aKOTti ovTig, oi Si irpogwvreg fxt) XavBavoisv, oXXo Sia to (j>Mg Kora^a- viXg tiiv — , kireX S' yaOiro, irQOirifnTii tov ipfitivia ktX. [Xen, An. 7,* 2, 18 sqq. Repetition without change, merely because of the nume- rous interposed clauses. The St of the commencement repeated with it.') Ta 8' av TWV arpaTiwribv ottots Evflujuoijutjv oti twv fiiv ayaOwv wavTixiv ovSsvog v/uv /ueteij}, el fir} irpiaifiida, otov S' wvtitrofiBOa, ySaiv tTi oXiyovg E^ovrac, aXXoie Ss irwg Tropit^taOai to EJrirjjSEia fj wvov/xi- vovg, BpKOvg fjSij KaTsxovTug rifiag, — tout ovv Xoyi^ofievog ivioTS Tag CTirov8ag juaXXov e^oJ3ouju>)v rj vvv tov itoXejuov {Xen. An. 3, 1, 20, Repetition with change, and o5v). Tawra te e5 Xiyeig, w "Siinfiia, Koi Tag irpwTag viroQiatig, koi A iriaTcu vfuv tlaiv, ojuwc ETiffKEirr^ai ' Repetition of a conjunction alone : AiSoiKa, nil, av llita% iidBui/iiv apyol Zrjv Kal kv ci(p66voig j3ioTivEiv xai MiiSiav Si Kai Utpawv KaXaXg re Kai fiiyoKaiQ yvvaiiXv ojuXiiv, /itj uigfftp 01 AuToijiayoi. lvriKa9iiiii9a rlje oUaSi oSov (^Xen. An. 3, 2, 25). § 216.] ELLIPSIS. ANACOLUTHIA. 205' o-a^eirrEpov [PI. Phmd. 107. Plato began as if he meant to say Im- [§^ (TKETTTsov, but then he has been led to say IttuiKiTtTiai, because of the ^'®'-' clause et kvu. iriaral Aaiv), BouXo/iEvop St Kvpoc KOTatricoTrov rtvo irifxxf/ai Ijrt AvSiag koi fjiaduv 6,ti irparTOi 6 'Aaavpiog, sSo^bv ovt^ Ittit^Seioc sivai 'Apaairag iXdnv iiri tovto {Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 31).' KaKwv c a'lTiov (j>dvai Oiov rivi ytjvsaOai, ayaSov ovra, SiafiaxETiov iravA rpoTTb) firi TE Tiva XeyEjv ravra iv ry avrov ituXei, tl /uIXXei EuVoju^o-taflat, jui) TE Tiva oKovHv (PL Rep. 2, 380 ; properly (pavai ought to have been followed merely by ouk eoteov, or a similar expression, but the whole is repeated and its sense developed more in detail). Kara vow v OS 6 Kvpog, WQ iv fiiy avri^ e'X'"' "' arpaTiwrai npog to Bvvaadai arpa- TKOTlKoilQ TTOVOUC ipois, ktX,, we should expect ovre Tolg ^pijffroie roig Trovi/poij or 216.] some similar form). In this manner it is not uncommon for the co-ordinate con- nexion of tivo members to be broken, which members should belong to a preceding principal sentence, and then the second member enters as a principal sentence (sometimes with no particular inducement in the connexion of the sentence, but with the view of adding something to the second member, or to give it an easier form) ; especially in this manner after a circumstance denoted by a participle the second member follows as verbum fimtum : Fivoiiivtie iKsXijiriaf i^kx^riaav roiotde \6yot airo ri aXXwv, t&v fikv iriaTevdvrtov tci irepi tiiq ffrparsiag Tfjg Tijjv*A9rjvai(t}Vf T&v Sk ra ivavria \iy6vTiav, Kai ''EpjiOKpartiQ 6 "Epituvog irapt\9(iiv aiiroXg iXiye Kal irapyvii ToiaSc {Thuc. 6, 32 ; we should expect airo rt oKKiitv — Kai a0' 'Ep/io- Kpdrovg roC'Ep/iiKVOs). 'Ewci irapeaKivdZtro ^5i) K5poe £ imiliv, irapijv o FaSarag dWa re StSpa woWd Kai iravTola ^kpujv Kai dytov Kai 'iTTirovg S' rjye TroWouf, d^iXoiiivog Tuiv eavTov iinrkoiv (Xen. Cyr, 5, 4, 29). Oi Botuiroi iarpdrtvaav iiri ri ^riXiov Kai vpogijiaKov Tip Ttixi-Oftan, oKKif Tt Tpo-Kif vtipdaavTig Kai firixav^v irpogtiyayov, jJTrep ilXtv avro, ToidvSi (Thud, 100). Oi 'AOrivaloi voaip iTTuKovro ear' dfi^onpa, rijg rt &pag row iviavrov ravTitS ovaitg, Iv y dnBtvovaiv dvBpiaTtoi, fidXtaTUf Kai rb \(j}pinv iifia, kv ip kaTpaTOiredtiovro, iXiadeg Kai x^XtTtbv rjv (jTkuc, 7, 47 = «ai Tov xwpiou — kXiiSovg ovTog). (Often in poets, e.g. SvgxXaiv'u} r a/top- 0off dftftdrbiv T dirb i^ovov ffraXayfioi ffrjv KaTSffTaZov yevvv, Eur^ Hec, 240, and in Herodotus.) (Ei^poviov v\og o5e eariv, dvSp6g, olov Kai av Tovrov Striyel, Kai dXXtttg tiSoKifiov Kai ^svToi Kai oiiffiav fidXa 9roXX}}v KareXtirEV, PI. Tkeest. 144 =: KaraXmovTog. Transition from an adjective to an independent sentence.)' Some- times, where a leading term common to both members precedes them both, the connexion is disturbed by the insertion of a new leading term instead of this in the second member: Oi AaKiSaifiopioi Ig rf/v 'P6Sov Tr)v yvia/iriv tJ^ov ttXhv, kXni- KovTeg VTjtrSv T€ oijK dSvvarov Kai vav^aTiav TrX^dcc Kai 'jreZip TrpogdKtaOat, Kai tifia riyovfievoi airoi Svvaroi eata9ai, TKTaa^kpvriv fly airovvTeg ^pq^ara, rpiipnv rds vavg (Thuc, 8, 44 ! where it might have been simply said : IXirtJovrte vijaSv rt irpogditaQai Kai airoi Svvaroi laiaOai. So frequently in Thucydides. Often the new leading term is necessary, so that the partition by re — xai or iiiv — Si ought properly to have been applied to the two leading terms, not to the accessory definitions, e. g. here eXn-iJovrt'f rt — xai a/ta ijyov^Evot. Hence re seems to be transposed.) 'Ev ry iarepaif iKKXiiaif iitriyvuiaav 'AOrivalot {the Atheniang changed their mind and determined; § 210, R. 1), KepKvpaioig ^vjiitaxiav fikv p-ii jrotiy- aauQai (Jo make indeed no public offensive and defenwie alliance with the C), iSere * Toig aiiToig kxSpoig Kal piXovg vofiiJ^tiv (ei ydp Itti KopivGov iKeXivdv a^iaiv oi EcpKi/paToi ivjiirXiiv, IXvovt av airoig ax irpbg lltXonovvinaiovg airovSai'^ iiri- /lax'^av Sk InoiljaavTO, ry aXXi/Xoiv fioriduv (Thuc, 1, 44). Rem. 2. Sometimes an anacoluthon is caused by the circumstance that the writer, as he proceeds, has in his thoughts an expression, the sense of which is contained in what goes before, though the expression itself is not there used, and continues the passage conformably with this (the construction ■Trpbg rb atifiaivd/uvov, according to the thing signified, not according to the words, especially in poets and in complicated prose) : Kai jrepi niXoi' iir' dn^orkpuv Kurd Kpdrog iTroXc/teTro. 'A BrivaZoi piiv SvoXv vioiv IvavHaiv dil ti)v vtjaov TrepnrXkovTtg Trjg tifikpag (rijg SI ' Oi Kv/ipaxot 'Opxo^evov kiroXwpKovv, ^ovXdficvoi aXXuig tc irpogytvlaOai a^iai Kai bftripot iK Trjg 'ApxaSiag r)aav aiiToBi vrrb AaKiSai/toviuiv Kilntvoi (TAuc. 5, 61, = Kai on tjaav). § 216.] ELLIPSIS. ANACOLUTHIA. 207 vvKTig Uirattai nept^pixovv)' liiXoiTovvriatot S' iv ry 'fiwiipif (rrparoirEc^cvo/iEvot [§ Kai 7rpo£^oXd£ irowvfiivoi rif Tiixa (Thuc. 4, 23 ; as if d/i^orcpoc iiroXsftow preceded). 21G.] Kai Toiq I!»paKovffioc£ KorairXjj^if oA/c 6Xiyi) iyiviro, li iripaQ uriSkv iarai aijiiai row KtvSitvov* opwvTtQ QVT£ 5«i Tijv AiKtXiiav TEix^ZofJtkvrjv oiSiv rjaffov OTparbv "laov Tt^ TrpoTsptp liTfXijXvdora ttjv n rdiv ' AQi\vaiitiv Suvafiiv Travraj^offe woXX^v tpaivopsvrjv (TTiac. 7, 42). 'H otfiioyr) tie tov IlcipaiuJc SiA tSv jUOKpuv reixwy ^C «<"■« JiqKEV, o j'rtpoj T^i Irlp^ irapayylXXwi/ (i'gr' iKJtvijc rqc vtiKTos oiStlg iicoi^^d);, oi /tovov roiie dwoX(iiXg ovTi yrjg Trigs' civoaiip putaropt (Soph. (Ed. R. 3S0, as if it had first been said ivvkitui trot, I command thee, not ai, I command that ihou). Rem. 3. Now and then an interchange takes place between a . remark to a leading sentence inserted with ug, and a principal sentence with object-sentence annexed : 'Qg kyoi, iv6 tov avTopaTOv x^^S ^KOVTog leXoiov, iJKOvaa rivog, on EXEavfpof o ix BvZavTiov appooT^g jue'XXei ^^av TrXoTa e^oiv Kai rptiiptig (Xen. An. 6, 2, 18 ^ either 'Qj — iJKovira nvog, K\cavSpog piWii — , or'HKovira rivog, on — without oif). PART III. THE ORDER AND POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. § a) The position of words in Greek, as in Latin, is, in detail, less 217. tied down to fixed and definite rules than in English and other (431, modern languages, and rests, in great measure, on the emphasis sqq-) which is meant to be laid ofa the several words according to the sense of the passage, and at the same time on the consideration of euphony. The simplest order is, that the subject, with all that belongs to it, stands first, and then the predicate, viz. either the verb last, with all remaining definitions (object, &c.) between, or the verb first, and then the other definitions : TicFcra^ipvri^ SiafiaXXti Kvpov irpoe Tov aSi\(p6v. These definitions are arranged among themselves according to their importance and their connexion with the verb. Interrogative sentences begin with the interrogative pronominal word or particle, accessory sentences with the conjunction or the relative word. b) For the sake of emphasis, a deviation from the simple order of the words takes place, such that the word which expresses the most important notion is advanced to the beginning, or sometimes kept * back to the end of the sentence : ^EirriyayovTo 8e roiig QrifiaiovQ kui ave'iji^av rag irvXag nXaraiitov dvopsg, NoukXc^SiiC re koi ot /jiet aiirov [Thuc. 2, 2). napeo-KEua^ovro 8s koi oi AaKtSainovioi [Thuc. 2,7). Kindred or opposed terms are made to stand out prominently by juxta-position. Rem. 1. One or more words conveying a notion on which there is a special emphasis may also stand before the interrogative word, as also before a relative which refers to a demonstrative following, and before a conjunction if the subordi- nate sentence begins the period : Depi Si tov iroKifiov ri v/iiv SoKtl ; Tlipl Si row 5ro\t//o« a IXtyii, ofioXoyiS dXijSq dvai. Ot Si tiSv ' Xpyiiuiv dvSpeg, aKOvaavTtg, evuSi) iviiviyKav Tovg \6yovg ig re Tcig apx^g Kairbv Srjfiov, iipijipiaavro 'Apyiioi Kai AvSpag iiKovTo SioStKa {Thuc. 5, 28). But in prose the verb may never stand before the relative or conjunction. § 2] 7-319.] ORDER AND POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 209 Rem. 2. Between two connected words, sometimes a third is inserted which is [§ less prominent, or which belongs at the same time to both : Aid ti)v Aaptiov 217-] 7-e\£ur))v Kal 'Apratipiov. a) A genitive or an adjective to a substantive without article § Stands first with some emphasis, and because of the opposition : 218. ivZwvo^ avrip, ttiq irarplBo^ awT^p, otherwise usually afterwards : avjjp ayaOo^. For the order of the adjectives, of the genitive, and other additions to substantives with the article, see the doctrine of the article (Part I. Chap. II.). Sometimes the definitions belonging to a substantive are detached from it by the circumstance, that the substantive itself, or its definitions, are drawn off", with emphasis, to the beginning or end of the sentence, provided no obscurity or ambiguity is thereby occasioned, especially with the verb in the middle place : 'Epw, a urapa (70(pwTaTii)v jjKoucra ttote avSpwv koi ifnru- poTUTwv. TovTiov Ttjv avopojv ovos Ta ovofiara olSa. (Tulv ^p^apav Tivkg iiririuiv. Xen. An. 2, 5, 32. Tuv d^' 'HpaicXiov; rivi ire^WKorwv. Jsocr. Phil. 76. Other peculiarities of position in the partitive genitive may be seen in § 50 a, R.) b) Adverbs belonging to the verb stand either next to it (before it, if it closes the sentence), or, in case of special emphasis, in the beginning or at the end of the sen- tence ; sometimes they are inserted without emphasis between other accessory definitions which are made prominent. Adverbs belonging to adjectives usually stand before them ; adverbs of degree, and oBrw, rarely stand after them (Trcijivitwe ovTbig, PL, /SfXriiDV ttoXw, varipov ov iroXX^J, yivvdiog travv, KoKoq \iav. PI.} (MaXa yi Tivig 6\iyot, PI. Rep. 7, 531. MdXo Kal avSpig dXici/ioi, Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 37.) c) On the placing of prepositions, see § 80. a) The indefinite pronoun ri? and the indefinite correlative adjec- § tives (iroioe, Trodoc) and adverbs {irwe, &c.) can never begin a sentence. 219. b) The particles apa, av, Se, Sj'j, yap, julv, juijv, vvv, ovv, ri, rol, Tolvvv, which in various ways connect sentences, form transitions, or give prominence to particular notions, never stand at the beginning of a sentence, but always after pne or more words, to which, in part, they closely adhere ; so av. See the Lexicon [and Appendix], and on Si, Tt, fiiv, § 185, R. 4, and § 188, R. 1 ; on the position of av, § 139. So 7E always after the word to which it gives prominence (limiting and restrictive), or after the first of several, when it thus belongs to a set of words taken together (koto yt tov aov \6yov, PL Gorg. 471 : liinp yt, & tXe, aSiKog, PI. ibid.). Rem. But in the parenthetic insertion of ^ijjii (see e) the words mentioned under a and b are sometimes put first, the interposed matter coalescing, so to say, with the rest of the sentence : Ti ovv, av tpaiti 6 \6yoe. In iitwrug ; (PI. Phted. 87.) 'B5o?£, wou ^i)rifil is put, when a person's own words are reported, ■■' by preference after one or more words of the speech reported : Kai 6 'SiWKpaTjfQ, "Iva Toivvv, ilf5o\ov y, bpiaari fioi, JutXP' TToawv ETwv Set vofii!^eiv viovg ilvai tovq avOpwTrovc [Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 35. More rarely: Kal 6 SwKparjje a^ij" "Iva — , for ETir£v""Iva — ). When to the (priiii thus used its subject is given, this stands by preference after it : T^ ovv, tfti 6 SwKparije, Tro(i|T£ov trot SokeT ; more rarely 6 Sai/cjoarrje £0»j- (Separated : Ei Se /ifj ravry yt, E^T), Tre'idi}, u) ^ifin'ia, 6 SwKjoarJjCj aKtipai, iav rrjSl Trp trot (TK07roiijUEv avvSo^y. PL Pfusd. 73.) Rem. The position of the words in poetry has various freedoms for which no rules can be given in this place. § In Greek, as in Latin, accessory sentences of every kind may be 220. inserted into every principal sentence, by which means, as also by (■*44, the position of the relative clauses before the demonstrative, a mani- ' fold and diversified variety is obtained in the structure of the period : in which the main thing to be considered is, that every accessory sentence should be inserted in its proper place, i. e. precisely where- the thought or statement contained in it naturally presents itself to one's mind, and, especially in the historical style, that the succession of time and the causal connexion of the several parts of the action and of the circumstances, should be carefully observed. Rem. When a dependent sentence, especially interrogative, is drawn to the beginning, either by a pronoun referring to what goes before, or by the emphasis and an antithesis, either the whole leading sentence, if it be short, or some words of it, may be inserted before the interrogative word or the conjunction : Td tQv TToXefiitav, ffa^toQ, oTTtoQ £xci, ^p<S' ug, not so too, not so either, stands on the same footing with Kai tiig, oiSi yap, neque enim, with Kai yap, etenim, oiSi jiiv oiSi, neque vera etiam, with koI jitiv xai, et vero etiam, ovSi yip ovSi,for also not, or for not even, with /cat ytlp /cat. The particle sometimes puts the things on a par (also not), sometimes exalts the latter (not even), eb-ei oiSk lotKi, because it is also not seemly (therefore must ii also not be). Td ydp irEWpw/ilv' oiS' virtpPairiv iror' av, Eur. Ion. 1388, that which is fated for me can I also not escape. OiSi vv rovirtp feiaaro, II. 24, 235, not even him did he spare ; obS' ovap, not even in a dream. OiSi ydp oiSi Tig §230—232.] AB. MEN. MHN. 215 aXKoe, Od. 8, 82, etenim ne alim quidem, OiSk fiiv oiSs Tpfiof iyfivopag daa "EBrwp C§ iUeiv, II. 10, 299. Not, however, the T. either (any more than the others) — . 228.] Si^ot the Trojans moreover (either) did JS. silver to sleep. /lev, on the one hand, indeed. x. This particle, bearing the same relation to the first numeral {ptic) pia, that Ik 230. bears to the second and to the Sue in oiSeie (not oiS" tig) means therefore in t}ie first place, and a fiiv is usually followed by a corresponding ik. But as the it has not always a preceding fiiv, so nkv not always a following U. This, however, is always implied in the thought, 'bikorijiiq, /tkv kvkx^rai, itiv(f KaK(f, Eur. Iph. A. 527, ambi- tion indeed (in the first place, as far as that goes) he is liable to (the suppressed opposition being, but what of the rest, hd what then ?) Kai bitodiv vore ravrriv rijv kiriawfiiav VKa^eg rb fiaviKhq KoKiiaQai, oix oWo tyiaye' iv fikv ydp rolj Xoyoij &el ToiovTOQ il, for in your discourse (to begin with that, ^ it must be owned, at any rate), &c. (/"/.) Aeyerat Si Kai oil 6 \Syog, 4/iOi /tiv oi TriBavog, Hdt. 3, 3, to me for my part (but what others may think I Itnow not). Oirot Jj) SijiiKrai, aWd Soml fikv fioi ijiiiv Ttiiitpov, PI. Crilo, 43 D, it seems to me, for my part. So ol/tat fkv, Tiyov/iai n'ev, SokH fikv, oiiK olSa fikv. Uapcykvov /liv ry /lax?) ^^- Charm. 168 C, 1/ou were present surely (or, I suppose) — ? (suppressed:, but if not, I have no more to say). Rem. In Homer and Ionic, ftkv is frequently used in the same sense as the cognate form fitjv, /lav, § 231 : in the later dialectSi only so in the combinations likvroi, /ikv oZv, fikv Sr^. fiTiv Dor., and Ep. fiav. § 231 This particle, cognate with ixkv, invblves the ?ame primary notion " first and fore- ' most," " to begin with," but more strongly expressed, as here the whole statement stops at the /ikv, as if the one thing were all : it insists upon one thing (the first) to the exclusion of the rest. Hence it is confirmative and concessive, and also oppo- sitive and adversative (as Lat. vero). Accordingly, it stands in hortatory addresses and exclamations : ei S" dye iiriv, ntipriaai, but come now, do' try (in the first place, now, for once) ; 'iirov firjv, do' follow : in questions, Tivog jir^v svixa fiavOdvETe To^fwtiv ; to what end (let me ask you one thing) do' you learn — ? especially ri /liiv ; thus, 01 rb vapavav riSovdg ov ^aaiv elvat. " ri firiv j" i. e. r'l firjv aWo ^aaiv airig iivai ; what else, I pray (for one thing), do they affirm them to be f 'Opag ovv iKiivtiv ti)v i^ri\oTaTt]v irXaravov ; " ri fiifv ;" PI. Phil. 44, what else, I pray, do I but see it ? = to be sure I do : in argumentative assertions with latent interrogation, au^pwv iirjv (I suppose I may assert this one thing) o yt roioCroj xal oiSafiy ^iKoxpviiaTog, PL Rep. 485, and adversatively, ravr iiriiiKiig jikv iariv vtto n droira, ijjXoJ iiijv — , this is indeed somewhat strange ; it shows, however — . oh /if/v eptlg ye, but then surely you don't mean to say — : in asseverations, wSt y&p tUptu), Kai firiv TeriXiafikvov earai, and be sure of one thing ^ assuredly ; so ^ iiyv, the usual formula of swearing, kvofivvia Boi, tj [irjv kyii ^oiXiaBai, verily and truly (for one thing, come what will) : in announcing the coming of a new person : oSt ni)v A'liiuiv, here, however, comes H. I (The notion however, which often renders fifiv, is given by the suppressed opposi- tion, " for one thing, however it may be with the rest," or the like.) Kai jiiiv, Kai /itiv ys, the Kai adverbial. Kai n^v ■x&ptv y av a,%iav \a^oig iitov (well, & be sure of one thing — ) : " Kai fir'/v iioKwra row/ d0uco/t))>', oirmg — " (well, sure 232, enough — ), Soph. CEd. T. 1004, 5. Adversatively : fxt6a ifi ^opriov. 'eirii Trpofltijitel, XP'I X'y"''- . araue Sfi, well then, hear, oiada Sri rb Trav, there thou knowest the whole, aviiircixipov towvv jwi Tiva. "Xa/3) Si& xpovov irpov^atve fiot, Soph. Ant. 58, 035 denoting the slowness of the passage of time. In conclusions : Ik Stj rovTiav — ,from this then it follows (comp. firiv of the steps of an argument). In resumption after interruption : kv roirif Ji} av ng ytvo/iei/oe, PI. Men. 240, well then (to come back at last to that point) if one be in — . Both uses are exemplified in Sii Jj) (of course then it is necessary) jrpfoTipov ttui; airoKpivtaSai. StlHOKpaTia Si] (Well then — ). In enumerations, denoting the accession of some weightier consideration, iyicta xal iaxvt k"' koXXoj kuI ttXovtos Sii (denique), PI. Men, 87 : so Kai rb Srj fxiywrov : or something special, aXXos re Kai Sr) Kai — . cat Sri, in replies : j8Xei//oi/ kcltui. " Kai Sri /SXIttw," well, I am' looking (that X already) : ravra Sri, there, 'lis done ! in the supposition of a fictitious case, Kai Sr) oQg Ti9vaai, well, they are dead (suppose it). jxijv and ^ij exclude each other, therefore this combination never occurs in good authors ; but fiiv Sri is frequent, especially in dismissing a consideration : cTev rd fiiv Sri toZ' Ixeic, the how' thou hast (enough of that), roiavra jxkv Sri rav-a, hcec hactenus. dXX' ijXdc fiiv Sri tovto tovvhSoq rax av i^pyy fiiaaOiv, but in fact — or, it may he enough to say that (one consideration, /iev, and there an end, Sii). Hence liiv Sri approaches nearly to iiiiv, and Plato renders Homer's Kai ii))v lavraXov dgiiSov by Kai /liv S^ xai tavraXov yi tigilSov, Prot. 315, and moreover (the enumeration begun with piv cut short by Sfi). So oii pev Sri Xtjiu, Soph. El. 103 = oi pr)v Xijiio. jSairtXiKot piv dvSpig, oi piv Ji; imarfipovig ye (where Stallb. would read pivroi for piv Sr'i), PI. Phced. 266. Kai piv Sy x"-^^'""'" iirtx^tpovptv, PI. Pol. 287 (jporro etiam). dv jiiv Sr) Kai uiroTTip, PI. Lys. 89, jam si adeo, pdXiara piv Sri 0" ^ori, or, and that one consideration enough) — tTrttra pivroi (but then), Soph. Phil. 330. SiJTa. S This more emphatic form of S-q (comp. lireiTa from l!rei, rjjviKoSra from ri/viKa), not 237. found in Hom. and Dor., rare in Herodot., is frequent in Attic, where it accom- panies all the parts of speech. In replies : ^vp^oXata Si Xiyetg Kotvuivtjpara, rj ri aXXo; " KoivnyvrjpaTa S^ra" (just so, that is the very thing !), PI. Sep. 1 , 333. In earnest iterations : o'lKTtipt S" fipdg . . . " oUreipe SiJTa," yes, do' pity, Eur. El. 678. iii. " I'ui Srjra," (it is') alas ! indeed. Soph. (Ed. 541. titg /i arruXeaag 6avuiv. dmoXeaag Sfjr, how hast thou undone me ! ' The particle belongs to the whole sentence, but attaches itself to pova. So in Msch. Eum. 3. (First Gsea, and after her, Themis) fl Sfi (ut satis constat') rb ptirpbg Sivnpa roS' 'iZero pavrtXov, it belongs to the sentence as a whole, but more closely to rd prirpoQ. Fully expressed, the meaning is : " who succeeded to the oracle which — every body knows that — was her mother's before her, and to which therefore — as everybody must see — she had the fullest right." Muller on the Eum. § 91, n. 218 ' APPENDIX. AAI. AHGEN. AHHOYeEN. GHN. [§ 338 243. [§ yes, undone indeed! Soph. El. 1155. axoirti SiJTa, only look! In wishes: iiiroKmo 237.] Srjra, oh that thou mightest but perish! In questions: Tid^r'tiiriidciv — ; quid turn demum dicetis, quum — ? ri Sjjra kXqUiq ; what- are' you weeping for? rig dpa pvairai, rig ap' kirapKeati BsSv ?) 6tav ; Trorlpa diJT' lyu voTnriaui ^perr] Saifiovav ; am I then (and what avails that) ? Msch. Sept. 93. oLtjQa S^ra ys ; thou dost', surely, know ? ySria9a ■y&p S^r, I suppose you knew (ironically). ^ Sfira, yes, verily, oi drjra, minime vero. /i^ SiJTa Spaayg ravra, only not this ! ore SiJTa, juSt when, xal dijr tToX/iag, and, forsooth, you had the audacity. Soph. Ant. 445. § Sai (Attic). 338. This particle occurs only in the combination ri Sai ; TrCig Sai ; and is used in forcible transitions, with indignation, wonder, or other emotions : what then ? how so ? ri Sai raWa ; what then say you to the rest? It occurs only in the familiar Attic style. § — Sf, —Btv. 339. The first only as a sufiix in ci0e, " would that," " if but" = in this (or, in that) case. The second as a suffix of case, oipavoBev, from heaven, IvrivBev, thence, &c. : hence, in composition with lii, SrjBsv. This particle (not used by Hom.), orig(inally ^from that (as the terminus a quo) is almost always ironical (:= something which all the world acknowledges, to set out \i/il\i Y), forsooth, in pretence, of course (derisively). roBro ro ayog ol AaKtSainivioi iXavvtiv EKsXtvov^ StjBev toIq BtoXg irp&Tov rifitopovvTEg, lOhuc. 1, 127. iag eKTreipevybig Toig ixSpovg, oi /itv . ■ . ^BeXriaav airoXlo-oi SijBtv (as he pretended), Hdt. 1,11. Trjg iKtivog ovSaiid ^Xaarag i^iiva, S^Btv ovSkv laropSiv, Soph. TV. 381. ^ SiiTTovBep," 240. See above, Sri rig, and Sriirov, under ttok : hence this (Attic) particle originally = from that in anywise, or, surely ; therefore, / should hope, or, surely, kyii Si, jjv 'iiririvtiv ixdBiMi, orav [ikv ettI tov 'iirirov yEvta^ai, Tci tov iinroKEvravpov SifTrovBEV Siairpd- ^ojjai, Xen. Cyr, 4, 3, 20. 'lardvai ydp iikaTai SijirovBiv airif, Dem. oSre ydp jiayEipif ftaxaipag oiStv iar' o^tXoe SriirovBiv, i'/Ttg jiri re/jvti, PI. 241. This stronger form of B'ev (§ 239) is Homeric and Doric (Sicilian). In Hom,^ always ironical, = Stittov, especially with ^ oi, ov /iev Br)v — yt, yet surely, yet surely at least not. In Theocritus iyi) Bijv, I for my part, ri Brjv, thou for thy part, and = denique. iri'ipq, Bt]v iravra TeXcirai, Adoniaz. 63. § V^V- 343. As Sri to S'e, so is rjSt] to riSk (which answers to ^(iev, as on the one hand, so on the other hand).^ It denotes, therefore, the absence of an interval, chiefly with refer- ence to time, this (that) instant, immediately. (a) As temporal particle, it answers to Lat. jam, now, in the senses, forthwith, henceforth, already, at last, still, the now being either that of the speaker, or of the person, &c. spoken of, not, as vvv, simply " at this present time." Thus ^^ij awijXBEv, he went away just now; rjlri aKE\ri\v0EV, is just gone; ^Srj dvEXEvaETai, will go directly. ' The I)" := as, so, not ri, verily, but the original of ^, or, than, whence also ^iiog and riire, when. § 343—246.] HAH. NtN. NH, NAI, MA. H. 219 vvv tjSti, ^5»; vvv, now this instant, voiriaag Si rovTO, t& &\\a ifJij Jjpxero StotxeXv, [§ anon, without more ado, Xen. Hell. 7, ], 12. q^Jij ouk Axajxtv, we were not t/et (ere- 242.] while) able; q^q oix i'?o/iev, we shall henceforth not (or, no more) be able, \6yai (a) tKiyov,just now : vvv Sri "Kiyia or Xe^oi, nunc cum maxime, at this very time. vvv, igitur, jam vero, further serves to denote transition or argument : /i^ vvv ari/ta Biovg, then do not — , Soph. Aj. 1108. ti vvv IviaTw, if then thou knowest. Soph. Phil. 1224. In the formula of adjuration : irp6c vvv ai yovarav, irpoe vvv 6eSv, now by — . This vvv is reduced to an enclitic (our unemphatic " now ") ; but, as a single & word, only in the poets ; in Ionic prose jiivvvv, in Attic roivvv. Homer has it, 044 e.g. Sevpo vvv, hither then, II. 23, 485.^ Connected, if not identical, with enclit. vvv is the enclit. w of Homer, used in asseveration with somewhat of irony : oi vv t aoiSoi airtoi, nempe, sdUcet, Od. 1, 348. BvriTbQ Sk vv Kai ai rkrvKai, but I suppose, II. 16, 622. So iirtl vv, q pa vv, fijj vv roi, ov vv Ti. Also Kai vv Kiv in apodosis with prset. indie, to an hypothesis also with praet. indie, and doubtless — . In questions : ri vv 01 roirov wSvaao, Ze5, Od. 1, 62, why art' thou — .* n vv a frpe^ow, //. 1, 414, why did' I — ? vri, vai, /id. § vii (cf. bie) asseverates, but only in aflSrmative sentences : vij tov Aia. 245. This lengthened becomes vai, yea, verily (cf. Si/, Sat) : often followed by ftd, as val jicL tSv Ai'a, a stronger form of vii rbv Aia. The /la in itself is neither negative nor affirmative, but simply = " by ;" but unless the vai is expressed, /la must always have a negative expressed or implied, either preceding or following : ov /id tSv. A., or /id tSv a., oil — . lid Ti)v TiXeiov r^s if^VS i^aiSbg SiKijv, 'Arijv, 'Epivvv 9' — . ov /loi ipifiov /liXaBpov i\nis iiivariiv, JEsch. Aj. 1354. J,. § This particle (always adverbial) expresses assurance : q = dXijeCe, uv-iag, Hesych., 246. indeed, surely, ti /liiv, § 231, a strong asseveration, assuredly (come what will, &c.). ' Kriiger savs, that in Aristoph. the v is long (but still to be written vvv end., not vvv), in the Tragic poets long or short. 220 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 247, 248. [I ri irov, assurance with a mixture of doubt, real or pretended (hence ironically of 246.] self-evident conclusions), or confident conjecture, sane opinor, surely. iW Jj (often falsely written aW -ij), at prqfecto. f/ pa, iJToi. See under po, roi. The same particle used interrogatively, asks' a question with confidence or conjec- ture. In Hom. without other particles, when the speaker answers his own question by another : T-in-j-e tosou — iporiaag — ; rj /iriTie atv /i^\a — iXavvn ; ■>) firing "avrhv KTiivtiv ; Od. 9, 405. Frequent in Attic, especially in Tragedy : ri ToKfiiiaaTi ; aye, did ye dare f rj Kilvog wftoatv ; then did he swear? With other particles : ^ Sij; ergo revera f f) ravra l^r' civiKra ; then is' this to be borne f rj irov ', num forte f expects an answer in the negative, r) irov reroX/ijjK Ipyov aitrxiarov rih ; do you mean to say that — f Eur. Med. 695. 'H pa Att. apa ; ^ yap J See under pa, yap. § TEP. 247. Etymologically connected with n-rpt, " through and out at the other end," wtpav, &c., comp. TTtpc, Lat. per, this enclitic particle has for its fundamental meaning the notion, throughly, thoroughly, throughout. Hence a) (In Homer) its meaning sometimes seems to be confined to the word which it accompanies (ct'.pergratusperquejucundtis): iilvvvOa irep ovri /laXd. Siiv, II. 13, 573, a very little while, := just a little while : Trpuirov irep, vararov irip, quite or just first, last : ytivifiivbv irep, just = precisely at the birth, II. 23, 79. dXXii kcli avroi irtp iroviiofieBa, ourselves precisely (and not others), //. 10, 70. oiKaSi irep niv vulval ved/ieBa, home just that (and nothing else), //. 2, 236. roSe irep jioi lirucpriiivov ikXSuip, just this (and only this) prayer, II. 8, 242. 6 Si ireiaerai eig ayadov irtp, to what is good if to nothing else ^ at any rate, //. II, 789. b) (also in Hom.) for all that : aSX oiS' Sig irdpovg t(5pw(raro lifievog irtp, though quite desiring, all eager as he was, Od. 1, 6. ayaOog irtp Iwv, all brave as thou art. oili Ofoi irep — Svvavrai, not the gods either for all that (they be gods), Od. 3, 236. liiJTip, eirei pC ereKBg ye fuvvvdaiiov irtp tovra, Tifiriv irtp /iot otjitXKtv 'OXv/iiriog iyyvaXl^at, all short-lived as I am, (yet) honour, if nothing else — , II. 1, 353. c) With relatives and conjunctions (this usage is Attic as well as epic) : oo-Trtp, just what, precisely who, the same that ; oaogirtp, just so great as ; oiog irtp, just of the same kind as ; also with iig, ov, ol, 69tv, y, oirov, ore, tv9a, 'iwg, iirei, eirtidri, &c. tiirep, if the case be just so, if really (tiirtp tlpyaarai loSe, la/iev yap oiSev rpavtg, Soph. Aj. 22) : sometimes, fever so much; edvitip, if indeed &nii provided only that : tlirep, iavirep xai, albeit that even ; oravirtp, when (provided only it be so). d) The Attic poets sometimes allow themselves the use of irtp as in Homer : yevvaXog irtp uv, all noble as thou art; but in this sense Kaiirep with the participle is usual (rarely with indie), § 173, e. (Sometimes Kai — irep with the emphatic word between, fiwv icai 9e6g irtp t/iepy irtirXtiyfisvog; jUsch. Aj. 1125.) § yt (Dor. ya). 248. t^is is also enclitic, and connected in its origin with qui in quidem, and our yea. Its (original) meaning may often be conveyed by yea, with repetition of the word to which it is attached : thus, lig S' or dvyp xaXKtig irtXtKVV hv iSari jSairry . . . t6 y&p avrt ailripov ye Kpdrog iariv, for that in the case of steel' (yea, of steel) is strengthening, i. e. of steel indeed (for in the case of other things it may be weak- ' Elmsley, Heracl. 55, Med. 678, 1275, and Stallbaum, PI. Lys. 207 D, deny the interrogative use of j^ irov, which Hermann, Opusc. iii. 161, has vindicated. § 249.] HEP. TE. 221 fining), jrwf oiixi Si/iwv' ivkirptimv, iWd t6v airov ye vsciv PaXKu; his own [§ temple (that, of all things !). el Sk fir) tKovres ye, aW cLkovtiq, if not willing (yes, if 248.] not that), yet — . lyiaye ravra iroiriao}, I' (yes, I : if none other). (a) When the force of the particle is confined to the one word which it accom- panies, this force can often be rendered in English by added emphasis, sometimes by indeed, at least. In general, any word admitting of emphasis may be followed by ye. Especially pronouns, personal and demonstrative : lywye (the accent retracted), ffiiye, ovtos ye, iiceivoe ye, oSe ye, aiiTog ye : relatives and correlatives, o'e ye, oaoe ye, Toaog ye, tobovtoq ye (oloc ye rare in Attic) : pronominal adverbs, aiS'e ye. He ye, iHare ye, (iWep y' : vvp ye : interrogatives, rare in Attic, but not unknown, rivoe y vit' dWov ; by whom' else* Eur. Hec. 774. Hva y . . eXvag; Troad. 241. ttSiq y &v \peyois ; how' indeed? Soph. CEd. C. 981 ' i negative particles, oA — ye, oi Sri vov — ye : /iri irut ye : conditionals, ei ye (in Trag.most usually ei — ye), certe si, at least if, if indeed, if (that is), &c. : eiirep ye, if really, if really'. — ^ith nouns of every kind, if with article, the ye often attached to it : thus, j-o y' Sxov rrpdyfia, the involuntary' deed (as certainly it was). Soph. CEd. Col. 981 : and often to the preposition, Ik ye TrjgSe yrje, the emphasis on r^eSe, Soph. TV. 798 : and with verbs, with various kinds of emphasis, iravaai ye, do' cease! xpfl V^j oportet nempe ! behoves, forsooth, ayef ?uii/ ^ Bavuiv ye, living or even dead, ap olaBa ye ; thou knowest, aye ? q iiaiverai ye ; is he mad even ? But in all these cases, it should be considered in each particular instance whether the ye is limited to one word, or whether its use comes under the following head : (b) It approaches to the nature of a conjunction, where, attached to one of two sentences or members of a sentence, it virtually belongs to both. In a reply, containing something additional to the preceding expression, the ye is placed as near as may be to the beginning, with the emphatic word first : eiTriD n Sr)Ta KoXKoi ""Qaov ye xPy^t'Ct" yes, (and) as much as you wish, (Ed. T. 364. ri jue\Xei£ KofiiKeiv — ; " ftaOovaa y — ," why delayest thou to carry — ? "yes, (I will carry) when I have learnt — ," (Ed. T. 680. Tpoiav a ekeiv del. " oiSerroTe y " (take Troy !) Never ! Phil. 987. areXxe — . " /iryirw ye irpiv B.v — '' (yes, go :) not yet, at least (however, though) untU — , Phil. 1409. Frequent in replies with secondary predicate (participle) j e.g. Kokdii y'eyd woiSv, " aye, and well too for me to do so" PL Rep. 5, 474. ipOCic ye ) Tror' eiiov avSp iyu, aye, but I too). oiiS'e y is 9vft6v ,eda, dXkd, to y'e roi vvp Tov KapiTov KpeiTTov idTiv, Xen. An. 2, 5, 19. — Often with Sr] added: thus (in answer to a question), faai ye roi Sri ol tovtidv Evptoi, yes, at least this is quite certain that — , PI. Crito, 44. Ktlvov ye roi Srj ■naig kKXyZero, Soph. CEd. T. 1171. ye fievTOi, yet — at least, rovg ye ftsvroL dyadovg, yet the brave' withal, Xen. An. 1, 9, 14. TOl. s This enclitic, derived from to — (connected with tamen and though), is originally nJn demonstrative, and by individualising restricts and excludes. The original demonstrative force appears especially in rousing exclamations : a'e TOl, a'e Kpivbi, vai ae, thee there (thee only), Soph. El. 1445, so Aj. 1228 : and other pointed allocutions, av rot, av roi KaTti^lojaag, thou', thou alone — , Phil. 1093 : and with emphatic pronouns, iyii rot, eywyl rot, I, for my part, eyii rot o4b i/i^tffjSijrfi, /', be sure of that — , PL Hipp. Maj. 369. ravra rot, this and this only, ravri ro'i ff' ex9£i TToXie, therefore, and reason enough that, — Eur. Androm. 212. It is fre- quent in replies, in the sense be sure of that ! never fear ! ' AXXd — raxii roi &7roicpi- vovjiai, Xen. An. 6, 4 (al. 6), 34. eipriaeTa'i rot, it shall be spoken (rely upon that!), Eur. Ion. 760. 'opa kot Sp^vriv lifi (jivXa^tv ivrvxyg. " ^vKa^o/tai rot," Eur. Hipp. 567. — iffSi rot Tiaovad y' dtlav S'uctiv, be sure though. Soph. EL 290. This particle is especially frequent in gnomes, maxims, and general reflexions, in the sense, sure enough that! Mqn rot SpiTo/iog juey' diieivu)v, iii ^iypiv, //. 23, 315. ' Ellendt adopts Blomfield's 'opa ye fievroi on the ground that liiv Si) de rebus adhue fadendis non dicatur : which is not true. § 253, 254.] TE MHN, &c. Toi. 223 Totg Toi SiKaioic X''> |3p'»X*C "«? li'syav. Soph. (Ed. C. 884. Kapra toi ^iXo'iKTiaTov [§ yvvi), Aj. 677. ^M roi avSpiiov ti boi eaXAv viiv eiTrdwra Kai voiiiaavTa fiviifiriv — 252.] irapixeiy kavTOv, Xen. An. 6, 8 (al. 5), 24. ^ rot rr)Q havoias oq, mriaq). A Stronger expression of this sense is leai ravra : rotavra — v^pusiv, Kal ravra rtjXiKovrog, and thai too — / Soph. El. 614 : even with the finite verb, though rarely, sat ravra Kovipwc sb juectuv apuvarantv uipovatv, ^sch. Eum. 112. Placed at the end of the sentence : Nuv yo5i/ lirtxdpriaaq, ovliv iiv Kal ravra, being nothing worth (yet), even so (for all that !), PI. Hep. 341. In satVoi yi, the ye belongs to the whole sentence : Boirot yc d^siKo/itvov vov Ian rovro 8 vapaKariOiro, and yet to be sure (it is true that — ), PI. Sep. 331 fin. In Kairoi — ye, the ye belongs to the interposed word : Boirot roiroiirov y olSa, though indeed thus much at least I know, Soph. (Ed. T. 1 455. Often followed by dXX' S/iw'e, which, again, illustrates the original force of boitoi = Bat ai'ff (r&o) : Kairoi oiiSkv '6 ri ovk aXTjQks siptjKa S)v irponirov dXX' ofioiQ — , = yet for all that : the thing is even so (eat rwe), yet even so (o/ituc), PI. Euthyph. 3. Katroi ^aaiv 'l^iKparriv — kXBiiv tt's txBpaV dXX' ojuwe — , Sem. Mid. 41, Buttm. fiivrgi ^ for one thing, this'. In rousing exclamations, like rot : oirog, ak Xlyw § /livroi, ai rbv rcBvriKara. — Usually it may be rendered however, to be sure, with an oka opposition to something preceding : iTrtira /livroi, anon however (though). jiaKiara fikv Si) — ■ eTreira fievroi. Soph. Phil, 350. rb fikv irpZrov wkvh — , eireira jxRvroi iimv, PI. Charm. 159.^ In affirmative answers (§ 199 c, R. 2) : ^ajiiv n ilvai SiKaiov aiirb tj oiSkv ; " ^ajiiv /ihroi, vij Aia," we affirm it, to be sure (true enough that), PI. Phced. 65. ov iroXXr) civ &\oyia Ai) ; " ttoXXi) nivroi vi) Aia" ib. 68. — Et ydp plot rb aw/ia Kal djroXX^otro — , di'ayBaToi' jievr' av iiri — , to be sure, it would be necessary, ib. 87. Sos ftkvroi ^ifiMviSris jroXirj/f SixawQ il l3ori9eiv rif civlpi, to be sure, S. is your countryman, you are bound to stand up for him, PI. Prot. 339 fin. AfiKov oVt S€u0ajc — dfftwr^ffet /*«, Kal airairiiati fikvroi SiKaibig, and for the matter of that — , Xen. Aji. 7, 6, 17. So An, 4, 6, 15, 16, iiriSti^aaQai rijv 'jraiSeiav Kal ^vXd^aaQai fikvroi (uMhat) firi Xri^BSiKV KKivrovres . . . 'AXXd /ikproi (weU, for the matter of that, i. e. talking of stealing) boi lyo> i/iag aKovm roig 'AO. Ssivoie ilvai KXsirriiv r& Sijiioaia — Bfli ToAc Kpariarovq /livroi (and your best men withal). — In questions with oi, rwwne? having the force of an affirmation : ot AvriSiKoi ri dp&aiv ; ovb avrtXEyovirt /iE»rai ; they oppose each other, to be sure, don't theyf PI. Phced. 261. oi riSv KakHv /iivroi r) aoi^poavvt} iari ; PI. Charm. 159. ' Stallb. PI. Pfaxd. 266, says, that a preceding piv requires ithroi to follow, not flip iii. 224 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 255 — 257. [§ Kai iievTot rz Kai ni]v together with Kairoi (corrective) : PL Ale. 1, 113, ifik U 254.] aiVi^ fidrtjv. Kai /ikvToi Kai eu Xlyeie.' and yet, to be sure, you do' say well. Similarly,* (iXXd fiivToi, oil /livroi (oi not interrogative), oi /livToi ovSe — . Comp. ov /irjv a\\a — with ov iisvToi aWd (Kai), yet no J but — = atlamen, verumtamen. Bo£\ei ovv — lirixiifr](jiiiiiLiv — ; " IIoi'ii niv ovv. ov fiivroi ciKK' iyuiyi Ikhvo av ijSiara — axov- ffai/ji," not so, though ; but — , Fl. Meno, § 22 init. ys nsvToi is a frequent combination, where both particles severally claim the second place in the sentence : thus,, rovg ys fisvToi dyaOovg slq 7r6X«/xoi/ 0}fioX6yriTO Siat^epovTbjg Tifxav, Xen. An._\, 9, 14, the sentence being compounded of rovg ye ay. and roig likvroi ay. So olpoi ye filvrot, Itpri. But when the first word does not admit ye, but does admit nivroi, the order is changed : thus, Xiyovai n'ev rf oi /tevToi ys 'oaov olovrat, PI. Rep. 329. oi /levroi rax" ye cLirayytKH, Xen. An. 2, 8, 9, On yk Toi, see § 251. A ij'^o', comp. of rt and toi is epic ' : verily, assuredly : u 0i\ot, ^roi K\^po£ inog : QKK often Tyrol fisv. Sometimes in oppositions : tjtoi NEffropiffijw — , TijXI/jaxov S' — , Od. 15, 6. ijrot 'OSvatreig Hartpog, aiirdp Tt/Xifiaxog TrpoaB' rjyijidvtvev, 24, 154. In the alternative i) — ij, the Attics often add roc to the first ij. j/roi xXvovaa Traiioc fi Tvxy irapa. Soph. Ant. 1182, Trach. 149. ^rot oXoi; row t'lSovg r) /ispovg iKaarov, PI. Farm. 131. Often with yi added : ^roi Btovg ye r)yoviit9a ri Bi&v jratSag, Apol. 27. ^rot iviardiievoi yi — ^ iiarepov, Phwd. 76. In Rep. 344, E, loiKag — ijroi fi/iCiv yt ovUv KtiSeaOai, the first ^ is suppressed, the sense being, or (else) in that case, you do not care for us at all. S oSroi, not — though, surely not : ovtoi — yt : ovrdpa : usually at the beginning of 256. * sentence, or preceded by d\\d. liriTot (the prohibitive /irj), do not — though : fiijroi rig iiiidg — Bopvfiriay, PI. Rep. 438. fiijroi — ys : fiqroi ye in aposiopesis, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 24. Md M', i^ri o TaKiapxog, ju^rot ye ev fxiq. ye r/fiep^, not in one day though : often (in the same sense fjtrj Ti ye) = nedum, avrovg iiroUi, firiroi Kai dWr^Xovg ye, — dSiKtXv, not to say one another, PI. Rep. 352. firiroi Oeovg ye, — ti S' ovv Beovg, /iriroi. tov ye /leyiarov tSiv Be&v, ib. 388. Sometimes /aqroi ye Si). S pa and dp (Epic), dpa '. 257. a) pa enclitic, dp the same inverted, and also apa*, are often attached (in epic • poetry) to relatives and demonstratives, particles and conjunctions, at the beginning of a sentence or clause of a sentence, with a notion of progress or sequence, which is ' Not simply boi /utjv, as Buttm. in 1. 2 But Soph. CEd. C. 1366, 17 rdv oiiK dv 5 = 5 roi av, and El. 498, rj roi or ij toi. ' The supposed derivation from dipu (KUhner, Nagelsb., Stallbaum) explains some of the facts (see //. 14, 511, and the preceding vss.) ; more satisfactory is that (cf. Hartung) which connects the simple pa (ap) with the verbal root, denoting easy or sudden motion, which appears in peu, pea, and pfSiog, rapio, repente (applied to mental action in rear, ratus), rite, and with the suflix in comparatives and comparative words, StivoTepog, Trorepog, alter(o), Sevpo, ultro, intra, rmerepog, longer, other, either, hither, our, &c. nostr(o). On this view, d-pa is the pronominal root 6, — (d-7ro, d-vd, d priv., d-rdp, d-rep, &c.) compounded with pa. '' But in numberless passages, a slight alteration will give pa or dp where the edited text has dpa, dp'. § 258.] -PA. 'APA. 225 sometimes perceptible, but often so slight that the particle might as well be absent, [§ and seems only intended to help the metre or to close an hiatus. Thus we find, 257.] mdifiFerently, ffle t^o" and flg dp' l^av, never He p lipav or (i's p i^ar : &£ l^ar, oi S" apa and fflg l^ar', ol Si : o'l S' ore Sr/ p' iKovro and oi S' on Si) ax^Sbv tjaav : tOv fikv dp' 'Afvpifuixoe and rwv jiiv 'OSvaatvg : oi t dp' 'AjuvcXac tlxov and o'i t' ixov Alytvav : S^ 7-ore and Sii pa tot. — "Qc iiliaT'' iSSnatv Sk — , xai p Axiovaa KadrioTo, with refer- ence to the preceding command, dW aKkovaa KaOqm, Jl. 1, 565-8. t'iq t dp aipue 9(S)V IpiSi guvlijKC iidxcBai ; and who then — , with ref. to SmaTi]Tt)v hpiaavTc, II. 1, 6. 8. — It frequently appears in one member of an alternative : {j pa — 17, — iIt «p« — «r£, of>r' dpa — oSrE ; or correlation, Toaaov — oaaov dp', ij/ioe — ttjuoq dp' : or opposition, itiv pa — Sb (aWd, aurdp) : oix — dW dpa. Also o'm pa, kirei pa, otij/ee' dpo, br« pa, 'ote and totc Sri ?"• yap P". V pa (verili/) : owe and owJ* dpa, ii /iii dp'. b) This use is less frequent with other words : it is found, however, in primary sentences after some monosyllabic verbs : 5 pa, so spake he ; ^ri p l/uv and airap o pij p iivai, II. 21, 205 (even not at the beginning of a sentence, furd Sk KktiToig l7ruovpou£ j3^ pa /I'sya iaxiav. It. 17, 215) : more frequently in apodosis, air&p iiTuSri — , j8q p ifiiv, and dXV Sre Sii pa — , yvd p' dvSpag, II. 10, 357. airdp iirci£>) reSJe aaxos — , Tevt dpa ol di&pijica, II. 18, 609. aurdp kirti — , liar dp', II. 22, 127. oi S' kvil oSv — , OTijaav dp', II. 24, 349. Similarly, ^rot 8y' lie diruiv, kot dp' 'iCiTO, II. 1, 101 : and with the participle, Tbv S' ug ovv — , Kivriaae pa icdpij, H. 17, 198. Rarely with substantives: Atos pa vpSiToe, It. 14,511. aairlq dp' ci iraiSig, ug dpa i^Xuapov/uv, ore — , how, as it now appears, we did trifle — ! Xen. Cyr. 1,4, 11. Iftoi, <5 dvSptg, Qvopkvif — oub ky'iyvvro rd Upd. jcai fucoTbi^ dpa ouK ky'vyvero' dg yap cyoi vvv irvv9dvofiat — , and with good reason, as the result has shown, Xen. An. 2, 2, 3. ^drijv dp' ij/ittc, s Iokev, f/ico/tEv, why then it appears — , Soph. El. 762. or' oii«7-' £t/«i, njvwaCr' dp' ci/i' dvijp, (Ed. C. 894. oiirw Koivov n dpa x'^'Pt *"' ^virp SoKpvd kariv ! Xen. HeU. 7, 1 , 82. Hence the use of the imperfect, '6S' rjv dpa — , this then is he — / (he was so all along, as it now turns out), Soph. Phil. 966. xai kvtvSijaa Tort dpa KaraykXaarog wv, iiviKa — l0ijv — , oiiSkv tiStog dpa TOV vpaynaTog — . kyi) fikv yap vir dj^tKrtpiag ipiii)V — . rb Sk dpa, ov tovto jjv — , dXXd — . el Sk ^jjevS^, oiiSkv dp' rjv irpdyfia, .... dXXd yip lyu oiiiE jffij dpa — , PI. Conv. 198 C — E. Sometimes in the middle of a sentence : n-oXXd kuI iyaSi tijv iroXiv -irevoHiKoreg dpa d£(K(i>£ vir avTrjg diroXXvvrai, iig tovtuiv Xoyof, PI. Gorg. 519. i>g Sk TavTa ytXoia kari, KaraSiiXov iarai, kav /tij ffoXXoit dvoitaai xp rig dp' kirapKcaii BeSv r) Bedv ; Eur. 9 259. 226 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 259 — 261, [§ In exclamations, Spa, ric dp' rjv ; (in disappointment at not finding the person 258.] who was expected ;) Soph. CEd. C. 118, ttSiq Trort — irSig dpa; Phil. 684, oig oix dp' ySi] — I how ignorant, it seefns, I was I El, 1176. So et and d /itj dpa — , if (or, unless), which I do not expect, &c. : iroraftbg S' U jikv tiq Kai dWog dpa ^/ilv iari Stafiarios, ovK olSa, if it should turn out that there is — , Xen. An. 2, 4, 6. ilri — sir' dpa, whether — or (should such unexpectedly be the case). With iog, " that," it is often ironical : i>s dpa oi irpoyovoi iiiyaXa li ira96vTce oiiSiva iTi/itiaav, that it should seem forsooth — , Dem. H Peculiarities : ravra irj xal oi aXXoi wavrce dpa %vv'eijiaaav, PI. Conv. 177. The force may be expressed by, they could but assent ; ravra axovaaQ o Kvpog tvaiaaro dpa (in his surprise) rbv fitjpov, Xen. Cyr. 7, 3, 6. "ZaK&v Si iSiiirrig dv^p dmXiTrcv dpa (to the surprise of every-body) rifi 'Imrif roic AXXoif iyyig rif rjiiiaii rov dpo/iov, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 23. bitrre kvu kSeSeiirvrjKeffav, Kal rd navra TroXXd ovra StaireirofupH 6 Kvpogdni rrjg rpajrljijf, ilirtv dpa o rw/Spuae" 'AXX' lyd, !i Kvpe, irpouBtv ftiv r]yovnr]v — (said in his surprise, or, could not help saying), Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 7. lu some places, the sense as it turned out subsides into in fact, or, it should be remarked that : " SaK^ Si . . . ovBiv SiSuig ;" 6 Si SaKag dpa — , now Sacas, it should be observed, was, &c. (or, it would turn out upon enquiry, that — ). So, in explanation of a preceding speech, ol d' dpa tUv jSatnXeuv oivo\6oi . . , . , Xen. Cyr, 1, 3, 9. 5 yap, (nam) namely, far. 260. Being a form of yt with the suflBx pa, ap, this particle denotes an affirmation (yi) which is explanatory (pa) of something else : sometimes the notion of explanation predominates, sometimes the affirmation. a) It is little more than merely explanatory ^ namely, after demonstratives and short sentences, such as a^ftiXov Si, SrjXov Si' SiiKvv/ii Si, aKiypaaBe Si, &c. (in which there is always a demonstrative, e. g. ivBivSc, ivrivBev, &c. implied.) See examples in § 196, and R,, to which add : oukoSi' Toaovrov fiiv fiiiiv tig rb irpoaBtv viirepavrai ; 8 yap ia/itv, iiruiKiog uifioXoyrirai, PI. Ale. pr. 1 32, thus much, namely — . Soku to'ivvv fiot, efi], )^apiiffT€pov tlvai fivBov vjuv \iyuv. ''Hv yap irore, where the demonstrative is not expressed : to tell you a story. Namely — , PI. Prot. 320. b) The affirmative force predominates in replies : IXtytg ; IXeyov yap, why yes, I did. at fii)Tipeg rd ■natSla fii) 'ttStifiarovvrmv. M^ yip, 6^ij (PI.), why yes (you say true) : they ought not = why no. c) Very often, especially in Herodot. and Thucyd., the explanatory clause with yap is premised to the thing explained : see § 196 &, and on the ellipsis in dXXd yap, iXX' oi yip, see under 'A\X avSpig, vvv jiiv Katp6(,' SiaKvBijvai ; / should think it would be time — ? Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 40. Sometimes in the middle of a sentence : 'A J/iijrov iv Soiioiaiv apa Ktyxdvio ; I wonder whether — ? Eur, Ale, 495. Very often it introduces an interrogation dependent on a preceding verb, but always in the form oi orotic recta : sKti^i&iiiBa apa Xijrt) virEp/SaXXei ri aSualv ; (as if it were tt dpa), PI, Gorg, 475. dtX apa ~— aKoirtiv, &,pa TixviKo^ kariv — ; PI, Loch, 185. ivwKit^aa9ai, apa d vvv 5i) SiiiXBoiiiv — apitdrTu ; PI, Rep. 462. (Cf. J 199 c, R. 1.) In apa ye, the interrogator believes, or pretends to believe, that the thing is as he x. says : 'O Si Si} arjp apd ye , , , 'on aipti rd dir& rqf yqc, d>}p KSKXqrai, / should say nco that — ? PI, Crat, 410, —''Ap' oiv — ; J presume, then — ? either where no answer ' is expected, but the speaker passes on to some further view of the subject, or where the question is grounded on what goes before (according to the two leading uses of oiv, § 264, a, b). 'Ap' oil — ; expects an a£Brmative, ^po /i^ — ; a negative answer, ip' ov /xiapov tan ; =: can it be, that it is not foolish f meaning, that it would be surprising if the thing were not so. apa /itj Sokus ; surely you do not imagine? = can it be, that there is reason to apprehend your imagimiig ? (Cf. $ 199 b.) In the poets, apa sometimes occurs in exclamations, in the same sense as apa : ot/ioi raXaivi/s -opa TrjqSt avjAtpopoQ, Soph. El, 1170. ToxoXqSe xp'/'f"'? "P" XP4 imroi6ivai, JEsch, Choeph, 281. olv, Ionic av, § This word is explained (by Hartung) as accusative a^v of avg, a Cretan and 264. Laced, form of oAtiSe. Hence its original force = " the same," " all one." (Others, make it = kov, ov, so that the primary sense is ut nunc est.) a) Originally ovv appears only as an adjunct to pronouns and conjunctions. In Homer it occurs only so ; chiefly with ivti and lic (also owr' oHv, and yoCv) : al t (the cranes) iiru oiv xuiuiiva ^iiyov leat dOiajiaTov oju/Spov, xKayyS raiyc ir'tTovrai, at what same time, i. e. no sooner have they — ■ II. 3, 4. riv S' aij otiv ivoiiae, ib, 21 and 30, ' Or, possibly, tt dpa, when, as is most usual, it is interrogative. Cf. the instances where it depends on a verb of considering, &c. Q 2 228 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 265, 266. [I and frequently: dlr' (the fawns) iirti ovv tKap.ov — , EO-rairi, iZ. 4, 243. In Attic 264.] writers, Ssne, ocTrep, 'oaoe, oiroloQ, &c., oiv, Vfith their adverbial forms ovy, (u'cirtp, &c. ovv, all in the sense of the Lat. — cunque ; e. g. yvvaXKa jriaryv S" iv Soiiotg eiipoi |toXi!)v oiavirep cZv tXtmtv, such exactly (yep), whatever that might be (Clytaemn. is spealcing of herself), ^sch. Ag. 565. irwg \iyeiQ ; Ian y&p otiovv Trpdy fia orifStl d'7ru)Qovv txovTi ajiuvov ayvotiv j) yiyv&aKuv ; fully, any thing, no matter what it may be, to any person soever, no matter in what condition, PI. Ale. 2, 143. oTrcp oiv oiStlg av oiriSiit), just what (without more ado about it, without question), ib.^ rovSk aoi /tiXtiv ^0K0' av^p KHvog, taairep oijv /ieXcc, Soph. Aj. 970. it S" tariv, lilffirep ovv lattv, PI. Phcedr. 242, with the same notion of indifference, not caring to argue the point further.^ b) In its consecutive use, ovv =^ thus, then, accordingly, such being the case : UoUv odv fioi. Hence frequent in resumptions, after interposed matter, KaTavo&v Si o Kvpo£ v i^ai^it tuvrdv, 2, 47. (On the death of any person of note) t6 9rj\v ykvog irav rb Ik tUv oIkiiiiv tovtidv kut !>v tTTKaaaTo ri)v ke^oX^v vt(Kif, lb. 85. (In embalming) irapaaxiaavrig «rapd rriv Xaira- pijv, IK u>v tlXov Tijv KoiXiav vSaav, ib. 86. (In making boats) vontvaiv ovSiv xpii^vrai, iauiBiv Sk rdg ap/ioviag iv Hiv iiruKTuaav ry /3i/3Xy, z6. 96. (In sacrificing) kuI lireira Pp6xip Tfpi o)v e^aXe rbv aix'^va, 4, 60 : usually, as in these instances, with the aorist, in descriptions of a customary process : the force seems to be, without more ado, straightway^ ; comp. the Homeric ovv in the relative member. § With dXXd, drop, Se, it has a force resembling that of o^wg : but, however (= all 266. onejbr that), d\X' oiv tocovtov y laBi, Soph. Ph. 1289. ioTua S' ovv oiring vpXv ^iXov, CEd. C. 1207. Kai iXixQriaav Xoyoi airiarot jjiiv kvioiat 'EXXriviav, iXix^1<">v S' iiv, but spoken they were', all the same, Hdt. ti S' oiv, ^iXtl y&p tovto /ii) Tavry piirtiv, with aposiopesis, viz. dXXy peirti, Soph. Ant. 722. In alternatives, sir' ovv — e'lri, the ovv implies that, whichever side be taken, it comes to the same thing : ovkoSv iai/iSvia /liv ^yg jit Kal vo/iU^tiv xal SiSdoKiiv, elr' ovv Kaivd, lire jraXaia' dXX' ovv Saiiiovid ye vo/t'iZii) Kara rbv abv Xoyov, PI. Apol. 27 (comp. jiToi — 71, ^ 255) : with ovv in the second member, Xkyovrtg dr dXridig, Ar- dp' ovv ixarijv, or, for aught I care — , Soph. Phil. 345 : in both members, Kai tovto rovvo/ia J^^ojra, lir oiv dXijSej eir' oiv i//(5fos" dXX' oiv SiSoy/tivov ye iari rbv SuKpdri] Staifteptiv Tivi r&v dXXwi/ dvOpii)ir(i}V, PI. Apol. 34 fin. So our' (^tjt) oiv : ovTt yap Qpaaijg, ovt oiv TrpoSeiaag tljxl. Soph. CEd. C. 90. /xijr' dporov abrolg yijg dvuvai rtvd lirjT oHv yvvaiKdv TralSag, ib, 275. Homer also has oir' ovv : ivQ' ovng tijv vrjaov iakSpaKtv ofQaXfioiaiv, ovt ovv KVfiaTa naxpd — aaiSojitv, Od. 9, 147. vvv I' iirsi — iKaviig, OVT ovv ioQiJTog divi^cxtai ovts rev dXJ^ov, Od. 6, 192. ' Buttmann in I. explains it as answering to a ydp in the independent form of sentence : roSro ydp oidtig av oiijfieii;, and similarly Homer's iird ovv tKafiov = a'lSi ydp, ETTtJ tKaiiov. But this will hardly explain the other facts. ' Not as Stallb. in I., oiv, hie quoque nativam serval ratiocinandi et conchidendi potes- tatem, which, in fact, is not the native force of the particle. ' Compare the cognate airUa and airiag =; avriag. Hartung says that it denotes a cool, offhand way of going to work ; but this is evidently not always the case. § 267—269.] OYN. 229 7o5v = ye o5v (therefore placed like yt), yes, without more ado : ?x"C SiSd^at Sri 5 ft, oVot Ka9saTanev ; — " rdj yoiiv 'ASijvaf olSa, rbv Sk xiipov oS," Soph. CEd. C. 24 067 (the feeling of certfunty with indifference). tovtu S" ov vaXtv auric airoiatTov (uBEfe iTTTToi a^0(i) . ov yctp ovv, PI. passim. With yap, "for," as in 06 riiv ye /i-q Btym&av, iv yip ovv Xtyeii;, S(^h. Ant. 772, for, of course ; oiKOVfilvii ydp oSv arkyi] jrupif /iera iravT iKiropiZfi, PhU. 298. fiSv = /jij owv ; surely (without more ado) not — .* liSv 'OSvaakue iwiia96ii)iv ; surelt/ not Ulysses ? (= I hope not). With ov : fiiiv oiix op j;c ; surely it cannot be that you do not see this? CEd. C. 1729. But the separate force of the particles having become obscured, so that /xuv has subsided into- a mere particle of interroga- tion, the Attics also say fi&v ovv ; = num igitur f and fiHv fit) — ; MoJv SovXoq uv (ap^Et (TOW 6 wajfaywyog) ; then, ^t — , PI. Gorg. 471. TOiyapovv, why then, such being the case : dWd 6«otff y txflioroc fjicit). " roiyapoSv Ttv%u rdxa," why then for that very reason (they are the more likely to grant thy request). Soph. (Ed. T. 1519. 6p9Sig eXtfoe' rotyapoSv rd aiv fpdaov, such then being the case, teU me, Phil. Sil. Jti/i^ijfie Koiyii' roiyapovv aiOiov roSe. Frequent in prose : e. g. (Cyrus never left a man's zeal in his service unrewarded) Totyapovv Kp&Tiarot S^ tiTTijpErai vavrdg Ipyov Kvpip eXI^Sijira)/ ytveaOai, accordingly, and reason good this — , Xen, An. 1, 9, 18. (He never broke promise) Kai -ydp oiv (and therefore in fact) lirianvov aiirtf — . TotyapoCr lirei — , accordingly, (it is no wonder that) when — ,ib. 1, 8, 7 — 9. S TTOV. 272. This enclitic particle (an adverbial form of rej, guis, ko?, whence Ion. kow, kws, &c.) properly =: somewhere. Apart from the notion of place, it means, somehow, in some sort or degree ; in conjectures, = perhaps, I suppose, used in conversation when the speaker puts something in a half-questioning manner (surely), intending to build something on the aflSrmative answer of the person addressed : rb ydp ■Kov kokSiq ■Koiiiv dvBpuTiovz Tov iStKtiv ovSiv Sia^pa, for, / presume — (it being possible that the other would say there was some difference), PI, Crito, 49. Also when, with a degree of uncertainty, a speaker repeats another's words : thus (Socr. having proposed a definition of trx^/Ja, Meno says), "On crxviid ttov iari, xard rbv abv \6yov, 8 dii xp^f ii^frai, because ^gure, I ta/ce it — , PI, Men. 75. Hence with Attic urbanity, it is used in matter of certainty, especially to intimate that, J)efore the speaker proceeds with his argument, he waits for the other to affirm the § 273—275.] TOTNYN. ToirAP. noY. dote. 'aaaa'. 231 point, or call it to mind ; 6 ydp yap irov dircicpivajui}!' ro Sid iravris ApOwc exov dpOSe Sk liiirov ej;" ri kotcl rijv nmn Tsxvriv ycyvo/iEi'oi', my answer, I presume you perceive, was as to what is done rightly (in wrestling) at all points : and rightly done — surely you will grant this — is what is done by strict rule of art, PI. Ale. pr. 107. tUv Aatov Sr/wov Tig iivoiiaitro, I suppose we may he pretty sure that — , Soph. (Ed. T. 1042. — Sometimes in a direct interrogation, distinct from the latent interrogation of the particle itself : koI tan Sfjirov rii Si^og Si^og tov ; PI. Rep. 439 ; even when the interrogation is virtually negative : cat tovtov ye Sriirov tiq &v in-idv/iqiTEicv ; equiva- lent to oi y&p S'qirov tovtov yi Tig In-tSv/it/crctEV, PI. Conv. 200. In oi jqirou (yc), the negation is expressed interrogatively : oi Sri irov ak ye — dyovaiv, surely they are not — .* Soph. Ant. 381. oi ydp Sriirov aov ye — , PI. Apol. 20. (" oi Sr/irov est sus- picantis : ov H irov mirantis et indignantis," Stallb.) Stronger still is Sr/irovOev (see } 240) ; used when the speaker, with a kind of defiance, disputes the possibility of an opposite assertion : eardvai yAp lUarai Sriirov- 9ev avTif,for I presume there can be no doubt that — , Dem. Mid. c. 26. Rem. Cf. fiiv in interrogation : "EWiji/ fiiv ktrrt, Kal iWriviZei ; PI. Men. 82, where /jIv assumes the fact as unquestionable : irou in the same question would mean, that the speaker waits for the other's assent. (Buttm. in 1. and Index, s. v.) iron (enclitic). t This temporal adverb of ng (quis, Kog, Ion. leore), at some time; once (irork /jIv — 274. irori Si, one while — another whUe, modo — modo, or Iviore, or aWore Si) : at any time, ever. With other designations of time : vvv irore, rjSri iroik, iraXai irore, irpiv xorf, irpoaBe irov irore, irdirore, en irore. The notion of time is less prominent in the following : fikdeg /liBeg fie. " iroi liedH ■" fteBtg irore, do' let me go (utigue, in any wise). Soph. P/al. 816. riaaaSe, Tiaaa9' dXXd r^J XP°^V ^ore, at last, tandem aKquando, or simply by the emphasis, do' avenge me! So noyig ovv irore riitiv dvOpioirog dvetfi^e Ttiv Bvpav, at last. 'ExKaXvirre vvv iroff (now at last) riixiv ovgnvag \iyeig \6yovg, Eur. Iph. A. 872. KaireiSfj apixero irore o "lirirap^og. In interrogations, it expresses impatience for an answer (tandem), or wonder, or emotion in general, ri iron Xiyetg ; what do' you say f ri irore ireirovBag ; what (in the world) ails you f irdg irore Spdaeig ; z= how wHl' you do it f ri irore ( Hom. r'urr), what can' be the reason that — .* Xlo'iif iror exp'h<'aVT0 reKfiiip'uf ; Xen. And so in indirect questions : 'Edau/iacra onf irori Tp6irif roSr' ey'evero : and with indefinite pronouns, ogrig irore, who-eoer, &c. : and with ei, elirore, if ever, and if perchance. With Sri- ogng Sriiron, whosoever, oirov Sri irore. So ei Sri irore. ri Si] irore ; rovro iriirpaKrai vvvl Siring Sri irore, no matter how ; and with ovv. 'E/iiaBiliaaTo jie ogng Sri iror ovv, JEsch. Ov S-q irore in negations interrogatively expressed, surely never — .? oi Sri iroB' riiiiv ^vyyevrig 7)(C£«£ iroB'ev ; surely it can never be that — ? Soph, El, 1202, Gf. oi Si] irov. 'AXKd. § This adverbial form (distinguished by its accent from pi. neut. aWa) d«rives its 275^ 233 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 275. [§ force from the proper signification of aWoc = " what there is else remaining after 275O the removal or exclusion of some :" i.e. the notion introduced by aWa is presented as being exclusive of some other preceding notion ; or aXKa corresponds to a preced- ing oi, expressed or understood. a) oiK iyi!>, AWci ai. oix taao/iiv, aWd, KiaXvao/uv : the second notion excludes the first, to which it stands in direct opposition. b) atffj^pdv yvvaiK Eyjjjuaf, aWa TrXovffiav. ffoipbc ai fiavTig, aWA radiKuv ^iXwv. Here the first notion is not expressly excluded, and the aWa introduces, not its direct opposite, but something different. But here also aWa has, in fact, its proper force with reference to a suppressed ov ; for in this form of sentence the speaker implies, that the first notion, which he concedes, is not the point, but the second is. In the full expression of the thought, there is an opposition by fikv and Si, with an ai in the Se clause, to which oi the aWd corresponds. Thus, r6 au/ia SovXov, aW vove i\ii9(fiog, the body is enslaved — this indeed (/uev) I grant, but {Se) not this is the point — but (that) the mind is free. Often, to mark the concession more strongly, the n'ev is expressed in the first clause : tovto rb vpay/ia ixpiXiiiov fiiv itrriv, aXKa SiaKoXov, which, however, is by no means simply equivalent to i)ip. jiiv i., SvaKoKov be, nor does the aX\d correspond to the /iiv, but to the negation in the suppressed Sk clause. In jxiv — Si, it is intimated that both considerations are taken into the account : in flip — aXXa, the former is conceded only to be set aside. When the second member is negative, the /niv mast be expressed, mfiXifiov /tiv, aW ov xaXov : without /liv, this would = advantageoits, and not handsome ; see c. — The first also may be negative, e. g. oix dpvoviiai jiiv, dXX' (aX\' o'/itwf) spioriS ; but then the aXXa corresponds, not to the expressed, but to the implied negation, viz. not my not- denying is the point, but ray asking. c) But the Greek often introduces with dXXd a negation in direct opposition to a preceding affirmation : thus, heWiv dXX' ois kvBivSi ripvaaBti, PI. Phtsdr. 229. See other exx. in § 187, to which add : XapaSptov riva av ai ;6io)/ XiyEig, iXX' ov vcKpov ovSk XiBov, PI, Gorg. 494. KivSvvivtt ri ixovra etti rb apx"" livai, &XXd /i^ dvdyKt)V ■TtepipivHv, aiaxpbv vivon'iaOai, coming forward to rule instead of (and not rather) uiaiting till one is forced, PI. Rep. 347. rig /irixavri — Sucaioavvrtv ri/iav iGiXtiv, aXXd fii^ yeXdv eTratvovpLivTjg aKovovra ; ib. 366. ^iXoao^ovg dXX' oi ^iXoSo^ovg KXrjriov, ib. 480. IviiT dirb ra^pov roig Sfoig vmpippovtXg, dXX' oix dirb rijg yijg ; Jrist. Nub. 226. The natural expression would be ovk ivBivSt dX\' ixtlBiv, &c., but to give greater emphasis to the affirmation by more forcible repudiation of its opposite, which is assumed as having been asserted, or likeli/ to be so, the order is inverted, so that the dXXd seems to belong, in a manner, to the preceding clause, and to look backward rather than forward : thence (quite another thing that !), not hence. But the true explanation (which reduces this to the form a) is this : UtWtv ripiraadrf oi/c (iig ai Xiyiig, or, (is ipofiiBa, or the like) kvBivSt, dXX' oAk ivBivSe, thence — not as people might suppose, "hence" — but "not hence." This explanation accounts for the irony which commonly appears in this use. Comp. i/itig ■ — iidXtar &v olirmg — tiSoicj/ioire Kai oiK iirmvotaBe — • ri)iug t av itdXiar' av oiiriDg ii(ppaivoiiiiBa oix riSoiftiBa, PI. Prot. 337, followed in each instance by an explanation : rb jikv ydp (iSoniniiv to oi ivaiviiaBai . . . , , &c. Here is no irony : had such been the case, the full form would have been, tiSoKipoXre xal oiK ivaivoiaBs dXX' oiic-i-n-aivoTaBe, = *' and the case would be, not a being praised, but a not being praised ;" whence, the negative state- ment being suppressed, the form would be dSoK. dXX' oix iiraivolaBe. Rem. This use of dXX' oi must be distinguished from the but not — , which is § 276-379.] -AAAA'. 233 opposed to a preceding fih ; see b: e. g. profitable indeed, but not handsome, iipeXi/tov iiiv, aXK' oi Ka\6v, which is better expressed, 06 julvroi (or iiiv S^) Ka\6v y£. _ o4 ixovov — &\\i Kai — not only — , but also — (the SiWa in direct opposition to § oil, the KQi = fcai — , Kal — ), sometimes with the addition TrpAc Toirtii, or TovTotg. 276. When the Kai is omitted, the notion contained in the first member is entirely put aside. Thus, in oA fiovov iavSvvivafv, a\\& xal tiraBiv, not only was he in danger, but he (both was in danger, and)_ also suffered, an equal stress is laid on both notions : but \vt the same sentence without Kai, on arriving at the second notion, we think it so_ important, that we reject the intention with which here also we set out, viz. of putting the notions (JtKtvi. and twadi) on the same level by (xai — ,) icat — . a) When oKKa follows conditional clauses with d, ei /iij, &c., it may be rendered S hy yet, yet at least ^ saltern, certe. This case comes under b, viz. the aWa refers to 277, a suppressed apodosis with (iiv ^— Ss. Ei aSfia SovXov, iW 6 vovq i\ti9epoQ : the suppressed apodosis is lariit n'lv SovXov, to which aWd refers in the manner explained above. So ft /iij iravra, aKK& iroWa yt lare. ( Comp. si mihi bona republica frid non licuerit, atcarebo mala.) This aWi is often followed by olv (even so, all one for that, &c. ; see § 266). Ei xal jiij Kaff 'EWaSa rtOpa/tiitff, iXK' ovv iwird /tot loKtig Xiytiv (Eur,), tiv Kai ryv fiaiv KaTaSieaHfiav fxiofftj/ aXX oiv raig y ijiiriipiaii . . . irpo- ixovaiv (Isoc). Rem. aWa ye, in direct combination, perhaps never occurs (in fact this would ^ no yes) ; but yi, as in the preceding instances, heightens the antithetic word. b) By an ellipsis of the conditional clause, aWa comes to stand in the middle of a sentence : airij ye vovv ox^S iWci rip xP"'"'!' "'ore (Soph.), the suppressed clause being, ei /ti) vftortpov. So, frequently, tiXXd vvv ye, aWd vvv y tn (Dem.). /3oti\o- fiai airbv SildZai, dv wtoQ ctWd vvv ye vatSivBy (Lys.), Si 9eoi varpipoi Juyysvefffis y dXXd vvv. Soph. El. 411. In like manner yap rot KT^/ia r^s viKijf Xafiiiv, ToX/ia, where the sentence is completed by ToX/ia (Soph.), iaojc 'Eptvvg sanv kx TpayipSiaQ, jSX67r« ys rot fiavixdv re Kai rpayifiSiKov. " dW oi/K ex^t yAp S^Sag," i. e. aW ohs 'E., ouk ixu ydp S. (Arist.). aXK' tar' i/toiy' tiioe boXos " icayaSog* aW oiiK Wi\H y&p navBavHv, where aXX^ — yap seems to be a mere colloquialism = attamen, as the context contains nothing from which the sentence with tiXXa may be completed (e. g. but whaCs the use of that ?). In familiar discourse, the two particles may come together : tt iyi> r\ ok. The two forms combined . (which was the more natural by reason of the affinity which the particle dXXa, in respect of its origin, has for fj) result in the forms, oiSkva dXXov opfi dXX' ^ ok, J see none other except that (I see) thee : in which, if we would express the force of both particles, we must say, I see none other than thee, but (I see) thee, or, I see none other, but I see (thee, and none other) than thee; and with omission of aXXov, oiSkva opw dXX' fi ok. The combination originating in this simplest form of sentence finds its way into more complex enunciations. In the neuter, it may often be doubted whether the wording is oiSiv dXX' >5 = dXXd ri, or oiSkv dXX' rj = dXXo ^. In the ellipsis of the verb (yivtrai, or the like) to oiSkv (} 215 b, R. 1), there is no doubt that the word is dXXo : thus, oiig ipapiv pavBdvuv oiSiv aXXo {j dvapujivrt- uKovrai (PI. ^ oiSiv dXXo ■^roiovoiv j) — ) : whence ovSkv &XX' rj (not dXX' fi) wpoaicv- vtXv vTreXapjiavov, whether it be, / (did) nothing other than suppose him to be praying, or, / supposed him to be (doing) nothing other than praying. In many other cases, the ydp Si' oiSiv, SXX' r) Sid aoipiav rivd rovro § 282, 283.] 'AAAA'. -AAA' H" AND "AAA' H'. 'H. 235 t6 ovo/xa lexriKa (jP/.). it is as natural to suppose the word to be aWo, by none other [§ thing than by — , as that it is aXKa. Only where an SKKoq is expressed in the first 281.] member, it may seem more natural to assume the form to be iXX ij : thus, oiSiv dXKo (TBOTreiv, a\\' ij rA apiarov (_Pl.). Madvig, however, conceives the true reading to be, in all cases, aW ^ ; see § 91, R. 2. To the examples there cited, add : oiSiv y&p, iar dW (aW, Brunck) f/ KoaK, Ami. Ran. 227. Apyipiov fiiv oiiK Ix'^i ^^^' V fUKpdv n, J[en. An. 7, 7, S3, dj S" o«xi ^iX" c' ovS" ear ivvovg, tovt' airo ae Trpoira liSaiu), aW fj Sid tovt' avB' orii] aov rqf dvBpaKiae avoKavH, Arist. Eg, 779, /iq^a/ioS dXAodi — aXV ij Ik£i (P/.). /)fi Sisftvpiovg ievovg, itrjSi rig eiriaToXi- ftaiovg ravrag Svvaiuig, dXX' ^ rflj iroKtoje larai, Dem. Phil. 45, 19, which Kriiger explains as a union of the two constructions, an army must consist, not of mercenaries, nor — , but of citizens, and, not of mercenaries, &c., nor of other than citizens, = nijSi Xeye dWag Svvaiieig rl rijg TroXewf. dWd without 17 : ovri jioi alriog dXXo£, dXXd roKtJe Mai (Hom.y. tiraiai S' avroxeip viv ovTig dXX' lyui. Soph. CEd. T. 1355. (} oil, if the predicate, and by ij firi if only a part of the sentence, • is negatived. ^ In comparison, after comparatives, and words implying comparison or opposition, 2gg aXXoc, eTipoe, ivavrioe, &c., ij = than {(juam. Germ, als, both illustrating the con- nexion of fi with the relative: our "than" is demonstrative, = "then"); see § 89, sqq. On fiaXKov rj ov, § 89, R. 2, cf. Herm. on Soph. Aj. 1260, where it is explained, that the last of the exx. above given (2T4«c. 3, 36) is equivalent to oii toIq atriovg aX\a fiaXKov r^r 7r6\iv oXqv. — (This union of two constructions resembles that which we have noticed above in oiSUs dXKog — aW ij.) i oil and 111). 286. ^°^ the distinction and use of these particles, see § 200 sqq., and the §§ there referred to (cf. Index) • : on oiiSk, fitiSe, ovre, urire, see § 208. 216. 229 c. All the applications of itr/ may be derived from the prohibitive. M/) Tv-iTTc, firi Tv^yQ. It is not, on the whole, indifferent which form is used. " M^ with imperative, , enjoins the giving over something that a person is doing (or thinking of doing) : with aor. subj., the not beginning it is ordered. Moreover, the present is used of a continued act, as /ti) ^aXKin : the aor. of a quickly transient, momentary act, pi) jSaXye, when a single throwing of the weapon is in question." Hermann, ad Viger. § 268, p. 809. The reason why the imperative phrase (in second pers.) must always be /i^ Tiirre, not iirj Tvif/ov, is, because the direct actual prohibi- tion of a thing prohibits it, not as a single momentary act, but once for all. In /it) rvvre, /ir] expresses the prohibiting, t-uttte the act prohibited : in ni) ritliyg, there is an intermediate verbal notion, viz. an imperative : e.g. /it») \iyc, firj ivvSu, ii^ jSoiXou, or the like (or rather, the /tij itself is the expression of such a verbal notion, " I will not have it," &c.), on which the subjunctive, as a form of the future, is dependent : e.g. "do not let the thought come into your mind, that you will strike." And because ' Oir appears to be cognate with ai, i-iro, ab, aut, haud, therefore primarily denotes separation or removal, reversal or contrast. Mi;, although it coincides to a considerable extent with ne, appears to have a diiferent origin from that particle (Sanscrit vm, Persian me, both prohibitive'). It seems to stand on the same line with the pronoun of the first person, fie, and with jia, jieig, fiiv, &c, ; but perhaps its peculiar force, as the particle of subjective denial, is best derived from the labial expression of rejection, dislike, impatience, &c., possibly with some notion of the first pers. pronoun in it, " I will not have it," or the like. §287—289.] OY. MH. 237 such a form of prohibition is more distinctly related to the future, therefore (cf. [§ §_ 128) the subj. aor. is used, not the subj. present. (Besides, iiij ruirTys would be a 286.] circuitous way of expressing what is better said by pi) riirre.) But /i») ruif^arw is allowable, § 142, R. 1, though rare : for here, as in /i^ Tuirrerw, the verb has relation to a suppressed imperative, just as we are obliged to express the third pers. impera- tive by the verb let : ju^ (let — not) tvktbtu (strike). The construction of /iq with the indicative and subj. in independent sentences is § always to be referred to this principle of an unexpressed imperative. Thus in the 2g7 question p») ypaipci;; " do not say (think, &c.), you will write" = "surely you will not write?" (jiri introduces a question to which we wish, but are not confident of receiving, an answer in the negative : with nZv, we express a confidence that the answer will be, " no"). But XeStis Si furiSkv tSv Ifiot SiSoy/ikviov, Eur. Med. 804 : but you vMl (not) tell — do not think of it! — aught of what I have resolved upon ; an asser- tion having the force of an express prohibition. 'AXX' oZv wpofirivvaeig ye tovto /itiSevi, Soph. Ant. 84, with the same emphasis of entreaty or dehortation expressed by the following fitiSevi, do not think of doing so (no, not) to anybody! The principle is the same for the subjunctive, which is in its origin only another form of the future ' : but in the usage of the language, /itiSiv Xe^yg, litjStvl ■npo/itivvayg has come to be merely , the expression of a prohibition, as above explained ; whereas the fut. indie, asserts that which will be. Kal r itivoi, fifi Srir' alwriBui, Soph. CEd. C. 172. With the proper optative, e.g. /*>) vvv Avaljuiv, Soph. CEd. T. 644. p) trfra — Xtaifu rairriv tifiipav, A. 830, the suitableness of jui}, as expression of not wishing, is obvious. With the adj., as also infin. and particip. of the verb, " /x^, non reapse negat sed S jubet cogitari negatum," Frank. Diss, de Partic. negant. i., p. 8. To n^ xaXov, " the ORg (do not call, think it, &c.) good :" aiaxpiv (to) jiri fioriGitv (if one does not — ), jiij PotiBHv, 6 jiTi poriOHv. See § 205, 6. For firi with inf. after verbs of denying, &o., see J 210. (Comp. under /») ov.) In sentences dependent on verbs denoting fear, anxiety, consideration, &c. (see § § 124, and R. 1, 2), the fiii is evidently in its place as the expression of not wishing, 289. and has the same force as in the independent sentence. ^o/3o5/iat /tg ivf^aojuv : without 0oj3oB/iat, (do) not (say) we shall find, i. e. I hope we shall not : in popoSfiai, the nature of the unwillingness is expressed : / am afraid (we shall). And so with the subj., SsSoiKa fif/ iiri\a9i!>iu9a. *povrt?w jirj Kpanarov y. — Hence the absence of SeSoiKa, &c., is not necessarily elliptical. M(> dypoiKorepov y ri d\ri0ig uweXv, do not say it'is, = I fear it may be. — In the usage of the language, ^oPovfiai fiy Ian is, J fear it is : ipo^ov/tai iirj y, I fear it may turn out to be : (po^Bvp-ai juj) iarai, I fear (I think with fear) it certainly will be. — The same principle holds for the optative ' Thus, Od. 16, 437, oi/c h9' oirog dvi/p, ovd' caaerai, oili yevtirat (cf PI. Rep. 472, ovre yap yiyvtrai, ovTS yeyoviv, ovSi oiv fir) jrore ysvr]Tai) '6g Kiv TijXf/iaxv a■) \i/00w SoXip: while the former, e. g. oi fxii XiipiiatiQ, is explained as, " will you not not-tri6e ?" =: " will you not have done with your nonsense ?" But both phrases are referable to the same origin, and (considered in themselves) admit alike of the interrogative or of the assertive notion, i. e. on the one hand, ov firi XijpqirEtf may be, " no, don't think you will (shall) talk nonsense," a union of oi Xijp^ireig, with ;x)) Xtipriatig (:= /t^ Xr/piitryg) : on the other, oS ri fir) XrifBii (= \ti^9riaoiiai), " shall I not not-be-taken ?" i. e. " shall I not be safe from being taken?" (Cf. Herm. Cens Elmsl. in Eur. Med.) In the practice of the language, however, the oi jii) of prohibition with second pers. is best understood interrogatively ; in other cases, oi firi is assertive. Thus, in the exx. given in J 124, R. 4, and Kur. Bacch. 340, ' oi firi irpoaoiaiig x^^P^> fSaKxtvaeig 5' twv, firiS' k^ofidpt^t ftiapiav TTiv c^v ifioi ; where the groundwork of the sentence is oi ^atxtvaug ; will you not go, play the Bacchanal f into which fir) irpoooiaiig x"pa. do not imagine you shall lay your hand upon me, is inserted, and nrfS' ii., &c., is added as opposition. But in Soph. (Ed. C. 1 73, ovroi /t^ jrore a ix riovS' iSpaviov, H yipov, aicovrd ng d^n, the § 294, 295.] ox mh. mh oy. 239 interrogative form is evidently not intended, and the sense is, " no, assuredly ! do not [§ imagine, do not fear, &c. (== jiii) that any shall carry thee off, ^c. (The usage of the' 293.] language would ratheivrequire, SXy (&yayy), but the thought prominent at last in the speaker's mind is ovk dUi: hence the future indie. ^ "do not imagine that the thing shall be ; it shall not be." So CEd. C. 848, oSkouw ttot Ik tovtoiv ye fiii OKrirr- Tpotv £71 oJotTTopijfftif — , whero, though the verb is in the second person, o4 — itrj is assertive, not prohibitive ; you shall not have these — do not imagine it — as props in your wayfarings, and the assertion is stronger than with oSoiiropriays- Soph. El. 1052, aW iliTiO'' ov aoi fi7] /ifdli/zo/iai Trors, oiiS" riv fffoSp* ifteipovffa tovto rvyxctvys, the fut. indie, as in the preceding instance, because the action is negatived for all future time. Arist. San. 508, /ict riv 'AttoXXiu, oi jii) a iyi) mpiS^oiiai AvtMovra, an asseveration beginning in the usual form, fid rbv 'A. oii, and strengthened by the prohibition of imagining the contrary'. — In the dependent sentence, ideairiaiv — wq oi fir) irort iripttouv, Soph. Phil. 607, represents oi uri wort irtp iv ols ri XPV" ^oiiiv iiii ; /uuv oix oVep iiroiovv ; Soph. CEd. C. 1727. But with the subjunctive in a form of sentence which may be considered as elliptical (cf. § 289), we have ;«} ovv, e^ij, oi diviafiai eyoi . . . i^iiyriaaaOai ; you do not say I am not to be able — .* Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 12. iiiiiv Si . . , iir) oiSiv aWo aKeTrriov y, where the supposed ellipsis is opa, PI. Crito, 48. — In the dependent sentence, SidoiKa /«} oiK airo9avy, iSeS. fit) ovk airoddvoi, SiSouca /i^ oi TiOvrjKev, require no further ex- planation. With the inf., see § 21 1, comp. § 210. Here observe that (1) oig dpvoS/jai ovraie S elvai represents the simple assertion oKrwc eortv, with negation of denial, oie Apvov- ngg fiai, (2) In &pvovfiai jii) ovTotg elvai, there is a union of dpvovfiai ovtus ilvai with /xj) ovTiag tariv, you do not say that it is so ? or with ^tifil fiij ovrioe dvai : the phrase is therefore stronger than (I), viz. == both I deny that it is so, and, I have no notion that it is so : and, the whole phrase being negatived, oiic d. pi) oiiroig iivai = J do not deny that it is so, and, I would not have you imagine that it is not so, which is equivalent to contendo ita esse. (3) Lastly, oiK apvovfiai jiri oix oBrus Avai may be referred to a union of oiic apvovfiai oiiroif dvai and /t^ oix ovriog lartv, you do not say that it is ' The pres. subj. is rare : oi /j^ Sivufiat (Xe»i.), and oi /«} olog r' ys (PL), are not conclusive instances, since these verbs have no aor., and, besides, SivaaSai and olov T dvai have in themselves the future signification which is required in this phrase. In Soph. CEd. C. 1023, the text is uncertain : oBg oi nii irore x'^P"? livBriaoftat ovS' dvo/irivu), viz. (ei kc — ) " if I try," or, " if another can :" Kai be rif m' ^pf ft, viz. " (if in any wise so be,) then may-kap — ." "Av, and in apodosis bev, always thus looks back to a supposition expressed or understood. But av, though it properly belongs to the apodosis, is often drawn info the pro- & tasis, viz. with the particle ci in lav, ijv, with o'c, and its adverbial forms (og av, orav, 298. oie av, &c.); also tSr' dv, kird av, and knyv, &c. In all these cases, the dv, together with its verb, is apodosis to a suppressed condition : thus, otptai ^v WiXyaSa = thou shalt see, if, when^the time comes, then thou shalt be willing (1. e. if in the event it shall appear that thou art willing). So with the relative forms. OBj dv iSye KaXeaov, = whom, if so and so (e. g. if there be any to be seen), you shall see . . , lie av syiav liiru, TruSii/iiBa ^ in what way (whatever the way may be,) / shall speak, or, in what way (supposing that I speak,) / shall speak : i. e. the groundwork of the sentence is, if I speak, I shall speak so (ei k' tiww, rwc dv eittw), and this thrown into the relative form becomes wg dv eiiru. So eb ydp 'Opiarao riaig taaiTai . , , . , SirrroT dv n^ijisy : the groundwork, "when the time shall come (ort Ktv — ), tot' av ifiriay," in the relative form, SinroT av riPnay. Or, as all relatives imply correlation, the relative with dv may be explained as condensed from demonstr. with dv together with relative with kev, viz. tot dv (taatTai) Stc kev ii^riay. So II. 15, 232, T6ippa yip ovv o( lyEipE iisvog lieya, oipp' dv 'Axi'O' tvyovTtg vfidg ti Kai 'EXXqjs-oj'roj' cBuirai ^ r60pa dv (lyepelg^ . . . . , o^pa Ktv 'iKojvTai. — Hence, where dv appears in the protasis, the apodosis rarely (perhaps never) has kiv : i. a. it would be difficult to produce a sentence of the form fjv Si ii-f/ Siiuaiv, lyw Si kev avTog EXu/ini, In vvv yap X "EBrop' eXoej, ^jtei dv fidXa Toi axiSbv iXQoi, II. 9, 804, the kev in the first clause corresponds with an unexpressed li be SeXoii,-, ei bev IXdoi, or the like, not with lira dv in the latter clause, which resolves itself into some such correlation as Sii TovTo dv (sc. eXoic) OTi Ktv /i. 0%. eXSoi. Sometimes dv and be» appear in the same clause : thus, "wtovto S' Ipiti, like fta96vTii>v, aSeXipebe dv aWoQ oiSevi Tp(5jrijj yevoiro, Hdt. 3, 119 (see J 139 b). Hence it likes to attach itself to words by which the simple form of the sentence is altered, such as ouk, ovt, oiS', ouirore, &c., tIq, H, nSie, apa, &c., adverbs of time, place, manner, such as ivravBa, totc, raxa, taias, lucbTuig, pifSiaq, pqara, fiaXurra, Ii6\ie, axo\y, riSsiog (aafuvog), a^oSpa, nai (xdv, etiam, vet), &c., and the inferential oiv, ri oiv av Tig inroc — , the principle being the same in all, viz. that that term of the apodosis which is to have the greatest prominence in reference to the conditional sentence (expressed or unexpressed) draws the av after it, because av has the same reference. For other remarkable attractions (hyperbaton) of av, see § 139 b, R. X For the usage of the particle 'A v, see the Index. — In the cultivated Attic prose, nnn the use of av with fut. indicative (Homer, Pindar, and lyrical parts of Tragedy) is rejected, partly in consequence of the rejection of /ce, partly because the provinces of the indicative future and the subjunctive are more clearly discriminated (whence also the omission of av with the subj. in conditional and relative sentences, which is frequent in the early and extra- Attic Greek, is rare in Attic, e. g. d noifiayg, ore XISjs). Thus, avrbv S' dv irvfiarov fie Kvvtg Trpuryat Oup^ffiv d}fiijffTal spiiovfftv, kTrei ks rig — cB Bvftbv eKtjTai, II. 22, 66, an apodosis with av, followed by its protasis with k£ : here the Attic, rejecting the ke, gives the protasis in the different form, iTruSdv 'iXrirai ; consequently, the av of the apodosis falls away. In the elliptical sentence, ir\ri6iv S' oiiK dv lyd jjuS^ffopai, where av points to an unexpressed £i k£ — , e. g. " if I shall try," the Attic retaining dv for the like reference uses the optative. In the passages (of Attic prose) where dv appears with fut. indie, there is some negligence of con- struction. Thus, PI. Apol. 29, iig ci Siaipivioifitjv, rjSii dv ifiiiv o'l vUlg emrtiSiiovTcg d ^wKparrig diSdaKit iravTig iravrdvaai Sta^Baprjaovrai (so all the best MSS.) : the writer meant to say, tjStj dv itpStv ot vUlg k-jriTrjSevouv . . . . , xal ir. tt, Sia^OapijirovTai, but, changing the construction, puts the participle in place of the finite mood. The other two undoubted instances in PI., are Sep. 615, oix »iwi, oiS' dv j)Sh Jsiipo; PhtBdon. 61, oir5' oTrtagriovv dv trot ckwv elvai wutrerai : in both, the irregularity is caused by the aptness of dv to attach itself to oiS' and ovv. So Thuc. 2, 80, pfSiiag dv axbvreg — Kparriaovai, the adv. pfSioig drawing dv after it, as if the writer had meant to say, {r;^otcr, koI axovreg KpaTTjtrovm. Just so Xen. Cyv. 6, 1, 45, dtrp.tvog dv irpbg dvSpa olog av tT dxaXXayriatTai =■ fiSkitig dv, " he would gladly come forward (or the like), and will — ." lb. 7, 5, 21, voXi dv 'in jxaXXov jj vvv lixpeioi laovTai = TToXi} dv — rovTo yevoiro — , on — . J^sch. de f. leg. 1 96, ,ouVw yap dv fidXiura p.e- * fivrjaopai Kal Svviiaonai tlTreiv, = dv tiij, on — . And in questions : ri iror dv Ik tovtidv epeX; Eur. Bacch. 595. ^pa ye tovt dv eyii tcot lv6i|'o/xat ; Arist. Nub. 465. ri ttot dv epel ; JEsch. Ctes. 155 : here the dv does not belong to the verb, but to an unex- pressed optative, Xlyoie, ^oi'ijf, or the like, followed by on. With imperf. and aor. indie, dv is always = " in that case," with reference to a preceding "if:" ei t^ovX6p.riv, ^Xtyov dv. — oi ^ii/Svot, iTcei rig dtiixoi, irpoSpa/idvreg dv ii(7rriK£(Tav (prescurrere et deinde restiiare solebant, Person : instead of the vulg. dv- eiarriiceaav, for which others 'iaraaav without dv), Xen. An. 1, 5, 2, so often as — , (in that case) they would — (av rei fieri solitai) : cf. Soph. Phil. 287 — 295, which is the locus classicus for this usage. So in all the usages of dv with optative ; fikvoip,' dv (viz. ei BeXoig, or the like). — was suggested by reminiscence of rj kc jxey' ot/jdJtiE yepiav IwjrijXara {IriKevg : else the speaker would have said, ^ iiey' dv (fp.. § 301, 302.] AN. 243 But av with subjunctive always accompanies a conditional or relative word; and [§ here the "in that case" refers to a latent condition, as explained above, vrhence it 300.] closely accompanies, or even coalesces with, the conjunction or relative.' When with the temporal particles, kirti, eug, fiexpt oi, &c., the av is omitted, the event is put by itself without the "in that case," or " if so be," involved in dv. "EaTTHarai Itkxpi oS iiraviXSiaatv ol itpkaPtiQ (Th.), kv T

f dv (TKon-ot v5v rjTe ruv eipripevoni. Ant. 215 ^ "(you say well : do it thenO so shall ye be — ." Creon not only insists that they shall make this their object (j/re), but that it shall result (iaeoQe).^ iaQi irdv Ti Spii/ievov, oTnur; dv eiSoig ^/Jiv dyyetXyg aafij, " acquaint yourself with all that is doing, that you may — ," and, " so shall you — ." — With the optative, ug dv, Hiriag dv = quomodo, or vt. irpo/iij9o5vrai oTTiitg dv eiSaiiiovoitig, derived from the direct interrogation vug dv (el SvvaTiv etij) eiSai/iovoiiig ; — "Iva with dv, subj. or opt., is never final, } 122. iraTpig ydp ioTi Ttaa "iv dv (ubicumque) irpaTty Tig ev, Arist. ' I cannot assent to M.'s statement, J 122, note, that dv does not perceptibly alter the meaning. " Comp. oirag with fut. in the phrase oiriag ovv eaeade dvSpeg d?to« r^j iXevBepiag, Xen. An. 1, 7, 3. R 2 244 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 303 — 306. § ofpa (Horn.). 303. The derivation is eitlier the relative form o-^i with pa, or 8 napa, and the meaning, until that, while that; but Sjipa also assumes the force of a final particle, the point of time to be reached being conceived as the goal or intent of the action. In this sense, oippa ISo), oippa irvBotiiriv expresses the same thing as oig, oTruf, 'iva. The appearance of ke and dv with this particle results from the correlation '6(ppa Kf — , 700(3' dv (or Kt) — . 'Ye S' dpa Ziig avvix^Q, o^pa ke Baaaov aXiirXoa rdx^a. flei'ij, II. 12, 25 (as the direct expression of the purpose would be ro^p' dv (or Ktv) vaut, S^pa KE 9('ui>). So, b0pa be TEpTrd/tEvof ott' cLKOvyq Stiprivoiiv, Od. 12, 51, " (let them bind thee = they shall bind thee the while, ro^p' dv (or kev) Sriaovai) that thou the while mayest hear, &e." Mr; ftk via iq 9p6vov t?£, Swrpi^ig, o^pa kiv'Ektiup Kslrai (r. KTJTai') Ivi KKial-gaiv oKijiije, //. 24, 553. In this correlation, the dv is often attracted to the relative clause, especially when the demonstrative clause is imperative : fiviiaaaBc Bk 9ovpiSog (iXicqf ii^p' dv kywv 'Ax'X^oe diiv/iovog ivTia Svii). So rbv ^iivov Siarrivov dy ig ttoXiv, Sjip' dv iKii6i Sdira irTioxivy. In a few passages, where the correlation is expressed, we have o0p' av juiv kiv — , roippa : viz. o0p' dv /liv Kiv opf . . . r60p' dvaxoipiiTia, II. 11, 187, and ib. 202. o0p' dv fxkv Ktv Soipar dpiipy, To^p' airov liivkw, Od. 5, 361, and o0p' dv ftkv k dypoig lo/iev — , rdippa — KapTraXifiwg tpx^ffOai, ib. 6, 259.^ § cuig. rlwg. , 304. The earlier form is probably ijog or yog (comp. iT^oj). Its correlative in Hug, but also Toippa is so used. TOfftpa yap dv TTOTnTTvaaoliisBa fiv9ip .... swg k dirb TravTo. So9eiti, Od.% 77. ewj (jjog) 8 Tav9' mpfiaivi, rotppa oi iyyv9iv riK9tv — Necrropof viog, II. 18, 15. Sometimes img in Homer is demonstrative, e.g. S>g "EKrwp Amg fiiv ditiiXti, in the same sense as Ttmg /liv (for a while) riaixat,ov, iitti Ss ^, Xen. : and sometimes in Attic prose, tews is used for iiag. {Buttmann, Index ad Hem. MM.) § ""• 805. Comp. Homer's etg ore, itaoKe, and Lat. iisque. The Attics use it instead of oippa, and in the sense usque with a preposition, ectte etti to Sdiredov (Aen.). Rem. The same sense is expressed by 'dug oi, fiixp'S ov, axpig oi. These two prepositional adverbs, in which there is no perceptible difference of meaning, are derived from /taKpog, dicpog (" to the length of where," " up to where.") Hom. has also /tlir^a (related to /iEffoe) in the sense of /lExpi, //. 8, 508. ' ^ irpiv. 306. This particle, whether explained as a locative form of the root irpo, or as an ancient comparative (vpiov-, comp. pritis and pris in priscus, &c.), is properly an adverb (and so used especially in poetry : Siv irplv oub dxriicoag. 8e irplv ipx^^o- ^v ''V Trplv xpovg — , and as — , so. Strengthened by 307.] Trep, e.g. 17 ^vx>i Eic/3aivowira iSairip irvivna fj Kawbq SiaaKiSaaOtlaa otxtroi. — In wishes and asseverations, as in Engl., " so heaven help me, as — :" oiJrwc bval/iriv TovTiov (!ij d\ij9q kpui, cf. ita me du ament ut ego Icetor (TVr.). — With 6 avrog, iirof, &c., the same as, for of. to airo ffxS^o (iairtp to wpCiTOV (Xen.). tovtov Sk elvai tov TrXaaTtiv tov ovtov wairep tote. Similarly, TrioTbg uig rig ical dWog implies the com- parison, as faithful as — . b) As, ut, in the sense quantum, quantum quidem, in interposed sentences of a limiting or restrictive kind (where the speaker qualifies a statement by remarking, that he puts it, or wishes it to be understood, in that way in which it holds, is allow- able, &c., under the circumstances described in the parenthetic clause) : e. g. " he will come to-day, as I hear, i>g clkovid : as they say, ag Xkyovmv : as it seems, lis toiKiv" The correlation is, e. g. I speak this (so) as I hear, &c. Si S', iig 'ioixag, vofiiZug. — Of the same kind is the i>g with inf. in the phrases we eiiruv, iig sTrog tiirilv (where we use the demonstrative, " so to say"), = ovtid Xkym u>e Hct^ iiiriiv, or the like : i>g avvTofUiig uiriiv, b>g avviXovTi tiiriiv. Elliptically, i)g trXrivM, ut summatim dicam (Pi'), — and ETrtffra/iai iSuliTag ovrag wg irpbg riiiag ayuivlZcaOai, and f) ihg with inf. after a comparative. So lilg y iiioi icpiTy, for which we have also nSg y i/iol xf>V''8at xpiry, big y sfiol oiKpoaTy : — u}g kfiy 66^y (Xen.). — big ya sVTiv^v I8eiv : (xig ye ovTiooi So^ai (PI.). So tie with a preposition and its case, n-upyoi ^kv ojg dir' ijinaTinv irpoam (Soph.), bjg BK Ttiiv SvvaTuiv, we ek rwv vwapxbvTiiiv (l^huc.) : aTnuTov to TrXijdog XiytTai cLvoXsaSai iig irpbg Tb nkyi9og Tijg TToXewc (Thuc), To the same head may be referred the we which we should express by for. Thus, 7iv Sk oiiSk aSvvarog, wf AaKiSai/ibviog, tiiriiv (Thuc.), for a LacedcEmonian. irujTbg we vo/tiig avyp (Soph. CEd. T. IWS), faithful, for a herdsman, that is (viz. considered as a mere herdsman, as far as such a person is likely to be faithful), ippovii yap we yuvi) liiya, she has, for a woman, a high spirit. (Here the force of the particle will be perceived by substitut- ing an interrogation with wwe ; e.g. " for how should a Lac. be SwaTbgiiiriiv ■" — TTwe av yvvri ^povol jikya ; &c.) And with the same construction, the dative : fiaKpciv ydp we ykpovTi irpovaTdXr]q bSov (Soph.), long, for an old man. ra^etav, we ^^01, crKkipiv kiriTaTTiiQ (PI.). — 'Qe I'd noXXa, u>g iirl rb iroXv, iig ejrf rb TrXrjBog, and the like, may be explained in the same way. c) At, in the sense quasi, tanquam, also quippe, utpote. In this use of we with nouns and participles, there is involved a notion of cause, as when we say, " as the , case is so and so, therefore — :" i. e. the relation is partly that which is expressed by " hoiv — ? as — ," partly by " why — ? because — ." This use of we also differs from a), as the things are not compared in their own nature, but put together as like in some thought, feeling, or purpose of the speaker or some other person. Thus, we voXifiiovg i(pvXa.TTovTO rmag, as (they thought us) enemies, (therefore) they were on their guard against us (so as they would be against enemies). £i*£p we ^'^.ot ■KpooriKiTi, if, as (you wish to be) friends (therefore) you are come (in the way that friends do come), we (pvXaKa avvkinjx-^tv airov, as (he wished him to be) a guard, (therefore) he sent him with (us) (so as one sends a guard). S' iig dvijp yivvatog oiiK oXktov fitrd learyvta, as (he was) a noble-spirited man, (therefore) he complied (in the way in which such an one acts). Especially with the participle (as, indeed, in the case ofsubst. and adjj., the participle wv, io-dfifvoe, &c., may always be supplied). Thus, dyavaKTOvaiv i>g ^trarij/ievoi, as (they think themselves) deceived, (therefore) they are indignant (in the way that people are, who find themselves deceived). irapioKivdltTo we jiaxov/ievog, as (he said to himself) he would fight, (therefore) he made ready (as one does who is going to fight). ynSivro ii$ irtiaavTa, as (they said) §307.] .'QS. . 247 he had been the mover, (therefore) &c. See J 175 d. C'A", IIti Si,, in the same [§ connexion, denotes the objective reason, § 175 c.) Hence with the gen. abspl, 307J wf iiirani^ikvuv ruidv rf/avnKTovv, as (they said) we were deceived, they were indignant (so, as in the case of our having been deceived) ; see J 181, R. 2 : and the ace. absol., see § 182, with R. 1. — In like manner, lif with the finite verb, in the sense «*_= "as asured that — ," especially followed by a negation. Skonai oiv aov jrapa- liHvai ij^iiv, i)Q iym oiS" hbg rjSiov isovffai/ii ?) ffoii. And so with fut. indic. i>c oune afiipl TifS" iypdv Briati icdi'iv, Eur. Cf. J 215 b, R. 2. iiq, &v aoi iruBiiitiQa, ovn 6 yswpyij yewpyoj carat, = since, or for — , PL As if, with the finite verb, in the ironical )v aKp6iro\iv lag iwi TvpavviSt = lag TvpavviitTiDV. — ' AirayyiWeTi rp /iiirpi x^'P""! ""C «"■' '/">'' ^^ *>? iTrayykXKuiv, or ayyeXoj air' i/iov. 'Qg with numerals, tduxev dg jivptag Spaxi^ag (Lys.), some ten-thousand drachmae, scarcely differs from ilg : thus, in the enumeration Xen. An. 1, 2, 3, hirXWag tig jrtv- TaKoaioVQ Kai x'^^ovg . • • , 07r\. itg irivTaKoaiovg . . . , ^dvSpag) dg iTrraKOtjiovg. It is usually referred to the sense quasi, but is rather to be explained as oaov : comp. the particles in the phrases, "how many ?" " as many as," and ewe, SiSs, usque. Rem. 'Qg with the accus. (but only of personal objects, or objects conceived as persons) is distinct from the preceding aig tig, &c. It is a pronominal form (like Lat. quo, comp. usque), denoting the direction whither, the terminus ad quern of a motion, and used quite as a preposition, aitl tov o/ioiov ayei Biog uig rbv o/toiov (Horn.), like to like, oiix ijKat irpAf ai Ktjpvaauiv oSt, dW iig Ifts (Eur.), n-opcverai o>g fiaaiKsa (Xen.). 7)Kovrog g Suvarbv, or oidv re, or Svvavrai, &c., Taxwra, See $ 96. Also with some positives : big cCKifiSig ■=■ u>g olovTt iXriSSig, as true as possible. So ijyyiiXav i)g trijrii/Kus (Soph.), and (lis riiridig ivvivtiv (Soph.),^ and iig raxog ^ "in what way speed is possible." So big cLTtxvStg, big iravv, litg fiaXa. big avriag (biaavroig), oig irkptnig. Hence we may explain iig 'eKaarot as representing (is cKag (end^). e) how, quomodo (and qvantopere). In the sense of ovbig, in indirect interroga- tion : thus, (ttws exti rh irpayfia ;) awris o" tinoi big ixti r5 vpaypia, how the affair stands, dig S' olSa ravra ryS' ixovr', iydi ippaaia (Soph.), how I know — . And in ex- clamations : big dartlog 6 dvBpoiirog, (see,) how polite the man is — / big oiSiv dpa la^iiv, (to think) how ignorant we are ! ilig n' inijXBi ng tpopog (Soph.). So tiiSaipav fioi 'SbiKpa.TTig i^aivcTo — s dSiag icai ytvvaibig irtXtira (PL), when I thought how fear- lessly — , though this may also be explained as } 198 a, R. .S.' d irpig rbv Oviarriv ' Not as Ellendt s. v. (is explains, = oiirios &aTt Irijru/iuis dyytXBsvTa (^iribig clpti- /ikyov) SoKtlv. '^ Xen. An. 2, 5, 39, oiiK ahxvvtitdt — , o'lTivtg i/ioaavrtg ripXv — , rois dvSpag avToig olg ufivvrt iig dvoXbiXkKaTt, an anacoluth. : itg either = (to think) how — .' or on ToiovTuig, that you have so — . 348 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 308, 309. [§ i>£ iifiei luwpaTTeTo, PI. Crat. 395, may be explained as a parenthic exclamation, how 307.] ruthless^ I Baviiaarh ydp to toIov iiq hXiaBdvii, Soph., whence the adverbial phrases eaviiaarde o)e, § 198 a, R. 4. — In wishes, wj oXoiro! how (T wish) he might perish ! unless this is rather to be referred to the ancient use of w's demonstr. = ovtioq. But comp. TTwe av in wishes, § 129, R. 1. — Possibly, Cig Sri ironical : how much forsooth it is the case that — / but see under c. f) In object-sentences, § 123, (is for oVwc with fut. indie. imjitKuuBai iyg laovrai, how they shall be : with subj., liriniKovvTai iae ixy ovriaq, prop, how it may be so (the latter usage is rare. — In final sentences with subj. and opt., § 122, 13), a, b. d))/ y't^vpav \iaci o>e firi Siaj3^Te = either (considering, planning, &c.) how you shall not cross, or with the notion of intention as explained under c. So KBpoe piXmv (^ero StXaOai big avvipyoie fX<"> •^^"' O" "S ""> ^^^ § ^^^ '■ t""' "^5 "" ^'''^ °P'"' """^ ''°"''" Xeio oiKoJo/tfii' lie dv cfKOjiaxioSai iKavi. ttri, = in the manner in which — , } 137. — With the past tense of the indie, wg is used in the same manner as 'iva, see } 131 b, R. 3, to denote an unattained result : ri fi ov Xa/iiav lureivas tv6ie, cif ISti^a firjiroTt ifrnvrbv avOpoiirotaiv evOtv r/v ysydig, (so) as I should never have shown — , = so had T never shown, approx. to the final that I might never — . See under 'iva. g) To the same head belongs the use of u>s instead of on after verba declarandi et sentiendi, § 159, R. 3, as we sometimes in the like ease use how, or how that (and in vulgar Engl, as how). jiaQiiv rbv 'S.u'epiwQ Savarov wf KpuTrrotro yevofievoQ Kat mq 6\iyot rjaav ot iviaTafiEvoi airbv Xlepaiiov, when he learnt the death of S., hdw (that) the fact of its having talten place was concealed, and how (that)'/eu> — . With verbs of fearing, considering, &c., cis with fut. indie, is rare : /^i} dtiatirt dig ovx nSemg KuBev- SyjffeTe, (Xen.). h) When wf with inf. denotes effect or consequence (more commonly illgrc). it may be explained as representing the correlation roaovrog — ouoc, Toiovrog — olos. Thus, lipog i>c dvo rpiriptig irXsciv ifioii, a breadth (so great, or such) as for two triremes to sail abreast : and >j iig with inf. after a comparative, /jsijw jj wf (airrt) ^ipuv. So fjLilZova riytitta/ievog tivat f/ i>g kvl HiaiBag rriv TrapaaKivijV (Jfen., suppl. tlvai). In Herod, and Att. poets, sometimes also in Xen., uig for iSan occurs with the finite mood, with the correlation oiiroi — i>g, roiovrog — iig expressed : see the exx. in $ 166 c, R. 2. — 'Qg also occurs (and uigirtp) where we should expect ^ after a com- parative, liS-Wov big fiot jrpoo-qBEt (Lys.). The full construction is rj ug. Thus, /naXa- Ktorspot yiyvovrai ?; wg KaXXiov aiirolg (PL). i) Lastly, ug = ore, ag ISev, when he saw, ut vidit : and hence, like other temporal particles, it denotes cause, see c. " Croesus, as it was summer, did so and so," oig Oepog rjv (Xen.). The comparative tag is strengthened with wtp, uSaircp, just as : oUnig, roiovTog, o airog, iirot; — tHairip. On the ellipsis airip (g, in the sense on oiirwc, see under e. & cSf, demonstr. thus, so. Frequent in Hom. Sg E^or', &c., and in comparisons, i)g 308 ^ — ' "^ — ' """^ "^ — *"■ ■^'*° "^^ "^' ""' *'"*" *"' "'''■'''' '^ ^'^° "^^'^ '" Attic prose. Plato has also wg — ilig : thg npog aarpovojiiav ofiftara Trkirriyfv, tog irpbg ivap/ioviov ipopciv uira (Kivdvvevii) TTayrjvai, Rep. 530 : and S)g tpiiaoiiiv, iA. 415, Stallb., so we shall say. &g oiv ■Koiriatn Kal TTtlBtaBk fioi, id, Prot. 338, ^Am* then ye shall do — . § (i'oT-E =: i)g with the particle t-e, § 227. 309. '- ' ' Heindorf. in I. and inPhaedon., p. 152, explains it, "'perquam saeva," which is not amiss, though many of his exx. are of a different kind. (It may also come under d!) § 310.] "as. "onos. 249 a) It is used in comparisons by Horn, and the Tragedians, iravTeg iHgrt ro?6rai [§ To^iveri, Soph., and now and tlien in the older Attic prose. 309.] b) In the sense (so) that, it refers to a preceding oiirus, or the lilie, expressed or understood, r} S" wJe tXtihiiiv, iliare rif luaaropi ivvsari., Soph, iSar ohSiv awrolj irpovpyov 9v(iv — /iarijv (_Pl.) := quocirca, ^ur, i. e. the case is such that — . GvtiTbc S' 'Opkanie, diari /t^ Xiav arivi (Soph.y c) With infin. £xe«c lyicXij^a (uVre eujuoBirSoi, such as (is reason enough =: &pKovv- Tu>s (iVrc) to be angry, § 152. — So that, see § 166, a, b. (In the passage cited in § 144, R. 1, aivvarov u/jii/ iSan nptaraydpov rovSe aoipitripov iXicBai (j3paPevTi)v tUv Xoycuv), liVrE is not superfluous : this construction occurs only with dliv. and the like, and implies the looking out, &c. for a way so as to — : i. e. it is impossible for you to be in such a condition as to — : it combines iSivarov kXiaBat and owk eaiaOi oloi Tt iXkoBai. d) With the participle, in Herodot. where the Attics have oici or &ti : ^v yap aSiivarog, (ujrt mjTro/ilKov tov /iqpoS. — Cf. § 166, note. This is properly the dependent interrogative adverb corresponding with irSQ, how, 310. as o-iroaos with woaog, o-ttote with ttots, &c. Thus, ttrrw S" ovv oTtog vfiiv ^iXov (Soph.) : the direct interrogation is irwe iiuv ^iXov ; indirect or dependt. (aKsipaaOc) oVwf li. 0. : hence, (say for yourselves,) how you Wee to have it, (and) so let it be =: so be it, as you like. In most of its usages it coincides with uiq, differing from it (originally) only as implying a question how ? a) As correlated to SiSi, ovTiag, Frequent in poetry, but less so in prose. "Ottws cffatrrof vn&v — /SovXcrai, tovtov tov rpoffov ^tperd) rijv ip^^ov (Isocr.) = ovriva rpoTTOV, X9^) Toiffibv (rutfta OdirTiiv ovroiQ onotg hv riyy vopifiov tlvai (PI.). IIoici OTTiag apiaT6v aoi Soku dvai (Xen.). Like i>s in comparisons, it frequently follows the term compared : 'Epiun — ognQ avTaviararai, Truierijc ovug kg xupag, oil KaKSg ^povii (Soph.). b) The sense on, after verba declarandi, &c., is even more rare (viz. like iig, especially after a negatived verb of this kind : oA Xsyu owag), and where it does occur, the sense is still that of a depend, interrogation : tovtov t^ot Ttg av tiiriiv oiriag ov SUaiSv iariv ivoBvijaKHv ; (Xen.) = irUg uv S., " how is it not just — .' can any one say how f " tovt' airi fni} jiot ^pat,' liirutg oiric tl xanog (Soph.), don't tell me (that you are not a villain) : how are you not a villain? Comp. } 159, R. 3. c) The force of oVidi; is just the same in oix tad' iiffwc — . there exists not the way in which, = it cannot be but that — , § 102 b, R. 2 : 122, R. 2, and in the ellip- tical otrx iiirus — aXKa — , " I say not how — " = not only — , but — , § 212. — It should be observed, however, that this phrase (and ovx on) is sometimes not only, sometimes not only not. Thus, oiix oViog irpiaiv, AW (or aXXd icai) t^vytv, should prop. ^ / say not how he was frightened (he was frightened, and not only that) but he alsojied. oiix oTrug tpvyiv, 6Xk' oiiSi irpiaiv — : here the negation in ovSi extends to both members, he did not — / say not, fiee — but (not) even tremble. 'E^wyev, ovx 6V(Ds tTptatv, hejled, (I say not how =) much more, he was afraid; fugit, nedum extimuerit. But in the usage of the language, oix oTri>>g in the first clause is often non solum non, even when the adversative clause is positive : thus, ow^ oVcuj x''?'" "iroXg exeic, dXXd /coi — Kord. tovtuivi iroXiTiv-g (Dem.), you not only are not grateful to them, but you even — , viz. because the first clause is, to say nothing of your being grateful — (you are not grateful, and not only so) but — ; in other words, ovx iVwc has become a 350 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 311. [§ phrase of negation, as if it were one word, like ovmag. On the other hand, in ovx oirwe 310.J rovg iroXeniovs krpk^avTo .oVEWtivsq, aWa Kai T7)V x*^pt^v a-iirutv ixaKUffav (^Xen,)^ the _ oix oTTuig is not treated as a negation of irp., but retains its proper force, I say not how they routed — ; they not only did that, but also — . With the infinitive : /i?) oVwg opxitaBai, aW ovS' opOovaBat iSvvaa9e, not only not to dance, but not even to stand upright (Xen.). (rois Qt]l3aiovc) jjyeiro oix ovuis avTiirpa^eiv — dWa. Kal avarpaTiv- auv (jDem.), that they would not only not act aghinst him, but would even join with him in the expedition : = that far fiom acting against him, &e. d) With the superlative, oVajj apiara : to be explained in the same way as wf, viz. oTTwc Svvarov iffrt, &c. (" how can it be best done?") e) After such verbs as OKovtiv, PovXtviaBat, itrixovaaBai, airovSaZ^iv, tppovriZiiv, and the like : to see how, &c. ; see the rules and exx. in the §§ referred to in the Index. Hence the ellipsis, oTrwf oiv iaiadt, (see then) how ye shall be. — Also after verbs of fearing and of prohibition, J 124 b, e.g. Skioixa oVwf /«) yivijaETai, I fear (considering with myself) how it shall not be, 'ATrttptiTal fiot, oiriaQ jxrjdkv kpH — , the prohibition being, opa ottw^ fiijdkv epeig. f) As final particle, oVws and own>g ytii with subj. and opt., } 122 and 131 b. ei'g Kaipbv fimig oiriag i-Kovyg = your intention being how you may hear. On oiriiig dv with subj., see under "Av, § 302. It results from the proper interrog. signification of oitiog that this particle (not i>g or iVo) can be used with fut. indie, in the final sense, see the exx. at end of § 122. (To do so and so) oirmg jiaxovvrai z= with this view and intention, how they shall fight. g) Its use with histor. tenses of indie, to denote an unattained result is rare. 'Exp^v at Uriyaaov Ztv^ai OTVuig tijialvov Tpayiiciirepog =i that you might have appeared, prop, how you would have — . See the expl. under 'iva, s 'iva. 311. '^^^ ^"^^ ^^ either the pronoun of the third person 'i or i, or perhaps more probably the relative o- with the vowel lightened (attenuated) into i. The original meaning is " where," " in which (or, what) case," &c. (comp. iv in IvBa, where, and the first element of in-de, Mn-de, last of aVio-guin.') a) ubi and quo, 'Iv oi%£rai, where (whither) it is gone, Horn, Od, 4, 821 : and demonstratively, 'iva yap ag, it is used with the historical tenses of the indicative to denote an unattained result, i. e. something which would be (or would have been) attained on the supposition made by the speaker (in the form of a wish, a question implying a wish, or of a declaration of what should be, or should have been). Here, " I wish he had come, in which case (^ so that) I should (might) have seen him," implying, " but he did not come, so I did not see him." See the exx. in J 131 b, R. 3. Thus, " he does (did) so and so, 'iv y (tit)) ru^Xds, as the case wherein he may (as § 312.] -INA. -OTi. 251 he purposes) .be blind ;" but " he should have done so, &c., V rj (imperf. indie.) [§ ru^Xoc, as the case in which he would have been blind." The force of the latter 311.] clause rests upon the convertible proposition, " where this (e. g. the doing) is, there that (e.g. the being blind) is," and "where that is, there this," so that the one being denied, the other is also denied. The absence of dv from the relative clause is explained by the kindred meaning of the two particles, iva and dv : comp. U l/SouXd/iijuXsyctv, iJKovaag dv, " if I had wished to speak, you would m thai case have heard," with ipovXo/ttiv dv X'etat, 'iva TJKovaag, " I wish I had spoken, in which case you would have heard." Where dv does occur in the relative clause, it is drawn in by some other consideration : thus, xaiTot ov irpoaiiKtv dW ti9ig Xsytiv — 'iva iidWov dv imanvtro i0' v/iiiiv (JLsceus^, the dv attaches itself to /uaXXov as a set phrase (see dv, § 299). 6V.. § This is the Lat. quod, our that : not originally the neut. of ojrif, but the ancient 312. form of neut. ace. oiSg, or, covered with the vowel i. Hence Hom. has indifferently and on. a) that, after verba declarandi, sentiendi, &c. oAic di«c o fie /SdXtv Alag ; Hom. prop, hear you not this — which {= that) Ajax has wounded me f \iyti {dieoiti, o'lirai, &C.) 6V« voaiiq : fXtycv or« ivoaovv, oVi voaoXfii. § 159, R. 3, 4 ; 178 a, R. 5. On the moods in object-sentences with on, see § 108. 130 a, b ; 137. On the difference between on and iig (ottwe), § 159, R. 3. ""On and wj are very rare after verbs denoting a purely subjective or uncertain view (e. g. oUaOai, SoKtlv, vo/iiZnv, fdvai = ' to declare one's own opinion :' but we find fdvai on, PI. Gorg. 487 ; ue, Dem. 4, 48, Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 7 ; ohaOai x oaov and oiix olov : ot /liv oix oaov ouk tJiivvavTO, dXX' oiS" iailiQriaav, Thuc., which might have been expressed by oiix Sirotg, or by ^i) (oix) on, ^itv- vavTO. Oiix ''^'"' i>^e\ilv SvvatvT dv roig (piXovg, dXX' oiiS' auroig aiiZeiv, Polyb. b) because, for Sid tovto on, whence also Start, apa rb 'oaiov, on Saiov iart, j>t\etrat virb tS)V Oeiiv, f/, on ^ikelrai, oat6v ian ; PI. Aid tL Si aXXo aXvTroi dXXijXoif lialv ot iltirXeovreg, ^ StSn iv rdUi — (cdflijvrai ; Xen. Rem. The poets have in the same sense, ovvma = o^ eVeko, i. e. roirov 'ivexa, o — , and odovvtKa = oVou tveKU. With the superlative, though written as the conjunction, on rdxiara, the word is o n, ace. neut. governed by Svva/iai, or nom. neut. subject to Svvarov iart, or the like. — Also in th? elliptical on nv (except), the full construction is ovSiv o n /iq. 252 APPENDIX ON THE PARTICLES. [§ 313 316. 5 ore, when. 313. This adverbial form is not a compound with rt, but its second syllable is an ancient case suffix : cf. quum, quando. Like other temp, adverbs, it is also used in a causal sense, f 127, R. 1, whence on nfi ^ quando non and d non. On iie/ivtiiiai, ore, see § 178 a, R. 5, and note. — With /iiv and Si, sometimes — sometimes, the accent conforms itself to that of ttote, viz. ork iikv — brk SL The correlative of oVt is j-dre, then. The corresponding interrogative irore, when? indef. woj-l, at some (any) time, § 274, and relative (depend.) interrogative, oTrdrc. Hence okore, as implying the question when f is indefinite. Cf. TrapjjyyeiXEi' vita- likviiv OTc oi TToXs/iioi 67riKlo(V70 (JfcK.), and et(ii9Et yoBv oTrore Sivp' ifiPaXKoi, when- ever — , Xen. S ojro«, where. 314. As ore, TTorf ; bttoTi, irort (end.) of rime, so oi, irov, ottov, iro« (end.) of place. The correlative (jov being lost) is £x<6a, demonstr. or ivravBa. — In prose, ottou has taken the place of o^, as the simple relative where. — Sometimes, but rarely, it is since, siqmdem, quandoquidem : and then the apodosis is often ritrov, in the sense, if — , then surely, ottov yap * A9r]v6Sb)poQ xai KaXXiarpaTOQ — olot re ytyovatrtv, riTrov — rifitie — dv SwriBiitiiiev (^Isocr.~), if A. and C. have been able, surely we should be able. i ittn (inudrf). 315. Properly a particle of time, when, after, postguam, but, like most particles of time, also denotes cause, since, quoniam, quandoquidem. sirti raj^ttrra, as soon as ever. — Both are also since (ex quo) of time. Oi iroMg xpovog inHlrj x^TSvag \ivove ivav- aavTo (j>opovvTtt (Thuc). With av : ktruSav, ijrav, sTrr]V, the first by far the most frequent, and the second somewhat more so than the third. In the sense "fori/ not," "for otherwise" "for if so" (where ei ii iiii, or d Si after a negat. proposition might have been used), there is an ellipsis : since (if you doubt it, or, if you think so, &c.) — . Ndo-ov yap 6 iraTt/p dWoKorov airroB voatl, rjv oiS" dv tig yvoiq ttot ovS' dv $v/i/3aXot fi /i^ 7rv9oi9' fijiSiv, sirtl ro7ra$Ert, Aristoph. I "'. if- QIC This is an ancient dative of the pronoun of the third person, t or 'I, comp. Lat. si (sibi). Its original force is " in this that," " in the (case, hap, event) that," " on the (condition) that."' For the use of ei, idv, rjv, in conditional propositions, see the Index. From such expressions as aKeipai il — , consider if — , results the sense whether in ' This (the reflexive) pronoun is closely connected with the relative pronoun, so that, in point of sense, the conditional particle may be said to be directly derived from the relative. Thus in Sanscrit, from relat. yas, ya, yat, '6s, ij, b, we have yadi = 'on, "when," and yadt = "if;" and in German, "wenn" is both when and if. Accordingly, the usages of the relat. (and interrog.) and of the con- ditional particle very often run over into each other. Thus, ore and ottou approach to the sense of condition : it rig is more nearlj' = Sg ng than " if any :" Qavjia^ui li represents 0. oVt (see § 194 c) ; the tl of wishing may also be expressed by i)g and ndg (the relat. utinam), and the interrogative tl (whe-lher) by Trorepa. § 317, 318.] 'oTE. "onoY. ehei. ei. eita. eheita. 253 depend, interrogation, § 199 b. ei (idv) is thus used only in indirect, and, indeed, [§ properly only in double questions, denoting a wavering between two considerations : 316.] but often only one member is expressed, the other being present in the mind of the speaker. Where both are expressed, the second is introduced by tj, § 199 c. Siclif'ai ei 6 'EW^vwv vo/tog xdWiov Ij^si, whether it be not (Aen.). Seo/iai vjuuv tovtiji riv vovv irpoakxuv ei liKUia \iyiii fj ni] (= /tit) SiKaia) PI. Comp. jrpiv SijXov tlvm . . . TrSnpov H^povTai Kvp^ q 08 (= oix i'f/ovTai). — The same thing is expressed by tire — iiTt, § 199 c. In poetry we also find eirt — ■§, £' — fire, and — cite with the first EirE omitted. Rem. Eire — Eire is also conditional, viz. where several cases are put condi- tionally, both if — and if: but here also in English we use the interrogative whether — or. See § 194 a. The use of it in wishes, ei ydp w^eXov irpiSrepos iSiiv, is elliptical : if it were so, it S would be well. Thus we say, O if it were so! (i.e. how happy I should be!) — 317. Hence \Vith suffix Bt, § 239, tWt, utinam. See exx. in § 129, and R. 2. El ye (:= si qmdem) if at least, if, that is (ei — ys when the ys distinguishes the interposed word, ei ye when its influence extends to the whole clause). OiStig, ei ye ai aXij9q Xsyeif, nobody, if, that is (or, if, at least) what you say is true. Etn-ep is ei strengthened by ^rkp. It calls attention to the condition, and so adds emphasis to it. The force of irep may be rendered in the condition by always sup- posing that — , in the apodosis by, then it quite follows that — ■. Kal ei, is even if: the xai emphasizes the condition, marks it as improbable, ex- treme, or as the most unfavorable that can well be conceived. In el Kai, the icai gives emphasis, not to the condition, but to the thing supposed. Kai el Xlyw, even supposing I say, i.e. go so far as to suppose that I say. ei xal Xeyo), supposing I even say, i. e. suppose I go so far as to say. For (see § 222) icai adverbial implies a cor- relation Kai — Kai : therefore the first is boi (aXXwc), koi ei Xeyiu ; the second, ei /cof (aXXus), Kai Xeyw. This is the principle of the distinction, but in practice the difference is often so slight, that no reason appears why one form should be chosen rather than the other. elra. eireira. § These particles, perhaps, are related to ei, ivei, as IrJTa to Sri, Trivueavra to rriviKa ; oio. and thus they may be considered as denoting the demonstrative apodosis of a sup- pressed condition (;/) or relative (when). Thus Ellendt remarks that elra may sometimes be explained by a sentence with el or el xai. Soph. Phil. 1337, dXX' eUaSia Stjt' ; elra irUe o Svaiiopos elg ipSis — eJ/" i >• e- (and if I yield) then how — .* Others make iTra cognate with en (corresponding forms in Sanskrit ati, eta), and iTreiro = iv' elra (KUhner). — In Latin, the sense is expressed by deinde : (a) In enumerations, irpurov (/lev) — , elra, eVeiro (^e) — (b) In the usage with participles, see § 175 a (comp. 181, R. 2). (c) In interrogations, expressed with vehemence or indignation : as in the ex. given above. Eu 1061, e>i), 6V<, ei vouiKoiui eeois cLvBpiivMV rt ijipovTileiv, ovk dv d/ieXoiijj' avrHv. S. 'Eweir' oiiK oiti dipovTileiv ; (Xen.) It may be explained = post talia (Gronov.), quum ita sit, ergo : the Lat. uses deinde in the same way : quoe nunc deinde mora est, aut quid jam, Turne, 254 APPENDIX ON THE PABTICLES. [§ 319. [§ retractas ? Virg. Aen. 12, 889. Hercules solus domat. Cur deinde latebras autfugam 318.] xiecors petam ? Sen. Here. 1407. — Often K^ira, Kavura, which are more emphatic : KamiTa towvtov ovra oil (piKiig aiiTov ; (Xera.) — EZra, tiriiTa, and then, } 185 a, R, 6. § 319. This particle is cognate with Lat. et, at, prep, ad, a^que ^ arf-que. Its meaning is, further (on), yet, still. Comp. also Lat. item, ravra jiiv ovv icavra ofioiuie ti/i^o- TB(io)v iariv &\\& rb /taxeoOai ovKsn (oirK en, non itern) ajjujioTepwv (^Ken.). iLviarpar (jijiaav ol afifi fSaaiKea, ireioi fitv oiiKeTi, tCiv Sh iifirkiav b \6foQ lvBir\ii(t9ri (^Xen.). INDEX I. A privativum ; adjectives so compounded, with the genitive, 63 a, R. 1, and c. ayajrav with accus. and dative, 44 a, R. ayysWeiv rivi woiovVTa and jroieiv, 178 a, R. 6. iSiKtiv, to have done wrong, 110 a, R. 2. -aioj, adjectives in, as adverbs, 86 a, R. aMavcaOai c. g., 58 a, R. 3 ; rivd ttex- T<»K6Ta and nvbg avKopavrovvToe, 178 a, note. alaxvvcaOai riva Troutv Ti, 145, R. 1, note ; XifOVTa and \kyuv, 177 b, R. S. ainof with the simple infinitive, with the genitive of the infinitive, and with the accusative and infinitive, 164, R. 3 ; rb S" aiTtov — yap, 196 a, R. aicoiitv with gen., 58 a, R. 3 ; in the sense to obey, with gen. and dat., 58 b, and R. aKoviiv n rivoc, 60 a. ctKoiisiv Tivd iJKOVTa. nvig ^laXsyofikvov, 178 a, note ; izkovui rivd ^kciv, 178 a, R. 6. 'Axoiiiv and dcovirai added to adject, and phrases, 150 a, R. 2 ; cf. 151, R. 1. aXif c. g., 49 b. oKiiTKonai voiSiv, 178 b. dXXd (AXK' oi), 187 with R. j in answers, 199 c, R. 2 ; iX\& yap, aXK' oi yap, 196 b ; dWd with the verb repeated as answer, 199 c, R. 2; dWd rij ibid. [App. 275—282.] dXXoc. 01 dWot, tve (you) others, the rest of us (you), 6 a, note ; 6 dWoq vfikxt- po; and dXXof o vfn., 10, R. 5 ; aXKoq constructed as comparative, 91 (ovSdg dXXof irXjjw, R. 2) ; dXXui' pleonastic with the superlative, 96, R. 3. 'AXXo TI ^, aWo Ti, dWo ri j) oil, dXXo tl ov in questions, 1 99 b, oiSiv dXXo i), ri dXXo ij, 215 b, R. I ; dXX' ^ after a nega- tion, 9] , R. 2. [Cf. App. 281, 282.] dXXorpioc c. g. and c. d., 62, R. Sfia with partcp., 175 b; a/ta riXiip avia- XovTt, 181 a, R 6. dfttivov juoi larai voiriaaVTi, 1 77 b, R. 5. d;ti0i, construction, 72. dfx^oTipov, ct/i^dTtpa, as predicate, 1 b, R. 5 ; as apposition to the predicate, 19, R. 3. dv in general, 107 ; dv c. imperf. and aor., sometimes c. plusquamperf. in- die, 117a; in object and other ac- cessory propositions, 117 b, R. 1 ; c. tior. of that which might have hap- ■ The numbers refer to the paragraphs and remarks : n. = marginal note. The particular words which come under a general rule (especially of case-government) are, except in a few instances, not specified in this Index ; e. g. for dtaaitv x"P« (22, R. 2), i^aaiXivaa, became king (Hi, R. d), see in Index II. "intransitive verbs" and "aorist of verbs denoting office and public station ;" and so Jn other instances. 256 INDEX I. pened, ibid., R. 2; c. aorist or im- perfect, which was wont to happen, ibid., R. 3 ; omitted with the imper- fect indie, 118; av with the future indie, poetical, 118, R. 3. ' kv with ois and oVwg in final sentences, 122; with relative words and conjunctions withthesubjunetive, 126, 127; omitted, 126, R. 2, 127, R. 2 ; different from av witli opt. in a relative sentence, 126, R. 3 ; av retained in a relat. sentence which has passed from the subj. into the opt., 132 b, R. " kv with the opt. in hypothetical sentences, 135 ; po- tential, in principal and accessory sen- tences, 136, 137(123, R. 3); whether omitted, 138, R. 2. " kv c. inf. 173 (separated from the inf. and repeated, ibid., R. 1); not c. fut. infin., 173, R. 2. "kv c. partcp., 184 (not c. fut., R.). " kv belonging to two verb.s, put once or twice, 139 a ; to be un- derstood from the preceding clause, ibid. Position of av ; detached from verb and repeated, 139 b, with R., note (173, R. 1, 219 b, R.). Trans- posed (oiiK AS av, ei), 139 b, R. Kdv = av — Kai el, ibid, ellipt. with verb omitted, 139 c. [App. 297—302.] iva c. ace. and poet. c. dat., 28 a, with R., note. dvayKal^HV riva tl, 25, R. 2, (ivQKus fx"" Tivog, 63 c, R. 2. ivaiUfivriQ rivo'e, 63 C, R. 2. Sia >■' with subjunctive, 121 ; with the fut. indie, R. 1 ; exuv, with, 1 74 b ; Bavfiaaag l^w, 179 ; ixuv ((caXws) as adjective after H/ii, 180 c ; ex'^" Q^VP^^s), 176 c, R., Tl Exwv — ; 176 b, R. Ixpij". XPVv without dv, 118 a. eiog ('iuig irip) [App. 304] with aorist, 114 c, R. 1. H. "H [App. 283—285] with comparatives, 89 ; )) Kara, ri &gTi, 90, R. 4 j after words denoting an opposition : roivav- INDEX I. 259 riov ^, 91, R. ] ; inserted and omitted after ir\iov, IXarrov, 92. •?. n — v, ^roi — ij, 186 [App. 283 and 255] ; 7>, or eke (sometimes with an infin. not quite accurately used), R. 1 [App. 283] J IJ — ^ for El — q in de- pend, questions, 199 c, R. 1. [App. 284.] ^ interrogatively, 199 b. [App. 246.] y Pfara, 96. y (subjunctive) omitted, 215 a, R. 2. 4/3avXa/ii]v av, 117 b, R. 2 ; dv omitted, 118, note. i7yoS/iai nvog and Tivi difiPerent, 58 b, R. Kfiij, ^pp. 242.] qttv as aorist, 113, R. 2 ; ya Ipuv, 175 d, R. 1. ^KEtv with adverbs and the genitive (ev ^Ktiv TivSe), 49 b, R. 2 ; fJKia as perf., 110 a, R. 2 J ^cov as aorist, 1 13, R. 2. iJKuTTa, riKUTTo. ye in ansvfers, 199 c, R. 2. 7]\ucos, attraction, 106. n/tepa omitted, 87 b, R. 1. fiv, where the present might have been used, 1 13, R. 3 ; ^v instead of ^v dv, 118 a and b. Hv dpo, ^jop. 257 c] [^roi, App. 255.] e. Oav/taZtiv Tiva rivog, OavfidZav rivoc, 61b, R. 1 ; TOVTo aov BavfiaW, 53 ; 9aviidliu>, £j, 194 c. [App. 316, note.] — Oe, —Otv [App. 239], 15 o, ^ 01 Oavofrf;, 183, R. 1, note. Bvtiv TO. AvKaia, 26, R. 2. 1. 'levai ipovvra, 175 d, R. 1 ; isvai rov vp6au>, 51 b, R. lEpdf rivof, 62 ; Upov omitted with the genitive, 47, R. 2. 'Iva [App. 311] with subjunctive, 122. 131 b i with optative, 131 a ; with in- dicative of the intention of an action which has not resulted, 131 b, R. 3 ; 'ivan; 189 a, note, [^iv av, App. 302.] 'Itttos, cavairy, 18 c. Kai [App. 222—226], xai — Kai, H -r- Kai, 185 a with R. 1 and 3 ; xai — rl, R. 3, Kai — Si, ibid., R. 2 ; Kai omitted before clra, iirnTa, ibid., R. 6 ; xai (tb — Kai) in statements of time {when), 185 b : Kai after adjectives and adverbs of likeness and equality, 185 c [icai Sri, App. 236 ; Kai ye, ib. 249 ; icat roi, ib. 253] ; icat, icatircp with participles, 175 e ; icai oi, 187, note. Kai ei and £1* icai, 194 d. [iijpp. 226. 317.] Kai . fidXa, Kai iroWd in answers, 199 c, R. 2. [icai raSra, App. 253.] KOivorepoQ in a sense approaching to the positive, 93. icaXfiv Ttvd Tif ovond rt, ovond ri nvi, 24 b, R. 1. Ka/itiKos in the sing., of a multitude, 18 c. Kav ei, 139 b, R. Kara, construction, 70 ; verbs com- pounded with Kara, denoting a dis- tinction, 23 b ; verbs compounded with, with gen., 59 a; also used in the passive, 56, R. 2. KfTO for elra with participles, 175 a. Kariaya rije Kt^aXijs, 51 b, R. Karr/icoog with gen. and dat., 63 c, R. 1. [kI, kev, App. 297 sqq.] KE^oXaiov Se — yap, 196 a, R. [App. 260.] Kotvoe with gen. and dat,, 62, R. Kparelv Tivog and rivd, 58 b with R. KpeiTTiDv Ei/ii with participles, 177 b, R. 4. Kvpio^ £1/11 woiiov ri, 177 b, R. 3. Aayxavetv, to become by lot, 20, R. 1. Xa/t^dvetv ri, Xa/tPdveaBai rivof, 57 a, note. XanPdveiv Tivd rijg l^uvrig, 57 a, R. \av6dveiv with participle, 177 b ; with on, ibid., R. 2 ; IXaSov, Xtyffiu with th^ aorist of the participle, 183, R. 2. XsyEiv riva ri, KaKUC> 25, R. 3 ; \iy(iv, to tell a person to, 146, R. 1. Alyoi, / mean, with the foregoing case, or with accus., 19, R. 4. XoiJopEiv riva, Xoif opEiirdai rivi, 82 d, R. 1 . XoiTTOf, ro', and rov Jyoiirov, 66 a. 260 INDEX I. M. Ma with accusative, 28 b. [App. 245.] fiaBoiv, t{ fiaBwv, 176 b, R. fiiXa separated from its adjective, 218 b j fiaXa (koi fia\o), ftaXiirra in answers, 199 c, R. 2. /laXXov, redundant with comparatives, or omitted after certain verbs, 93 c ; iiSK- \ov rj oil, 89, R. 2 [Ajy). 285] ; juaXXov ij in comparison of different qualities, 93 a. Mapadwvi, 45 b. ftafiTvpiov Se — yap, 196 a, R. [App. 260.] /icXtt, /ikXto, construction, 58 a with R. liiXKiiv (fiiWui, ^/utWov, ^/ilXXijoa), peri- phrastic, 116 ; £t fieWb), 6 fikWiaV) ibid. fieixvijaBat, construction, 58 a, R. 2. ^l/t0((r0at, construction, 36 a, R. I. Iiev [App. 230], 188 with R. (itivye, note) ; omitted, ibid, note, and R. 2 (xaipet. Ton S" aXyti) ; position, ibid., R. 1 ; /xkv — flip — di — Si, ibid., R. 4 ; jjev with- out following Sk, ibid., R. 5 ; fikv — Sk instead of the connexion of a primary with an accessory sentence, 189 a and b ; /itv — S'e inaccurately connected (anacoluth.), 216, R. I . [jikv Sri, App. 236. 250. (ttv oiv, ib. 269.] fikvsi ire trv6s(T6ai, 145, R. 1. likvTot [App. 254] with the verb repeated in answers, 199 c, R. 2. Iikpog, T<> e/iov Itepog, 31 c. ^fiearoe d/ii with participle, 177 b, R. 5. (lira, construction, 74. liara/ikXti /loi with participle, 177 b, R. 5. Iierakv with participles, 175 b, 181 a, R. 2. HeraHOtaBai tovto ilvai, 159, R. 2. fjerfx"" A'^pofj ftirkxtiv Tivog, 57 a, notei fikxpi[App. 805]; /ikxp' ixj/k,S\. Mkxpi with aorist in the indie, 114 c, R. 1 ; fiEXP« instead of ^Ixpi av, 127, R. 2. pil [App. 286 sqq.] with subjunctive in final sentences, 122 ; after Silowa, 0w- XaTTojioi, &c., 124 a (with the fut. indie, ibid,, R. 1 ; with the present after dpfi, ibid.) ; elliptically with the subjunct. present, 124 a, R. 2 ; with optative, 131 ; with the imperative present, aorist subjunct. in prohibi- tions, 142 and R. [App. 286.] Mij (liriSiis, &c.) and oii different, 200 sqq. M^ very rare in a principal sentence in indie. [App. 287] or optat. with av, 200, R. ; fit] with the imperat. and prohibitive subjunct., 201 a [App.286] ; in final and object-sentences, 201 b ; 0o|3ov/iai jii] — ov, ibid. ; rarely /tii — firi, note ; ju^ in conditional sentences, 202 a, after temporal particles with dv or without dv, of the action so often as occurring, with ore, oirort, ottov in causal signification, 202 b ; in relative sentences, 203 ; in depend, interrog, sentences after li and ottids, 204 a ; in the second member of a disjunctive question, 204 b ; with the infin., 205 ; with adjectives and participles without the article, 206 a and" b, with R. 1 j with adject, and partic. with the art., 207 [App. 288] ; in later writers, where the earlier have ov, 207, R. 2. Mij with infin. after verbs of negative meaning, 210 with R. 1 and 156, R. 3, 4. M77 in prohibitions of two members, 189 a, R. 1. M^ (Jpa liif) interrog., 199 b. [App, 287.] Ml} ovTiD, fxri fioi without a verb, 216 b. M^ ov [App. 294 — 296] with infin. after a negative verb, 211 a with R. ; after expressions of disapprobation, &c., ibid, b ; with par- ticiples, ibid. c. M>) 'oTi (fij) on — dXX' oiSl, oil — firj on — aXX' oiiSe), 212.' [App. S12.] Mjj Ti yc, 212, note. [Mij- Toi ye, App. 256.] Oil firi, see oi. /iijJI, fjjJTE — lirjTi, fii]Ti — re, 208, /iqrc — lii}S' av, firjTi — Se, ibid., R, I . [finv, App. 231 sqq. 236. 250.] fitixavri, rig fTlx- with ace. c. infin., 165 a. ^iBpoC Set and simply iwcpov, 57 a, note. /tovoe, where in English we should use the adverb, 86 a ; /idvoc rSiv dWuiv, 96, R. 3. jivpla (^iairig, &C.), 18 c. liHv, fidv oh, fiuiv fiii, 199 b. [App. 267.] N. [Nai, vi], App. 245.] veiiirepog in the sense of the po.sitive, 93. vueav 'laOfua, 26, R. '2 ; vucu, have coit' INDEX I, 261 gaererf, 110, R. 2 ; hktiat noKiiv, 145, vo/ui^Eti/ with dative, 44 b. [vvv, vvv, vv, App. 243, 244.] '0 r?)j' 7rop0up«'Ja, the man with the — , 32, R. 1. o /ilv — o U, 188, R. 2. o, ojrtp, 8 KOI, S (caf as connecting particle, 195 d, R. Ui, h^e, 100 c. aS6q omitted, 87 b, R. 1 ; 6S6v, 31 d, R. uZhv /tvpov, 60, R. 2. of 5a with partcp., Un or ilc, 178 a and R. 5 (rare with ace. c. infin., R. 6). OXia, IV laSi extra structuram, 193 ; tv olS" on, laff oTt added for assurance, ibid., R. 0759' 8 dpaaov, 141, R. 1. oiVeioe Tivoe and nvi, 62 with R. oUta omitted with the gen., 47, R. 2. o7/iot Siiv with nominative and infin., 160, R. Olftat, oi£» extra structuram^ 193 ; olnai Si, kqi (tv and oliiai Si Kal ak, 193, note. oi;(o/iai with signification of perfect, 110 a, R. 2. oloj; with the superlative, 96, R. 1 ; at- traction with oIoE, 106 J o'iif aoi ivSpi, 106, R. 2 ; oloc, TotovToe oloe instead ofii'cTe with infin., 166 c ; olog rf, olov Tt, ibid., R. 1 ; oioff =: OTt Toiovros, 198 a, R. 3 ; o'of with adjectives (aftrixavoe olog), ibid., R. 4 ; in ex- clamations of wonder, 198 b, R. Olov, ola Sri with participles, 175 e. 6\tyov with comparatives, 43, R., 6\Lyav, as adverb, 57 a, R., note ; without dv with aorist indie, 118, R. 2.' o'Xof, the article with, 11, R. 4. Sfioioc with dative instead of icai, 37, R. 2 ; ojiOioQ, ifioiuie xai, 185 c. ojiov, adjectives compounded with, with dat. and gen., 37 with R. 1. o/j(Df with partcp. transposed, 175 e. ovojxa, TO, yiaKapraros, rA ovo/ia Suaiav, 49 a, note. ovofia Ti9ia9ai rivi, ovo/ia Swfftav r. Tivi, 24 b, R. 1. ivo/iaZiiv ilvm, 24 b, R. 2. oirioQ [App. 310], 123, R. 1 j (and iVuf nil) with subjunctive in final sentences, 122, 131 b ; in object-sentences, 123 ; with optat., 131 a ; with the fut. indie, 122, 123 with R. 1 ; with indie, of an action intended, but which has not resulted, 131 b, R. 3 ; ovme (oiriag jiq).> with the fut. indlc. instead of the im- perative, 123, R. 4 ; 6V(i)£ fiii with subjunctive and indie, (for iiif) after verbs of fearing, 1 24 b j ottuiq firi ellip- tically with the fut. indie, 124 b, R. 1. "OTTtof (interrogatively) after verbs such as ittixavdaBai, 145, R. 2 ; after airovSaZnv, and the like, 164, R. 2 ; oTTWf firi after verbs denoting a pro- hibition, or a challenge, 146, R. 2 (124 b) ; oVmc after negatived verba declarandi, 159, R. 3. "Ottmc av in final sentences, 122 [App. 302]. Ohx idTiv oVojc, 102 b, R. 2. 122, R. 2. "Ojrwe with superlatives, 96. opav juj] with subjunct. and indie, 124 with' R. 1 J the infinitives o^av, iSilv after adjective phrases and intransitive verbs, 150 a, R. 2. Off and 8f av, 126, R. 1 ; of in causal re- lative sentences, 105 d (og yt) ; inter- rog. := Of riff, 198 b ; 8ff a.v [App. 298] instead of tl nc, 195 b ; referring to a plural antecedent, 99 d. o'trof, attraction, 106 ; after adjectives (BavpiaiiTbg oaog), 1 98 a, R. 4 ; in ex- clamations of wonder, 198 b, R. ; oaov = ToaovTov (i'ffre with infin., 166 c; ooov jiii, oira/jr), with the partcp., 175 e, note. oaai Tinepai, otrq/ilpai, 106, R. 3. ofTiff as simple relative pronoun, 105 (a man to — , fortv o'crif, oiirwf — ^ffi'if,. in. causal signif.) ; for ei riff, 195 b ; •referring to a plural antecedent, 99 d. "Offriff jSouXei, 103, R. 2, note ; b,Ti (on) with the superlative, 96. [App„ 312 b. '6ti liri, ibid.] ore [App. 313] in causal signif., 127, R. 1 ; Itifivriiiai, ire, 178 a, R. 5, note. OTt [App. 312] and &g after verba decla-. randi, &c., 159, R. 3; a statement be- gun with oVt, carried on the infin., ibid., R. 4. "On after the verbs to know, &c.,, 1 78 a, R. 5. "On, the circumstance that. 263 INDEX I. as regarding the fad that, 1 70 a, R. "On before oratio recta, 192 a ; on, for proof that, 192 b, R. Td Si piMyuiTov, oTi and & Sk jikywTov, ort, 197. "On tI, 198 a, note. 0« (o4ie, oiiiig, &c.) [/c) oi, 105 b, R. oiSi, 208 (cf. ovTt). oiiSdc iljri? oi (^ovSsva ovriva oil), 105 b, R. oiSiv iiaXXov, 43, R. (oiiSev adverb.) j oiiShv tj, 93 C ; oiidkv aWo y, 215 b, R. 1. oiilirtpov, oiidkripa as predicate, 1 b, R. 5. oiiKovv, oiiKovv, 199 b with 11. [App. 268.] oiv [App. 264 sqq.] in resumption, 216. o'vvtKa, oOoivtKa, 159, R. 3. oilTt — oiiTi, oSre — tI, re — oJrrt, 208 ; rl — oi for oiiri, ibid., R. 1 ; ovTt — oSre — oiiii (oiid' aj), oire — , oiiS' ai, ovre, — St, oil — oi, ours — oil, ovre the first time omitted, ibid. Oiirf — oSrE, the connexion resolved, 216, R. 1. o^roc, here, 100 c ; redundant, 100 e ; rpirop- irog roOro, 80, R. ourue with participles, 175 a (181 a, R. 2). iipXiaicavfiv aacfiHas, aSiKiav, ■yiXiora, 61 a and R. 2. [o^pa, App. 303.] n. HaBiiv, TI iraBiiv, 176 b, R. wavToig in answers, 199 c, R. 2. jravv yt, navv fiiv oiv in answers, 1 99 c, R. 2. irapa, construction, 75 ; instead of i>ro, 78, R. irapaaKivaZtadai Troi^ffovra, big Trotr/aovTa, TToiHV, 175 d, R. 1. trag with the article and without it, 11, R. 4 (ol iravTig, in all) ; eg vav KaKOv ikvai, kv iravri kukov elvai, 49 b, R. ; TIf iravTi Kpi'lTTdlV, 43. •jraiiitv and iraveuGai (kiravaaiiriv, kiraii' ij9r)v), 82 b ; Traiiiiv tivcl itoiovvto. ti, 178 b. TretSeiv, vd9ea9ai, ETTfiffSjjv, 82 c, R. 2 ; TTEiBeaBai Tivog for nvi, 58 b, R., note. •jreipdffdai irotovvra for irotuv, 177 b, R. 3. TTEp [App. 247] \v\th participles, 175 e. irepi, construction, 76 ; put after its case, 80 b ; TTspi or simple genitive after , certain verbs, 58 a, R. 1. iripiopav Twa iroiovvrci ti, 178 b (and tt. Ti yiyvtaBai = iSi) ; iripiiSiiv with the aorist of the participle, 183, R. 2. — irXamog, adjectives in, constructed as comparatives, 91. irXiov with or without y, and with gen., 92 {irXiiovg y). \l\kov oiiSkv lari /loi iyavaKToUvTi, 177 b, R. 5. nXyv, oiiSkv dXXo wXtji/, 91, R. 2 ; as ad- versative conjunction, 187, R. 2. rrXyaiov elvai with the dative for the genitive, 55, R. 1. ■Koiiiv Tiva Ti (li), 25, R. 3 ; iv, KoXSig iroiBv, with good reason, 176 c [App. 248 b] ; TToisiaBai oTrXa, to cause to be INDEX I. 263 made for oneself, 82 a, R. 2 ; irouXadai Bripav, and the like, 82 c, R. 1 ; ttowI- aOai Ti TTepi jroXXou, 6\iyov, 65 a, R. jToiof with tHie article, 11, R. 5. jroXXd as adverb, 88 a. iroWaTtXcunoq, construct, as compara;, 91. TToXu wiih compara., 43, R. ; and ttoXX^J sometimes put after the adject., 218 b. 5ro(5pw (aopiag, &c.), far gone, advanced, w any thing, 50 b (diflferent from itoppbi, far from). [wore, App. 274.] iroTtpov (irorEpo) — j/, 199 c. [ttou, App. 272 sq.] irpaTTiiv, irpaTTiaOat, 82 a, R. 2. JTpii' (oil — jrpiv) with indie, aor., 114 c, R. 1 ; irpiv dv with subj., 127, irpiv with opt., 138 ; n-piv with infin., 167 (irplv Tj, ibid., R.). [ylpjo. 306.] jrpo, verbs compounded with, with een., 59 b. irpoKa\iia9ai nva. ti and iXq ti, 25, R. 2. Trpoe, construction, 77 (npbQ Sk, adverb. 77, 2). irpoiiiKu /lot TToiftv and ;ie jroieiv, 164 a ; TTpof^cEv without av, 118 a. wporepaloff as comparative, 91. B-porepov ^ with infin., 167, R. 1. Ilvdoi, 'ladfioi, 45 b. ■nvKva as adverb, 88 a. irvvBaveaOai ri rtvog, 60 a ; wvv6avca9ai n yiyvojitvov and yiyvtaQai, 1 78 a and R. 6. itSiq; TtoBiv; negatively, 199 c, R. 2 ; ir&Q y&p ou ; vSe oi) /liWci in answers, 199 c, R. 2 ; irUg oi (Siivov ;), 199 b, note. TTu; dv in wishes, 129, R. 1. Sfiiielov Se — yap, 196 a, R. [App. 260.] (rrkpytiv ti and Ttvl, 44 a, R. ffvyyiyvbXiKiiv ry kiriOvfiig. Tivog and (but rarely) tivI rijs IviOvftiat, 61 b, R. 1. avu^aivti yiyvia9ai n, 164, and j-J yiy- vofitvov, 177 b, R. 3. avu^ovXtvHV, avulSovKivfaBai, 82 d, R. 2. avp} with infinitive, 167, R. .*. iavcpos I'lu JTOtSv Ti, 177 b; ^avipog, oVi, ibid., R. 2. ' ipaLviaQai with participle, 177 b (wv omitted, R. 1) ; with infin., R. 3. iptvyiiv, to be an exile, 110 a, R. 2. g rdxtara', tem- poral particle [App. 307 d] with aorist or plusquamperfect, 114 c. oic with subjunctive in final sentences, 122. 131 b; with optative, 131 a ; in- stead o( oiriog in object-sentences, 123, R. 6 ; after verbs of fearing, 124 b, R. 2 : dig av with subjunctive in final sentences, 122 [with note, and App. 302] ; itg with potential optative with av of intention and aim, 137. 'Qc and on after verba declarandi et opinandi, 159, R. 3. 'Qs (iig yt) with the infinitive in a restric- tive sense (9i)v), 183, R. 2. Par- ticiple of the aor. with dv, 184. Apposition to the subject or object, 1 9 with R. 1 (as) ; in statement of ex- tent, weight, &c., ibid., R. 2 ; to cha- racterize the whole sentence, 19, R. 3, and 1 97 (jb Si iisyiarov). Apposi- tion of the part to the whole as ob- ject, 32, R. 1. Apposition partitively instead of a partitive gen., 50 b, R. 4. Apposition of an entire sentence, 190. Article, in general, 8 ; where in Engl, a possess, pronoun, 8, R. 1 ; omitted with certain words, 8, R. 2 ; position of, with substant. having an adject, or partcp., 9 a ; put to the following ad- jective, 9 a, R. 3 ; connecting adverbs or prepositions with substantives, 9 b ; with substant. governing a gen., 10 with R. 2, and (gen. of a pron.) 3 ; with possess, pronouns, ibid., R. 4"; with substantives to which two speci- fications are appended, ibid., R. 6. Article with demonstr. pronouns and adjectives, 1 1 with R. 2 and 3 ; when omitted, R. 1 ; with ttSj and oXog, R. 4 ; with iToXoe, R. 5 ; with nume- rals, R. 6 ; with substantives having an adject, in apposition, where in Engl, the indef. art., 12 ; with prop, names, 13 a and b ; before the gen. of the name of the father, 13 a, R. With adject, and partcp. put substantively, 14 a (180 b, R. 1) ; with an adverb or a prepos., substantively, 14 b ; put ad- verbially, ibid., R. 2. The art. go- verning the gen., 14 c ; with the infin. and ace. c. infin., 15 a and b (154 and 170) ; belonging to an entire depend, sentence, 15, R, 1, 2; with omission of the substant. or adject, to be re- peated, 16 a ; omitted with the second of two connected words, 166 ; ellip- tically, with a substant. understood, 17. Asyndeton, 185 a, R. 6 ; where a whole sentence attached, 190. Attraction of the case with i>e, &eircp, KaBavtp, 20, R. 3 ; with the compara- tive, 89 ; of gender with the demon- strative pron., 98 a ; of the case of the relative pron., 103 with R. 1 ; rarer instances of, R. 2 and note, R. 3 (at- tracted relat. pron. neut. nearly in the sense ofoVt) ; attract, of relat. adverbs of place, ibid., R. 2, note. Relat. ad- INDEX II. 267 verbs by attraction after prepositions, passing into pronouns and forming con- junctions, ibid., R. 8. Attraction with oloj, jjXiKos, 106, R. 2 ; with oiSitQ oQTig oil, 105 b, R. ; with <;ii{rE,l66, n. Attraction of subject of a depend, sen- tence to the primary, 191 with R. 1. Causal conjunctions, 194 d, note. Cities, names of, in dat. without iv in statements of place, 45 b. Collective, sing, with verb plur., 3 a. Comparative with rj and the same case, or an entire sentence, or the nomina- tive by itself, 89 ; with 7rpi5, irapa, ibid., R. 1 ; with gen., 90 with R. 1 ; with gen. of a pronoun, and therewith »), ibid., R. 2 ; with aiiros, avrov, 90, R. 3 ; with the genitives iXniSoe, \6- you, &c., 90, R. 4 ; with fi Kara (ftii- Zitiv irapa, iTp6q, j) iSfrt), 90, R. 4 ; two comparatives connected by fi, 93 a ; comparat. of a tolerably high de- gree, 93 b ; comparat. instead of the positive of certain adjectives (in the neuter), ibid. Comparative instead of the superlative, in speaking of two, 94. Conditional sentences, simple in indie, 108; hypothet. in indie, 117 (indie, with av in the primary apodosis) ; in the optat., 135 (the apodosis in optat. with av) ; both forms (indie, and optat.) used interchangeably, 135, R. 1 and 2. Conditional conjunctions, 194 a i the condition expressed as in- depend. sentence without conjunction, 194 a, R. 3; more specific condition annexed to a condition, ibid. Conjunctions formed of a preposition and a relative pronoun, 103, R. 3 ; copu- lative conjunctions, 185 ; disjunctive, 186 ; adversative, 187 ; adversative and partitive, 198; causal, 194 d, note. Temporal, ibid. The conjunc- tion omitted in attaching a sentence torairov, &c., 190; the conjunction repeated after an interposed sentence, 216, note. Construction irpAc rb atiiuuv6iitvov, 216, R. 2. D. Dative, 33; commodi and incomnfi., 34 with R. 1 ; dat. comm. to a substant., 34, R. 2 ; of the object of reference to verbs governing the accus., 35 a and b ; to verbs which take the gen., ibid, b, R. 2 (the object of reference of active made into subject of the passive verb, 35, R. 3) ; to intransi- tive verbs, 36 a, and (to, verbs com- pounded with a preposition) b ; in- terchangeable with a prepos., 36 a, R. 2, b and note. Dative governed by adjectives, 37 ; in some, alternating with gen., R. 1 ; to o/«o/, ibid. Intransitive verbs, used transitively, 22 b with R, 2. M. Middle, signification, 82 (action in refer- ence to the subject itself, a ; intransi- tively and reflexively, b ; more special active signification with reference to the subject, c ; difference between the act, and midd. evanescent, d). Act. and midd. form in intransitive verbs, 82 d, R. 2 ; midd, form in compound verbs, 82 a, R. ; midd, and passive form alternating in deponents, 82 b, R, I, Fut. midd, (rarely aor, 2) in passive signification, 83 a ; perfect midd. of transitive deponents, 83 b. Moods in Greek, in general, 107. N, Negation referring to two members con- nected, 189 a, note, and R. 1, A simple negation cancelled by a preced- ing neg., 209 a (exception, R. 1) ; a composite neg, continuing and con- firming the preceding neg,, 209 b. Redundant neg. with infin., 210 ; can- celled neg. with infin. (^i) o4), 211 a. An aflarmative to be understood from the neg,, 213, See the particulars under oii, ovSk, oiirt, (iri, jiritk, iirjTc, &c. Neuter plur. with verb singular, 1 a (exceptions, R, 1) ; neut. (sing,) of the predicate to a subject masc, or fern., 1 b, R. 3, Neut. plur, in im- personal expressions (aSivara fiv), 1 b, R, 4, Neut. sing, and plur. of adjec- tives put substantively, 87 a. Nominative preceded by wg, dien-Ep, Ka9d- irip, with verb understood, 20, R. 3 ; after the comparative in a different INDEX II. 271 case, 89 ; nominative with infiu., see Infinitive. Object-sentences with oVi, tic in the indie, 108 and 130 b ; in the optat., 130 a ; in the optat. with av, 137 ; the subject attracted to the principal sentence, 191. Object-sentences with o7rcu£, oiruc fi^, fi4> i*^ the subjunctive (fut. indie), 123, 124. 131 b ; in the optat., 131 a ; the subject attracted to the principal sentence, 191, R. 2. Optative, 119 with R. ; in wishes, 129; with on, iis, and in depend, questions after a praeterite, 130 a (indie, b) ; in the continuation of such sentences with ovv. Here,' yap, 130 b, R. 4 ; in final and object-sentences with 'ojriag after a prsterite, 131 a (subjunctive, b) ; (optat., indie, subjunct, in final and object-sentences depend, on a sen- tence of the same kind, 131 b, R. 4) ; optat. in depend, sentences of oratio obliqua after a principal verb in the prsterite, 132 a and d (indie or sub- junct., ibid, b) ; optat. put less accu- rately in a depend, sentence to an infin. after a present, 132, note ; optat. in relative sentences, and after tem- poral particles, denoting frequent re- currence, 183; in conditional sen- tences, 135 ; optat. and indie in de- pend, sentences to the optat. with av, 188. Tenses of the optat., 134. (See Perfect, Aorist, Future.) Optat. with I av (present, aorist, sometimes perfect), 135 ; as potential and dubitative mood, 136 ; also in depend, sentences, 137. Oratio obliqua continued in the optat.,' 130 b, 4 ; in the infin., 163 a ; de- pend, sentences in oralio obliqua in the indie, 140; in the optat. (indie, or subjunct.), 132 a — d. Oratio obliqua suddenly passing into the oratio recta, 192 b. P. Participle, 174 ; denoting the relation of time, manner, &c., 174 b ; its relation to the principal action indicated by various particles, 176 (r(!re, lira, &e) ; of intention, with verbs of motion, 175 d, R. 1 ; governing a relative or interrog. pronoun, 176 a ; partcp. in Greek, where other languages would employ a principal sentence, 176 b. The partcp. serving to annex a cha- racterizing remark, 1 76 c ; certain participles used adverbially, ibid., R. Partcp. aimexed to another partcp., 176 d ; not in strict agreement with subject of principal verb, 176 e ; (ana- coluth. of case, ibid., R. and 216, note.) Passing by anacoluth. into a verbum finitum, 216, R. 1. Partcp. in apposi- tion to the subject serving to complete the predicate, mostly with intransitive verbs (iiaTt\S> -iroiSiv), 177 a and b (with afiuvov Inn, and the like, b, R. 5) ; in apposition to the object (subject in the passive) with transitive verbs, 178 a and b (to the subject, when this is at the same time object : StiKwin womv, sometimes t/tavriv irot- ovvTu, a and R, 1) ; alternating in certain verbs with 8t«, i>s, 178 a, R. 5, or with accus. c. infin., ibid., R. 6. , Partcp. attached to ix'^> l'^- Partcp. as attributive, 180 a ; substantively, ibid, b (rarely anarthrous, R. 1 ; 6 votiiaaiv, one that sfiaU, can, &c. do, ibid.) ; with a gen,, poet., 180 b, R. 2 ; in the neuter instead of an abstract substantive, ibid. Some few present participles used as adjectives with ilvai, 180 c; present or aor. of the partcp. with cijut, yiyvofiat, in periphrasis, 180 d. Partcp. in the gen. absol., 181 ; particles therewith, relation to the simple partcp., ibid., R. I — 3. Subject of the gen. absol. omitted, ibid., R. 4 a and b. Gen. absolute formed from impersonal phrases, ibid., R. 4 c ; from a passive with a sentence beginning with fin, ibid., R. 4, d ; with ovTog omitted, ibid., R. 5 ; gen. absol. instead of a simple partcp., ibid., R. 6. Partcp. with a substant. governed by a preposition instead of the gen. absol., ibid., R. 7. Partcp. in the accus. absol. ^om impersonal phrases, and 272 INDEX II. after oig, ligitip, 182 with R. (fiv omitted, R. 3.) Tenses of the par- ticiple, 183. (See Present, Aorist.) Partcp. with av, 184 (not the future, R.). Position of the partcp. with the article, 9 a, and R. 1. Partcp. of certain impersonal verbs used per- sonally with the infin., 165 a, R. Particles which cannot begin a sentence, 219 b. Passive used impersonally, 7 b, and R. ; formed in a certain connexion from verbs not transitive, 26 a, and 27 a (6 l3tPuankvog aoi fiios, TO. ffoi ireirpeajStv- liiva) i predicated of the object of reference, 35 b, R. 3 ; formed from verbs which govern the dat., 36 a, R. 4 J from verbs which govern the gen., 36, R. 2 ; passive, where some- times in English, and oftener in Ger- man, the reflexive expression is used (ijepoioSi)!/), 82 b s as deponent, 82 b, R. l,e, R. 2. Perfect, in the indie, 112; of certain verbs as present, 112, R. 2 ; subjunc- tive, 128 b with R. ; optative, 134 ; with dv, 135, 136 ; perfect infin. of the entirely finished action or state efl'ected, 171, R. I. Period, structure of, 220. Person, first plural instead of singular, 1 a, R. 3 ; third plural without de- finite subject, 6 b ; singular of certain verbs impersonally, 7 a ; second per- son of an indefinite subject, 6 b. En- allage of person, by transitition from oratio ohliqua into oratio recta, 192 b. Personal expression in Greek, where in other languages impersonal, 7 b, R. 3, 165 a, R. {S'lKaioQ), 177 b (S^Xof, ibid, d ; redundant, ibid, e ; before the relative omitted, 102, 103 (its place supplied by the attraction, 102 a, R.). Pron., demonstr., ex- plained by a sentence in apposition, 190; by a sentence with yap, 196 a. Pronoun, indefinite, with lariv before the relative omitted, 102 b ; before re- lative adverbs of place and time, ibid., R. 2 ; never stands first in the sen- tence, 219 a ; understood from an infin., 144, B. 2. , interrogative, in apposition to a demonstrative, 100 b j governed by a partcp., 176 a, 181 a ; in a depent. sentence, or in a periphrasis with the article, 198 a ; two in one sentence, 198 a, R. 1 J direct (n'c) for iudirect, 198 b (Trolof for iiroiog, &c.). -, personal, as subject, omitted. 6 a ; position of the gen., 10, R. 3 ; in I the gen. = a possessive pronoun, 67 a. , possessive, with a gen. in ap- position, 67 a ; instead of an objective gen., 67 b. , 'relative, after ^ (with compar rative), used or omitted, 91, R. 1 ; in the neuter to several substantives of a different gender, 97 a ; in the plural to a substant. in the dual, 97 a, R. ; in the plural to a substant. in the singular, 99 c ; mascul. or fern, to a neuter term denoting a person, 99 e. The antecedent drawn into the relat. clause, 101 a and b (so a gen. or an adjective, ibid, b) ; draws the fore- going substant. to itself, in case, 101a, R. The accus. of the relative after a dat. or gen. passes into the same case (by attraction), 103 (exceptions, R.) ; relative in the nominative neuter at- tracted to the dat. or gen., 103, R. 2. Attracted relative in the signification of on, 103, R. 3. Rare and anomalous cases of attraction, 103, R., note. The relative with a preposition as conjunc- tion, 103, R. 3. A relative in the nominat. or accus. in the second mem- ber, to be understood from a different case preceding, 104 a ; for the rela- tive in the second member a demon- strative, ibid. b. The relative attached to a person not expressly named, 195 c. A more specific statement attached to the relative in the infin. or in a depend, sentence, 195 d. The relative pro- noun attaching itself to a sentence dependent on the sentence which it connects, or to a partcp., 195 e. Relative in the nAiter, in the sense as regards the circumstance that (or, the thing which, &c.), 1 95 a. Proper names, use of the article with, 13. 274 INDEX II. R. Relative sentences in the accus. c. infin., 1U9 a. Sentences, connexion of, peculiarities of the, 183 sqq. Shall; this notion not expressed, but in- volved in the construction of accus. c. infin. in certain connexions, 164, 166 b, 170 c. Singular of the verb (tartv, riv, ylyviTm) to a (following) subject in the plural (mascul. or femin.), 1 b, R. 2, note ; of certain substantives, where a multi- tude is denoted, 18 c. Subject, suddenly changed without no- tice, 6 a, R. ; omitted in the gen. absol., 181 a, R. 4 a and b. The sub- ject of the depend, sentence attracted as object into the primary sentence, 191. Subjunctive and optative in general, 119 with R. Subjunct. in exhortation and demand, 120 a ; with /lii in prohibi- tion, 120 b, and 142 (the first person, in entreaty, 120, R.) ; in questions, luhat is one to — ? 121 ; in sentences of intention (final), 122 ; in object- sentences with '6jt 3 This WorlE is published by the proprietors of EUls^s Latin Exercises* REV. T. K. ARNOLD'S WORKS {continued). GREEK CLASSICS, with ENGLISH NOTES {continued). EdU iQscHiHEs. — The Oration against Ctesiphon HOMERI f?? Complete Edition Ilias {a) Complete b) Lib. I— r c) Lib. I— I] -IV,, with Critical Introduction , -III., for Beginners „... . Homeric Lexicon, Greek and English (Crusius's) I The Ajax (Schneidewin) I The Fhiloctetes (Schneidewin) Sophocles^ The (Edipus Tyrannus (Schneidewin),.. I The (Edipus Coloneus (Scbneidewinf .. [The Antigone (Schneidewin) (The Hecuba The Hippolytus TheBacchae Thelphigeniain Tauris The Medea Thuctdides.— Book First - Book Second. Hebodotvs. — Eclogx HeiodoteEe, Fart I, (SchweighEeuser) , Eclogae Aristophanicae, Fart I. "The Clouds" FartIL "The Birds" The First Hebrew Book The Second Hebrew Book (Genesis) Copious and Critical English-Latin Lexicon, founded on the Ger- man-Latin Dictionary of Georges [by the Rev. T. K. Arnold and the Rev. J. E. Riddle] 2 **A terf slight Inspection of It vttl Bhow that ft alms at a fiir higher standard of accuracy and completenecs than any of its English predecessors." — Extract J'roin Prtfaee, ClasBical Examination Fapers ■. 1 English Grammarfor Classical Schools 4 Spelling turned Etymology, Fart I , Fart II. (Latin vid English) The First German Book Key to the Above The Second German Book., :..., German Reading Book German Vocabulary The First French Book i,„ Key to the Above [by M. Delille] French Vocabulary First Classical Atlas Zumpt's Annals of Ancient Chronology THEOLOGICAL. TheChristologt of the Old Testament, and Commentary on the Mes> sianic Fredictions of the Frophets. By Professor Hengstenberg 1 The Churchman's Cowp anion, containing Essays and Fajiers, some origi- nal, but mostly selected, chiefly on Religious subjects I Short Helps to Devotion, arranged for every Day in the Year 1 HANDBOOKS. Romas- ANTiauiTiES...) iri~^„„„„\ Grecian AsTiautTiEs / t^o'^sENj 2 1 Ancient Geography and Histobt...^ 2 Medx^val Geography AND History > (FiiTz) 1 Modern Geography and History...) 1 Latin Syhonymes. By the Rev. HiH. Arnold 2' Greek Synonymes (Pillon) 1 Hebrew ANTiauiTiES. Bythe Rev. H. Browne i The Athenian Stage From the German of Witzschel i Handbook op the Religion and Mythology of the Greeks. From the German of H. W. Stoll 1 Price. 4j. Od. 12 7 6 5 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 4 4 6 2 6 4 5 6 2 6 4 4 5 6 2 6 4 6 7 6 5 18 4 6 8 By the Rev. H. H. Arnold : The ITALIAN ANALYST; or, Essentials of Italian Grammar. G08FEL EXTRACTS FOR YOUNG CHILDREN. 3«. By the Rev. C. Arnold : BOY'S ARITHMETIC, Part I. Second Edition. 3a. 6d. Fart II. , Ss. 6d. ! ; ri 1